Auditing Graded Questions

All rights reserved.
May not be reproduced in any form without permission from the publisher, except fair uses permitted under U.S. or applicable copyright law.
Copyright 2019. Oxford University Press Southern Africa.
EBSCO Publishing : eBook Collection (EBSCOhost) - printed on 10/5/2020 9:12 AM via UNIVERSITY OF KWAZULU NATAL
AN: 2350260 ; Hamel, Andre P., Kunz, Rolien.; Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context Graded Questions 3e
Account: s7246381.main.ehost 1
EBSCOhost - printed on 10/5/2020 9:12 AM via UNIVERSITY OF KWAZULU NATAL. All use subject to https://www.ebsco.com/terms-of-use 3
Oxford University Press is a department of the University of Oxford. It furthers the University’s objective of excellence in
research, scholarship, and education by publishing worldwide. Oxford is a registered trade mark of Oxford University Press in the
UK and in certain other countries.
Published in South Africa by Oxford University Press Southern Africa (Pty) Limited
Vasco Boulevard, Goodwood, N1 City, Cape Town, South Africa, 7460 P O Box 12119, N1 City, Cape Town, South Africa, 7463
© Oxford University Press Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd 2019
The moral rights of the author have been asserted.
First published 2014

Third Edition published in 2019
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by
any means, without the prior permission in writing of Oxford University Press Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd, or as expressly permitted
by law, by licence, or under terms agreed with the appropriate reprographic rights organisation, DALRO, The Dramatic, Artistic
and Literary Rights Organisation at [email protected]. Enquiries concerning reproduction outside the scope of the above should be
sent to the Rights Department, Oxford University Press Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd, at the above address.
You must not circulate this work in any other form and you must impose this same condition on any acquirer.
Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context: Graded Questions (third edition)
Print ISBN: 978-0-190738-58-7
ePUB ISBN: 978-0-190732-21-9
Typeset in ITC Franklin Gothic Std 10.5pt on 13pt
Acknowledgements
Publisher: Penny Lane
Development editor: Edward Ndiloseh
Project manager: Lindsay-Jane Lücks
Copy editor: Lee-Ann Ashcroft
Designer: Yaseen Baker
Typesetter: Julie Ackermann
Cover photo: Tony Sparkes, Shutterstock
The authors and publisher gratefully acknowledge permission to reproduce copyright material in this book. Every effort has been
made to trace copyright holders, but if any copyright infringements have been made, the publisher would be grateful for
information that would enable any omissions or errors to be corrected in subsequent impressions.
Links to third party websites are provided by Oxford in good faith and for information only.
Oxford disclaims any responsibility for the materials contained in any third party website referenced in this work.
Contents in brief
PART A: The context within which the external auditor operates
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Ethics
Chapter 3 Legal responsibilities of the auditor
PART B: The auditee’s responsibility for financial information
Chapter 4 Basic concepts of governance and internal control

Chapter 5 Introduction to risks and internal controls in a computerised environment
Chapter 6 Revenue and receipts cycle
Chapter 7 Purchases and payments cycle
Chapter 8 Inventory and production cycle
Chapter 9 Human resources cycle
Chapter 10 Investment and financing cycle
PART C: The external audit process
Chapter 11 Overview of the audit process

Chapter 12 Pre-engagement and planning activities
Chapter 13 Audit procedures: Essential concepts
Chapter 14 Audit procedures: Specific considerations
Chapter 15 Completion of the audit
Chapter 16 The independent review
Chapter 17 Additional questions
List of references
Contents
Contents in brief
Preface
Additional resources
About the editors
List of contributors
PART A: The context within which the external auditor operates
Chapter 1 Introduction
Questions
Question 1 Background to auditing [24 marks] LEVEL 1
Chapter 2 Ethics
Introduction
Example question SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice [12 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Questions
Question 1 SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: Fundamentals and CA in practice [27 marks] LEVEL 1/2
Question 2 SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Suggested solution to question 5
Question 7 SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in business [9 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 17 SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CAs in practice and in business [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 18 SAICA Code of Professional Conduct and general auditing theory [21 marks] LEVEL 3
Chapter 3 Legal responsibilities of the auditor

Introduction
Example question Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Reportable irregularity [17 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Questions
Question 1 Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Reportable irregularity [8 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 3 Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Registration as auditor, duties of auditor [14 marks] LEVEL 1/2
Question 6 Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Legal liability [9 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 7 King IV™ report [13 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 8 King IV™ code [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 12 King IV™ report and Companies Act 71 of 2008 [18 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 13 Companies Act 71 of 2008 [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 14 Companies Act 71 of 2008 [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 15 Companies Act 71 of 2008 and King IV™ report [16 marks] LEVEL 2/3
Question 16 Companies Act 71 of 2008 and Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Reportable irregularity [24
marks] LEVEL 2/3
Question 17 Companies Act 71 of 2008 and King IV™ report [28 marks] LEVEL 2/3
PART B: The auditee’s responsibility for financial information
Chapter 4 Basic concepts of governance and internal control

Introduction
Questions
Question 2 Internal control: Fundamentals [19 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 3 Internal control: Fundamentals [15 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 4 Internal control: Control objectives [11 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 5 Internal control: Components [10 marks] LEVEL 1
Chapter 5 Introduction to risks and internal controls in a computerised

environment
Introduction
Questions
Question 1 Multiple choice questions addressing multiple concepts [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 2 Physical access controls [18 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 3 Access controls [16 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 4 Application controls [12 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 5 Business continuity [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 6 System development [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 7 General controls [16 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 10 Weaknesses in an IT environment [30 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 11 Governance in an IT environment [30 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 12 Application controls and back-ups [22 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 13 Application controls (input controls) [15 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 14 Processing and masterfile controls [24 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 15 Controls regarding changes to masterfile data [18 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 16 Application controls (masterfile) [22 marks] LEVEL 3
Chapter 6 Revenue and receipts cycle
Introduction
Example Question 1 Internal control weaknesses [8 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Example Question 2 Internal control weaknesses, risks, control objectives and assertions [32 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Questions
Question 1 Control objectives [8 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 2 Functional areas and control objectives [18 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 3 Assertions [9 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 4 Purpose of controls, control objectives and assertions [23 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 5 Weaknesses [13 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 6 Risks [25 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 8 Weaknesses and recommendations [32 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 9 Weaknesses, risks and recommendations [20 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 11 Weaknesses, risks, decrease in gross profit and recommendations [40 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 12 Weaknesses, recommendations, internal controls, role players and documents [41 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 13 Recommendations [14 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 15 Key controls [8 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 16 Key controls and control objectives [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 17 Key controls and tests of controls [10 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 18 Tests of controls [30 marks] LEVEL 3
Chapter 7 Purchases and payments cycle

Introduction
Questions
Question 2 Assertions [4 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 7 Risks and assertions [20 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 11 Key controls and assertions [6 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 12 Key controls and control objectives [16 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 15 Test of controls and control objectives [13 marks] LEVEL 2
Chapter 8 Inventory and production cycle

Introduction
Questions
Question 1 Purpose and control objectives [11 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 3 Functional areas [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 6 Weaknesses and risks [8 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 10 Key controls [4 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 11 Purpose and tests of controls [25 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 13 Control objectives, key controls and tests of controls [24 marks] LEVEL 3
Chapter 9 Human resources cycle

Introduction
Questions
Question 3 Risk of material misstatement at assertion level [12 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 12 Assertions, key controls and tests of controls [20 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 13 Audit procedures [10 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 14 Risks, internal controls and substantive procedures [25 marks] LEVEL 3
Chapter 10 Investment and financing cycle

Introduction
Questions
Question 2 Segregation of duties, fraud and error [9 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 4 Risks: Companies Act 71 of 2008 [12 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 11 Key controls and assertions [11 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 12 Internal control vs test of control, control objectives [9 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 13 Test of control vs substantive procedure, objective of audit procedure [13 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 14 Tests of controls vs substantive procedures [16 marks] LEVEL 3
PART C: The external audit process
Chapter 11 Overview of the audit process
Introduction
Questions
Question 1 Stages and steps [13 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 2 Audit evidence [7 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 3 Audit evidence [7 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 4 Impact of computerised environment on audit procedures [7 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 5 Audit opinion: Modified and unmodified [4 marks] LEVEL 1
Chapter 12 Pre-engagement and planning activities

Introduction
Example Question 1 Pre-engagement [10 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Example Question 2 Strategy [4 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Example Question 3 Materiality [10 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Example Question 4 Risk at financial statement level [6 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Example Question 5 Risk at assertion level [4 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Questions
Question 1 Planning materiality [7 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 6 Pre-engagement [20 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 7 Pre-engagement activities [12 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 10 Client acceptance decision [26 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 11 Pre-engagement [12 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 12 Risk at assertion level [9 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 13 Risk at financial statement level [12 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 14 Risk at assertion level, the audit approach and the risk thereto [22 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 15 Risk at assertion level and the response thereto [20 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 17 Risk at financial statement level [16 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 19 Audit risk overall level [19 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 21 Risk and response at assertion level [17 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 22 Detection risk [22 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 23 Audit strategy [6 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 24 Planning strategy [9 marks] LEVEL 2
Chapter 13 Audit procedures: Essential concepts

Introduction
Example Question 1 Balances [17 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Example Question 2 Transactions [15 marks]
Guidance
Suggested solution
Questions
Question 1 Revenue applying IFRS 15 [14 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 2 Revenue [15 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 7 Commission paid [15 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 8 Purchases and payments balances [18 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 9 Purchases [14 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 10 Substantive procedures: Expenses [20 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 11 Prepaid expenses [8 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 12 Prepayments [16 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 13 Wages {25 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 14 Salaries [15 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 15 Lifetime expected credit losses [21 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 16 Accounts receivable [18 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 17 Provision for future expected credit losses [14 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 19 Positive confirmation and provision for future expected credit losses [26 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 20 Creditors statement reconciliation [15 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 21 Trade payables [12 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 22 Trade and other payables [25 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 23 Trade and other payables balance [23 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 24 Inventory [18 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 25 Inventory and roll forward procedures [25 marks] LEVEL 2
Suggested solution for question 27
Question 29 Property, plant and equipment [20 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 30 Investment property [14 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 32 Intangible asset [10 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 34 Goodwill [22 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 35 Loans [10 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 36 Long-term borrowings [20 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 37 Loans [22 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 38 Interest paid/debentures [25 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 39 Warranty provision [14 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 40 Provision for bonuses [18 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 41 Provision created for environmental rehabilitation costs [15 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 42 Provision for leave pay [14 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 43 Provision for leave pay/share option scheme [31 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 44 Provision for bonuses [14 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 45 Provision for rehabilitation of land [20 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 46 Provision for chemical spill [25 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 47 Provision for defective work [13 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 48 Issue of shares: Equity [15 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 49 Equity [21 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 50 Other reserves [14 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 51 Bank reconciliation [7 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 52 Bank confirmation letters [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 53 Deferred taxation [16 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 54 Taxation payable [22 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 55 Audit of unlisted investment/accruals [24 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 56 Directors emoluments [26 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 57 Audit procedures regarding legal matters [14 marks] LEVEL 3
Chapter 14 Audit procedures: Specific considerations

Introduction
Questions
Question 2 Opening balances [16 marks] LEVEL 2
Chapter 15 Completion of the audit

Questions
Question 1 Series ISA 560 Phase 1–3 (6 scenarios) [66 marks] LEVEL 3
Scenario 1: Subsequent events [10 marks]
Question 2 Subsequent events [15 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 7 Going concern [12 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 12 Materiality [14 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 13 Final materiality [13 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 14 Audit differences [10 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 17 Evaluation of misstatements [15 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 18 Audit conclusion [12 marks] LEVEL 3
Question 19 Reporting [10 marks] LEVEL 1
Chapter 16 The independent review

Questions
Question 1 Audit and review engagements [10 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 2 Audit and review engagements [16 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 3 Independent review [14 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 4 Report [14 marks] LEVEL 2
Chapter 17 Additional questions

Questions
Question 1 Internal controls: Various cycles [10 marks] LEVEL 1
Question 2 Internal controls [24 marks] LEVEL 1/2
Question 3 Key controls, control objectives, tests of controls: Receipts [25 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 4 Key controls, control objectives and tests of controls [30 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 5 Control objectives and tests of controls [20 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 6 Control objectives and purpose: Computerised systems [18 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 7 Control objectives and purpose: Computerised systems [20 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 8 Risks and substantive procedures [24 marks] LEVEL 2
Question 10 Integrated question [30 marks] LEVEL 2
List of references
Preface
The purpose of this book is to provide undergraduate students with the experience they will need to answer audit
questions successfully in tests and exams. The text does not attempt to provide the theoretical background to
auditing, as such theory is covered in our companion textbook, Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context.
The chapters in this work correspond to those in the complementary textbook, except for chapter 17 which contains
additional questions addressing multiple topics. This question book should be used for the revision and
reinforcement of concepts encountered and mastered in Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context, and for
the identification of areas requiring additional study.
The questions in the text are graded according to levels which correspond with and support the framework of
SAICA proficiency levels. The text is structured in such a way that the question at the lowest level of difficulty is
positioned at the beginning of each chapter. Thereafter, the questions are graded to ensure that the most difficult
question will be the last question in each chapter. It follows, therefore, that second-year students will work through
those questions at the beginning of each chapter, while third-year students will probably work through those
questions in the latter part of the chapters. Since this book is directed at undergraduate, rather than postgraduate,
students, one or two integrated questions have been included for each topic and chapter.
Each chapter addresses a different section of the syllabus. The student should first study the relevant theory in the
Auditing Fundamentals textbook before working through the example questions in this book. Example questions and
guidance are included in the majority of chapters in order to support students’ development and understanding of
how to approach and answer specific questions. Following engagement with the example questions and the
guidance, students should apply these techniques in the questions that follow, working under exam conditions.
The Companies Act is not covered in the depth which its scope justifies as this would merit a book on its own.
Corporate governance is not covered as a separate chapter, but rather addressed throughout the textbook in the
relevant context and sub-components. After careful consideration, corporate governance questions were included in
chapter 3.
We should like to express our gratitude to the many contributors, from various academic institutions, who have
kindly contributed material to this book. A key benefit of material which is authored by a large and diverse group of
contributors is that students are exposed to questions which reflect a broad range of styles and approaches. This is
valuable preparation for the initial test of competence (ITC) and assessment of professional competence (APC)
exams.
Future editions of this book will be published at regular intervals in order to ensure they remain relevant and that a
continual supply of new content is provided. As can be seen, many new questions have been added to this third
edition, and additional notes were also included for the questions that have suggested solutions.
Prescribing lecturers can access additional, unseen questions through the Oxford University Press Learning Zone
website. At the same website, students may access short, formative questions, which are automatically marked, in
order to test their understanding of key concepts. Solutions that are not provided in the text are also available to
prescribing lecturers here. Please bear in mind that different universities follow different structures and layouts for
suggested solutions. If you should experience any difficulties with either the questions or suggested solutions, or
should you wish to raise any queries, please contact us at [email protected] or [email protected]. We welcome
your feedback, as it will assist with future development of the book.
We should like to tender our apologies if any case should arise in which an original source of any question concept
in this book has unwittingly not been acknowledged. We will be grateful for any information enabling us to rectify
this in future impressions.
We wish to thank Oxford University Press Southern Africa and its staff who participated in the publication of this
edition for their time and patience in ensuring we met our deadlines and answered the many queries which resulted
during the revision process.
André P. Hamel
Rolien Kunz
Additional resources
All prescribing lecturers will be given access to the Oxford University Press Learning Zone website. This opens the
gate to a selection of additional resources for this title.
For lecturers, the Learning Zone website provides:
A set of Online Questions

These are additional, unseen questions which can be used for assessment, consolidation or extension purposes.
They provide further opportunities for students to apply their newly acquired knowledge and skills across a
range of different contexts.
A Solutions Manual
This comprehensive Solutions Manual provides the answers and/or suggested solutions to both:
the questions in the textbook, and
the Online Questions mentioned above.
For students, the Learning Zone website provides:
A Question Bank
This Question Bank contains a range of short, formative questions which are marked electronically as students
complete them. These questions provide students with unlimited chances to self-assess their grasp of the key
concepts related to auditing.
About the editors
André P. Hamel (Editor) BCom Accounting (University of Johannesburg), BCom Honours Accounting (University
of Johannesburg), CA(SA)
André P. Hamel is a Senior Lecturer, and the Subject Head of Auditing in the Department of Accounting at the
University of the Western Cape, and a Chartered Accountant. André has extensive lecturing experience at various
education institutions in South Africa, and has co-authored several auditing textbooks. He has served as academic
representative on the auditing standards committee of the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants for three
years and has set, and assisted in setting, questions for the qualifying exams of both the South African Institute of
Chartered Accountants and the Independent Regulatory Board for Auditors.
Rolien Kunz (Editor) BCompt (University of South Africa), BCompt Honours (University of South Africa),
Postgraduate Certificate in Higher Education (cum laude) (University of Pretoria) MCom Auditing (University of
Pretoria), CA(SA)
Rolien Kunz is a Senior Lecturer in the Department of Auditing at the University of Pretoria, and a Chartered
Accountant. Rolien has lectured at various higher education institutions at undergraduate as well as postgraduate
level. She also acts as external examiner for a various higher education institutions. Rolien is a co-author of the
companion text to this work, Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context. Her research interests are focused
within accounting educationand for many years, at various levels, she has actively participated in the professional
education activities of the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants and the Independent Regulatory Board
for Auditors.
List of contributors
A broad panel of expert contributors, from various South African academic institutions, have authored the questions
and solutions which are published in this book and/or on the Oxford University Press Learning Zone website. The
questions and solutions which have been placed on Learning Zone complement this third edition as additional
supporting material and are available to prescribing lecturers of Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context:
Graded Questions.
Barend Barnard BCom (Pretoria), BCompt Honours (South Africa), MCom (Pretoria), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, College of Accounting Sciences, University of South Africa; Marker, Assistant Umpire and
Umpire for both the Initial Test of Competence as well as the Assessment of Professional Competence of the South
African Institute of Chartered Accountants and the Public Practice Examination of the Independent Regulatory
Board for Auditors.
Rika Butler BCom Honours (Accounting) (Pretoria), CTA (Pretoria), MAcc (Computer Auditing) (Stellenbosch),
CA(SA)
Associate Professor, School of Accountancy, Faculty of Economic and Management Sciences, Stellenbosch
University.
Cornelie Crous BCompt (Free State), BAcc Honours (Free State), MCompt (cum laude) (Free State)
Senior Lecturer, Centre for Accounting, Faculty of Economic and Management Sciences, University of the Free
State.
Monique du Plessis BCom (North West), BCom Honours (North West), MCom (North West), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, School of Accounting Sciences, North West University (Vaal Campus).
Mandisa Gandela BCom Accounting (Cape Town), BCom Honours Accounting and CTA (Natal), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, College of Accounting Sciences, University of South Africa.
André P. Hamel BCom Accounting (Johannesburg), BCom Honours Accounting (Johannesburg), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer and Subject Head of Auditing, Department of Accounting , University of the Western Cape;
current Regional Chairman of the Southern African Accounting Association (SAAA), Western Cape.
Phindiwe Kamolane BCom Accounting (Johannesburg), BCom Honours Accounting (Johannesburg), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, College of Accounting Sciences, Department of Auditing, University of South Africa.
Rolien Kunz BCompt (South Africa), BCompt Honours (South Africa), PGC in Higher Education (cum laude)
(Pretoria), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, Department of Auditing, University of Pretoria.
Jana Lamprecht BCompt Honours (South Africa), MA Higher Education Studies (Free State), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, Department of Auditing, University of the Free State.
Ismail Mohamed BCom (Cape Town), BCom Honours (Natal), CA(SA)
Lecturer, Department of Accounting, University of the Western Cape.
Anneke Moolman BCom Chartered Accountancy, BCom Honours CTA, MCom Accountancy (North West),
CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, School of Accounting Sciences, North West University.
Vincent Motholo BCom Accounting Sciences (Pretoria), BCom Honours Accounting and CTA (Natal), CA(SA)
Previously: Senior Lecturer, College of Accounting Sciences, University of South Africa
Currently: Audit Senior Manager, Sizwe Ntsaluba Gobodo.
Mari Patterson BAcc Honours (Stellenbosch), MComm (Computer Auditing) (Stellenbosch), CA(SA)
Lecturer, School of Accountancy, Faculty of Economic and Management Sciences, Stellenbosch University.
Gerrit Penning BAcc Honours, CTA (Free State), CA(SA), MCom (UP)
Senior Auditing Lecturer, University of Pretoria; serving member of the question-setting team of the Public
Practice Examination (PPE) of the Independent Regulatory Board for Auditors.
Pranisha Rama BCom, BCom Honours, CTA (Johannesburg), CA(SA)

Senior Auditing Lecturer, Department of Accounting, University of Johannesburg.
Riaan J Rudman BBus Sc Honours (Cape Town), PGDA (Cape Town), MBus Sc (Cape Town), MAcc (cum laude)
(Stellenbosch), CA(SA)
Senior Auditing and Information Systems Lecturer, Thuthuka Senior Project Manager, School of Accountancy,
Stellenbosch University.
Henriette Scholtz BCom Accounting (Rand Afrikaans University), BCom Honours Accounting (Rand Afrikaans
University), MCom Financial Management (Rand Afrikaans University), Adv Cert Tax (South Africa), CA(SA)
Senior Auditing Lecturer, School of Accounting, University of Stellenbosch; Member of SAICA ethics
committee.
Jacques Siebrits BCom (Stellenbosch), LLB (Stellenbosch), BCompt Honours (South Africa), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, Department of Accounting, University of the Western Cape.
Olive Stumke BCom (North West), BCom Honours (UNISA), MCom (North West), Professional Accountant (SA)
Internal Auditing and Accounting Lecturer, School of Accounting Sciences, North West University (Vaal
Campus).
André (JJ) Swart BCom, Honours BCompt (South Africa), MCom (North West), CA(SA), RA
Subject Chair for Ethics, External and Internal Auditing, Senior External Auditing Lecturer, School of
Accounting Sciences, North West University (Vaal Campus).
Alet Terblanche BCom Accounting Sciences (Pretoria), BCom Honours Accounting Sciences (Pretoria), MCompt
Accounting Science (South Africa), CA(SA)
Senior Lecturer, College of Accounting Sciences, University of South Africa.
Judith Terblanche BAcc (Stellenbosch), BAcc Honours (South Africa), MComm (Computer Auditing)
(Stellenbosch), CA(SA), PGD Theology (Stellenbosch), Diploma in Sport Psychology (BSY(UK)), HED
(Stellenbosch)
Senior Lecturer, Department of Accounting, University of the Western Cape.
Jolandi Volschenk BCom CA, BCom Honours CTA (North West), CA(SA), RA
Senior Auditing and Advanced Auditing Lecturer, School of Accounting Sciences, North West University (Vaal
Campus).
Lyle Weber BCom Accounting (Western Cape), BCom Honours Accounting (Western Cape), MCom Computer
Auditing (Stellenbosch), Diploma Itinerant Ministry (Rhema Bible Training College) (USA)
Previously: Senior Auditing Lecturer, Department of Accounting, University of the Western Cape.
Currently: CEO of LBW Consulting, and traveling Minister.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced in any form without permission from the publisher, except fair uses permitted under U.S. or applicable copyright law.
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
CHAPTER 2 Ethics
CHAPTER 3 Legal responsibilities of the auditor

The topics contained in this chapter provide a background to those included in the rest of the book. These topics are
normally not tested on their own, but a thorough understanding of them will enhance your application of them in the
chapters to follow.
Question 1 LEVEL 1
Background to auditing
[24 marks]
As an audit partner at OLX Incorporated (OLX), you are responsible for the recruitment of trainee accountants for
the firm. You recently attended an open day at one of the universities, during which a confused second-year student
approached you with the following questions:
A. I found the following definition in my auditing text book:
External audit is a systematic process of obtaining and evaluating evidence and information objectively
regarding assertions about economic actions and events to determine the degree of correlation between
those assertions and predefined criteria and to communicate the results in writing to the users of the
financial statements.
Could you please explain the definition to me? (6)

B. What are the postulates of auditing, and where do they fit into the bigger picture of auditing? (9)
C. What is the difference between the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants (SAICA) and the
Independent Regulatory Board for Auditors (IRBA), and which other professional bodies related to the
accounting profession are there in South Africa? (9)
REQUIRED
Answer the student’s questions.
[24]
INTRODUCTION
The following question formats are most often used when the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct is examined:
Apply information in the question or scenario with reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct.
Discuss safeguards that could be implemented where problems have been identified.
Discuss the theory that you had to study regarding the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct.
Variations of the above.
A sound knowledge of the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, as well as the safeguards that could be
implemented in order to address identified problems, is necessary in order to answer questions in this chapter. These
questions are not difficult if you have properly studied the underlying theory and have worked through a number of
them. All the information you need to obtain a good mark is in the question. The crucial thing is to identify the
relevant information that you need to apply to the principles set out in the code and to apply it properly.
EXAMPLE QUESTION
SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

[12 marks]
Carter & Cash Inc. (CC Inc), a small firm of registered auditors with a single office in East London, is the auditor of
the 20X1 financial statements of Monsterbond Ltd (Monsterbond). Incorporated in 20X0, the company develops
small shopping centres in medium-sized towns. Until four years ago, it had been relatively small, and operating only
in the Eastern Cape. The company then appointed a new managing director, Mr Garth Groenewald, under whose
leadership the company expanded its operations to other provinces, thereby attracting in excess of R250 million in
new investments from non-institutional investors. Monsterbond is now CC Inc’s largest client by far.
Mr Carter, a CA(SA), has been the engagement partner on the Monsterbond audit since the incorpora-tion of the
company. Since the appointment of Mr Groenewald as MD, he has become increasingly uncomfortable with
developments within the company. First, Mr Carter has found Mr Groenewald to be abrupt, uncooperative and
sometimes aggressive. Second, Mr Carter has experienced problems dealing with Monsterbond’s new computerised
accounting system, as he is not comfortable with computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs). In response to these
problems, Mr Carter has been delegating more of the responsibility for the Monsterbond audit to Megan Meek, who
is in the third year of her training contract.
Megan Meek has been placed in charge of the fieldwork for the current year’s Monsterbond audit. Being a rather
timid person, she is also struggling to deal with the difficult Mr Groenewald, as well as other senior managers at
Monsterbond. When she builds the courage to tell Mr Carter about this problem, he says, ‘Megan, stop moaning.
You’re a third-year student now, this is your client, and you must learn to handle senior management.’
REQUIRED
Comment on the above scenario with reference to the SAICA’s Code of Professional Conduct. Where relevant, your
answer should include references to appropriate safeguards that ought to have been implemented.
[12]
GUIDANCE
Understand the question

Comment on the above scenario with reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct. Where relevant, your
answer should include references to appropriate safeguards that should have been implemented.
Identify the theory applicable to the question, and thus the issue
Identify which of the following threats are applicable to the auditor in the scenario:
Self-interest
Self-review
Familiarity
Advocacy
Intimidation
Identify which of the following fundamental principles of the code are threatened by the identified issue(s) in the
scenario:
Objectivity
Professional behaviour
Professional competence and due care
Integrity
Confidentiality
Discuss whether the level of the threat(s) is significant or not and give reasons why.
Identify appropriate safeguards for each of the threats identified.
Read the question

It is clear from the scenario that a small-sized audit firm is auditing a client, namely Monsterbond, which has now
appointed an aggressive new managing director. Ethical issues have been identified during the performance of this
audit. These and other similar ethical issues are experienced on a daily basis by audit firms throughout the country.
Chartered accountants (CAs) and/or registered auditors (RAs) should ensure that they comply with the SAICA and
IRBA Codes of Professional Conduct, and they should implement appropriate safeguards if any threats to their
professional conduct have been identified. The objective of this type of question is to test your ability as a student to
apply the theory that you have studied to a practical scenario.
Exam technique
Scrutinise the scenario for possible indications of where there might be threats to the CA or RA’s professional
conduct. These have been marked in bold print below. You should also highlight, or underline, the words indicating
possible threats.
Carter & Cash Inc. (CC Inc), a small firm of registered auditors with a single office in East London, is the auditor of
the 20X1 financial statements of Monsterbond Ltd (Monsterbond). Incorporated in 20X0, the company develops
small shopping centres in medium-sized towns. Until four years ago, it had been relatively small, operating only in
the Eastern Cape. The company then appointed a new managing director, Mr Garth Groenewald, under whose
leadership the company expanded its operations to other provinces, thereby attracting in excess of R250 million in
new investments from non-institutional investors. Monsterbond is now CC Inc’s largest client by far.
Mr Carter, a CA(SA), has been the engagement partner on the Monsterbond audit since the incorporation of the
company. Since the appointment of Mr Groenewald as MD, he has become increasingly uncomfortable with
developments at the company. First, Mr Carter has found Mr Groenewald to be abrupt, uncooperative and
sometimes aggressive. Secondly, Mr Carter has experienced problems dealing with Monsterbond’s new
computerised accounting system, as he is not comfortable with computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs). In
response to these problems, Mr Carter has been delegating more of the responsibility for the Monsterbond audit to
Megan Meek, who is in the third year of her training contract.
Megan Meek has been placed in charge of the fieldwork for the current year’s Monsterbond audit. Being a rather
timid person, she is also struggling to deal with the difficult Mr Groenewald, as well as other senior managers at
Monsterbond. When she builds the courage to tell Mr Carter about this problem, he says, ‘Megan, stop moaning.
You’re a third-year student now, this is your client, and you must learn to handle senior management.’
Discuss the threat(s) and possible safeguards for each of the issues marked in bold print. Use the
following framework for your answer:
Start by explaining the type of threat(s) that might exist and the fundamental principle(s) being threatened.
Next, state and motivate whether the level of the threat is significant or not (certain lecturers, however, might not
require this step).
Discuss the safeguards that could be implemented.
Use the above framework, which has been applied in the suggested solution below, for each of the areas
highlighted.
In addition, start your answer by indicating why the Code of Professional Conduct will be applicable (refer to
point 1 below).
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1. Mr Carter is a CA(SA) and therefore needs to comply with the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct. (1)
2. There is a self-interest threat to independence because Monsterbond is now CC Inc’s largest client by far which
1
might cause independence issues.2 (1)

a) This might cause an intimidation or self-interest threat to Mr Carter’s objectivity as his professional judgement
might be compromised because of bias.3 (1)
b) This might also cause an intimidation or self-interest threat to integrity as Mr Carter might not be honest when
reporting on Monsterbond’s financial statements. (1)
c) The level of the threat is significant as Monsterbond is the firm’s largest client by far and the newly appointed
managing director is described as aggressive.4 (1)
d) A possible safeguard5 would be to try actively to increase the firm’s client base. (1)
3. Mr Carter has been the engagement partner since the company’s incorporation, which is a contravention of both
the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct as well as the Companies Act, causing independence issues. (1)
a) This might create a familiarity or self-interest threat6 to objectivity as such a relationship can influence Mr
Carter’s judgment (although one could argue that the threat is negated by the fact that he does not seem to be
getting along with the entity’s senior managers). (1)
b) In addition, a self-interest threat to professional behaviour is created as the engagement is in contravention with
the Companies Act requirements. (1)
c) The level of the threat might be regarded as significant as it has been an exceptionally long relationship with no
partner rotation.7 (1)
d) A possible safeguard8 would be that Mr Carter be replaced as the engagement partner. (1)
4. The client has implemented a new computer system and Mr Carter is not comfortable with CAATs. 9 (1)
a) This creates a further self-interest threat10 to professional competence and due care as Mr Carter seems to be
lacking the necessary knowledge to provide the required services. (1)
b) The level of the threat is significant, because it is stated that the engagement partner is uncomfortable using
11
CAATs but continues with the engagement irrespectively. (1)

c) Possible safeguards would be to:
12
i) assign a partner with the required skills to the audit, if possible; or (1)
ii) seek outside assistance. (1)
Available marks [16]; maximum marks [12]
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1/2

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: Fundamentals and CA in practice
[27 marks]
A. In the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, a ‘conceptual framework’ approach is used.
REQUIRED
1. Why is this approach used? (1)
2. List the steps that should be followed when applying the conceptual framework approach. (2)
B. The SAICA Code of Professional Conduct consists of four parts: 1, 2, 3 and 4.
REQUIRED
1. State what is contained in each part of the code, and to whom it is applicable. (7)
2. What, if any, is the relationship between the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct and the IRBA Code of
Conduct? (1)
C. Independence is not a fundamental principle in the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, but many examples are
provided of how a member should respond to a threat to his/her independence.
REQUIRED
1. What is the connection between independence and the fundamental principle of objectivity? (1)
2. List, and briefly explain, the five threats dealt with in the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct. (8)
D. In an auditing test, Billy Blunder, an accounting student, is required to apply the guidance contained in the SAICA
Code of Professional Conduct to the following scenario:
Mr Wild is a partner in Wild & Woes, a firm of registered auditors. He has an advertisement placed in Daily Gossip,
a low-quality tabloid newspaper, of which the following is an extract:
The Big 4? Rather choose us. I did my traineeship with one of those firms, and I saw what they are:
lumbering dinosaurs that overcharge their clients for impersonal service. Smaller is better. Try Wild &
Woes, where the client is king.
The CEO of Cavalier (Pty) Ltd read the advertisement and, after some discussion, the company appointed Wild &
Woes as its auditors.
Billy Blunder answered it as follows: This is a self-interest threat. I think this sort of thing is dealt with in section
150 of the Code of Professional Conduct. Safeguards: Cavalier should rather get some other auditing firm to
audit their financial statements, because Mr Wild seems to have poor judgement.
REQUIRED
Comment critically on Billy Blunder’s answer. (7)
[27]
Question 2 LEVEL 2
[10 marks]
Elkom (Pty) Ltd (Elkom) was founded in 20X1 in order to support electricity production in the country. Elkom’s
financial manager, Mr Power, approached one of your audit firm’s partners, Ms Spark, in order to be the external
auditors of the entity. Mr Power and Ms Spark are good friends and therefore Mr Power sees this as a great
opportunity to spend some time together.
Your audit firm, AUD Inc. (AUD), was recently founded and therefore the engagement was immediately
accepted in order to grow the client database. The audit fee that was contracted with Elkom is the previous audit
firm’s fee, increased in line with inflation. Mr Power bought Ms Spark a Rolex watch in order to thank her for
accepting the engagement.
After the engagement was accepted, the planning phase started immediately, and the preliminary engagement team
has been arranged as follows:
Ms Spark – the engagement partner
Mr Capacitor – the audit manager
Mr Volt – the senior audit trainee
Mr Cable – the second year audit trainee
Ms Bulb – the first year audit trainee
Mr Capacitor was the information technology (IT) director at Elkom two years ago, and therefore has in-depth
knowledge of the client. During Mr Capacitor’s directorship, he designed an IT system for Elkom’s financial
reporting, and has since kept the shares that Elkom gave to him as payment for the development of the system. Mr
Power requested AUD to issue an assurance report on the effective operation of the IT system. As Mr Capacitor has
close connections with the personnel in Elkom, he is currently assisting Mr Volt to find a job at Elkom once the
latter has finalised his articles.
REQUIRED
Discuss the professional conduct concerns that you may have based on the information provided above. Categorise
your concerns based on the type of threat created by your concerns.
[10]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
[13 marks]
Mr Basil Blink is a director of Blink & Bowles Inc. (B&B), a small firm of chartered accountants and registered
auditors with an office in Century City.
During the period of 10–14 August 20X1, the following occurs:

1. 10 August: Mr Blink sends his sister, Rebecca Rossouw, an email. Rebecca is the chief financial officer of
Shoppies (Pty) Ltd (Shoppies), a retail company with seven branches in Cape Town, and an audit client of B&B.
In the email he asks her to do her utmost to get Shoppies to give additional work to B&B. The email reads as
follows: ‘We will take on accounting work, tax work, consulting work, whatever you have for us. We have two
junior trainees who have been idle for the last three weeks and we can’t afford that’.
2. 11 August: Mr Blink gets a call from a friend, Charles Coetzer, who runs a cage diving business in Kleinbaai.
Some time ago, Charles had told Mr Blink that he could place a small advertisement on the advertising pamphlets
for his cage diving business. Mr Blink then asked Doug du Toit, another friend of his who does marketing, to
come up with such an advertisement. On 11 August, Charles calls to say that he got the text for the advertisement
from Doug, and that he is having new pamphlets printed that include the advertisement. Mr Blink tells him to go
ahead without having seen the text for the advertisement, which reads as follows: ‘You want to see sharks today,
but you don’t want your accountant or auditor to be a shark (and many of them are, unfortunately!). So, bring your
business to Blink & Bowles, and you won’t be swimming with the sharks’. This is followed by a phone number
for the firm.
3. 12 August: In July, a company called Rumble Ltd (Rumble) asked Mr Blink to find a suitable empowerment
partner for the company to whom they could sell a shareholding in the business to improve Rumble’s
empowerment status. Having since looked at Rumble’s financial statements, Mr Blink realises that taking a
shareholding in that company would be a very good investment, so he asks a friend, Sipho Dube, to buy the shares
on his behalf, but to pretend that he (Sipho) is the buyer.
4. 13 August: Mr Blink calls five experienced managers who are working for other small firms in Cape Town, and
offers each one a director position at B&B on condition that he/she brings clients with a fee income of at least
R1.5 million per annum with him/her to B&B.
REQUIRED
For each of the above situations, identify the threats to Mr Blink’s compliance with SAICA’s Code of Professional
Conduct and explain the fundamental principle(s) being threatened. Briefly explain your reason for stating that each
threat exists.
[13]
Note: Your answer does not have to deal with the following:
The level of significance of the threats.
Safeguards to mitigate the threats.
Question 4 LEVEL 2
[15 marks]
REQUIRED
1. List the type of threat(s) that would be created in terms of the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct for each of
the following situations. The fundamental principle, the significance of the threat and the safeguards that could be
implemented in order to reduce the threat to an acceptable level do not need to be addressed.
a) A firm has undue dependence on total fees from a client.
b) A firm is threatened with litigation by the client.
c) A firm has prepared the original data used to generate records that are the subject matter of the assurance
engagement.
d) A chartered accountant is informed by a partner of the firm that a planned promotion will not occur unless the
chartered accountant agrees with an audit client’s inappropriate accounting treatment.
e) A firm enters into a contingent fee arrangement relating to an assurance engagement.
f) A member of the engagement team has a close or immediate family member who is a director or an officer of
the client.
g) A director or an officer of the client, or an employee in a position to exert significant influence over the subject
matter of the engagement, has recently served as the engagement partner.
h) A firm is threatened with dismissal from a client engagement.
i) A firm is concerned about the possibility of losing a significant client.
j) The firm performs a service for an assurance client that directly affects the subject matter information of the
assurance engagement. (10)
2. Benny Edge, a CA(SA) recently qualified as a chartered accountant, has opened his own auditing firm, U3 Inc.
(U3). In an attempt to attract clients, Benny has had high-quality leaflets printed, on which the following
information appears:
Benny Edge CA(SA): three year training contract done and dusted.
The best newly qualified chartered accountant in town.
Fee: Only R1 000 an hour.
With reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, discuss Benny Edge’s ethical conduct in printing
such information on the leaflets. (5)
[15]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
[6 marks]
Frans van Zyl CA(SA), the audit manager on the audit of Mountain Limited (Mountain) bought 1000 shares in
Foothill Limited (Foothill) on 30 April 20X1. Frans was involved in the due diligence review of Foothill, conducted
for Mountain, during April 20X1. Foothill was taken over by Mountain on 1 June 20X1. The share price of Foothill
before the takeover was 10c per share. It is currently trading for R2,00 per share.
REQUIRED
Discuss Frans van Zyl’s behaviour with reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct.
[6]
SUGGESTED SOLUTION TO QUESTION 5
1. Frans van Zyl is a CA(SA) and therefore has to comply with the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct and its
fundamental principles. (1)
2. Frans obtained confidential information during the due diligence review which he used for his own benefit. (1)
3. This creates a self-interest threat to confidentiality as he used the information acquired as a result of professional
and business relations for his personal advantage. (1)
4. It can also create a self-interest threat to the professional behaviour as his actions might bring the profession into
disrepute. (1)
5. Frans has to comply with relevant laws and by using the information to purchase shares, knowing that the share
price will probably rise as a result of the takeover, will be transgressing the insider trading act, creating a
self-interest threat to professional behaviour. (1)
6. The threat is significant, as information obtained from a client was used to purchase shares and the share price has
increased because of this. (1)
7. No safeguards can be implemented to reduce the threats to an acceptable level. (1)
Notes:
The required does not exclude any points of the framework, thus the significance of the threat(s) as well as
safeguards need to be included.
When looking at the mark allocation, six marks in a Code of Professional Conduct questions could serve as an
indication that it probably only deals with one issue.
The suggested solution is presented in terms of the framework provided in the guidance question, for example it
started with why the Code of Professional Conduct will be applicable, followed by the identified issue and the
type of threats to the relevant fundamental principles, with an explanation/application of the fundamental
principles, followed by the significance of the threat and a safeguard.
Question 6 LEVEL 2
[8 marks]
Hush Ltd (Hush) placed an advertisement in a newspaper, after the resignation of its auditors, to call for prospective
auditing firms to come and do a presentation on the audit approach they would follow as well as an estimation of
their audit fees. Your auditing firm, Rush Inc. (Rush), which is registered with both the South African Institute of
Chartered Accountants and the Independent Regulatory Board of Auditors, would like to obtain the audit of Hush
and is therefore planning to do a presentation to Hush. You are a CA(SA) and RA, and your plan is to present a fee
lower than that charged to current clients.
REQUIRED
Discuss the above with reference to the SAICA Professional Code of Conduct. Also advise regarding alternative
actions and/or steps that could or should have been implemented.
[8]
Question 7 LEVEL 2
SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in business
[9 marks]
Mr Bonanza is a chartered accountant employed as the most senior financial accountant of a significant division of
Medium Ltd (Medium), a company listed on the JSE Limited. Among other incidents, the following happened to Mr
Bonanza in 20X9:
1. February 20X9: Mr Bonanza spends most of February compiling the division’s financial information, which will
feed into Medium’s financial statements for the financial year ended 28 February 20X9. Medium’s management
awarded Mr Bonanza 300 000 share options in 20X1, which will vest on 30 April 20X9. In February, the share
options are ‘in the money’, as they were awarded when Medium’s share price was R7,20 per share, and the share
price is now over R11 per share. Mr Bonanza is glad about the amount of money that he is likely to receive when
the share options vest, because he was divorced late in 20X3, and needs the money in order to maintain his
standard of living.
2. September 20X9 : In September, the chairperson of the board of directors of Large Ltd (Large), a competitor of
Medium, calls Mr Bonanza and offers him the position of financial director of Large. Mr Bonanza views this as a
once-in-a-lifetime opportunity. However, there is a condition attached to the offer: he must supply Large with a
list of Medium’s clients, showing the amounts that Medium charged each client for services over the last 12
months.
REQUIRED
Discuss each of the above situations in the light of the relevant guidance in the SAICA Code of Professional
Conduct.
Mark allocation
1. (5)
2. (4)
[9]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
[10 marks]
You are a CA(SA) and registered auditor and were appointed as an audit partner of Frazer Inc. (Frazer), an
established auditing firm. The following represents clients and potential clients of Frazer:
Shop Ltd (Shop) is a popular grocer and one of the largest retailers in the country, and is the largest client of
Frazer. Shop’s audit fees comprise 65% of the auditing fees of the auditing firm.
The auditor of Buy (Pty) Ltd (Buy), the holding company of Shop, is retiring. You offered to pay the current
auditor of Buy a gratitude fee of 15% of the first year’s audit fees if he persuades the board of Buy to appoint
Frazer as the new auditor of Buy.
REQUIRED
Discuss any ethical concerns with reference to the SAICA Professional Code of Conduct.
[10]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
[10 marks]
GDH Inc. are the auditors responsible for the audit of XXR Ltd (XXR), a manufacturer of luxury cars. John Burton
CA(SA) is a registered auditor and the engagement partner on the audit.
It is customary for John and Harry, the chairperson of the board of XXR, to play a round of golf together on a
Wednesday afternoon. During the course of their last game, Harry made an offer: John could buy the new XXR
sports car at cost (the same rate as that offered to company employees, arguing that the auditors are considered part
of the business).
REQUIRED
With reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, discuss any ethical concerns evident from the above
scenario. List any steps that should be implemented in order to reduce the threats to an acceptable level.
[10]
Question 10 LEVEL 2
[10 marks]
Smart Books (Pty) Ltd (Smart Books) is a distributor of textbooks to most universities in southern Africa. The entity
has only one office in Pretoria, and all orders are placed online, whereafter Smart Books delivers the books to the
relevant university. Smart Books is currently expanding into the rest of Africa.
The financial director of Smart Books, Anne Smith CA(SA), has requested your audit firm, Lead Audits Inc.
(Lead Audits), to tender for the external audit of the entity for its 30 September 20X1 financial year-end. As several
of the audit firm’s trainee accountants are still studying towards becoming chartered accountants, Anne Smith
offered the audit team members a 10% discount on all books ordered through Smart Books. This offer was made
during the tender meeting, to which Anne Smith arrived late. At the meeting, the HR director also asked the audit
partner, Ben, if he could recommend some hardworking people that Smart Books could employ in order to fill
positions for the expansion. Ben and the HR director play golf together every Friday, and therefore the HR director
trusts Ben’s opinion.
During the coffee break, Ben overheard Anne telling one of her colleagues that she would actually prefer Lead
Audits not to be awarded the tender, as she was not at all fond of the way that they had presented themselves at the
tender meeting. Anne added that she would rather have Zebra Audits Inc. (Zebra Audits) as external auditors for
Smart Books, as she is more comfortable with her brother, James, one of the audit partners of Zebra Audits. James
apparently also owns a 5% share in Smart Books, and Anne is sure that he will therefore ‘look after the company’.
REQUIRED
Discuss any concerns and considerations relating to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct you may have, based
on the information provided. Do not include significance and safeguards as part of your answer.
[10]
Question 11 LEVEL 2
[18 marks]
The four paragraphs below describe incidents that occurred during a year in the working life of Mr Hentie Hopper, a
CA(SA). Hentie started the year as a director of Carradine & Hopper Inc. (CH), a firm of chartered accountants and
registered auditors:
1. January: Quicksand (Pty) Ltd (Quicksand), one of CH’s audit clients, is experiencing serious cash-flow problems.
Hentie Hopper, who is the partner in charge of the Quicksand audit, recently inherited a substantial amount of
money and thus decides to make an interest-free loan of R200 000 to Quicksand, because he is a close friend of
Mr Hussey, a major shareholder in the company.
2. 12 March: Mr Jackson, the controlling shareholder in a number of private companies audited by CH, comes to
CH’s offices with a carrier bag containing approximately R800 in cash. Mr Jackson asks Hentie Hopper to store
the money for him for a few days and not to keep any record of having received the money. Finally, Mr Jackson
asks Hentie Hopper to give the money to his (Mr Jackson’s) son should ‘something unfortunate happen to me
before I get to collect the money’.
REQUIRED
With reference to the relevant guidance provided by the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, discuss any ethical
concerns as well as how Hentie Hopper and/or the firm of Carradine & Hopper should have responded to each of the
situations described above. Do not discuss the significance of the level of threat(s) as part of your answer.
Mark allocation
1. (9)
2. (9)
[18]
Question 12 LEVEL 2
[3 marks]
You have recently been appointed as the head of ethics at a training firm and your main function is to answer queries
submitted by CA(SA)s who need guidance regarding ethical issues. The following issue was presented to you:
Johan Van Wyk, a CA(SA), was recently appointed as the financial manager at Rubco Ltd (Rubco), a company
that manufactures rubber. Johan’s duty is solely to prepare the financial statements, while the financial director,
Willem Malherbe, also a CA(SA), is responsible for the review of the financial statements. Willem, however, felt he
needed a holiday, and instructed Johan to take over the preparation and review of the financial statements. Johan was
rather concerned about this, and explained to Willem that he could not perform both functions as it would be
considered as a threat. Willem’s response was as follows, ‘I disagree with you. There is no such a thing. Do as I say
or leave the job!’
REQUIRED
Comment on the issue with reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct. Do not include safeguards in
your answer.
[3]
Question 13 LEVEL 2
[5 marks]
Eddie Noyons, registered with SAICA as a CA(SA) in business, has recently been appointed as the financial
manager at Raindrops (Pty) Ltd (Raindrops), an irrigation company. The company is a wholly owned subsidiary of
Hydro Ltd (Hydro), a listed company. One of his main duties is to prepare financial statements for submission to the
holding company.
These financial statements are used in the calculation of bonuses which are paid to management of the
subsidiary. Upon Eddie’s presentation of the June 20X1 results to Pete Venter, financial director of Raindrops, Pete
suggested to Eddie that he should inflate the profit figure in order to reflect a higher profit. Pete whispered to Eddie:
‘Do not forget that managements’ bonuses depend on the profit, and I strongly suggest you do as I say!’
On his way back to the office, Eddie discussed the matter with a colleague, Ahmed Haji, also a CA(SA).
Ahmed’s response was: ‘Just do as you are told, or else Pete will fire you. Besides, you are not in the profession any
longer. Oh, and on the brighter side, our bonuses will be bigger, and it is not like you’re stealing! Lastly, the auditors
are useless so that should not even be a worry to you.’
REQUIRED
Discuss the situation that Eddie Noyons is currently in based on the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct. Do not
include the significance of the threat and safeguards in your answer.
[5]
Question 14 LEVEL 2
[12 marks]
Jeffrey Wells, a second-year trainee accountant at MMM Inc., is the audit senior on the audit of BGG Limited
(BGG). During a visit to the canteen, Jeffrey overhears William Woods, the financial director, and Matt Walker, the
financial manager, who are both CA(SA)s, discussing their respective weekends. Matt tells his colleague that he had
to bribe a traffic officer in order to evade a speeding fine. William acknowledges that he too has done so in the past.
In addition, he informs Matt that the editor of Finances magazine offered him R15 000 to tell him (the editor)
whether the financial position of BGG had improved or declined over the past year, which he accepted and so shared
the information.
REQUIRED
With reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, discuss any ethical concerns arising from the above
scenario. Do not include safeguards in your answer.
[12]
Notes
In answering the question, follow the layout explained in the guidance to the example question.
When analysing the required, take note of the fact that safeguards are excluded from the required.
When looking at the mark allocation, 12 marks in a Code of Professional Conduct question could serve as an
indication that it deals with more than one issue (probably two to three), taking into account that safeguards were
excluded.
1. Both William and Matt are professional accountants in business (CA(SA)s); therefore, Part 2 of the SAICA Code
of Professional Conduct is applicable to them. (1)
2. Matt made the payment of a bribe to a traffic officer and William acknowledged that he had done the same in the
past. (1)
a) Such an action could create a self-interest threat to integrity, as they were dishonest in their dealings with their
offences and the traffic officers. (1)
b) Paying a bribe also causes a self-interest threat to professional behaviour, as such an action is against the law
and could discredit the profession. (1)
c) The level of the threat is significant as in an attempt to protect themselves, they were breaking the law. (1)
3. William has disclosed confidential information to the editor of a magazine in return for R15 000. (1)
a) He should not have done so, since this creates a self-interest threat to confidentiality – he disclosed confidential
information without the appropriate authorisation. (1)
b) In addition, this creates a self-interest threat to professional behaviour, as his unauthorised disclosure will
discredit the profession if it becomes public. (1)
c) The level of the threat is significant as he financially benefitted from the disclosure. (1)
4. The R15 000 can be regarded as an inducement. In terms of section R250.8, William shall not accept any
inducement if a reasonably informed third party would be likely to conclude that it was made with the intent to
influence his behaviour improperly. William is offered R15 000 if he discloses confidential information. A
reasonably informed third party would conclude that the R15 000 was offered to influence him to transgress the
code by disclosing confidential information. (2)
a) Accepting the inducement created a self-interest threat to integrity, as he was not acting in a straightforward and
honest manner by accepting the money in return for the confidential information. (1)
b) It also created a self-interest threat to his objectivity, as his judgement was compromised when he accepted the
money and shared the information. (1)
c) In addition, this will create a self-interest threat to professional behaviour, as the profession’s reputation will be
discredited by his actions. (1)
d) The level of the threat is significant as he acted in his own interest and financially benefitted from the disclosure
. (1)
Question 15 LEVEL 2
[17 marks]
Mr Reserve is a chartered accountant and is employed as the financial manager at Dodd Ltd (Dodd). Dodd’s
warehouse, in which finished products are stored, was flooded in the last month of the financial year. Dodd was able
to keep it out of the news. Mr Reserve is responsible for preparing the draft annual financial statements and liaising
with the external auditors. The chief financial officer of Dodd instructed Mr Reserve not to make any adjustments to
the inventory balance and advised him that no write-offs were allowed to the lowest of cost price or net realisable
value.
REQUIRED
Discuss the abovementioned with reference to the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct.
[17]
Note: You are not required to discuss the detail of a dispute resolution process.
Question 16 LEVEL 2
[22 marks]
Nomvula Phosa CA(SA) was appointed the head of accounting at Kind Hearts NPC on a six-month contractual
basis. Kind Hearts NPC is a national non-profit company involved in the redistribution of unsold food to people in
need. The company was specifically formed in the wake of statistics showing that an immense volume of food that
has reached its sell-by date goes to waste, despite still being perfectly suitable for human consumption. To
counteract the waste, Kind Hearts NPC will typically obtain the food either for free or at significantly reduced prices
from retail chains and distribute it to soup kitchens and other charity organisations involved in providing food to the
poor. Kind Hearts NPC relies on subsidies from the national lottery, on private donations and on donations from
multinational corporations to fund its operations.
When the end of Nomvula’s six-month contract was approaching, the finance director of Kind Hearts NPC,
Kenneth Wiggins, managed to secure a further six-month contract for her after having gone through immense
trouble on her behalf. Soon after her contract was extended, Nomvula came face-to-face with a major ethical
dilemma. Upon reviewing the accounting records, she came upon several suspicious and material general journal
entries, posted by a person with a username of ‘guestuser001’. The entries were for donations received, but instead
of being debited to bank, the receipt was debited to a suspense account. Upon closer investigation, she determined
that payments were subsequently made from the suspense account to an unidentified personal bank account.
Nomvula decided to ask Kenneth Wiggins about the matter. Kenneth simply responded that Nomvula should keep
her nose out of journals she did not understand and reminded her that he, Kenneth, was the reason her contract with
Kind Hearts NPC was extended.
Nomvula approached the chairman of the board, a non-executive director, for guidance on the matter. However,
the chairman seemed fearful and told her that ‘some battles in life are too big for us ordinary people to fight’ and
recommended that she turn a blind eye to the problem. Nomvula decided not to approach any other party in the
company out of fear that she might be made the scapegoat in the matter, especially since she had no evidence to
implicate Kenneth in the fraudulent payments.
REQUIRED
Discuss the ethical issues, aspects to consider and further actions that Nomvula Phosa could possibly take in terms of
Part 2 of the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct.
[22]
Question 17 LEVEL 2
SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CAs in practice and in business
[10 marks]
1. Paddy Lambkin is a first-year trainee accountant at Abel & Blom Inc., a firm of chartered accountants and
registered auditors. Paddy is a member of the audit team for the audit of the 20X1 financial statements of Really
Big Bank Ltd (RBB), a listed retail bank. During RBB’s 20X1 financial year (but before the start of the audit
testing), Paddy went to an RBB branch and applied for a personal loan. He was granted a R15 000 loan which he
used to buy shares in RBB. The RBB staff members who dealt with his loan application were unaware of his
involvement with the RBB audit.
2. Henry Pollock is a recently qualified CA(SA) and works as a business analyst in the group schemes department of
Solid Ltd, a life assurance company. He is instructed by a senior manager in the department, Mr Grump, to take
R250 000 in cash to the head office of a trade union, and to hand it to the trade union’s general secretary. When
Henry musters the courage to ask Mr Grump the reason for the payment, the latter answers as follows: ‘So, little
Pollock is now asking questions about things that don’t concern him. Shut up and do as you are told, or you will
soon be sitting on a street corner with a placard. This is real-world business, which you don’t know anything
about.’
REQUIRED
Discuss, with reference to relevant guidance in the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, threats to compliance with
the fundamental principles as outlined in the Code by:
1. Paddy Lambkin (5)
2. Henry Pollock (5)
Note: Your answers should include relevant safeguards that should have been implemented to mitigate the relevant
threats.
[10]
Question 18 LEVEL 3
SAICA Code of Professional Conduct and general auditing theory
[21 marks]
Sweetie Jacobs is the marketing manager at Pratt & Whitney (P&W), a recently formed firm of registered auditors
operating from offices in Rondebosch, Cape Town. She recently drafted a letter that she intends sending out to a
large number of local businesses. The letter reads as follows:
Pratt & Whitney
P.O. Box 420
Rondebosch
17 January 20X1
[Name and address of potential client]
Dear Sir/Madam
We are the new kids on the audit block, formed to serve the southern suburbs of Cape Town (for now –
we eventually intend to conquer the world of auditing!). The purpose of this letter is to:
inform you of our range of top quality services; if you have dealt with the so-called Big 4 before, we
promise you vastly better service than you received from those lumbering dinosaurs (in fact, we think
they are on the verge of extinction);
invite you to make us your business partner; and
guarantee our speedy acceptance of appointment (within 24 hours, as outlined below), should you do
the sensible thing and choose us as your auditors (and, hopefully, the provider of further services).
All you have to do in order to appoint us as your business partner is to complete the short section towards
the end of this letter: no mess, no fuss. But hurry, because we are only able to offer the terms and
conditions outlined below for a very limited period. (Another reason not to delay, but to act today is that
the first 20 respondents will receive fantastic braai tongs, equipped with a built-in LED light, so you always
have a light handy to check the wors.)
Some reasons to choose us:

As stated above, we are good. In fact, we are more than good: we are (to borrow a line from Tina
Turner) simply the best!
We are qualified to perform audits of companies (large, small or anywhere in between) as required by
the Companies Act 71 of 2008. But here’s the really good part: our auditing methodology is designed to
minimise disruption to your business activities. How do we do this? It’s very simple: being an up-to-date
firm, we do controls testing only, which is much more efficient than the substantive testing methodology
used by other firms. Our methodology also ensures the detection of fraud. And, should our testing
procedures cause you any degree of inconvenience, we would be happy to modify them to better suit
you: no arguments. We are the flexible firm, always willing to bend over backwards for you.
We pass the savings of our efficient controls testing methodology on to you, so we will quote you an
audit fee at least 15% lower than what you paid for your last audit.
Our audit can be extended to include a range of other services, as listed below. It would be sensible for
you also to engage us to provide all of these other services, as we reduce our audit fee by 5% for each
additional service that you ask us to perform. Do the sums: if you tick all the ‘Yes’ boxes below, you can
save a further 20% on our already low audit fees! And there is nothing untoward about this fantastic
discount. We can offer it because, if, for example, our tax staff does your tax compliance work, the audit
staff will know it’s spot-on, and can then cut back on the related audit work.
If you have had a fall-out with your present auditor, partner with us instead. We promise to assist you,
not fight with you. After all, you pay your auditor good money, and in return deserve the best service.
And don’t just take our word for this: have a look at what one of our many satisfied clients has to say
about us:
I can’t tell you how much I have enjoyed dealing with Pratt & Whitney. Our previous auditors
were expensive, and they found fault with just about everything we did. Pratt & Whitney is so
much nicer to deal with: they’re much cheaper, and they hardly bother us at all. And, most
importantly, they give us exactly what we want, a clean audit report!
For you to complete
Indicate which of the following service(s) you require in addition to an external audit (and remember: the
more you tick, the more you save!):
YES NO
Management consulting
Accounting
Internal auditing
Tax compliance
Your name:
Your email address:
We will email you a letter of client acceptance within 24 hours of receipt of the above, and that will serve
as a binding contract between ourselves and your company. That’s how easy we make it for you!
We look forward to doing business with you, and knocking your socks off.
Regards,
Pratt & Whitney
REQUIRED
Guided by the SAICA’s Code of Professional Conduct and general auditing theory, comment critically on the draft
letter.
[21]
1 First point of framework.

2 Last section of text highlighted in paragraph 1.
4 Second point of framework.
5 Third point of framework.
9 Last section of text highlighted in paragraph 2.
INTRODUCTION
The legal responsibilities of, as well as the requirements to be met by, an auditor are governed by, among other
things, the Companies Act 71 of 2008, the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005 (APA), and the King IV Report on
Corporate Governance™ for South Africa 2016.1
The following types of application questions can typically be asked regarding compliance with the Acts and the
King IV™ report:
Discuss whether an incident constitutes a specific event or would give rise to a specific liability in terms of an
Act.
Discuss the non-compliance of an auditor, a company, a committee or the directors in terms of an Act or the King
IV™ report.
Evaluate the conduct of an auditor, a company, a committee or the directors in terms of an Act or the King IV™
report.
EXAMPLE QUESTION
Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Reportable irregularity

[17 marks]
You are a director at AuditCorp Inc., which has recently been appointed as auditors of Distron (Pty) Ltd (Distron), a
cold beverage wholesale supplier servicing the Gauteng area. You were appointed as the designated auditor.
Distron buys its products directly from various beverage manufacturers, and then resells them to independent
shops and retail chains. Distron currently owns a fleet of 12 delivery vehicles, with which it makes its deliveries to
its customers.
During your review of the audit file, you could find no substantive documentation for an amount of R123 456
claimed as a deduction when the second provisional tax return was completed by the financial manager and signed
off by the financial director, Mrs Botha. Further investigations revealed that this amount was the total of all traffic
fines issued during the financial year to the company’s delivery vehicle drivers. Subsequently, you set up a meeting
with Mrs Botha and were stunned by her response: she was of the opinion that traffic fines received by delivery
vehicle drivers for speeding, illegal parking and so on could be claimed as a deduction from taxable income. She
reasoned that the fines had been issued in the production of income. She argued that the faster the deliveries were
made, the more profitable the company would be. Mrs Botha insisted that these deductions be made, as the South
African Revenue Service would not pick them up.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss whether Mrs Botha’s treatment of the traffic fines constitutes a reportable irregularity in terms of the
Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005. (11)
2. Describe the actions that you should take in terms of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005, if you have
concluded that Mrs Botha’s treatment of the traffic fines constitutes a reportable irregularity. (6)
[17]
GUIDANCE

1. Discuss whether2 Mrs Botha’s treatment of the traffic fines constitutes a reportable irregularity3 in terms of the
Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005.4 (11)
2. Describe the actions that you should take in terms of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005, if you have
5 6
concluded that Mrs Botha’s treatment of the traffic fines constitutes a reportable irregularity. (6)
Identify the theory applicable to the question

In order to answer the above question, you need to be familiar with the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005, or you
will not be able to list the criteria against which Mrs Botha’s conduct will have to be measured when deciding
whether or not it is a reportable irregularity. You will also not be able to describe the actions you should take as
required in part B.
Read the question

You are a director at AuditCorp Inc., which has recently been appointed as auditors of Distron (Pty) Ltd (Distron), a
cold beverage wholesale supplier servicing the Gauteng area. You were appointed as the designated auditor.7
Distron buys its products directly from various beverage manufacturers, and then resells them to independent
shops and retail chains. Distron currently owns a fleet of 12 delivery vehicles, with which it makes its deliveries to
its customers.
During your review of the audit file, you could find no substantive documentation for an amount of R123 456
claimed as a deduction when the second provisional tax return was completed by the financial manager and signed
off by the financial director, Mrs Botha.8 Further investigations revealed that this amount was the total of all traffic
fines issued during the financial year to the company’s delivery vehicle drivers. Subsequently, you set up a meeting
with Mrs Botha and were stunned by her response: she was of the opinion that traffic fines received by delivery
vehicle drivers for speeding, illegal parking and so on could be claimed as a deduction from taxable income.9 She
reasoned that the fines had been issued in the production of income. She argued that the faster the deliveries were
made, the more profitable the company would be. Mrs Botha insisted that these deductions be made,10 as the South
African Revenue Service would not pick them up.11
Exam technique
Remember: you need to follow a specific approach if you are required to describe, or comment on, requirements set
out in:
Acts, such as the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005 and the Companies Act 71 of 2008
the King IV Report on Corporate Governance™ for South Africa 2016.
You need to:
identify the relevant issue in the Acts and/or the King IV™ code
state the relevant theory as stated in the Acts and/or the King IV™ code
apply the information in the scenario to the relevant stated theory.
If you are asked to comment on the non-compliance in terms of an Act or the King IV™ code, that is exactly what
you will deal with: non-compliance. However, if you are asked to evaluate or assess the information in terms of an
Act or the King IV™ code, you must include in your answer the instances of both compliance and non-compliance.
Remember also to conclude on the compliance and the non-compliance.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1. There is an issue that relates to incorrect tax practices, which could possibly prove to be a reportable irregularity.12
a) It must be in the capacity of the auditor of the company. (Theory) (1)
You were appointed as the designated auditor of Distron. (Application) (1)
AND
b) An unlawful act or omission must have taken place. (Theory) (1)
Provisional tax returns were unlawfully completed owing to the deduction of traffic fines from taxable income.
(Application) (1)
AND
c) The unlawful act or omission must be committed by a person responsible for the management of the company.
(Theory) (1)
Mrs Botha was responsible for, and/or fully aware of, the deduction of the traffic fines from taxable income. (Application)
AND (1)
d) The unlawful act or omission has caused, or is likely to cause, material financial loss to the entity or to a
partner, member, shareholder, creditor or investor of the entity in respect of his/her dealings with that entity.
(Theory) (1)
i) Fines and penalties can be imposed by the South African Revenue Service and Distron will suffer financial
loss. (Application) (1)
ii) If returns go through the way they were completed, the South African Revenue Service will suffer a loss, as
Distron will pay less tax than that to which the South African Revenue Service is entitled. (Application)
OR (1)
e) The unlawful act or omission is fraudulent or amounts to theft. (Theory) (1)
The submission of these falsified tax returns might constitute fraud. (Application) (1)
OR
f) The unlawful act or omission represents a material breach of any fiduciary duties. (Theory) (1)
The submission of falsified tax returns represents a material breach of the financial director’s fiduciary duty, as it
is not in the best interests of the company. (Application) (1)
Therefore, based on the above, Mrs Botha’s treatment of the traffic fines constitutes a reportable irregularity
in terms of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005 (Decision/Conclusion). (1)
2. Theory stated in the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005

a) As per section 45 of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005, the existence of a reportable irregularity must be
reported to the IRBA without delay. (1)
b) Management of Distron must be notified (in writing) of the report to the IRBA within three days of the auditor
sending the first report to the IRBA. (1)
c) The auditor must, as soon as reasonably possible, but no later than 30 days from the date on which the first
report was sent to the IRBA: (1)
i) take all reasonable steps to discuss the report with the management of Distron; (1)
ii) afford the members of the management board of Distron an opportunity to make representations in respect of
the report; and (1)
iii) send a second report to the IRBA stating that:
no reportable irregularity has taken, or is taking, place; or (1)
the suspected reportable irregularity is no longer taking place, and that adequate steps have been taken
for the prevention or recovery of any loss as a result thereof, if relevant; or (1)
the reportable irregularity is continuing. (1)
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
[8 marks]
Section 45 of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005 imposes an obligation on registered auditors to report a
reportable irregularity to the IRBA if certain requirements are met.
REQUIRED
List and briefly explain the elements that constitute a reportable irregularity.
[8]
Question 2 LEVEL 1
[6 marks]
REQUIRED
Briefly outline the process that a registered auditor should follow when he/she is under a duty to report a reportable
irregularity in terms of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005.
[6]
Question 3 2 LEVEL 1/
Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Registration as auditor, duties of auditor
[14 marks]
The three individuals below would like to register with the IRBA. They are not sure what the requirements are and
have asked for your assistance:
Franc Massri is a qualified CA(SA). He has been vigilant in keeping up with his continuous professional
development requirements as set out by SAICA. He received his South African citizenship five years ago and has
been working at an auditing firm for the past three years.
Jakky Chiang is a South African citizen. He was released from prison in 20X1, after having been sentenced,
without the option of a fine, to 25 years in prison for the forging of salary cheques at his previous place of
employment. While in jail, he realised his mistake and decided to become an auditor in order to catch fraudsters.
He was released on early parole owing to good behaviour and began studying immediately after his release. He is
ready to write his professional exams and start his training at an audit firm.
Grant Thorn is a well-known and respected accountant in Johannesburg. He complies with all the SAICA
continuous professional development requirements as well as those of the IRBA. He is still waiting for his South
African citizenship to be approved, as he is originally from the UK.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss each person’s eligibility to be registered as an auditor in terms of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005.
Motivate your answer. (9)
2. List the criteria with which an appointed auditor of a company must be satisfied, according to section 44 of the
Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005, before expressing an unqualified opinion on a company’s financial
statements. (5)
[14]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
[13 marks]
Mr Murray is the partner in charge of the 20X1 audit of Mega Ltd (Mega). During the course of its 20X1 financial
year, Mega purchased a much smaller company, Micro (Pty) Ltd (Micro).
One evening, while the Mega audit was in progress, three staff members of Micro came to Mr Murray’s house. They
showed him convincing-looking documents that indicated that, shortly after Mega took over Micro, an executive
director of the former company, a Mr Retief, instructed Micro’s accounts payable clerks to delete from Micro’s
records a large number of entries for deliveries received by the company before the takeover. He instructed them to
do so because:
he hoped that some of the suppliers concerned would not have any record of having made the relevant deliveries
to Micro; and
he wanted to create discrepancies between Micro’s records and the relevant suppliers’ statements in order to delay
having to pay them.
REQUIRED
Given the above information, discuss whether Mr Murray has a reporting responsibility in terms of the Auditing
Profession Act 26 of 2005. Motivate your answer.
[13]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
[11 marks]
Kelly Auditors Inc. (Kelly) have been the external auditors of the Multicor group for the past four years. Kelly is the
external auditors of all the subsidiaries in the group and the audit team is currently busy with the audit of Wonder
Ltd (Wonder), one of Multicor’s subsidiaries, for the financial year ended 31 May 20X1.
During the inspection of the minutes of directors meetings, the following information was obtained regarding the
remuneration of Wonder’s board of directors and management. The company has six executive directors and one
independent non-executive director. The directors had not been satisfied with their current remuneration, as due to
the ever-increasing cost of living in South Africa, they felt that it had become difficult to maintain their lifestyles.
They had therefore taken it upon themselves to approve a new directors’ remuneration policy. This policy had been
developed during the current financial year by the company’s chief financial officer, who is also a director, but it had
not been approved by the shareholders.
The directors of Wonder do not wish to disclose any remuneration in the annual financial statements of either
Wonder or the group. They are willing to disclose only their basic salary.
REQUIRED
Discuss whether the lack of approval and disclosure of the directors’ remuneration will constitute a reportable
irregularity in terms of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005.
[11]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Legal liability
[9 marks]
Mr John Cowboy is a CA(SA) and a registered auditor. In his role as audit partner at John Cowboy Inc., he issued an
unmodified audit opinion on the financial statements of Dicey Rock (Pty) Ltd (Dicey) that reflected that the
company had a positive financial outlook, and would be a going concern for the foreseeable future. The audit work
performed, however, did not support this statement. The unmodified report was issued, despite Mr Cowboy being
aware of the fact that Dicey was under severe financial pressure at year-end.
Mr Cowboy was also aware that a financial company, Capital Ltd (Capital), would rely on the audit report in
deciding whether or not to provide Dicey with financial assistance in the form of a loan. The granting of the loan by
Capital was specifically dependent on Dicey’s latest audited financial statements, providing assurance that Dicey
would be able to operate as a going concern for the foreseeable future. Mr Cowboy was aware that the potential loan
from Capital would bring some short-term cash flow relief to Dicey, but that this would be insufficient to restore
financial stability.
Based on Mr Cowboy’s audit report, Capital granted the loan to Dicey, as Capital expected the company to be
more than capable of servicing the loan repayments.
A few months after the loan had been granted, Capital realised that Dicey was not in a position to make the
contractual loan repayments. Upon subsequent enquiry, they discovered that Capital had used the loan money to pay
administrative expenses, including salaries.
REQUIRED
Discuss whether Mr John Cowboy will be held liable for the loss suffered by Capital in terms of the Auditing
Profession Act 26 of 2005.
[9]
Question 7
Question 7 LEVEL 1
King IV™ report
[13 marks]
You have recently been appointed as an audit manager at the audit firm of General Practitioners of Excellence Inc.,
which has entrusted you with the audit of Goodies Ltd, a company that was incorporated by its chief executive
officer, Mike Goods.
Goodies Ltd manufactures and sells ceramic teapots, and was listed on the JSE in 2000. Mike Goods has heard
about the importance of the King IV Report on Corporate Governance™ for South Africa 2016 and the so-called
‘combined assurance model’. He feels, however, that King IV™ is not applicable to Goodies Ltd, as the external
auditor and the internal audit department work independently with different agendas and goals.
REQUIRED
Write a letter to Mike Goods in which you explain the applicability of the King IV™ report to the company and
describe the concept of and responsibility for combined assurance.
[13]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
King IV™ code
[10 marks]
You are a first-year audit trainee allocated to the statutory aspect of the audit of Kilimanjaro Ltd (KLM).
Client: KLM Year-end: 30 June 20X1

Prepared by: A. Trainee Preparation date: 20 July 20X1
X1
Reviewed by: S. Supervisor Review date: 24 July 20X1
Subject: Statutory matters
The company secretary provided the following schedule to the board of directors and the risk committee:
Board of directors
D. Masha – executive director and chairperson
A. Anker – chief executive officer (CEO)
S. Sighn – marketing director (an executive director)
M. Makas – human resources director (an executive director)
G. Jones – information technology (IT) director (an executive director)
E. Weinstein – risk director (an executive director)
W. Derksen CA(SA) – independent non-executive director
The position of financial director has been vacant for nine months after the previous director’s resignation. The
CEO, A. Anker, is in the process of interviewing candidates and he will, in due course, appoint the new financial
director. Even though there is only one independent non-executive director in the board, the directors and
shareholders are satisfied that the number of directors per company is sufficient and they are not prepared to appoint
additional directors.
Risk committee
D. Masha (chairperson of the risk committee)
E. Weinstein
W. Derksen
The nomination committee has recently been dissolved as the CEO believes he and M. Makas have the ability to
handle the appointment process on their own.
REQUIRED
Briefly describe any concerns that you have regarding the composition and appointments of the board of directors
and risk committee. For each concern, provide a recommendation(s) and/or requirement(s) of the King IV™ code
and report.
Present your answer as follows:
Concerns (1 mark Recommendations and/or requirements of King IV™ code and report (1 mark
each) each)
Communication skills – logical argument, layout and structure (2) (8)

[10]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
King IV™ report
[21 marks]
The following information relating to the board of directors of Paino and Later Ltd (P&L) has been presented to you
during an audit. You have been assigned the responsibility of investigating compliance with the King IV Report on
Corporate Governance™ for South Africa 2016 (King IV™). The company is listed on the JSE.
DIRECTOR TITLE/POSITION HELD IN COMPANY INVOLVEMENT IN

NAME THE AUDIT
COMMITTEE
Al Paccino Chairperson and CEO Audit committee
chairperson
Joe Tick Inc. Secretary and auditors
D. Preston Not in the employ of P&L. D. Preston was, however, Audit committee member
the CEO up until one year ago, when Al Paccino was
appointed as CEO.
Joe Marciano – Risk director Audit committee member
PhD Maths
R. Balboa Not in the employ of P&L. He owns 2% of P&L’s
shares. This is, however, immaterial to his personal
wealth.
J. Acker CA(SA) Financial director Audit committee member
B. Acker Self-employed. B. Acker is one of P&L’s significant
suppliers.
J. Bolt – MSc Production director
M. Advert Marketing director
REQUIRED
1. Classify the directors of Paino and Later Ltd as executive or non-executive in terms of the King IV™ report. Also
classify the non-executive directors as independent or not independent in terms of the King IV™ report. Your
answer should be presented in the following tabular form: (12)
DIRECTOR TITLE/POSITION INVOLVEMENT EXECUTIVE/NON-EXECUTIVE INDEPE

NAME HELD IN IN THE AUDIT MEMBER OF THE BOARD,
COMPANY COMMITTEE PLUS MOTIVATION
Al Paccino Chairperson and CEO Audit committee
chairperson
Joe Tick Inc. Secretary and auditors
D. Preston Not in the employ of Audit committee
P&L member
Joe Marciano – Risk director Audit committee
PhD Maths member
R. Balboa Not in the employ of
P&L
J. Acker CA(SA) Financial director Audit committee
member
B. Acker Self-employed
J. Bolt – MSc Production director
M. Advert Marketing director
2. Discuss any instances of non-compliance with the King IV™ report, specifically with reference to the
composition of the board of directors and the audit committee. The role of the chairperson of the board as well as
the CEO should be included in your answer. (9)
[21]
Question 10 LEVEL 2
King IV™ report
[20 marks]
You are the audit manager at the audit firm Go ProAudits Inc. (Go ProAudits). Your firm was recently appointed as
the external auditors of Pen ’n Pencil Ltd (Pen ’n Pencil) based on the recommendation of the board of directors.
Management was very helpful during the planning stage of the audit and assisted in providing the following
background information to the senior trainee accountant on the audit team:
Background of the entity’s management

Pen ’n Pencil is a wholesaler of stationary with 30 branches throughout southern Africa. The entity listed on the JSE
in 2010 and has been profitable since its incorporation in 1980. The board declares full compliance with King IV™
in its annual reports.
The board consists of the following individuals with their different roles:
Ms Danielle Copper – chairperson of the board
Mr Thabo Mofokeng – serves on the audit committee
Ms Fatima Naidoo – chief financial officer (CFO)
Ms Marie Swanepoel – serves on the audit committee
Mr Siphiwe Makuma – chief executive officer
Mr Yusuf Wascowitz – managing director
Ms Danielle Copper and Mr Siphiwe Makuma were the founders of Pen ’n Pencil. Both of them separately owned
50% of the entity’s shareholding at inception, but their shareholding has decreased – since the date of listing, they
have owned only 7.5% each. Ms Copper is seen as the best candidate to oversee matters in the company due to her
involvement in the incorporation. Mr Makuma was appointed as chief executive officer for the same reason. The
shareholders at the time therefore elected both of them to their respective positions on the board of directors in 2010.
Mr Thabo Mofokeng is an independent director of Pen ’n Pencil with an extensive background in retail stores.
Pen ’n Pencil therefore appreciates his willingness to assist in the day-to-day operation of the entity.
Ms Fatima Naidoo has a background in psychology, but is currently studying towards becoming a chartered
accountant. She has been in a managerial position at Pen ’n Pencil for the past five years, and was promoted to CFO
after the resignation of the previous CFO. As Pen ’n Pencil aims to maintain a high level of qualification, Ms Naidoo
was requested to further her studies in accounting.
Ms Marie Swanepoel is a stay-at-home mom, and also the sister-in-law of Ms Copper. Ms Copper requested Ms
Swanepoel to assist on the board in order for them to increase the board’s independence.
The compensation of the directors is determined by Ms Copper and is as follows:

Executive fees: R1 million per annum
Non-executive fees: R500 000 per annum
The directors’ fees are appropriately disclosed in the financial statements by the accounting function, which is
responsible for the preparation of the financial statements.
REQUIRED
Discuss the corporate governance concerns based on the King IV™ report.
Notes:
The required asks for concerns based on the King IV™ report. Therefore you will only deal with instances of non
-compliance in your answer and you will not include a conclusion in your answer.
You need to state the relevant King IV™ requirements (theory) in your answer and have to apply the information
in the case study to the stated King IV™ requirements (application).
Your answer must clearly link the theory to the application. One way of presenting this type of answer is to do it
in tabular format, with the theory in the first column and the application in the second column.
When looking at the mark allocation, 20 marks constitutes 10 relevant King IV™ requirements marks and 10
properly applied application marks.
1 The chairperson of the board is not a non-executive director who is independent, as required
. by the King IV™ report. (1)
Ms Danielle Copper owns a 7.5% share in Pen ’n Pencil, which is material to her personal
wealth, and will not be seen as independent. (1)
2 The company should appoint a lead independent member to strengthen the independence of
. the board. (1)
There is no indication of a lead independent board member. (1)
3 The chairperson of the board as well as the CEO should be appointed by the board of
. directors. (1)
It is a concern that the chairperson of the board was elected by the shareholders and not by
the board of directors in terms of the King IV™ report. (1)
The CEO was also appointed by the shareholders and not by the board of directors, as
required by the King IV™ report. (1)
4 The majority of the board members are not non-executive directors. (1)
. Mr Mofokeng assists with the day-to-day activities of Pen ’n Pencil, and therefore cannot be
seen as non-executive. (1)
Four of Pen ’n Pencil’s six directors are executive directors (only Ms Copper and Ms
Swanepoel are non-executive), and therefore the entity does not adhere to this principle. (1)
5 The majority of these non-executive directors are not independent, as required by the King IV
. ™ report. (1)
Neither Ms Copper nor Ms Swanepoel is independent.
Ms Swanepoel is remunerated based on the performance of the company and therefore

cannot be seen as independent.
(Refer to point 1 for the discussion of Ms Copper’s independence.) (1)

6 There should be an effective and independent audit committee. All the members of the
. committee should be independent and it should be chaired by an independent, non-executive
director. The committee should comprise at least three independent, non-executive directors. (1)
Only Mr Mofokeng and Ms Swanepoel serve on the audit committee (only two directors). (1)
Mr Mofokeng is involved in the day-to-day operations of Pen ’n Pencil, which means he is an
executive director (mark awarded in point 4). (1)
Ms Swanepoel is remunerated based on the performance of the company and therefore
cannot be seen as independent (mark awarded in point 5). She serves on the audit
committee. (1)
7 The members of the audit committee as a whole should have the necessary financial literacy,
. skills and experience to execute their duties effectively. (1)
Ms Swanepoel is a stay-at-home mom and there is no indication that she has financial
literacy, skills and experience. There is also no indication whether Mr Mofokeng has the
relevant financial literacy, skills and experience. (1)
8 Pen ’n Pencil does not have the following required minimum committees according to the King
. IV™ report:
Risk committee (1)
Nomination committee (1)
Remuneration committee (1)
Social and ethics committee (1)
9 The number of breaches of the governance principles in King IV™ detailed above indicates
. the following:
The company either does not have a company secretary or the incumbent is ineffectual. (1)
The board does not meet their responsibility for compliance governance as required by King (1)
IV™. (1)
Question 11 LEVEL 2
King IV™ report
[25 marks]
Bookings-R-Us Ltd (BRU) is a travel agent in the South African tourism industry. BRU is listed on the JSE. The
board of directors is well aware of the fact that good governance in terms of King IV™ is compulsory for companies
listed on the JSE and, as such, has requested your review of the information provided below.
The audit committee (sub-committee of the board of directors)

The audit committee met on 5 March 20X1 for their annual meeting. The audit committee consists of four members
and therefore exceeds the requirement set by King IV™ to have a minimum of three members. The members of the
committee are as follows:
Mrs Gold – chairman of the board, chairman of the audit committee, chief executive officer (CEO)
Mr Black – marketing director (executive director)
Mr Green – human resources director (executive director)
Mr Red – CA(SA) (independent non-executive director)
Mr Red qualified as a chartered accountant after he finished his training contract seven years ago. However, he then
decided to follow his passion of becoming a professional singer. He never kept up to date with the latest changes in
the auditing/accounting profession while pursuing his passion as he was not planning on returning to the profession.
The following memorandum was presented and discussed at the meeting on the 5 March 20X1:
Memorandum
To: The audit committee members
From: Mrs Gold (on behalf of the board of directors)
RE: Functions of the audit committee
Dear Member
Please take note of the following additional functions required from the audit committee in assisting the
board of directors to be effective and efficient:
1. Assisting the nominations committee in future with the appointment of a company secretary
2. Appointing or renewing the appointment of the external auditors
3. Investigating suspected instances of fraud during the weekly wage pay-out to the workforce
4. Conducting the audit of the interim financial results
REQUIRED
Highlight all instances of non-compliance with King IV™ and make recommendations as to how BRU can become
compliant with the requirements.
[25]
Question 12 LEVEL 1
King IV™ report and Companies Act 71 of 2008
[18 marks]
Per the King IV Report on Corporate Governance™ for South Africa 2016 (King IV™), a company’s audit
committee is supposed to, inter alia, oversee both its external and internal auditors.
REQUIRED
1. Answer yes or no. In terms of the Companies Act 71 of 2008, it is compulsory for the following companies to
have an audit committee:
a) Public companies (1)
b) State-owned companies (1)
c) Private companies, in the case where the memorandum of incorporation indicates that the company should have
an audit committee (1)
2. What are the duties of the audit committee in terms of the Companies Act 71 of 2008? (15)
[18]
Question 13 LEVEL 2
Companies Act 71 of 2008
[10 marks]
As the senior manager in the technical department of the audit firm of Matthews & Mbowene Inc. with expertise in
aspects of the Companies Act 71 of 2008, you have received a query from one of your colleagues and an email from
another. You need to respond to these queries separately.
1. During the course of a conversation with Meisie Smith, one of the audit seniors at the audit firm, regarding a
prospective client, Trophy (Pty) Ltd, a company that performs all types of engraving, especially that of trophies,
she told you the following:
I have a potential client, Trophy (Pty) Ltd, who approached us to serve as the company secretary. I obtained Trophy
(Pty) Ltd’s memorandum of incorporation (MOI), and there is something that is bothering me. The company’s MOI
only indicates that the company is prohibited from offering its securities to the public. Am I correct in saying that the
company will be seen to be incorporated as a private company in terms of the Companies Act 71 of 2008?
2. You have received the following email from a colleague:
From: [email protected]
To: [email protected]
Date: 20X1/07/08 8:15am
Subject: Companies Act Query
Good morning, Colleague,
I have a potential audit client, Seals (Pty) Ltd, who is the sole provider of printed degree certificates in
South Africa. Even though they are registered as a private company, they need to know whether or not
they need to be audited according to the new Companies Act. They have provided me with the
following information for the financial year ended 30 June 20X1:
Number of certificates printed during the year under review 40 million
Cost price per certificate R5
Sales price per certificate R7
Average number of employees 40
Total creditors R20 million
Number of shareholders 20
Do they need to be audited according to the new Companies Act?
Gift Sisulu CA(SA)
REQUIRED
Address each of your colleague’s queries separately.
Mark allocation
1. (4)
2. (6)
[10]
Question 14 LEVEL 2
[10 marks]
As a member of the audit team of Cheesy Ltd (Cheesy), which manufactures and sells dairy products, you have been
assigned to the audit of statutory matters and, as part of your procedures, have extracted some information pertinent
to your audit.
Group structure
Cheesy Ltd owns 80% of the shares in Boxes Ltd, a company responsible for marketing the products of Cheesy Ltd.
The other 20% of shares are held by independent shareholders.
Directors of Cheesy Ltd

Fifi Frame
Shervani Govender
Apple Cruise CA(SA)
Directors of Boxes Ltd

Fifi Frame
Apple Cruise CA(SA)
Joe Slow
Boxes Ltd (Boxes) had to appoint a new auditor during the last annual general meeting, but the shareholders could
not come to an agreement as to who the new auditor should be. Therefore, they gave the directors authorisation to
make an appointment. Listed below are the candidates they are currently considering:
Giddy Fellows (Pty) Ltd, a new dynamic firm in the city whose shareholders are Franc Giddy CA(SA), Mary
McTree CA(SA) and Thabo Mzini (BCom)
Apple Cruise CA(SA)
Badrep, a firm of registered auditors involved since its inception in the supply of secretarial services to the
company
Brainwaves Inc., a large international firm of registered auditors
REQUIRED
Discuss the eligibility of the four entities or individuals listed above for the appointment as the auditor of Boxes Ltd
in terms of the Companies Act 71 of 2008.
[10]

Companies Act 71 of 2008 and King IV™ report
[16 marks]
Wellworthit Ltd (WWI) is one of the top 100 companies listed on the JSE. Its business involves retailing of clothing,
food products, groceries and home products to upper- and middle-income customers, and it has operations in South
Africa, Namibia, Botswana, Australia and New Zealand. WWI also has an interest in Wellworthit Financial Services
(Pty) Ltd, which provides financial services such as personal loans.
At WWI’s financial year-end (30 September 20X1), WWI’s board consisted of:
Mr Archibald – chairperson of the board; non-executive director
Mr Brooks – independent non-executive director
Ms Calvin – independent non-executive director
Mr Du Toit – non-executive director
Mr Els – non-executive director
Mr Franken – executive director; chief executive officer
Mr Goodes – executive director; chief operating officer
Ms Hamilton – executive director; head of corporate affairs
At 30 September 20X1, the company had the following board committees:
Audit, risk and compliance committee members

Mr Brooks – committee chairperson
Ms Calvin
Mr Franken
This committee met once during the 20X1 financial year.
Nominations committee members

Mr Archibald – committee chairperson
Mr Brooks
Ms Calvin
The nominations committee did not meet during the 20X1 financial year. Per WWI’s annual report, this committee
‘meets when required, and it was decided that it was unnecessary to have a meeting during the reporting period’.
Remuneration committee members

Mr Archibald – committee chairperson
Mr Isner – WWI’s chief financial officer
Ms Jordan – an executive remuneration consultant who is not a full-time employee of WWI
The remuneration committee decides on the remuneration of executive directors. All non-executive directors are
remunerated with a meeting attendance fee of R20 000 per board meeting and R15 000 per committee meeting.
The company also has a social and ethics committee, which it is required to have in terms of the regulations to the
Companies Act of 2008.
The social and ethics committee members at year-end:

Mr Goodes
Ms Hamilton
Mr Keyser – WWI’s head of compliance management
During the year, two independent, non-executive directors resigned from the board. The first was Mr Langeveld,
who did so after it became known that he had been listed in the Companies and Intellectual Properties Commission’s
(CIPC’s) register of delinquent directors before he was appointed. WWI’s annual report stated that Mr Langeveld
resigned during the reporting period, but did not provide a reason for his resignation. The other director who
resigned was Mr Mlambo. WWI made a statement that the reason for his resignation was ‘to free up time to pursue
other interests’. This statement was repeated in the annual report. The Black Management Forum issued a statement
that accused WWI’s board, and the chairperson of the board in particular, of having been disrespectful towards Mr
Mlambo, and called for a boycott of WWI. The company did not respond to the Black Management Forum’s
statement. Both Mr Langeveld and Mr Mlambo served on WWI’s audit committee before they resigned as board
members.
REQUIRED
Discuss the governance practices at Wellworthit that you regard as being problematic/unacceptable, given relevant
guidance in the King IV™ report and the Companies Act 71 of 2008.
[16]

Companies Act 71 of 2008 and Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005: Reportable irregularity
[24 marks]
Colorz Ltd (Colorz) manufactures ink cartridges for laser jet printers. Colorz has a 28 February 20X1 financial
year-end. The company has been in operation for 20 years, and has been profitable up until the current financial year
when a major global financial recession hit. The recession, along with the fact that an increasing number of
individuals and companies are ‘going green’, has caused a massive decline in profitability. Mrs Pink, the financial
director and a financial accountant, provided you with the following extract from the statement of financial position
as at year-end:
ACCOUNTS 29 FEB 20X1 (R’000)
Inventory R59 157
Debtors R45 178
Non-current assets R125 689
Overdraft R55 431
Creditors R45 682
Non-current liabilities R85 479
During the 20X1 financial year, Mrs Pink approved a loan to the executive director, Mr Green, to enable him to
partake in a new business venture. Mrs Pink approved the loan on 15 April 20X10 without consultation with Ms
Yellow (chief risk officer) or Mr Blue (human resources director) as, in Mrs Pink’s opinion, ‘they have limited
financial knowledge’. The loan amounted to R6 million, and is repayable at the end of March 20X1, as this is the
month when directors are awarded bonuses. The loan does not carry interest. The loan was funded out of the bank
overdraft and Mrs Pink posted the following journal entry in order to record the transaction on 15 April 20X0:
Dr Debtors R6 000 000

Cr Non-current liabilities R6 000 000
General journal entry in order to record loan to debtor
REQUIRED
Note: Ignore any taxation implications.
1. Discuss whether Mrs Pink acted in compliance with section 45 of the Companies Act 71 of 2008. (7)
2. Discuss the effect of your findings in (1) in terms of section 45 of the Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005. (17)
[24]

Companies Act 71 of 2008 and King IV™ report
[28 marks]
Diversified Ltd (Diversified), a large logistics company, was listed on the JSE in 1983. The company has expanded
into a number of sub-Saharan countries: first, into the countries neighbouring South Africa, and then into West and
East Africa. Generally speaking, the expansion process has been a success.
Board composition
On its 20X1 financial year-end date, the board of directors of Diversified consisted of:
Mr Appleton – chairperson and joint chief executive officer (he was the board chairperson before being made
joint CEO)
Mr Brundyn – joint chief executive officer (he was an executive director, tasked with stakeholder engagement,
before being made joint CEO)
Ms Carter – chief financial officer
Mr Dube – non-executive director
Mr Engels – non-executive director
Mr Franks – non-executive director
Mr Gordon – independent, non-executive director
Ms Hadebe – independent, non-executive director
Mr Irish – independent, non-executive director
Half-way through the 20X1 financial year, Mr James, Diversified’s CEO at the time, unexpectedly resigned from the
position to which he had been appointed two years ago. Later, it became apparent that Mr James had pushed for the
board to remove the company’s chief financial officer, Ms Carter, and then resigned when the board refused to do
so. Mr Appleton, a former chairperson of Diversified, has been the joint CEO, with Mr Brundyn, since that time. It
is not clear how long this joint CEO arrangement will last.
Shortly after Mr James’s resignation, Mr Klein, the chief operating officer at the time and an executive director,
also resigned. He reportedly left because he had not been appointed chief executive officer. Apparently, the
company does not intend appointing a new chief operating officer. Diversified’s share price dropped considerably
after the above-mentioned events.
Committees
At the financial year-end date, Diversified had an audit committee and three board committees, which were
constituted as follows:
Audit committee:
Mr Appleton – chairperson
Ms Ludd – chief audit executive
Mr Gordon
Mr Irish
Executive committee:
Mr Brundyn
Ms Carter
Four additional senior managers
Nomination committee:
Mr Engels
Ms Hadebe
Mr Langa – head of human resources
Remuneration committee:
Mr Franks – chairperson
Mr Irish
Mr Langa – head of human resources
During the financial year, the board decided to do away with both the risk committee and the social and ethics
committee. The functions of the risk committee were transferred to the audit committee, while the functions of the
social and ethics committee were transferred to the executive committee.
Loans to board members

After the departure of Messrs James and Klein, the company made loans totalling R100 million to Mr Appleton, Mr
Brundyn and Ms Carter in order for them to purchase shares in the company. The minutes of a board meeting held
on 1 December 20X1 indicated that these loans were approved by Mr Gordon and Mr Hadebe. The minutes of this
meeting did not include anything else relating to the approval of these loans. No notice of this meeting was sent out
to the directors. All of the directors were present at the board meeting.
REQUIRED
Discuss any instances of non-compliance with the King IV™ report and the Companies Act 71 of 2008 with
reference to the information provided relating to Diversified Ltd. You may assume that the Companies Act
requirements relating to quorums of meetings have been met. You are not required to address the issuing of shares in
your answer.
[28]
1 Copyright and trademarks are owned by the Institute of Directors in Southern Africa NPC and all of its rights are
reserved.
2 Requires a decision from you = conclusion.
3 Deals specifically with a reportable irregularity.
4 Criteria stated in the Auditing Profession Act.
5 Actions = what you will do.
6 Stated in the APA = theory.
7 First requirement is met: you are the auditor.
8 Financial director = management is aware.
9 Not in terms of the Income Tax Act = unlawful.
10 Not in the company’s best interest.
11 SARS will lose money.
12 This is the issue, but in this case will not earn a mark as it has been given to you in the required.
CHAPTER 4 Basic concepts of governance and internal control
CHAPTER 5 Introduction to risks and internal controls in a computerised environment
CHAPTER 6 Revenue and receipts cycle
CHAPTER 7 Purchases and payments cycle

CHAPTER 8 Inventory and production cycle
CHAPTER 9 Human resources cycle
CHAPTER 10Investment and financing cycle
INTRODUCTION
The basic concepts of internal control provide a background to the topics included in the rest of the book. Although
these concepts are not usually tested on their own, a thorough understanding of them will enhance your ability to
apply them in later chapters.
For guidance on the answering of those questions on governance requiring the application of theory, refer to
Chapter 3.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
King IV™ report
[16 marks]
Your audit firm, Excellent Service, appointed as the auditors of Corporate (Pty) Ltd, has received the following
document from their new director with regard to uncertainties or questions in terms of the King IV Report on
Corporate Governance™ for South Africa 2016 (King IV™ report).
Date 4 February 20X1
Attention: Excellent Service audit team
Subject: King IV™ report requirements
According to the King IV™ report, corporate governance is defined as the exercise of ethical and effective
leadership by the governing body towards the achievement of the following governance outcomes: ethical
culture, good performance, effective control and legitimacy.
Based on the above statement, I have the following queries with regard to governance and internal
control in terms of the King IV™ report:
Query 1
Risks are an integral part of any business striving to achieve its objective.
What is the definition of risk according to the King IV™ report?
Query 2
The governing body should exercise ongoing oversight of risk management and ensure that particular
objectives are achieved.
What are the objectives that should be met in terms of the King IV™ report?
Query 3
After the process of risk identification and risk evaluation, the entity should decide on an appropriate risk
response for each of the risks identified.
What are the different risk responses available to us as an entity?
I look forward to your response.
Mr A. Hopeful
(Director)
REQUIRED
Assist the director of Corporate (Pty) Ltd with his queries.
Mark allocation
Query 1 (5)
Query 2 (5)
Query 3 (6)
[16]
Question 2 LEVEL 1
Internal control: Fundamentals
[19 marks]
The International Standard on Auditing (ISA) 315 (Revised), which identifies and assesses the risks of material
misstatement through an understanding of the entity and its environment, requires an auditor to understand an
entity’s internal control. ISA 315 (Revised) defines internal control and deals with the different components thereof.
REQUIRED
1. Define internal control. (5)
2. List the components of an entity’s internal control, and give a brief explanation of each component. (14)
(Adapted from ACCA Question 2a, 8 December 2011)
[19]
Question 3 LEVEL 1
Internal control: Fundamentals
[15 marks]
You were recently appointed as a partner at the audit firm of Tom, Dick and Harry Inc. One of your duties includes a
monthly training session with the trainee accountants in order to resolve their uncertainties regarding, among other
things, aspects of internal control.
In order to identify problem areas, you distributed a questionnaire among the trainee accountants, the results of
which revealed that there are reservations about the benefits to be derived from the implementation of a
computerised system, the type of control activities and the inherent limitations of internal control.
REQUIRED
Prepare a guideline that could be used as a reference tool during the training session, in which you:
1. describe five potential benefits identified by ISA 315 (Revised) to be derived from the implementation of a
computerised system (5)
2. list the different type of control activities (5)
3. list five inherent limitations on internal control. (5)
[15]
Question 4 LEVEL 1
Internal control: Control objectives
[11 marks]
You have recently been employed as the audit manager responsible for resolving technical issues and overseeing
trainee accountants completing their studies part-time through Various University. One of your tasks is to assist the
trainee accountants in preparing for their upcoming examinations.
One of the areas of concern is their understanding of internal control and, more specifically, the control
objectives relating to internal control. You have been tasked with the preparation of a presentation on control
objectives in order to answer the following unrelated questions raised by the trainee accountants.
REQUIRED
1. List and define the generic control objectives that need to be present in all accounting systems. Bearing in mind
that the objectives referred to are those of management, and should not be confused with the assertions that
management implies in the financial statements, answer using this tabular format:
CONTROL OBJECTIVE GENERIC DEFINITION OR MEANING
Notes:
Listing the generic control objectives requires the provision of one word only – the control objective.
In defining the listed items, provide a description of each – the generic description for each of the listed control
objectives.
Whenever (as in this case) you are required to provide an answer in a certain format, use the format throughout
your answer. (9)
2. Explain the first step (one step only) in the design of a system of internal control and the difference between risks
and control objectives. (2)
[11]
1.
CONTROL GENERIC DEFINITION OR MEANING

OBJECTIVE
Validity (1) All transactions and events executed:
are properly authorised in accordance with management policy; (1)
did actually occur during the period; and (1)
are supported by sufficient documentation and evidence. (1)
Completeness (1) All transactions that actually occurred during the period are recorded in a timely manner.
No transactions are omitted. (1) (1)
Accuracy (1) All transactions are:

recorded at the correct amounts (quantity, prices and calculations); (1)
correctly classified in terms of the entity’s chart of accounts; and (1)
correctly summarised and posted to the entity’s accounting records. (1)
2. When designing a system of internal control, the first step is to formulate control objectives (what the entity wants
the system to achieve or ensure) for each class of transaction, or part of the accounting system. (1)
Risks are things that could go wrong. (1)
Control objectives relate to what management wants the system to achieve. (1)
Note: An understanding of the generic meaning of the three control objectives is of utmost importance, as they are
the foundation on which entities, business cycles and the accompanying accounting systems are built.
Question 5 LEVEL 1
Internal control: Components
[10 marks]
REQUIRED
List and describe briefly the five components of internal control according to ISA 315 Revised that should be
present in every entity’s internal control system.
[10]
INTRODUCTION
The questions in this chapter deal with information technology.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 2
Multiple choice questions addressing multiple concepts
[10 marks]
REQUIRED
Answer the following multiple choice questions by selecting the appropriate option:
1. Which of the following statements about the control environment is false?
a) Management’s attitude towards internal control and ethical behaviour has little impact on employee beliefs or
actions.
b) An overly complex or unclear organisational structure could be indicative of more serious problems.
c) A written policy and procedures manual is an important tool for assigning authority and responsibility in many
organisations.
d) Supervision is important in organisations that cannot afford elaborate responsibility reporting, or are too small
to have an adequate segregation of duties. (1)
2. All things being equal,
a) detective controls are superior to preventive controls
2.
b) corrective controls are superior to preventive controls

c) preventive controls are equally as important as detective controls
d) preventive controls are superior to detective controls. (1)
3. In order to achieve an effective segregation of duties, certain functions should be separated. Which of the
following is the correct listing of accounting-related functions that should be separated?
a) Control, recording and monitoring
b) Authorisation, recording and custody
c) Control, custody and authorisation
d) Monitoring, recording and planning (1)
4. Which of the following is a control procedure relating to both the design and the use of documents and records?
a) Locking blank cheques in a drawer
b) Reconciling the bank account
c) Sequentially pre-numbering sales invoices
d) Comparing actual physical quantities to recorded amounts (1)
5. Which of the following is the correct order of action to be taken when one undertakes a risk assessment, in order
to implement an effective system of internal control?
a) Identify threats, estimate risk and exposure, identify controls, estimate costs and benefits.
b) Identify controls, estimate risk and exposure, identify threats, estimate costs and benefits.
c) Estimate risk and exposure, identify controls, identify threats, estimate costs and benefits.
d) Estimate costs and benefits, identify threats, identify controls, estimate risk and exposure. (1)
6. Controls designed to ensure that an organisation’s computer-based control environment is stable and well
managed are called
a) general controls
b) applications controls
c) detective controls
d) preventive controls. (1)
7. All of the following are effective control procedures in order to ensure that operators do not make unauthorised
changes to programs and files except for
a) rotating duties
b) having multiple operators in the computer room during processing
c) requiring formal written authorisation and documentation of any program changes
d) maintaining and reviewing a log/register of all operator activity and interventions. (1)
8. Password effectiveness is enhanced by all of the following, except
a) frequent changes
b) user selection of passwords
c) not displaying the password on the screen
d) automatic disconnection after several unsuccessful attempts. (1)
9. Controls designed to prevent, detect or correct errors in transactions as they flow through the various stages of a
specific data-processing program are referred to as
a) general controls
b) application controls
c) administrative controls
d) data-processing controls. (1)
10. The edit check in order to detect the entry of a customer number that does not exist is called
a) a check digit
b) a limit check
c) a sequence check
d) a validity check. (1)
[10]
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Physical access controls
[18 marks]
You were recently appointed as chief information systems officer (CIO) of Some Nights Ltd (Some Nights),
responsible for the information system controls. Some Nights, a subsidiary of the notorious Black Water Group of
mercenaries, is used to raise money with which to fund the clandestine activities of the Black Water Group in
countries such as Afghanistan and Syria. The company manufactures historic war memorial figurines (the
best-selling ones relate to the American Civil War), and has a modern warfare series. The company’s logo is ‘Listen,
boy; this is war!’
Some Nights operates from its head office just outside Langley in Virginia, USA. The building also houses the
Black Water Group’s offsite back-up facility. Some Nights employees are not aware that a back-up facility is on
their premises; they have simply been informed that they are not allowed into Block B, the research and
development section of the company. Similarly, the company does not allow wireless technology or internet
connections on its premises. The company has a strict ‘no cellphone or tablet’ policy.
Each employee in the computer department has a mini computer connected in real time to the mainframe
computer located in a room at head office. Computers are connected via a local area network. The computer room
contains an applications server, database and a mainframe computer. This network connects with the back-up service
contained in Block B. Users can, by logging on to the network, gain access to various application software
programs, as well as data files stored on the computer hardware located in the computer room. A general procedure
used by Some Nights in order to verify access to the information system is by means of a password linked to a
username. The data administrator is responsible for the maintenance of the computerised information collected
during investigations.
During the year, the company’s head office came under siege when the computer room was attacked by a gang
of five well-armed men. They breached the building with military precision in under 15 minutes. Unbeknown to the
other staff employed by the company, there was also a break-in at Block B. According to the police, another group
of thieves (which is suspected to have included company employees) broke into the building and stole one of the
servers and a few back-up hard drives. On the way out, they exchanged fire with the police.
The company has excellent physical access controls for both blocks A and B, as well as logical access controls to
the computer information system. All these controls were designed by the company in collaboration with an external
computer specialist. You are, therefore, satisfied that they appear sufficient and effective. This was confirmed by
one of the thieves wounded in the gunfight with the police before being arrested. He confessed that, before stealing
the hardware, they had hacked the system and removed and changed some of the information in order to make it
difficult for the Black Water Group to determine which information had been stolen.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the physical access controls (over and above those already mentioned in the scenario) that should have
been implemented in order to prevent the break-in and to ensure that the back-ups stored in Block B of Some
Nights’ premises could be used for authorised purposes only. Your answer must not address logical access
controls. (13)
2. Explain how ‘authorisation matrixes’ could have been used in order to ensure that only valid and authorised
changes could be made to the information on the computer system, which could have prevented the thieves from
removing and changing information stored on the system. (5)
[18]
1.
a) There must be a formal, documented security policy, distributed to all users, that determines that only authorised
staff may have access to and utilise the mainframe computer; and that action will be taken in the event of
unauthorised use or access. This policy should be communicated to all staff members. (2)
1.
The following physical access controls should be in place in Block B and the back-up store: (1)
i) Access to the room must be restricted through keys, magnetic card readers or a security guard with a register.
ii) A security guard must be present at the entrance in order to accompany visitors through the building. (1)
iii) Doors to the venue must always be locked if the computer is not in use as well as when staff leave the (1)
computer room. (1)
iv) Only authorised users may have access to keys for the room and/or should have proper control over the
registration of magnetic cards. (1)
v) Additional security gates must be installed at the entrance to the back-up storeroom. (1)
vi) An alarm with motion sensors must be installed. (1)
vii) The hardware must be locked when it is not in use (e.g. in a server case). (1)
viii) There must be no place for the insertion of such media devices as memory sticks or DVDs. (1)
b) The terminal should be located in a highly visible area where it cannot be hidden, so that unauthorised people
approaching the servers are visible. (1)
c) All staff should have uniforms and identification cards in order to be clearly identifiable when entering
non-public areas, such as the server room. (1)
d) Staff should be allowed to use the computer during operating hours only and have to sign in before entering the
computer room; otherwise, the area must be locked. Alternatively, a daily work schedule must be prepared.
(1)
e) Every computer must have a terminal code. (1)
f) Access outside business hours must be managed by the use of:

i) alarms
ii) security cameras, and/or
iii) security guards who supervise the use of computers, and
iv) previously received consent. (ma 2)
2. An access control matrix (programmed authorisation scheme or CRUD matrix) can contribute in the following
ways in order to ensure that only valid changes to the information in the system are made: (1)
a) By means of a terminal code, only a specific terminal would be permitted access to the program’s module that
makes information changes possible, thereby restricting such changes to a specific terminal; (1)
b) The employment of a log-in system involving user ID authenticated by a password would restrict: (1)
i) the access rights each user has to change information on the system (for example, display and write), and
ii) the possibility that an unauthorised staff member could make changes to the information on any of the (1)
computers, because he/she would then not have the necessary access rights in order to implement such
changes. (1)
c) Changes in accordance with the allocated authorisation level should only be allowed to be made on a
predetermined day of the month. (1)
d) Ad hoc changes should require at least two authorising passwords. (1)
Question 3 LEVEL 3
Access controls
[16 marks]
You were recently appointed as the computer audit specialist at Marki Ltd (Marki). Marki is known for selling
speciality dog food from its store and storeroom located in Canal Walk shopping centre. As part of your first job,
you formulated a strict policy around dismissals and resignations of employees, as well as a security policy. The
policy requires that staff’s access to the store be revoked on date of dismissal or resignation. It also includes other
disciplinary consequences.
In order to obtain a better understanding of how the company operates, you documented the following system
description:
Dog food is displayed in large containers on shelves in the store. Customers can fill 5 kg bags with dog food from
these containers. The 5 kg bags are then taken to a till located at the exit of the store, where a cashier weighs the dog
food. Marki also has a self-help express counter at the back of the store where customers can pay exclusively by
credit card. Customers can use one of four touch screen computers to place orders for pre-priced vacuum-packed 5
kg, 10 kg, 20 kg and 50 kg packets of speciality dog food. Customers can browse through pictures and descriptions
of the available dog food on the touch screen and make selections. The touch screen computers are easy to use and
have visual prompt navigation and a help function, and therefore training is not required. Customers who want to use
the service must first register on the touch screen as presented below:
Email Email serves as username.

address:
Create a Strong passwords contain 7–16 characters. Do not include

password: common words or names. Combine upper and lowercase
letters, numbers and symbols. Do not disclose your
Retype password to anyone.
password:
Alternative
email
address:
Security
question:
Answer to Password changes every three months.

security
question:
First
name:
Last An sms will be sent to your phone confirming your

name: password, with a one-time pin.
Address:
Province: Reconfirmed password must match.
Postal
code:
Telephone
number:
Enter 45dg7$7
characters
you see:
Create Click to go to next page.

account:
As part of the registration process, customers must capture their credit card information (screenshot not provided),
which the system automatically verifies with the bank. Thereafter, customers receive a unique username and can
select their own unique password.
In order to purchase dog food, the customer can click on the relevant product displayed on the screen. The dog
food is added to the customer’s electronic basket. This is updated to the mainframe computer and server via the local
area network. One of three trained shop assistants receives a picking slip printed in the storeroom and brings the
ordered dog food to the customer.
In addition to the shop assistants, a shift manager is always on duty. The shift manager reviews and investigates all
the available logs (including input logs, error reports and access registers) from the touch screen system. These are
reviewed by the shift manager and he investigates and obtains reasons for unusual access. He is specifically
interested in the following:
Activity log that records who logged on, when and for how long
Exception reports of all unsuccessful or failed attempts to use a username
REQUIRED
Identify the access controls you would expect to be in place over the touch screen system as a whole.
[16]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Application controls
[12 marks]
Your firm, Du Toit & Mayane Inc., has been the auditors of JBC Ltd, a company retailing earth-moving equipment,
for the past four years. Salaries are a material expense at JBC Ltd, representing 35% of the total expenses of the
entity. Management has therefore implemented stringent controls in order to prevent any fraud or error in the payroll
system. Currently, the payroll system works as follows:
1. All employees are paid by electronic funds transfer (EFT) via the secure bank software application. Julia Ntembe,
one of the payroll clerks, is solely responsible for the EFTs to employees.
2. Fatima Naidoo, another payroll clerk, reconciles these payments by downloading and printing the company’s
bank statement via the secure bank software application and reconciling this to the payroll register.
3. The financial manager, Tim Lake, oversees the payroll process.
REQUIRED
Describe the application controls that you would expect to find in place in order to prevent and detect unauthorised
access to the company’s secure bank software application as well as the printed bank statements.
[12]
Question 5 77
EBSCOhost - printed on 10/5/2020 9:14 AM via UNIVERSITY OF KWAZULU NATAL. All use subject to https://www.ebsco.com/terms-of-use
Question 5 LEVEL 2
Business continuity
[10 marks]
You were recently appointed internal auditor of 221B Baker Street Ltd (221B Baker Street) founded by Mr Sholmes
and Dr Watsup. The company is fairly new and the first of its kind. Mr Sholmes and Dr Watsup operate a detective
service and mostly perform background and credit checks on individuals. They consider themselves to be
‘consultative detectives’. The company prides itself on being the company that the police call when they cannot
crack a case. Mr Sholmes is the brains of the operation, while Dr Watsup is considered to be the muscle.
Unfortunately, it has been involved in only two cases. Companies who want to make use of 221B Baker Street’s
services can contact them via the company’s website.
221B Baker Street operates from its head office in London. It uses a mini-computer system that is connected in
real time to the mainframe computer located in a separate room. Computers are connected via a local area network.
The computer room contains various servers and a mainframe computer on which all information is stored.
During the year, an attempt was made on Mr Sholmes’ life by Dr James Mortuary, renowned thief and criminal
mastermind. In addition, an arsonist was hired to burn down the company’s head office. The fire was extinguished
by the fire brigade two days later, after which the power supply to the building was restored. This resulted in
significant losses for the company.
REQUIRED
Briefly describe the business continuity controls that 221B Baker Street could have implemented in order to limit the
losses experienced as a result of the fire.
[10]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
System development
[10 marks]
You are an audit manager at Will.I.Am Inc., located in Cape Town, a company appointed as the external auditor of
Agent J & K (Pty) Ltd (Agent J & K) after the previous audit partner passed away unexpectedly.
Agent J & K retails a famous brand of black suits. It also sells black accessories, such as sunglasses and shoes, as
well as white shirts. Agent J & K’s accounting system is fully computerised. It uses a fully integrated system that
consists of various components that perform specialist functions, such as purchases, sales, payroll and so on. These
integrate to maintain one general ledger and produce the financial statements. Although the company has internet
access, Agent J & K does not currently have its own website, although it is considering creating one that will be used
as a marketing tool for services and to promote any special offers.
A couple of years ago, Agent J & K purchased a biometric timesheet recording module that allows employees to
record their working hours on a biometric reader using their thumbs. According to the agreement with the vendor
who developed the module, the vendor must email a software patch to Agent J & K’s IT administrator when bugs
are detected in the software or when the software requires an upgrade. The IT administrator then loads the patch
onto the server and updates the software.
During the course of the year, a couple of virus scanner updates were not uploaded by the vendor, which resulted
in the biometric system being infected by a virus. In the light of other problems experienced during the uploading of
similar patches for some of the company’s other software modules, it was suggested that the company implement the
necessary internal controls in order to address these risks.
A decision was taken to update the company’s IT procedure manual with these controls. The IT administrator
tasked with this responsibility has requested your assistance in formulating the controls. The IT procedure manual
already contains sufficient internal controls relating to appropriate user training, and the complete and timely
uploading of patches.
REQUIRED
Describe the additional controls that should be documented in the IT procedure manual in order to address
appropriately the risks relating to the uploading of software patches.
[10]
Question 7 LEVEL 3
General controls
[16 marks]
You were recently hired as a consultant to I[phone] Ltd (I[Phone]). I[phone] was formed by two entrepreneurs from
Technopark, the silicon valley of South Africa, and retails I-phones and other cellular technologies.
The company records all its transactions in Excel. This was adequate until the company started to grow and expand.
The company has made significant investment in its infrastructure to keep up with the growth and is considering
implementing alternative record-keeping methods. The following two options are being considered:
The company uses a new app from a local bank which prepares a company’s accounting records based on the
company’s bank statements and cash transactions.
The company purchases a new accounting package developed specifically for the South African small- and
medium-enterprise market. The company could purchase this standard package from Pastel Blue™, a software
supplier.
The company is making a significant investment in all its systems. Considering that the company’s accounting
records will be available electronically only, management is worried about the impact of loadshedding on its
business activities and the associated risk of loss of information.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the additional benefits to a company buying and implementing a new accounting package developed
specifically for the South African small- and medium-enterprise market. (9)
2. Describe the additional continuity controls that I[phone] must implement in order to sufficiently protect the
company against the impact of loadshedding on the business. (7)
[16]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
General controls
[11 marks]
Staff Force (Pty) Ltd (Staff Force) is a labour hire entity and connects employers with employees. The entity is the
largest of its kind in South Africa and has an annual turnover exceeding R1 billion. Approximately 250 transactions
flow through the accounting records of the company on a daily basis. The board of directors states compliance with
King IV™ in its annual report, and has therefore focused intensively on eliminating any fraud or error in its financial
statements.
In order to meet the increasing demands of the accounting division of Staff Force, the board of directors is
considering purchasing a new accounting package, Numberz. A sales representative from Numberz highlighted the
following details of the Numberz accounting package:
It is suitable for all entities, excluding manufacturing entities.
It is competitively priced, especially in light of the fact that it can be customised if required by the entity.
Numberz has functionalities to address all accounting needs of entities, from recording of transactions to the
preparation of financial statements.
Accounting personnel may phone the support line 0760 784 1249, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, if any assistance
with Numberz is required. The support is provided free for five years after purchase. This is an attempt from
Numberz to remain the leading accounting package in the country.
Due to the high quality of Numberz, the program needs 40 gigabytes of computer memory per computer, in order
to install and run properly.
The accounting personnel at Staff Force previously worked on a simple accounting package that was much smaller
than the Numberz package.
REQUIRED
Discuss the issues the board of directors should consider before buying the Numberz accounting package.
[11]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
General controls
[19 marks]
You are the computer consultant on the internal audit team of Marry Me, Darling Ltd (Marry Me). The company
operates a wedding-planning business in Stellenbosch. The company was started when the owner, Ms Elza Johnson,
realised that there was a need for sophisticated, low-cost wedding planners. She noted, however, that cost was not
the only driver of market demand: there was also a demand for weddings that could be arranged at short notice.
Therefore, if she expanded her company, she would have to place greater reliance on the company’s information
system. In addition, she realised that the existing mainframe on which her accounting systems operated would not be
sufficient and would require frequent program changes.
In order to react proactively to the growth of the company, Ms Johnson had two options:
1. Develop a new system.
2. Make regular changes to the existing system.
The financial director responsible for determining the computerisation needs of the company implemented the
following process regarding changes to the application software:
STEPS IN THE PROCESS

Requirements Program change requirements must be communicated to the information
systems (IS) manager via email.
The IS manager prepares the needs assessment.
The IS manager engages all affected users.
The IS manager determines the cost relating to the program change. Cost is
the main consideration in approving a request. If the cost is more than R10 000,
approval is needed from the financial director.
Plan The IS manager prepares a project plan incorporating a cost and time budget.
This is prepared based on the PRINCE 2 program change standards.
Standards The approved request for the program changes, together with the needs
assessment, are handed to the programmers. The programmers also have to
rely on the PRINCE 2 program change standards when they make program
changes.
Librarian A librarian supervises and keeps records of the issuing and the coping capacity
controls of programs.
The programmer works on a copy of the relevant program and not the live
system.
Since the programmers require access to all programs and files, they use the
administrative password.
The copy of the relevant program is kept in source code in the development
area of the library.
Testing The IS manager reviews the programmers’ work and monitors the compliance
of the documentation relating to the program change to the PRINCE 2 program
change standards. Once the program change has been completed, both the
programmer and IS manager test the coding and the system logic.
Approval Only the upgraded program version control list and program description are
retained in the library.
After a discussion with the internal auditors, users and IS manager, the
financial director approves the testing results.
Since there is no need to retain the test results, they are thrown away.
Implementation Once approval is obtained, the use of the previous version of the program is
immediately stopped and the program change is implemented.
Training Training is provided to all staff.
REQUIRED
1. Identify the weaknesses in the controls over changes made to the application software. (13)
2. List the most significant risks that should be considered when a new system is developed. (6)
[19]
Question 10 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses in an IT environment
[30 marks]
Da Rock Ltd imports exotic cars from Spain for resale in Johannesburg. As Spanish cars have become a fashion item
and are gaining in popularity, the company has opened several retail outlets across South Africa, its 20th store being
the one that recently opened in Upington.
The company does all its distribution from its head office and storage facility in Rosebank, Johannesburg, where
its IT department is located.
Because of Da Rock’s nationwide expansion, its computer infrastructure has come under pressure. The areas that
have been affected are:
staffing
infrastructure
processing.
Increased pressure in these areas has resulted in errors occurring. Management doubts that the current system
addresses properly all the relevant risks that exist in the computerised information system environment. In order for
it to do so, the company approaches you, as a computer consultant, to provide them with advice. The IT
programming department, which has been placed at your disposal, has capable personnel with sufficient knowledge
and experience in order to develop their own software. Management has stated that, in order to process the
transactions, update records, amend the system and so on, staff should be available to work overtime. It is standard
practice at Da Rock that, if necessary, management approves overtime, as they prefer to reimburse staff for overtime
rather than have them take additional leave. Thus, staff work overtime if and when available, or when requested to
do so by management.
The IT department has the following organisational structure:
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
IT MANAGER: MR T. PITT
Programmers: Data control clerks:
Mr Johnson Ms van Rhyn
Ms Nye Mr Matshoba
Ms Makanga Operating personnel:
Mr Williams Mr Naidoo
Ms Erica
Ms Parker
Systems analysts:
Mr Muhamad
Mr Mpondo
The IT manager is responsible for the department as a whole, and reports to the board of directors. The current
system has been in use for the past 10 years, as a result of which most staff are familiar with the system. Many of
them have been performing the same type of work ever since they started working at Da Rock Ltd.
When a user identifies problems in the system, or requires a new functionality, he/she can contact a programmer
telephonically and request that the error be fixed, or the new functionality be added to the system. In terms of the
service level agreement with the IT department, all requests should be resolved quickly and the necessary changes
made to the software. The agreement also requires that users obtain immediate access to the system. After a period
of four hours of inactivity, the IT department must reimburse the user department for the loss of income. This allows
users to continue with their work on the system without unnecessary delays.
REQUIRED
Identify the weaknesses in internal controls of Da Rock Ltd’s computerised information system, and recommend
internal controls in order to address these weaknesses. Present your answer in tabular form.
[30]
Question 11 LEVEL 2
Governance in an IT environment
[30 marks]
The sustainability of any company, particularly one that is listed, could be threatened by any number of risks. In an
information environment, IT risks are becoming more significant. In terms of the King IV™ report, the board of a
listed company is responsible for responding to these risks in an appropriate manner. It has an overall responsibility
for implementing IT governance, and for formulating an IT-governance framework that cannot be generic and
should be customised to a particular industry or organisation. Responsibility for the implementation of the IT
framework may be delegated to IT management.
REQUIRED
1. Identify what IT management of a listed company should be able to demonstrate with regard to responding to the
risks arising from the information system detailed above. (4)
2. Identify three high-level information security principles that the IT management system should include. (3)
3. Explain why the implementation of these principles is important for the sustainability of a listed private hospital.
4. Explain the responsibility of the board of directors in terms of IT governance, as well as the responsibilities (8)
of the risk and audit committees. (15)
[30]
Question 12 LEVEL 2
Application controls and back-ups
[22 marks]
You are a business consultant employed at Dan-o Ltd. The company, which was set up approximately a year ago,
sells copyrighted pictures at a fixed price to magazine publishers, who can use them in either hard copy or online
publications. Dan-o Ltd owns various licences for pictures ranging from cats and dogs to designer artworks.
You were approached by staff in the IT department to assist with the design of internal controls for a cloud-based
enterprise resource planning system used to manage the company’s sales. They are currently working on the
ordering module of the software. The company prides itself on its state-of-the-art, cloud-based technologies that use
the latest assurance logos, firewalls, encryption and virus protection protocols. The network on which the cloud
service operates is located in the basement of the company’s premises. The network consists of personal computers
linked to a server, which contains the programming of the cloud-based service and an integrated accounting
package.
Cloud-based service
Publishers can install an ordering application (app) from the company’s website onto their system. The app
communicates directly with the company’s network and is then used to process orders and to perform various other
tasks, such as making payments. Publishers can register for the company’s free cloud service app by submitting their
company details, including their name, registration number and delivery address. Publishers must also enter their
banking details onto the app. An account is then created. On registration, the system automatically generates a
username for the publisher; the username consists of the first six letters of the company’s name combined with three
random numbers. The company can choose its own password. The username must be recorded on the app when
orders are placed and electronic payments made.
Publishers can search Dan-o Ltd’s website in order to view the available pictures. They can also view them using
the app. Once a publisher has identified a picture that it would like to use, it can place an order on the app by
selecting the serial number of the picture from a list of available pictures (by means of drop-down boxes, where
applicable). This list is automatically updated on a daily basis as new pictures are loaded. When orders are received,
a member of staff writes the pictures to a DVD and places it in a bubble-wrapped package for distribution. The DVD
is delivered to the publisher by a courier company as soon as the payment of R100 per file has been made
electronically. The system then automatically emails an electronic invoice to the publisher’s accounting department.
This invoice also serves as a pre-numbered receipt.
Virus infection
The system was recently infected with a virus that corrupted a large portion of the information on the server, because
the company had not loaded the latest antivirus patches. The information lost could not be recovered, as effective
back-up procedures had not been put in place. All important information is supposed to be backed up onto a CD at
least once a week, but, during busy times, back-ups are not always made, or are lost, and are sometimes not stored
safely.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the application controls that must be present on the cloud service app in order to ensure that all pictures
ordered by publishers are processed accurately and are valid and complete. You must discuss input, processing
and output controls. (12)
2. Describe the controls that should be implemented relating to back-up procedures and controls in order to prevent
back-up CDs from being lost or falling into the hands of unauthorised persons. (10)
[22]
Question 13 LEVEL 3
Application controls (input controls)
[15 marks]
You are employed as the IT governance specialist at Super Shirts Ltd (Super Shirts). Since your staff is aware that
you are very busy and do not always have time to read everything, they have provided you with the following: a
high-level system description and a detailed description of the system.
High-level system description

Super Shirts operates a self-service kiosk in a large mall in Cape Town. The kiosk has three touch screens on which
customers can order and pay for a men’s shirt. The customers’ selection is based solely on the images on the
touchscreen. The company’s slogan is: ‘Like shopping on the internet, but not. We provide the human touch’. Once
the shirt has been ordered on the touch screen, the kiosk assistant collects the shirt from the storeroom behind the
booth and presents it to the customer. Customers do not have access to the shirts and the kiosk assistants do not
handle cash.
Detailed description of the system

Customers must first register for the service. As part of the registration process, customers must capture their credit
card information, which is automatically verified with the bank. Customers receive a unique username and can select
a unique password.
Customers can use one of three touch screen computers to place orders for men’s shirts depending on their size,
style and measurements. Customers can browse through pictures and descriptions of the available shirts on the touch
screen and make selections. The touch screens are easy to use and have visual prompt navigation and a help
function, and therefore training is not required. In order to purchase a product, customers click on the relevant
product displayed on the screen from the inventory masterfile. The product will be added to customers’ electronic
baskets. After a customer completes a transaction, the system allocates a sequential number to the transaction. This
order number is displayed on the touch screen and a pre-numbered receipt is printed for the customer. The system
automatically creates a picking slip in the storeroom behind the kiosk for each order captured. One of the kiosk
assistants brings the ordered shirt to the customer and confirms the order details and number on the receipt held by
the customer.
A shift manager is always on duty, monitoring the kiosk assistants. The shift manager reviews and investigates
all the available input logs (including error logs related to inputs) from the touch screen system.
REQUIRED
Describe the additional input controls which must be present at Super Shirts in order to ensure the completeness and
accuracy of sales transactions captured into the touch screen.
[15]
Question 14 LEVEL 2
Processing and masterfile controls
[24 marks]
Two years ago, you were appointed chief operating officer at Honolulu 5.0 Ltd (Honolulu 5.0), after you had
resigned from a position as an audit manager in a large auditing firm. Honolulu 5.0 is a chain store group that retails
plastic guns, police badges and other such items to the public. The head office of the company, which has shops on
the various islands of Hawaii, is located on the main island of Hawaii, in Pearl Harbour.
As part of your responsibilities as chief operating officer, you are responsible for the human resources function.
You have been able to centralise the salaries and related processes only partially, because of the distances between
the shops located on the various islands. As a result, the computer information system used by the group consists of
mini-computer systems at the various shops, systems that are linked to the mainframe at head office via a virtual
private network. Each shop is responsible for its own staff appointments and for maintaining hard-copy records.
Head office also keeps hard copies and electronic staff records for the whole company and is responsible for
calculating and paying out the monthly payroll. You are responsible for overseeing this function.
The payroll system includes a payroll masterfile and monthly transaction files. During the month, each shop
manager and the departmental manager at head office forwards to you via email all the relevant documentation –
such as appointments, resignations, dismissals, retirements, changes to existing employee information and
transactional information – relating to staff matters, all of which is captured by one of your employees. Masterfile
changes are immediately recorded on input forms and entered into and processed on the payroll masterfile. Where
possible, payroll information already available on the system is extracted from the masterfile. Information that
requires approval is placed in a computerised suspense file for your approval.
The system has an effective report-writing function. Exception reports will, for example, be printed for any error
identified by the programmed matching and reasonableness tests performed on the input field. All exception reports
generated by the system are reviewed by a manager on a monthly basis, and any unusual items investigated.
Reports regarding access violations are also checked. Various other reports, too, are generated, reviewed and
investigated. During last month’s review, you were distressed by the errors highlighted in one of the reports relating
to salaries and wages.
Processing errors occurred during the monthly payroll production run, when the payroll masterfile was updated
with the transaction files. The controls to detect omissions by the calculation of various control totals, among other
things, are sufficient, but the internal controls to detect other types of errors are not.
Unauthorised staff obtained access to payroll information.
You decide to look into the matter further in order to identify the related risks. You would also like to make
recommendations with regard to addressing the identified problems. To this end, a business consultant has been
appointed to investigate any unauthorised activities.
REQUIRED
1. List the risks arising when attention is not given to the errors that occur during the updating process of the payroll
masterfile. (7)
2. Recommend internal controls in order to detect weaknesses caused by process errors occurring during the
updating of the payroll masterfile. (5)
3. Describe the additional logical internal controls that should be implemented in order to prevent the unauthorised
3.
use of the payroll masterfile. (12)
Note: In all cases, ignore risks, controls and weaknesses relating to the virtual private network.
[24]
Question 15 LEVEL 2
Controls regarding changes to masterfile data
[18 marks]
You are the auditor of Jacobs Ltd, a coffee shop in a well-known Cape Town mall. Jacobs Ltd sells brews made
from both locally sourced and imported beans. It also delivers take-away coffee in special heated containers. A
couple of months ago, the business implemented a computer system in order to manage orders, suppliers, prices and
take-away delivery drivers. The program integrates with a point-of-sale module linked to an electronic cash register.
Clients can order coffee either telephonically or over the counter. Deliveries are made by casual staff. The menu
with prices is displayed above the cash register and is also available on the internet. Both the menus and the prices
are revised every two months by the shop manager.
Most business is conducted by means of cash or credit card payments. However, over the past couple of months,
the shop has opened corporate accounts on credit to some local businesses, whose details are recorded on the
masterfile of the computer system before they are allowed to purchase on credit.
Before specific stock levels of coffee run too low, the computer system generates a suggested order, and
identifies the most appropriate supplier, the quantity of coffee required and the appropriate price. This information is
extracted from the supplier and the product masterfile. The system relies on a complicated, but accurate, economic
order-quantity program.
REQUIRED
Describe the controls that should be present within the computer system relating to changes to the supplier and
product masterfile information.
[18]
Question 16 LEVEL 3
Application controls (masterfile)
[22 marks]
Lemon Tree Ltd (Lemon Tree) was founded by P.G. Marais and Martinette Marais in Moorreesburg. The business
was started after their dog Marki developed a habit of digging holes in their garden, which P.G. filled by planting
lemon trees.
Over the past few years, the business has grown so much that they now own a small shop in the main street of
the town. Lemon Tree uses the lemons to make creams, preserves and jams.
The purchases cycle operates as follows:

In order to ensure that their stock is fresh, Lemon Tree relies on a computer accounting package which is linked
electronically to all its suppliers.
At the end of every week, the storeroom assistant extracts a report of all varieties of lemons (i.e. stock items) that
have reached their minimum stock levels.
The chief storeroom assistant uses the stock codes from these reports to enter orders into the accounting package
to be sent to the approved suppliers.
Management reviews the approved list of suppliers quarterly.
The chief storeroom assistant selects the most appropriate approved suppliers’ codes from a drop-down box when
he inputs the order.
After the order has been electronically approved and released by the chief storeroom assistant, it is automatically
sent to the relevant supplier electronically.
A schedule of amounts payable to creditors is prepared on Excel. The schedule indicates each creditor’s supplier
code, name and the amount payable.
Creditors are paid by making use of an independent internet banking service.
Creditors must have been loaded as beneficiaries on the company’s internet banking service facility before
payment can be made.
Monthly bank reconciliations are prepared and properly reviewed.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the additional controls which must be in place at Lemon Tree in order to ensure that only valid
amendments are made to the inventory masterfile. (10)
2. Describe the additional controls which must be in operation over the internet banking service at Lemon Tree in
order to ensure that only valid payments are made to creditors.
Note: You are not required to discuss the process for the creation of and any changes to beneficiaries. (12)
[22]
INTRODUCTION
The following types of application questions can typically be asked on the business cycles:
Describe weaknesses in the control system and recommend improvements by describing the required internal
controls. This type of question can also be combined with control objectives and/or account or assertions affected.
Identify and describe risks in the cycle. This type of question can also be combined with control objectives and/or
account or assertions affected.
Design a system of internal controls, both manual and computerised, that will achieve the cycle’s control
objectives.
Weaknesses in the cycle will always be the starting point for all of the above types of questions. Risks are
consequences of identified weaknesses and could affect business operations and financial statements (business
risks), or only the financial statements (risks of material misstatement at the assertion level). By answering the
example questions, you will be guided through weaknesses (example question 1) to the risks, the control objectives
not being achieved and the account or assertions affected (example question 2).
EXAMPLE QUESTION 1
Internal control weaknesses

[8 marks]
As a trainee accountant at A2Z Inc., a registered audit firm, you were appointed to the audit of Blitz Ltd (Blitz), a
wholesale company that sells electrical goods, such as kettles, toasters, stoves, television sets and MP3 players. All
sales to customers are made on credit and Blitz is responsible for delivering the goods to its customers.
One of the other trainee accountants has already dealt with the following parts of the revenue and receipts cycle:
Credit management
Receipt of orders from customers
Authorisation of sales orders
Picking of goods from the warehouse
Receipt of cash from customers
Recording of receipts in the accounting records
Processing and recording of returns and other sales adjustments
The audit senior has requested that you assist with the remaining parts of the cycle and provided you with the
following abstract of the company’s revenue and receipts cycle description:
Dispatch and delivery of goods to customers

Upon receipt of the picking slip and the packed goods from the warehouse, the dispatch clerk compares the contents
of the goods to be delivered with the picking slip, whereupon he/she signs the slip as evidence of having received all
goods from the warehouse. He/she then prepares a sequentially numbered, multi-copied delivery note for the goods
to be delivered. After the goods have been loaded onto the delivery vehicle, the driver proceeds to the exit gate,
where security guards perform a check on the number of boxes in the truck, following which the goods are delivered
to the customer. Upon their delivery, the customer is requested to sign all three copies of the delivery note as
acknowledgement of receipt of the goods. The first copy is retained by the customer; the second is returned to the
warehouse, where the status of the delivery is updated to ‘delivered’ (this enables the sales order staff to follow up
on long-outstanding orders), and the third copy is submitted directly to the invoicing clerk for the purpose of
invoicing the customer.
Invoicing
Upon receipt of a customer-signed delivery note from the driver, the invoicing clerk files it sequentially in a
‘pending invoice file’. First thing every morning, he/she takes the delivery notes from this file and prepares
sequentially numbered invoices for each of them. The invoices are cross-referenced and attached to the original
internal sales order and delivery note.
Recording of sale in the accounting records

Posting the sales transactions to the sales journal takes place once the invoicing clerk has generated the invoices.
After preparing them from the delivery notes as described above, he/she records them in the sales journal. He/she
also posts the transactions to the debtors ledger and the general ledger.
Towards the end of each month, the bookkeeper: accounts receivable performs a debtors reconciliation between the
grand total of outstanding debtors balances in the debtor’s ledger (computerised debtor’s listing) and the balance of
the trade debtors control account in the general ledger. Any reconciling items are followed up and resolved. After
the invoicing clerk has successfully performed the debtors reconciliations, he/she generates debtors statements for
each debtor, showing:
the outstanding balance (if any) of the debtor brought forward
all transactions with the debtor over the past month (including invoices, receipts and adjustments)
the outstanding balance, with ageing of the balance, payable by the debtor at statement date.
He/she then emails each debtor statement to the applicable debtor.
REQUIRED
Describe the weaknesses in the above system.
[8]
GUIDANCE
Describe the internal control weaknesses1 in the above system description. [8]2

In order to answer application questions, you need to know the theory relevant to the cycle. You need to:
understand the nature and the purpose of the cycle
identify the major general ledger accounts affected by the cycle
understand the accounting treatment required for the recording of revenue
identify the cycle’s functional areas
identify the documents and records, both manual and computerised, utilised in the cycle, and describe the purpose
of each
understand the flow of transactions in the cycle through the information system, including its relation to source
documents and accounting records and its relation to classes of transactions and events, and balances
understand how internal controls may assist in achieving the control objectives in the cycle, and how these control
objectives relate to the management assertions in the financial statements.
Thus, you need to know what the ideal revenue and receipts cycle should look like (your framework), and you will
have to measure the system provided in the question against that framework. Internal controls applied incorrectly, as
well as internal controls not mentioned in the question, are weaknesses.
Read the question

wholesale company that sells electrical goods, such as kettles, toasters, stoves, television sets, and MP3 players.3 All
sales to customers are made on credit4 and Blitz is responsible for delivering the goods to its customers.5
One of the other trainee accountants has already dealt with the following parts of the revenue and receipt cycle:
Credit management
Processing and the recording of returns and other sales adjustments6
The audit senior has requested that you assist with the remaining parts7 of the cycle, and provided you with the
Dispatch and delivery of goods to customers8

of the goods to be delivered with the picking slip,9 whereupon he/she signs the slip as evidence of having received
all goods from the warehouse. He/she then prepares a sequentially numbered, multi-copied delivery note for the
goods to be delivered.10 After the goods have been loaded onto the delivery vehicle, the driver proceeds to the exit
gate, where security guards perform a check on the number of boxes in the truck,11 following which the goods are
delivered to the customer. Upon their delivery, the customer is requested to sign all three copies of the delivery note
as acknowledgement of receipt of the goods.12 The first copy is retained by the customer; the second copy is returned
to the warehouse, where the status of the delivery is updated to ‘delivered’ (this enables the sales order staff to
follow up on long-outstanding orders), and the third copy is submitted directly to the invoicing clerk for the purpose
of invoicing the customer.
Invoicing13
Upon receipt of a customer-signed delivery note from the delivery truck driver, the invoicing clerk files it
sequentially in a ‘pending invoice file’.14 First thing every morning, he/she takes the delivery notes from this file and
prepares sequentially numbered invoices15 for each of them. The invoices are cross-referenced and attached to the
original internal sales order and delivery note.16
Recording of sale in the accounting records17

The posting of sales transactions to the sales journal takes place once the invoicing clerk has generated the invoices.
Towards the end of each month, the bookkeeper: accounts receivable performs a debtors reconciliation18 between the
grand total of outstanding debtors balances in the debtors ledger (computerised debtors listing) and the balance of
the trade debtors control account in the general ledger. Any reconciling items are followed up and resolved. After
He/she then emails each debtor statement to the applicable debtor.19
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
Remember: a weakness is a control that is incorrectly performed or not performed at all. Therefore, it will always be
phrased as not being there with nobody performing it or as being performed incorrectly. In this scenario, the
following controls are missing:
Security guards do not perform spot checks on the contents of the truck by agreeing the goods on the delivery
truck back to the delivery note. (1)
A senior personnel member does not ensure that invoices have been prepared for all returned delivery notes. (1)
A senior personnel member does not ensure that the date on the invoices corresponds with the financial period in
which the deliveries were made (as per the date on the delivery notes). (1)
Missing delivery notes (gaps in sequence) are not identified and followed up with the dispatch area by a senior
personnel member as to why the delivery has not yet taken place. (1)
A senior personnel member does not compare (review) the quantities and prices on the prepared invoices to the
delivery notes and quoted prices respectively. (1)
A second clerk or senior personnel member does not recalculate the costs and calculations on the invoices. (1)
A second clerk or senior personnel member does not check the recorded invoices in the sales journal by agreeing
the entries to supporting invoices. (1)
A second clerk or senior personnel member does not agree the invoice amounts being posted from the invoices to
the sales journal and the debtors ledger. (1)
A second clerk or senior personnel member does not inspect the numerical sequence of the entries being posted
from the invoices to the sales journal and the debtors ledger. (1)
The debtors reconciliation is not reviewed by a senior personnel member before monthly statements are prepared
for mailing to debtors. (1)
EXAMPLE QUESTION 2
Internal control weaknesses, risks, control objectives and assertions

[32 marks]
wholesale company that sells electrical goods, such as kettles, toasters, stoves, television sets and MP3 players. All
sales to customers are made on credit and Blitz is responsible for delivering the goods to its customers.
One of the other trainee accountants has already dealt with the following parts of the revenue and receipts cycle:
Credit management
Processing and recording of returns and other sales adjustments
The audit senior has requested that you assist with the remaining parts of the cycle, and provided you with the

of the goods to be delivered with the picking slip, whereupon he/she signs the slip as evidence of having received all
goods from the warehouse. He/she then prepares a sequentially numbered, multi-copied delivery note for the goods
to be delivered. After the goods have been loaded onto the delivery vehicle, the driver proceeds to the exit gate,
where security guards perform a check on the number of boxes in the truck, following which the goods are delivered
to the customer. Upon their delivery, the customer is requested to sign all three copies of the delivery note as
acknowledgement of receipt of the goods. The first copy is retained by the customer; the second is returned to the
warehouse, where the status of the delivery is updated to ‘delivered’ (this enables the sales order staff to follow up
on long-outstanding orders), and the third copy is submitted directly to the invoicing clerk for the purpose of
invoicing the customer.
Invoicing
Upon receipt of a customer-signed delivery note from the driver, the invoicing clerk files it sequentially in a
‘pending invoice file’. First thing every morning, he/she takes the delivery notes from this file and prepares
sequentially numbered invoices for each of them. The invoices are cross-referenced and attached to the original
internal sales order and delivery note.
Recording of sale in the accounting records

Posting the sales transactions to the sales journal takes place once the invoicing clerk has generated the invoices.
Towards the end of each month, the bookkeeper: accounts receivable performs a ‘debtors reconciliation’ between
the grand total of outstanding debtors balances in the debtor’s ledger (computerised debtor’s listing) and the balance
of the trade debtors control account in the general ledger. Any reconciling items are followed up and resolved. After
He/she then emails each debtor statement to the applicable debtor.
REQUIRED
Describe the internal control weaknesses. For each of the identified weaknesses, describe the associated risk as well
as the control objective not being achieved and the revenue assertion affected in the above system description of the
revenue cycle of Blitz.
[32]
GUIDANCE

Describe the internal control weaknesses.20 For each of the identified weaknesses,21 describe the associated risk,22 as
well as the control objective not being achieved23 and the revenue assertion affected24 in the above system
description of the revenue cycle of Blitz.[32]25
Identify the theory applicable to the question26

In order to be able to answer application questions, you need to know the theory relevant to the cycle. You need to:
understand the nature and the purpose of the cycle
identify the major general ledger accounts affected by the cycle
understand the accounting treatment required for the recording of revenue
identify the cycle’s functional areas
identify the documents and records, both manual and computerised, utilised in the cycle, and describe the purpose
of each
understand the flow of transactions in the cycle through the information system, including its relation to source
documents and accounting records, as well as its relation to classes of transactions and events, and balances
understand how internal controls may assist in achieving the control objectives in the cycle, and how these control
objectives27 relate to the management assertions28 in the financial statements.
Thus, you need to know what the ideal revenue and receipts cycle should look like (your framework) and you will
have to measure the system provided in the question against this framework. Internal controls applied incorrectly, as
well as internal controls not mentioned in the question, are weaknesses. You must now also write down what the
consequences of the weaknesses (the risks) will be.
Read the question

Refer to example question 1.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
Always remember to make it as easy as possible for the marker to understand what you have done and thus allocate
marks. One of the best ways of presenting a weakness29 and its associated risk,30 control objective and assertion
question is by presenting it in tabular form. Remember that the control objective needs to relate to one of the three
listed above and the assertion to one of the five revenue assertions listed above.
WEAKNESS RISK CONTROL ASSERTION

OBJECTIVE AFFECTED
NOT
ACHIEVED
The security guard does not The goods leaving the Completeness: None:
perform spot checks on the premises might not all all goods picked completeness
contents of the truck by agreeing have been recorded on by the storemen assertion is only
the goods on the delivery truck delivery notes, leaving are recorded on affected once the
back to the delivery note. (1) insufficient records of the a delivery note. customer has
sales that have taken (1) accepted the
place. (1) delivered goods.
(1)
A senior personnel member does The goods leaving the Completeness: Completeness of
not ensure that invoices have premises might not all all goods revenue (1)
been prepared for all delivery have been invoiced, delivered have
notes returned from customers. leaving insufficient records been invoiced.
(1) of the sales that have (1)
taken place. (1)
A senior personnel member does Deliveries might not be Validity: sales Cut-off of revenue
not ensure that the date on the invoiced timeously, are recorded in (1)
invoices corresponds with the resulting in sales possibly the period to
financial period in which the being recorded in an which the
deliveries were made (as per the incorrect accounting transaction
date on the delivery notes). (1) period. (1) relates. (1)
Missing delivery notes (gaps in The goods leaving the Completeness: Completeness of
sequence) are not identified and premises might not all all goods revenue (1)
followed up with the dispatch have been invoiced, delivered have
area by a senior personnel leaving insufficient records been invoiced.
member as to why delivery has of the sales that have (1)
not yet taken place. (1) taken place. (1)
A senior personnel member does Invoices might be Accuracy: all Accuracy of
not compare (review) the prepared on incorrect invoices are revenue (1)
quantities and prices on the quantities and/or prices, prepared with
prepared invoices to the delivery which will lead to the accurate
notes and quoted prices under- or overcharging of quantities and
respectively. (1) customers. (1) prices. (1)
A second clerk or senior The costs and the Accuracy: all Accuracy of
personnel member does not calculations on the invoices are revenue (1)
recalculate the costs and the invoices might be prepared with
calculations on the invoices. (1) inaccurate, which will lead accurate
to the under- or quantities and
overcharging of prices. (1)
customers. (1)
A second clerk or senior Postings to the sales Validity: only Occurrence of
personnel member does not journal may be invalid, valid sales are revenue (1)
check the recorded invoices in leading to the posted from the
the sales journal by agreeing the overstatement of sales. invoices to the
entries to supporting invoices. (1) sales journal.
(1) (1)
A second clerk or senior Postings to the sales Accuracy: sales Accuracy of
personnel member does not journal may be inaccurate, are correctly revenue (1)
agree the invoice amounts being leading to the under- or posted from the
posted from the invoices to the overstatement of sales. invoice to the
sales journal and the debtors (1) sales journal and
ledger. (1) the debtors
ledger. (1)
A second clerk or senior Postings to the sales Completeness: Completeness of
personnel member does not journal may be all sales are revenue (1)
inspect the numerical sequence incomplete, leading to the posted from the
of the entries being posted from understatement of sales. invoice to the
the invoices to the sales journal (1) sales journal and
and the debtors ledger. (1) the debtors
ledger. (1)
The debtors reconciliation is not Postings to the debtors Validity: only Occurrence of
reviewed by a senior personnel ledger and control account valid sales are revenue OR
member before monthly in the general ledger may posted from the Accuracy of
statements are prepared for be incomplete, inaccurate invoices to the revenue
mailing to debtors. (1) or invalid. (1) sales journal. OR
OR Completeness of
Accuracy: sales revenue (1)
are correctly
posted from the
invoice to the
sales journal and
the debtors
ledger.
OR
Completeness:
all sales are
posted from the
invoice to the
sales journal and
the debtors
ledger. (1)
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 2
Control objectives
[8 marks]
Coffee Bean Ltd (Coffee Bean) is the first roaster of certified fair trade coffee and strives to make a sustainable
difference in the lives of African coffee producers by personally sourcing quality coffee through direct fair trade.
Coffee Bean is a wholesaler of coffee beans and sells on credit to coffee shops. The following internal controls were
implemented by Coffee Bean in the revenue and receipts cycle:
1. When a new customer wants to purchase coffee beans on credit, the customer needs to complete a credit
application form with trade references. The credit controller performs a background check and confirms the credit
status. The credit controller then sets a credit limit for the customer.
2. Sales orders are placed telephonically. The order clerk only accepts orders from customers who are able to
provide an account number and who are on the approved customer list. The order clerk asks the customer to
confirm certain pertinent details (such as ID number and address).
3. The sales orders are then sent to the warehouse. The warehouse prepares pre-printed and pre-numbered picking
slips and cross-references these to the sales order.
4.
4. The dispatch clerk completes a pre-numbered and pre-printed delivery note for all the coffee beans dispatched.
The driver checks coffee beans against the delivery note and signs the delivery note if it agrees.
5. The customer receives two copies of the delivery note and signs one as proof of acceptance of the coffee beans.
6. The customer-signed delivery note is handed to the invoicing clerk. The invoicing clerk prepares a pre-numbered,
pre-printed invoice for each delivery note received.
7. Prices and quantities are included on the invoice with reference to the sales order, delivery note and approved
price lists. The second invoicing clerk checks the prices and calculations on the invoice and signs if satisfied.
8. The bookkeeping clerk posts the invoices to the sales journal. A second bookkeeping clerk checks the recorded
invoices in the sales journal by agreeing the entries to the supporting invoices.
9. The second bookkeeping clerk also checks the amounts of the invoices posted and checks the numerical sequence
of the invoices posted.
REQUIRED
Formulate the control objective(s) for each of the internal controls listed above in the revenue and receipts cycle of
Coffee Bean.
[8]
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Functional areas and control objectives
[18 marks]
Business cycles are divided into ‘functional areas’, each of which represents a phase in the cycle through which
transactions flow. In order to ensure the achievement of an entity’s control objectives (the validity, the accuracy and
the completeness of financial information), internal controls are implemented in each functional area.
The functional areas in the revenue and receipts cycle for Homestyles (Pty) Ltd (Homestyles), a wholesale company
selling home appliances and furniture to its retail customers on credit, are:
a) managing of credit
b) receipt of orders from customers
c) authorisation of sales
d) picking of goods from the warehouse
e) dispatch and delivery of goods to customers
f) invoicing and recording of sales
g) posting of sales to the accounting records
h) receipt of cash from customers
i) recording and posting of receipts in the accounting records
j) granting of credit on sales returns and the provision of discounts to customers.
Consider the following control activities that have taken place in Homestyles’s revenue and receipts cycle:
1. The driver of the company’s delivery truck requested that a customer sign a copy of the delivery note indicating
the quantities and descriptions of goods delivered to the customer.
2. The computer system prevented the sales clerk from processing a sales order received from a customer, because
the customer would have exceeded his credit limit.
3. A sign on the cashier’s counter requests that customers insist on a printed receipt when settling their account with
cash.
4. The debtors clerk prepared a debtors reconciliation, agreeing the total of the debtors ledger with the balance of the
4.
debtors control account in the general ledger.

5. The sales manager approved a credit note requested by a customer who returned faulty goods to the company.
6. The cashbook clerk prepared a monthly bank reconciliation, comparing the cashbook total with the bank balance
as per the bank statement.
7. The credit controller assigned a limit to a new customer’s credit account.
8. A shipment of goods leaving the warehouse was recorded on a delivery note by the storeman, which in turn was
provided to the dispatch clerk who performed a check in order to ensure that all goods dispatched had indeed been
recorded on the delivery note.
9. The computer system requested the invoicing clerk in the accounting department to key in an internal sales order
number before the computer allowed her to generate an invoice.
10. The sales clerk requested an account number from a customer who wanted to place an order for goods over the
telephone, before proceeding with the order.
REQUIRED
For each of the 10 control activities referred to in the above scenario, identify the functional area in which the
control activity would typically take place and state the control objective(s) achieved by each.
[18]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Assertions
[9 marks]
You are an accountant in public practice, specialising in the provision of accounting and business consulting services
to start-up companies. A new client of yours, Woodworks (Pty) Ltd (Woodworks), has recently completed the
statutory registration of the company in anticipation of its future manufacturing activities. Its chief executive officer,
Patrick Japhta, has requested your advice on the financial reporting risks the company may face in terms of its
recorded sales transactions.
REQUIRED
List and explain the assertions applicable to the revenue figure in the financial statements of Woodworks. Categorise
the assertions in terms of ‘overstatement of revenue’ and ‘understatement of revenue’. Ignore misstatement risks
pertaining to sales returns, and the presentation and disclosure assertions.
[9]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Purpose of controls, control objectives and assertions
[23 marks]
Wooltons (Pty) Ltd (Wooltons) is a producer of wool yarn. The company, which buys wool in large quantities from
sheep farmers, produces the yarn before selling it in bulk to clothing manufacturers and haberdashers. Woolton
makes deliveries to customers using its own staff and delivery vehicles.
Before the start of the financial year subject to the current audit, Wooltons implemented several new, improved
internal controls in its revenue and receipts cycle:
INTERNAL CONTROL
1. Wooltons has contracted the services of a credit bureau that runs background checks on the credit status of
potential customers wishing to open an account with Wooltons. Based on the results of the checks, the bureau
might suggest a credit limit for a particular customer.
2. On a monthly basis, referring to a list of debtors identified as being at risk of defaulting on their outstanding
debts, the financial manager carefully determines whether long-outstanding debtor balances (or part of a
balance) should be included in the allowance for credit losses.
3. The accounting application on Woolton’s computer system does not allow the sales clerk to process a sale to a
customer’s account if the account has been flagged by the financial manager (by means of the accounting
software application) as at risk of default.
4. Woolton’s senior bookkeeper reviews the file of delivery notes issued to customers upon delivery in order to
ensure that the sequence of delivery notes is intact and that for each delivery note a corresponding invoice has
been generated on the computerised accounting application.
5. The accounting software application automatically calculates item prices and invoice amounts when customer
invoices are generated on the computer by the accounts receivable clerk. This is achieved by referring to the
product code entered and the price stored in the price list masterfile (that is, the clerk does not have to enter
product prices manually).
6. The sales manager is required to authorise all sales returns by referring to a goods returned voucher and a copy
of the invoice on which the details of the returned goods appear.
REQUIRED
Describe the purpose of each internal control listed above. In addition, for each control:
explain the control objective(s) that management attempts to achieve
state the assertion and the account affected by the control.
Present your answer in tabular format.

[23]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses
[13 marks]
You have recently been appointed as the manager of Queen Fridge Cakes (Pty) Ltd, a cake company that specialises
in extended-freshness fridge cakes, which can be stored in fridges for up to six months. You have prepared the
following notes to describe extracts of the company’s system of sales:
Orders
The order clerk receives orders via the telephone from customers. The order clerk records telephone orders on sticky
notes which are colour coded. The order clerk only accepts orders from customers who are able to provide an
account number and who are on the authorised customer list. If a customer is not on the customer list, the customer
is referred to the credit controller to commence the credit application process. You can assume that the credit control
department has efficient internal controls in place. As Queen Fridge Cakes (Pty) Ltd has a free delivery policy, most
orders will be for cakes being delivered to existing customers. The order clerk will therefore always confirm the
delivery address from the customer, confirm the price according to the authorised price list and only then sign the
sticky notes as approval of the final order. The orders are always written down on two different sticky notes: the
green sticky note is filed in the order department and the pink sticky note is sent to the warehouse department.
Warehouse and dispatch

The picker in the warehouse uses the pink sticky note to draw up a picking slip. All the cakes are then picked from
the fridges as recorded on the picking slip, checked by the picker for expiry dates and signed off on the picking slip.
If the storeman cannot find some of the cakes, he/she highlights it on the picking slips. Once the picking is done, the
picker will sign the picking slip to acknowledge the procedures performed. The cakes, together with the picking slip,
are then carried to the dispatch bay that is connected to the warehouse area. The dispatch clerk will then sign the
picking slip as proof of having taken custody of the cakes that were picked and create numerically sequenced,
two-part delivery notes for all cakes being dispatched. The driver and the gate security guard have to observe that
the specified cakes are loaded onto the delivery truck. The driver will compare the cakes loaded onto the truck with
the delivery notes. After the gate security guard has supervised the loading of the truck, he will quickly proceed to
open the gate for the delivery truck to exit the premises. The driver will provide the customer with the delivery note
and cakes upon delivery. If the customer is satisfied with the delivery, he/she will normally tip the driver as a token
of appreciation.
REQUIRED
1. Briefly describe the weaknesses in the ‘orders’ function, which forms part of the sales system of Queen Fridge
Cakes (Pty) Ltd. Limit your answer to manual controls. (5)
2. Briefly describe the weaknesses in the ‘warehouse and dispatch’ function, which forms part of the sales system of
Queen Fridge Cakes (Pty) Ltd. Limit your answer to manual controls. (8)
[13]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Risks
[25 marks]
An entity may have business risks relevant to the various transactions in the business cycles or processes.
Management is responsible for the risk management of the company and should implement internal control in order
to reduce these risks. They may appoint internal auditors to perform the risk management process internally.
Each risk may have a consequence for, or impact on, the financial statements and/or operations of the business.
The auditor is concerned with the risks that might impact directly on the company’s financial statements and
indirectly on the company’s business processes and operations.
The following information is relevant to the company for which you have to supervise the trainee accountants
performing the auditing of the sales cycle:
Type of company: Manufacturer and retailer with high volumes and low gross profit margins
Gross turnover: R532 936 000
Cash sales: R137 946 258
Credit sales: R394 989 742
Number of outlets or branches: 152
Gross profit percentage: 12.5%
The company operates on a manual system and batches are sent to head office for processing onto the computerised
system.
In terms of the system:
orders are placed telephonically, whereupon an email is sent to the production line for them to produce the
products
the products are sent either to the retail outlet or directly to the customer, who signs the invoice as proof of
delivery, either paying COD or taking the products on credit
the credit controller follows up the outstanding amounts after only 60 days
the company does not reconcile the invoices issued to the dispatches completed.
Owing to the large volumes of sales transactions, the audit partner has instructed the auditor to identify the risks and
list the consequences next to each risk, in tabular form.
REQUIRED
Identify and discuss the risks, relevant to the information given above, that could occur in the sales cycle and list the
consequence(s) next to each risk in tabular form.
[25]
Question 7 LEVEL 2
Risks
[15 marks]
You are the internal auditor of Fruity Juice (Pty) Ltd (Fruity Juice), a company that manufactures a wide range of
fruit juices from its factory located in Elgin. The company has a December year-end. The following is an extract of
information that you have obtained from the sales and marketing director of the company:
Extract: Revenue and receipts cycle – credit sales
Up until April of the current year, all sales were conducted on a cash basis only. The directors approved
a resolution at the March board meeting to start selling products to customers on credit from April. The
decision was made because the company was losing customers to competitors who sold similar
products on credit.
Customers are required to submit the following documents to a sales representative of the company via
email or post in order to qualify to purchase goods on credit:
A completed application form
A certified copy of their identity document
A utility bill indicating where they reside
An income and expenditure estimation to determine how much credit the individual should be granted
The sales representative is required to review the documentation submitted and grant the customer a
credit limit. The customer receives a notification of their credit limit via an email and an official letter
from the company. Credit limits that are granted to customers are capped at a maximum of R100 000.
Customers wishing to have their credit limits increased at a later date are required to submit a written
request for the increase to the credit manager who reviews the request and, if he is satisfied, increases
the limit on the system. He uses his unique user ID and password to gain access to the debtor’s
masterfile to initiate the increase. If the credit manager is away from the office, he leaves his unique
user ID and password with one of the members of his credit team who is permitted to use the log-in
details in order to amend a client’s credit limit by a maximum of R10 000 after reviewing the written
request.
Credit orders
Customers are only able to place orders over the telephone. When an order is received, customers are
asked to provide their company’s customer number. If unable to do this, they are asked to provide their
company’s name and address in order to identify that they are an existing customer. The order is
captured on an internal sales order on the sales system by a sales representative. A notification is sent
through to the warehouse manager, the dispatch manager and the creditors clerk responsible for
handling the customer’s account, informing them that there is a new order. The warehouse manager
prints the internal sales order form and hands it to the head picker who is responsible for collecting the
bottles of juice to fill the order. Once the bottles of juice have been prepared, the goods are moved to
the dispatch department where the bottles are stored until the juice is loaded onto the truck and
delivered to the customer. The dispatch manager prepares a delivery note based on the internal sales
and hands it to the driver of the delivery truck. At delivery, the driver of the delivery truck hands a
duplicate copy of the delivery note to the customer. The customer is given one copy of the delivery note
and the driver retains one copy. The driver and the client both sign the delivery to indicate that the
driver was at the client’s premises.
Recording of the sale
Once the driver returns to the premises, he gives the delivery note to the creditors clerk, who prepares
the invoice and recognises the sales and corresponding debtor in the accounting records by using the
information located on the internal sales order document. The detail located on the delivery note is not
reviewed but is simply used to identify that the driver delivered the juice to the client.
Collection of payment from customers
Customers are able to settle their outstanding amounts by making an electronic funds transfer and
using their customer number as their reference. Customers who prefer paying by cash or cheque are
able to deposit the money into the company’s bank account and use their customer number as their
reference. The bank details are provided to the customer by the creditors clerk over the telephone.
Credit allowances at year-end
The amount recognised as an allowance for credit losses for the company at year-end was 5% of the
amount due to the company. While the assumption that 5% of the debtors will not be able to repay the
company may not be entirely accurate, the company does not have enough historic data of credit sales
to make a more realistic allowance.
The company grants customers 30 days to settle their outstanding balances. If clients fail to do so, the
company contacts them to determine the reason they have not settled their outstanding balances. If
clients are unable to make their payment, the company starts charging late payment penalties and
interest on the amount outstanding. If customers have not settled their account within 90 days, the
company recognises 5% of the balance receivable as an allowance for credit losses and contacts a
debt collecting agency to assist in the recovery of the amount due to the company.
REQUIRED
Describe the business risks affecting the revenue and receipts cycle at Fruity Juice (Pty) Ltd.
[15]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses and recommendations
[32 marks]
You are the auditor of Family Mag (Pty) Ltd, a company that publishes a monthly magazine aimed at families in
South Africa. The following has been brought to your attention about the revenue received by the company in lieu of
advertisements:
New advertisers
A prospective customer contacts the company’s corporate office and indicates that he/she would like an
advertisement to be published in the company’s magazine. The prospective customer is then transferred to the
marketing department. An employee in the marketing department obtains more details about the advertisement and
then emails the prospective customer an application form that needs to be returned in order to register as a customer
of the company.
In addition to the application, the email also includes:

a request for the copy of the advertisement
a request that the customer select a username which will be used to identify his/her payments
the costs involved to publish the advertisement (mini ads run up to as much as R4 000 and full ads up to R16 000)
the details of the company’s bank account, into which the customer is required to make a payment.
Once the application has been emailed back to the marketing employee, he/she prints the application form and
submits it to the marketing manager for approval. The marketing manager scans the contents of the advertisement as
well as the application to register as a customer of the company. If she approves of the new customer, she informs
the marketing employee via a telephone call to load the new customer’s details, including his/her username, on the
sales system and the amount that she feels that the customer qualifies for as his/her initial credit limit. The marketing
employee logs on to the sales system by using the general finance department user ID and password to load the new
customer on the system.
Customers are always granted 30 days to settle their accounts, but the marketing manager has the discretion to
issue credit limits up to R10 000.
Customers can request to have their credit limits increased. The request should be made via email and directed to
the marketing manager at [email protected]. She makes a decision based on whether or not the
customer has placed regular advertisements with the company, in which case she increases the credit limit to R10
000 on her computer by using the general finance department user ID and password to gain access to the system.
The credit manager has indicated that he is not pleased with the current system as many of the customers whose
credit limits are being increased are actually the ones defaulting on their accounts.
For all advertisement requests made by existing customers, the customers email their advertisements through to
the marketing manager, who approves the publication after scanning the contents.
Recording of the sale

At the end of each month, the marketing manager emails a report to the financial accountant informing him of the
advertisements that were published during the month, the username of the customer to whom the advertisement
relates and the amount to be charged.
The accountant logs onto the revenue system and records the sale by processing a journal entry for the amount
noted in the email received from the marketing manager.
Collection of cash
Customers are permitted to pay their accounts via electronic funds transfer or by direct deposit into the company’s
bank account.
The financial accountant logs into the company’s bank account and identifies all payments received with
customer usernames, allocates the payments to the customers’ accounts and emails the customers an
acknowledgement of receipt.
Where the financial accountant is unable to find customer usernames on the system, he records the income in a
miscellaneous account until the customer contacts the company.
If a customer does not contact the company within 90 days of depositing the money for an invoice or an
acknowledgement of receipt, the money is moved to a staff party fund.
Debtors who have not settled their accounts within 90 days are handed over to the company’s collection agency.
Some debtors have contacted the company informing them that they have indeed settled their accounts as agreed via
direct bank deposit, but have lost their proof of payment.
REQUIRED
Identify and discuss the weaknesses in the revenue and receipts cycle above and make suggestions to address them.
[32]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses, risks and recommendations
[20 marks]
You are a trainee accountant on the audit of Doorbell (Pty) Ltd (Doorbell) for its financial year ended 30 September
20X1. Doorbell is a wholesaler of kitchenware, table-top and home décor products. You have been tasked with
auditing certain aspects of the company’s revenue cycle. All sales to customers are on credit, and very little
computerisation is used in the company’s business processes. From enquiries with client staff and from the
observation of cycle activities, you have noted the following:
Credit management
Retail customers wishing to open a credit account with the company must phone Doorbell’s credit controller and
provide their business details. The credit controller then enters the customer’s details on the computer system, and
also sets a credit limit for the customer’s account based on the customer’s credit needs.
You have determined that sound controls are in place regarding the identification of long-outstanding and
uncollectable debt.
Sales orders and approval

Customers place sales orders with Doorbell by telephone. Any one of two sales order clerks writes down the order
on a blank notepad after requesting the customer’s account number. The sales clerk ensures that the account exists
by referring to an official list of customers (prepared on a daily basis from the debtors ledger by the credit controller)
and that the customer is still within his/her credit limit.
After writing the order quantities and inventory codes of products ordered, the order clerk signs and dates the
order as evidence of approval.
You have not identified any concerns regarding the picking of goods.
REQUIRED
Describe the internal control weaknesses and the associated risks in the above system description of the revenue
cycle at Doorbell (Pty) Ltd. Also describe the recommended control(s) that should be put in place in order to prevent
the consequences associated with each risk for each identified weakness. Present your answer in tabular form.
[20]
CREDIT 1. a) Weakness
MANAGEMENT i) No credit background checks are performed on the creditworthiness of an
applicant. (1)
ii) Credit limits are based on the customer’s needs rather than on his/her
credit history and/or business references. (1)
b) Risk
Doorbell (Pty) Ltd risks selling goods on credit to customers who cannot
settle their debts, which could lead to possible debt write-offs and
consequent financial losses. (1)
c) Recommendations
i) Each potential new credit customer should complete a pre-printed credit
application form and submit trade references. (1)
ii) The credit controller should perform a background check on a potential
new customer’s trade references and credit status with credit bureaux.
iii) Based on the results of the credit check, the credit controller should (1)
set an informed credit limit on the amount of debt a particular customer
might incur and record it on the credit application form. (1)
iv) The debtors ledger should be reviewed by the financial manager on a
regular basis for new debtors added; in addition, he/she should agree
the additions to a supporting approved credit application form. (1)
SALES 1. a) Weakness
ORDERS AND A pre-printed, sequentially numbered order form is not used to record sales
orders from customers. (1)
APPROVAL b) Risks
i) Sales orders could go missing if there are no means of identifying them
owing to their not being numbered sequentially. (1)
ii) The potential for errors and missing order information is increased when
an order is made out on a blank sheet of paper, as there are then no
form details with which to guide the order clerk as to what information
is needed (e.g. the account number, the customer’s name and the
quantities ordered). (1)
iii) It will make it more difficult to cross-reference other documentation (such
as the invoices) to sales orders, thereby increasing the risk of unfilled
sales orders. (1)
c) Recommendation
A multicopy, pre-printed, sequentially numbered internal sales order should
be completed for each order, with one copy being filed in a pending sales
order file for follow-ups. (1)
2. a) Weakness
No additional validity check besides the request for an account number is
performed by the sales order clerk on the customer placing the order. (1)
b) Risk
Despite providing an account number, the person phoning might not be the
genuine customer, which could result in a credit sale that the account holder
cannot, or legally will not, settle. (1)
c) Recommendation
The sales order clerk should request that the customer provide pertinent
details (ID number, address, contact details etc.) that should be compared
to the information on the official list of customers in order to confirm that the
customer is genuine. (1)
3. a) Weakness
No inventory availability check is performed before the sales order is
accepted. (1)
b) Risk
i) There might be insufficient inventory and, if the order is processed, there
will be short-deliveries leading to possible cancelled sales and/or
customer dissatisfaction. (1)
ii) A back-order system cannot be maintained effectively if customers are
not informed of inventory shortages before an order is accepted, as
these shortages might be identified too late (owing to the delay,
customers might cancel ordered items that are not in stock). (1)
c) Recommendation
i) In order to confirm inventory availability, the sales order clerks should
have access to an up-to-date official inventory list that they should
consult while taking down an order. (1)
ii) Any inventory shortages should be referred to a back-order system, if the
customer agrees. (1)
SALES 4. a) Weakness
ORDERS AND There is an insufficient segregation of duties between the initiation and the
approval of sales orders, as the order clerks who initiate the orders are also
APPROVAL allowed to approve them. (1)
b) Risk
The sales order clerks might make out sales orders to unauthorised parties
(customers not on the debtors ledger) or customers who have exceeded
their credit limits, which could lead to possible non-payment by such parties.
c) Recommendation (1)
All sales orders should be submitted to the credit controller for approval
before any further processing takes place. (1)
Notes:
When looking at the suggested solution you will note that only weaknesses, risks and recommendations relating to
credit management and sales orders and approvals were included in the solution. This is because these were the
only functions for which information was provided in the case study. You cannot include functions for which
there is no information in the case study.
Another important aspect to take note of is the fact that one weakness can have more than one risk and more than
one recommendation.
Question 10 LEVEL 2
[23 marks]
Leonard Langley was recently appointed as the assistant financial manager of Trucker Tools (Pty) Ltd (Trucker
Tools), a wholesale distributor of vehicle parts serving the trucking and courier industries. One of Leonard’s first
tasks was to solve internal control problems in the revenue cycle. All sales made by the company to its customers are
on credit, and the company performs local deliveries using its own staff and delivery vehicles. Computerisation in
the company is minimal. Trucker Tools’s revenue cycle, from warehousing to recording of sales, takes the following
form:
Warehouse, dispatch and delivery

The warehouse receives a copy of the picking slip from the sales order department soon after a sales order has been
approved.
The slip indicates the items to be picked from the warehouse shelves, in addition to the customer’s details and
the delivery address.
The picking of goods is the responsibility of Henry Crause, the storeman. He also creates a delivery note in
duplicate for all the goods picked. After picking, the slip is signed by Henry and filed directly in the warehouse
manager’s office.
The goods are then transferred by trolley from the warehouse to the dispatch area, together with the delivery
note. As they enter dispatch, the dispatch clerk, Victor Msimane, immediately starts to pack the goods into boxes.
The security guards at the exit gate report to the dispatch area and assist Victor to load the packaged items onto
the delivery vehicle, thus saving a considerable amount of time and enabling the security guards to experience the
operations of the business first-hand.
Upon delivery of the items to the customer, the driver responsible for deliveries, James Mann, requests him/her
to sign the top copy of the delivery note (which carbon-copies the one beneath) and hands the top copy to the
customer. The second copy is returned to Trucker Tools.
Invoicing
Upon returning to the company premises, James Mann hands the second copy of the delivery note – signed by the
customer – in at the invoicing office.
The invoicing clerk, Bonani Fumba, prepares a pre-printed, sequentially numbered invoice in triplicate for each
delivery, cross-referenced to the corresponding internal sales order.
In order to expedite the process of debt collection, Bonani sends the original of the invoice to the customer (by
postal mail) as soon as possible after invoice preparation. The second copy of the invoice is presented to the
bookkeeping office for recording in the financial records, while the third copy is filed in the pending invoice file. On
a regular basis, the senior bookkeeper checks the invoices in the pending invoice file for sequential numbering (in
order to ensure that there are no missing invoices) and for matching to the delivery note brought back by James
Mann after it has been signed by the customer (in order to ensure that an invoice has been created for each delivery
note).
Recording of sales
The accounts receivable clerk, Helen Troy, is responsible for recording sales in the sales journal. After recording
invoices for the day, the senior bookkeeper reviews the accuracy, completeness and proper cut-off of the recorded
sales in the sales journal by agreeing each entry in the journal with the supporting invoice and delivery note. She
also ensures that an entry in the journal exists for each invoice.
At the end of the month, Helen prepares debtor statements from the debtors ledger for mailing to customers.
Leonard did not find any particular weaknesses in the credit management and sales returns areas of the revenue
cycle.
REQUIRED
Describe the weaknesses and the associated risks in the above system description of the revenue cycle at Trucker
Tools. In addition, for each weakness identified, describe the recommended control(s) that should be put in place in
order to prevent the risks associated with the weakness. Present your answer in tabular form.
[23]
Question 11 LEVEL 3
Weaknesses, risks, decrease in gross profit and recommendations
[40 marks]
You are an internal audit manager employed at WTK Inc. (WTK), a firm of registered auditors and accountants. One
of the firm’s clients is Autonovation (Pty) Ltd (Autonovation), a company that sells vehicle products to the public,
operating from large retail stores situated across the country. Each store is responsible for keeping its own set of
accounting records, although some reconciliations are performed at head office. The following matters have come to
your attention:
Extract from the system description of sales function at the Kimberley store
Sales to customers can either be on credit (for pre-authorised account holders) or for cash. After
selecting products, customers proceed to the sales clerk counters. In order to ring up a sale, a sales
clerk logs onto the financial application on the computer system using a common username and
password (the username is saLescLerk123).
Credit customers must show a store card on which an account number appears. The clerk keys in the
number in order to display the customer’s account details on the screen. New credit applicants are
referred to the sales manager’s office before being able to buy products on credit. Cash customers do
not have to provide any form of identification.
Products are scanned with a barcode scanner. Should the customer’s credit limit have been reached,
the clerk enters an override code if the clerk deems the customer’s reason for exceeding the credit limit
to be reasonable. Credit customers receive a printed, sequentially numbered sales invoice. Cash
customers receive a printed sales quote. Sales clerks can enter a discount percentage for cash sales
by using their discretion, even though (according to sales clerks) this function is never used. (Note: the
sales clerks’ commission is based on net sales.) Goods are packed into shopping bags at this stage.
Cash customers proceed with their products to a cashier at the exit, hand the sales quote to the cashier
and pay the amount due. A sequentially numbered cash invoice is printed by the cashier and handed to
the customer after it has been stamped ‘Paid’. The customer then exits the store. Credit customers
leave the store directly after receiving their sales invoice from the sales clerk.
Extract from the internal audit report on the system of cash receipts at the George store
The gross profit percentage of the George store fell from 30% in quarters one to three to 25% in quarter
four (the year-end inventory count has already taken place). A replacement cashier was appointed at
the beginning of the fourth quarter, which coincided with a significant increase in the issuing of written
cash receipts instead of printed cash invoices. Management of the store had not yet detected the
decrease in the gross profit percentage, and showed surprise when asked about the matter. The store
manager confirmed that, although head office does not generally approve of this, the issuing of manual
cash receipts is allowed in emergency cases. As no formal policy document could be provided by the
store manager on the regulations applying to the use of manual cash receipts, this query was referred
to head office.
According to the cashier, frequent network failure between his terminal and that of the sales clerks
compelled him to write out manual cash receipts, as his terminal is dependent on the sales quote
created on the system by the sales clerks. The computer system does not allow him to create a cash
invoice if a sales quote has not previously been generated by a sales clerk. (The cashier keys in the
sales quote number in order to call up the quote details on the screen.) According to the store
manager, she is aware of the network problem.
When a computerised cash invoice is created, sales are automatically recorded in a pending sales file.
Hand-written cash receipts, however, must be manually recorded in the file, which is posted to the
general ledger the next day when the sales amount in the file is reconciled with the cash deposit slip.
The cashier is responsible for performing this reconciliation, recording manual receipts to the pending
sales file and posting the file to the general ledger. He is also responsible for issuing stationery to
company staff.
Request by Autonovation to assist with the implementation of the sales returns function
The accounting department at the head office of Autonovation has requested your firm to advise the company on the
internal controls that should be implemented over its sales returns function. To date, the company has followed an
informal approach to sales returns, owing to the limited number of such returns. However, increased sales have
necessitated the formalisation of controls for roll-out across all stores. Management is prepared to establish sales
returns counters at each store, staffed by a sales returns clerk. The financial application currently enables the creation
of both goods return vouchers and credit notes. Returns are made in person by customers.
REQUIRED
1. With reference to the information contained in the extract, describe the deficiencies in the sales function at the
Kimberley store. Explain also the risks associated with the deficiencies and describe the recommended controls
that should be put in place in order to minimise the risks. (16)
2. With reference to the information provided, discuss what might have led to the decrease in the gross profit
percentage of the George store and the delay in the detection thereof. (Refer to the George scenario, but allow the
information in the Kimberley scenario to inform your answer.) (15)
3. Describe the controls that Autonovation should implement in the sales returns function of each store in order to
ensure that the control objectives of validity of sales returns recorded in the financial records are achieved. (Refer
to the information provided in the request, but allow the Kimberley and George scenarios to inform your answer.
Do not include controls for previously stored transaction and masterfile data.) (9)
[40]
Question 12 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses, recommendations, internal controls, role players and documents
[41 marks]
You are the internal auditor employed by South Peninsula Cleaning Services (Pty) Ltd (SP Cleaning), a provider of
cleaning services to office blocks in an around the South Peninsula area. The business has been in existence for the
last five years and has grown 10-fold over that period of time. The administrative function is performed and takes
place from the home of the owner and now chief executive officer, Mrs Radcliff. When the business started up, Mrs
Radcliff could perform the administrative function because she had only one client. Today, Mrs Radcliff employs
the following employees to perform the administrative function of the business:
Mrs Bray – administrative clerk
Mr Adams – sales and marketing manager
Ms Britton – operational staff co-ordinator
Mr Jikijela – financial manager.
At the previous financial year-end, the external auditors were concerned about the revenue and receivables process
and requested SP Cleaning to map the process for their review for the following year’s statutory audit (i.e. the
current audit).
All new and existing business is handled by Mr Adams. In his position as sales and marketing manager, he is
authorised to enter into contractual agreements with customers to provide cleaning services to them. Customers can
only make use of SP Cleaning if they have a signed contractual agreement with the company.
On the first working day of each month, Mrs Bray creates a manual sales order based on the agreement between
the customers and SP Cleaning for cleaning services. The sales order is authorised by Mr Adams after he inspects
the agreements to confirm the number of working days. The original sales order is kept in a book and the carbon
copy is sent to Ms Britton so that she can co-ordinate the cleaning staff for the month ahead.
Upon receipt of the sales order, Ms Britton plans the roster for the cleaning staff. The SP Cleaning model is
based on two shifts – an early morning and a late afternoon shift. As only office blocks are serviced, the business
model is designed to provide cleaning services in the administrative offices before the customer’s staff arrive for
work as well as after the customer’s staff leave work.
Ms Britton visits the office block locations on a regular basis to make sure that supervisors and cleaning staff are
doing their work and also to handle queries from customers. All customer queries are logged in a query book used
by Ms Britton to assess cleaning staff performance and also in cases where disputes arise with the Department of
Labour.
At the end of each month, all cleaning staff and supervisors complete their monthly time sheets and this is reviewed
by Ms Britton. She then uses this information to complete a service delivery form. The service delivery form reflects
the following:
Sales order number
Month of service
Cleaning staff and supervisor on duty for the specific office block
Number of hours worked by each staff member based on the authorised time sheets
The service delivery form is reviewed and signed off by Mrs Radcliff, who is responsible for all senior staff,
including Ms Britton. The service delivery form is then sent to Mrs Bray for processing.
At month-end, Mrs Bray creates the sales invoices for customers based on the following documents:
Original sales order in the order book
Service delivery form sent to her from Mrs Radcliff
The sales invoice is made out in duplicate in an invoice book. The carbon copy sales invoice is kept in the invoice
book and the original sales invoice is sent to the customer for payment.
The general customer payment terms are one calendar month from statement date. The debtor’s statement is
created and sent out with the original sales invoice on the last of every month.
There are no unpaid invoices from the previous months as all customers comply with their contractual agreement
with SP Cleaning. There is only a current balance on the debtor’s age analysis as a result of this.
Note: All documents are pre-printed and pre-numbered.
REQUIRED
1. Identify the internal control weaknesses based on the scenario above. For each weakness identified, explain the
consequence(s) and make recommendation(s) for improvement.
[11]
2.
a) Identify the internal controls in the revenue and receivables process of SP Cleaning, as outlined in the scenario,
for the following activities:
i) Receiving and processing customer orders
ii) Granting credit to customers
iii) Delivering the service
b) For each internal control identified, indicate who the role players are and what documents are used in the internal control.
Present your answer in the following format:
INTERNAL ROLE PLAYERS DOCUMENTS

CONTROL
(1 mark for each internal (1 mark for each relevant role (1 mark for each relevant
control) player) document)
[30]
Question 13 LEVEL 2
Recommendations
[14 marks]
You are a first-year trainee accountant employed by an audit firm to work in its internal audit department. One of
your firm’s internal audit clients is GameZone (Pty) Ltd (GameZone), a company that operates in the family
entertainment industry.
GameZone’s operations include an indoor laser games compound, where people can simulate a battle using
laser-beam guns. Each participant receives a laser gun connected to a battery-operated body harness that can detect
light beams, upon which the harness registers a shot received from another player. Up to four teams of five people
each can participate in a round lasting 30 minutes and costing R50 per person. During the game, the gameplay
computer collects all game data (e.g. those players shot and by whom, how many times a person was hit and the
firing accuracy of each person). During busy periods, up to R12 000 a day is collected from the laser games
compound.
Mr Mark Costa, owner of GameZone, has confided to you that he believes cash is being misappropriated in the laser
games operation. You have obtained the following information:
Participating players must pay the required fee before a game commences. Receipts are printed by the
compound’s cashier from a stand-alone point-of-sale computer connected to a cash register. Players pay either
with cash or with a bank card using a card-swipe machine. Cheques are not accepted. The point-of-sale computer
is connected neither to the gameplay computer nor to the computer used by Ms Betty Colt, the bookkeeper. A
duty manager oversees the smooth working of all GameZone’s operations, while Mr Costa’s wife, Mrs Arcadia
Costa, assists with finances and accounting in general.
Ms Colt has told you that she occasionally fulfils the duty of cashier at the laser games compound in the evenings
when casual staff members do not show up for work and to ‘supplement my meagre income’.
Daily cash takings for all the operations at GameZone are stored in Ms Colt’s office inside a fireproof safe,
together with the cash receipt report printed out from the point-of-sale computer. Either one of the two keys kept
by Mr Costa and Ms Colt respectively can open the safe.
Ms Colt is responsible for preparing a deposit slip for each day’s total cash takings. Banking is done weekly, and
when the bank-stamped copy of the deposit slip is returned after banking by the company’s messenger, Ms Colt
records the deposits in the cash receipts journal. A bank reconciliation is prepared on a quarterly basis by Ms Colt.
You have not been able to find any indication that the past year’s bank reconciliations have been reviewed.
REQUIRED
Recommend the controls that you would suggest be implemented at GameZone (Pty) Ltd in order to reduce the
possibility of the misappropriation of cash in the company’s laser games operation. Ignore the effect of any
computerised access or input controls.
[14]
Question 14 LEVEL 3
Recommendations
[22 marks]
Handyman Wholesalers (Pty) Ltd (Handyman) distributes a wide range of hardware and paint products to retailers
across South Africa. The audit firm by whom you are employed as a senior auditor has been requested to audit the
company’s financial statements for its financial year ended 30 September 20X1. A trainee accountant on the audit
has obtained the following system description of the company’s revenue cycle:
Credit management
All sales to customers are on credit. The company’s credit management office is staffed by Ms Ellie Amber, the
credit controller, who is responsible for:
performing creditworthiness checks on credit applicants
allocating credit limits to customers’ accounts on the debtors masterfile
ensuring that each new customer receives a unique, computer-generated account number
flagging accounts on the system of those customers who are behind with payments or have other pending queries
against their accounts.
Receiving orders from customers

The sales order department is staffed by two sales order clerks who report to the department’s supervisor, Mr Loyiso
Mkwevu. All orders from customers are received telephonically by either one of the sales clerks on duty.
A customer, after reference to a product catalogue, is required to read his/her order to the sales clerk by quoting
the product code and quantity, after which the clerk enters the details on an on-screen internal sales order (ISO) on
the sales order module of the company’s computerised financial system. This module is linked to the debtors
masterfile and the inventory masterfile. A back-order system is not in use.

When an ISO has been generated by the system, the storeman, Mr Jimby Zin, receives a message on his computer
that there is a pending sales order awaiting processing. He prints a copy of the ISO and picks the ordered goods from
the warehouse shelves, whereupon he clicks on the ‘picked’ button on the on-screen ISO and the system
automatically prints a multi-copied, sequentially numbered delivery note.

Goods are transferred to the dispatch area by Jimby Zin and dispatched via delivery vans, which pass through
security checks at the exit gate of the company’s premises. Customers are required to sign the delivery note and
retain a copy for their own records. When customer-signed delivery notes have been returned to the warehouse,
Jimby Zin accesses the computer system and clicks on the ‘filled’ button on the on-screen delivery note in order to
indicate that delivery has taken place.
Invoicing and recording of sales

A copy of the customer-signed delivery note is submitted to Ms Renée Plait, the invoicing clerk in the finance
department, who on a daily basis accesses the invoicing module on the computerised financial system and selects the
‘Create invoice’ option. A list of all delivery notes in sequential order appears, with those that have been flagged as
‘filled’ by Jimby Zin clearly indicated as such. Next to each filled delivery note, Ms Plait clicks on a button that
creates an invoice.
At the same time as the invoice is accepted by Ms Plait on the system, the sales journal and debtors ledger are
updated with the sale. The financial manager to whom Ms Plait reports is Mr Suyesh Khare.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the computerised access and input application controls required in order to achieve the control objectives
of the validity, accuracy and completeness of internal sales orders captured onto the financial system by the sales
order clerk. (12)
2. Describe the computerised input and processing application controls required in order to achieve the control
objectives of validity, accuracy and completeness of invoices recorded in the financial records of Handyman.
(10)
In both of the above questions, ignore controls relating to screen aids and any controls applicable to
amendments to masterfile data.
[22]
Question 15 LEVEL 2
Key controls
[8 marks]
In October, you received the latest copy of the accounting and auditing circular from your firm. The main focus of
the circular was key controls. The following extract intrigued you:
Extract from accounting and auditing circular
Key controls are those internal controls that provide reasonable assurance that material misstatement
in the financial statements (whether owing to fraud or error) will be prevented, or detected and
corrected, before the finalisation of the entity’s financial statements. It follows from this definition that
key controls are those that respond to risks that could result in misstatements in the financial
statements that are considered material. This means that, if a key control fails, there is a reasonable
likelihood that material misstatement (error or fraud) may be present in the financial statements.
After you had read the extract, you decided to look at this list of controls as practised by your current client, Hot and
Cold (Pty) Ltd (Hot and Cold):
1. Customers should be requested to provide orders by fax, email or physical delivery.
2. All written orders should be completed in blue pen.
3. All products obtained should be compared to the order form received from the sales department before they are
moved to the dispatch department.
4. All order forms should be grouped in batches of 10 and bound by an elastic band.
5. Discounts should be authorised by a specified personnel member and granted in accordance with the
organisation’s policy.
6. The organisation’s discounts policy should be displayed on the back of the sales department door.
7. Customers should always sign the delivery note as proof of having received the goods.
8. Customers may sign anywhere on the delivery note.
9. All delivery notes must be pre-numbered and kept in a locked drawer.
10. The sales department should have a scheduled tea break at 10h00 every morning.
REQUIRED
Indicate which of the controls listed above are key controls.
[8]
Question 16 LEVEL 2
Key controls and control objectives
[10 marks]
During the interim audit of Trust-Us (Pty) Ltd (Trust-Us), you requested system descriptions of all the different
business cycles within the company in order to design the appropriate test of controls. An extract of the revenue and
receipts cycle is presented below. The extract only deals with the revenue generated through the selling of tickets for
specific fundraising events undertaken by the staff of Trust-Us.
Extract: Ticket sales

The campaign manager determines the quantity of tickets needed to be sold for the purpose intended.
Based on this, the campaign manager orders the appropriate number of booklets. For example, 1 000
pre-numbered booklets for the wheelchair fundraising project (each booklet containing 10 pre-printed and
pre-numbered tickets) were ordered from the local printing company. On receipt of the booklets, the
printer’s delivery man, as well as two administrative staff members of Trust-Us, count the number of
booklets (and, on a sample basis, confirm that each booklet contain 10 tickets). All three applicable
persons sign the delivery document of the printing company after the booklets are counted. The secretary
of the finance team compiles a booklet register, containing the 1 000 booklets in numeric order. The
booklet register is locked in the secretary’s filing cabinet to prohibit unauthorised access. The booklet
register contains the following details: booklet number, details of the staff member who receives the
booklet, a place for the signature of the staff member who receives the booklet, and lastly a place where
the secretary and staff member sign (together with the number of unsold tickets in booklet) when the staff
member returns a booklet (with unsold tickets in it).
Staff members have five weeks to sell the tickets and the staff member who sells the most tickets
receives a cash incentive. When a staff member has sold all 10 tickets in the booklet, he/she brings the
cash to the cash clerk, who records the cash received and issues a receipt (pre-printed and
pre-numbered in quadruplicate) for the staff member. One copy of the receipt stays with the cash clerk,
one copy is sent to the secretary to ensure that a staff member does not receive a second booklet before
he/she has paid the cash of the first booklet, and one copy is sent to the accountant for independent
review purposes. At the end of the five-week term, all staff members must return the booklets in their
possession – the booklet to the secretary and the cash for sold tickets to the cash clerk (process as
described above).
The accountant performs a reconciliation at the end of the period between the tickets sold according to
the secretary’s booklet register and the total cash received (and banked) by the receipts and deposit slips
of the cash clerk. The accountant performs a reconciliation between the total tickets sold, total unsold
tickets and total tickets available for sale. The accountant investigates any discrepancies found and
records his findings on the reconciliations. The accountant signs the reconciliations and submits it to the
finance manager when a fundraising project is finalised.
REQUIRED
Identify the key controls from the above extract of the revenue and receipts systems description. For each key
control identified also state the main control objective achieved by the key control.
[10]
Question 17 LEVEL 3
Key controls and tests of controls
[10 marks]
You are a member of the internal audit department of Quality Supplies (Pty) Ltd (Quality Supplies), a company that
sells a range of household furniture and electronic appliances from its store located in a prominent mall in Durban.
The company has a December year-end.
The accounting system, which includes a point-of-sales system module, is located on a fully integrated system
run on a local area network at the store.
Extract: Sales process at company
For existing customers

At the start of each shift, the salesperson logs onto the point-of-sales system using his/her unique user ID
and password, thereby gaining write access to the sales file and read-only access to the inventory and
debtor masterfiles. The system shuts down after three failed attempts at entering an unauthorised
password.
The salesperson asks the client to provide his/her Quality Supplies customer card. When the salesperson
scans the barcode on the card, the following details appear on the screen:
Name and Address Identity/passport Outstanding Available Credit

surname number balance balance limit
In cases where customers have left their Quality Supplies card at home, they are requested to produce
their identity document, passport or South African driver’s licence. The ID/passport number appearing on
the presented document is captured into the system and the same information appears on the screen as
if the barcode on the customer’s card had been scanned. The system has logic tests built into it that
recognise whether or not a valid ID or passport number has been entered.
If the total purchase price does not cause the outstanding balance to exceed the credit limit, the sale will
be approved and the customer will take immediate delivery of the goods purchased, unless he/she
requires the goods to be delivered, in which case the goods will be delivered within three business days
of the date of purchase.
When the value of the goods purchased causes the outstanding balance to exceed the credit limit, the
sale is loaded onto the system and stored in a sales pending file. At the same time, a notification is sent
to the email address of Mr Jenkinson, the credit manager. The customer will not be permitted any more
sales until his/her credit limit has been increased. The turnaround time for doing so is normally two
working days.
Mr Jenkinson logs onto the system using his unique user ID and password in order to gain access to the
sales module. He reviews all such cases and applies his discretion when increasing the credit limit,
subject to certain requirements. Mr Jenkinson documents his reason on the system for increasing the
credit limit (e.g. regular payments received to date). In some instances, the customer may be required to
provide three months’ bank statements in order to prove his/her increased disposable income. A log is
created of all instances where Mr Jenkinson authorises an increase in the credit limit. It is then printed
and reviewed by Ms Ballinger, the chief financial officer, at the end of each month and all exceptions
(such as where there is no valid reason for the increase) are followed up with Mr Jenkinson. Ms Ballinger
signs the log in order to indicate that she has reviewed it.
Once Mr Jenkinson has documented the reason for the increase and authorised it, a sequentially
numbered notification is sent to Mr Ndlovu, whose duty it is to capture and update the debtor’s masterfile.
The notification received by Mr Ndlovu informs him that he needs to increase the client’s credit limit. Mr
Ndlovu has write access to the debtors masterfile, and uses the authorising email as a debtors masterfile
amendment form. Mr Ndlovu then files the notification.
The customer is informed via SMS the day after the order has been placed in order to:
inform him/her whether the order was successful or not
advise him/her if his/her limit has been increased
give him/her the date on which he/she will be able to take delivery of the goods.
REQUIRED
Identify the key internal controls in the sales system as described above and describe a test of control which the
internal auditor could perform for each. Present your answer in tabular form.
[10]
KEY INTERNAL CONTROLS TEST OF CONTROL BY INTERNAL

AUDITOR
The salesperson and Mr Jenkinson log onto the Attempt to gain access to the system by using an
system using their unique user IDs and incorrect user ID and password and observe that it
passwords. (1) shuts down after three unsuccessful attempts. (1)
The salesperson scans the barcode located on Observe the sales clerk scanning the barcode on
the customer’s Quality Supplies card in order to the customer’s Quality Supplies card to gain access
gain access to his/her details. (1) to the customer’s details. (1)
Alternatively the customer’s ID number or Attempt to input an incorrect ID or passport number
passport number is used to call up their details into the system in order to call up a customer’s
on the sales system. (1) details and observe that the system does call up
any customer details. (1)
The system performs credit checks before Attempt to process an order for a customer which
orders are processed. (1) exceeds his/her credit limit and observe that the
order is not automatically approved. (1)
A log of all instances where Mr Jenkinson has Inspect the log for Ms Ballinger’s signature. (1)
authorised amendments to the credit limit of
existing customers is reviewed by Ms Ballinger
and all exceptions are followed up. (1)
Mr Ndlovu uses the sequentially numbered Extract a report indicating all customers whose
notification received from the system as debtors credit limits have been increased during the course
masterfile amendment form. (1) of the year and agree them to the corresponding
sequentially numbered notifications. (1)
Notes:
The first important aspect to take note of is that the required asked you to identify key controls, thus controls that
will help to ensure that the information in the accounting records and, in the end, the financial statements are
accurate, valid and complete.
Another important aspect to take note of is the fact that the required asked for a test of control, therefore you
should only have formulated one test of control.
Question 18 LEVEL 3
Tests of controls
[30 marks]
You are the senior auditor on the audit of Quality Clothing (Pty) Ltd (Quality Clothing), a company that sells
clothing to the public from its 15 stores located around South Africa and has its corporate head office located in
Roodeport.
The following is an extract of information that was obtained during the planning phase of the audit:
Extract: Revenue and receipts cycle – credit purchases
General
Customers who purchase goods on credit are required to open an account with Quality Clothing.
Authorisation of credit purchases

The prospective customer needs to complete a credit application in order to purchase clothes on credit
from one of the stores.
The credit application may be completed in the store or on the company’s website.
The following documentation is required in order to approve an individual as a new credit customer and to
determine the customer credit limit:
A completed new customer application form
A certified copy of the customer’s identity document
Proof of residential address
Three most recent payslips or three most recent bank statements
If an individual is unable to provide the documentation required above, the individual will not be permitted
to open a customer account.
For new customer applications submitted in the store, the documentation is scanned into the system and
stored in a new customer pending file.
For new customer applications submitted via the company’s website, the application, along with the
documents that the prospective customer has loaded onto the system, is stored in a new customer
pending file.
Once a prospective customer applies to open an account, it takes four to five business days to process
the application.
The company has several credit managers who log onto the system using their unique user IDs and
passwords. They have read-only access to the information loaded onto the system by the prospective
customer.
If the credit manager inputs his/her user ID or password incorrectly more than three times, the computer
automatically logs off.
The credit manager performs the following checks:

Confirms that the new customer application form has been completed correctly
Inspects the supporting documentation
Performs a credit check on prospective customer
Once the credit manager is satisfied that the application and supporting documentation meet the
company’s requirements, the credit manager approves the application by digitally authorising the
application.
An employee in the credit department who is responsible for loading the credit limits onto the customer’s
account logs onto the system by using his/her unique user ID and password. The employee loads the
new customer’s credit limit based on the disposable income noted on the application form as well as
recommendations made by the credit manager. The new customer’s account is then moved from the
pending file to an approved new customer file. The employee digitally signs off the activation as proof that
he/she loaded the new customer’s credit limit in terms of the company’s policy.
The new customer is mailed a customer card which takes two to three business days to arrive at the
customer’s mailing address and is activated instore with the approved credit limit. The customer is
required to come into a store, provide proof of identification and swipe his/her customer card in order to
activate it. The system logs the date on which the card was activated in the store for the first time.
The system creates a log of all cards that have been issued as well as those cards that have not been
activated in the store within 21 days, so that the approved customers can be contacted to determine
whether they have received the cards or whether they are still interested in making purchases on credit.
The reason why the approved customer has not activated the card is noted on the system.
The card and offer to purchase on credit for the first time expire 90 days after the card was mailed to the
individual if the individual has not come into a store to activate the card. Once the 90 days has lapsed the
individual is required to reapply.
Increasing of credit limit

Customers are permitted to request that their credit limits be increased. They are required to submit:
motivation for the increase
three most recent payslips or the three most recent bank statements.
The credit manager reviews the documentation and determines whether or not the approval is warranted.
If the credit manager is satisfied that the credit limit increase is valid, he/she completes a credit limit
amendment form which is sent to an independent employee in the credit department to load onto the
system. The credit manager signs the credit limit amendment form to indicate that he/she has reviewed
and approved the increase in credit limit in terms of the company’s policy.
An employee in the credit department logs onto the client’s account using his/her unique user ID and
password. The employee changes the credit limit by using the information located on the credit limit
amendment form. The employee signs the credit limit amendment form and digitally signs the change in
credit limit as proof that he/she has made the change. A log of all changes to the credit limit is recorded.
The log is reviewed by the financial manager on a monthly basis and exceptions are followed up. The
financial manager signs the log as proof that he/she has reviewed the log and followed up on any
exceptions.
Orders
Orders are taken in the following manner:
By telephone
In person
When someone calls to place an order, the employee receiving the order follows the following process:
Asks the customer for the customer number
Repeats the order back to the customer
Confirms that it is the customer by asking a series of predetermined security questions (e.g. what was
your nickname in high school)
Completes the order on an internal sales order form
All calls are recorded for legal purposes.
Where an order is placed by a customer in person, the customer is required to provide his/her customer
card when placing the order, as well as proof of identification.
Prior to approving the sale, the payment history of the customer is reviewed by the sales representative
on the system, and where the customer’s account is in arrears for more than three months, the system
will not permit the sale to proceed unless a manager overrides it. The system creates a log of all sales
where managers have overridden it, and this log is followed up by the financial manager on a monthly
basis. The financial manager signs the log as proof that he/she has reviewed the log.
Where the purchase results in the customer’s credit limit being exceeded, the system will not process the
order. The customer is informed that the order has exceeded his/her credit limit and the customer is
requested to pay the balance that exceeds the credit limit. Should the customer not be able to pay for the
balance above the credit limit, he/she will be required to reduce the value of the order by removing some
products.
REQUIRED
Identify the key controls as described in the above scenario, and for each key control identified, describe the test of
control that you would perform to determine if the control was working effectively.
[30]
Question 19 LEVEL 3
Tests of controls
[15 marks]
You are the auditor of Juicy M. This business sells a range of juice bottles to both the general public and
wholesalers.
Credit sales, which make up the majority of the company’s total sales figure, are made as follows:
DEPARTMENT PERSON OPERATIONS

Order Sales clerk The sales clerk receives orders telephonically, by mail or
directly from walk-in customers. These are recorded on the
company’s pre-numbered order forms. The company uses two
copies: one is sent to the credit department, the other retained
in the order department and filed in sequential order.
Credit Credit Credit limits are determined for all new debtors based on their
manager and credit references. The credit manager records this limit in a
debtors clerk debtors file. After each transaction, price lists are used in order
to calculate the value of the transaction. This total value is used
in order to verify whether the customer has exceeded his/her
credit limit.
If the limit has not been exceeded, the order form is signed by
the debtors clerk and sent to the inventory warehouse. If the
credit limit has been exceeded, the form is returned to the sales
department. The debtor concerned is contacted.
Each debtor receives a statement on a monthly basis. Should

he/she have any queries about the statement, these are
referred to the credit manager, who resolves them in
conjunction with the debtors clerk.
Warehouse Storeman Once the signed order form arrives at the warehouse from the
credit department, the storeman checks that the items
requested are available.
If they are, he/she signs the order form and forwards it to the
accounting department. If the items are not available, it is
returned to the sales department and the debtor concerned is
contacted.
Accounting Accounting Once the approved order form has been received, the
clerk and accounting department prepares a pre-numbered invoice in
accountant triplicate. The accounting clerk uses the price list in order to
calculate the total amount due.
One copy of the invoice is sent to the warehouse, where the

goods are packed and distributed. The customer signs this
copy as evidence of receipt of the goods and returns it to the
accounting department.
Once the signed copy of the invoice has been returned, the
accounting department sends the original invoice to the
customer. The signed invoice, which is filed sequentially, is
entered by the accounting clerk into the sales journal, where it
is also filed sequentially. The third copy of the invoice is sent to
the debtors clerk, who updates the debtors ledger.
At the end of each financial year, the accountant performs a

reconciliation between the debtors ledger and the debtors
control account in the general ledger.
REQUIRED
Formulate the audit procedures relating to the internal control objectives of validity and accuracy that you would
perform on the internal controls as contained in the credit sales system described above.
[15]
Question 20 LEVEL 3
Tests of controls
[18 marks]
You are the external auditor employed at Furniture Protectors Ltd (FP). You are assigned to audit the sales cycle of
FP.
FP designs protectors that can be placed on furniture to protect furniture against damage and dirt from young
children and animals. It produces and sells a wide variety of protectors for all types and shapes of furniture. The
following information relating to the sales system is available:
1 Mr Nieuwoudt, the customer relationship manager, is responsible for dealing with customers who
. want to make purchases of furniture protectors on credit.
Mr Nieuwoudt requires proof of physical address and income as well as a customer identity
document before a customer can make purchases on credit. Customers are also required to bring
three copies of each of these documents with them, when they present the originals. This is done
to reduce FP’s printing costs.
The credit bureau is also contacted by Mr Nieuwoudt before setting the credit limit for a customer.
A credit form is used, which contains the customer’s information and credit limit.
The customer is requested to check and sign the form, which is filed in a customer file with copies
of the necessary documents listed above.
The customer is given the latest price list and a number of pre-numbered order forms. Customers
can complete the details of their purchase on the order form.
2 If the customers want to order furniture protectors, they contact the call centre telephonically,
. reading the number of the order form (which is in their possession) to the call centre agent.
The call centre agent then prepares a pre-numbered sales order based on the information
received.
The call centre agent records the order form’s number as communicated to him/her by the
customer on the sales order.
Mr Nieuwoudt checks that the customers’ credit limit is not exceeded and authorises the sales
order.
A copy of the order is sent to the head storeman and to Mrs Marais, the accounting clerk. A copy
remains in the call centre.
Mr Nieuwoudt frequently performs a sequence check on the sales orders and investigates any
missing numbers as well as any long-outstanding sales orders whose delivery notes have not been
received.
3 The orders are packed by the storeman and a pre-numbered delivery note is made out.
.
The guard at the gate checks that the goods agree to the sales order and delivery note before the
goods leave the premises. The guard signs the delivery note as proof that he has performed the
check.
A copy of the delivery note is returned to the call centre, two copies are sent to the customer and
one remains in the warehouse.
4 The delivery clerk, who is also the driver of the delivery vehicle, compares the delivery note with
. the original order form as prepared by the customer to ensure that the order is complete.
In the event that the goods being delivered differ from the original order form, changes are made to
the order form and the customer is required to sign next to the changes.
The customer signs the delivery note on receipt of the goods.
The delivery clerk signs the original order form and returns the form and a signed copy of the
delivery note to the head office. These forms are handed over to Mrs Marais.
5 Mrs Marais compares the original order form, delivery note and sales order with one another and
. investigates any differences.
Mrs Marais then makes out a pre-numbered invoice.
Mr Benadie checks the calculations on the invoice and that the latest prices were used.
Mr Benadie signs the invoice.
Invoices are printed and sent to customers.
Monthly statements are sent to debtors via email.
6 Mrs Marais posts the invoices to the sales journal and debtor ledger at the end of each week.
.
Mr Swartz, the assistant accountant, posts the sales journal to the general ledger on a monthly
basis.
Mr Patterson, the accountant, checks the postings on a sample basis.
Debtor reconciliations are performed by Mr Patterson, and checked and signed monthly by Mrs
Morris.
REQUIRED
Describe the test(s) of control you would perform to test the operation of each control identified above.
[18]
1 Deal with incorrect controls and/or controls that are not there, and are stated as such by means of the words ‘no’ or
‘not’.
2 8 marks = 8 weaknesses.
3 Take note of the goods being sold; they might affect the answer, as not all of the goods might be packed in boxes.
4 Start thinking about credit management controls.
5 Thus, dispatch function.
6 These functions can thus not be included in the answer.
7 Identify which are the remaining parts from your framework, as well as the internal controls in those remaining parts.
8 The first part of the cycle that you need to think about deals with controls that should be there: the inspection of goods
against the picking slip by the dispatch clerk; numerically sequenced delivery notes based on goods being
dispatched; the two functions performed by the security guard; and the customer’s signature on receiving the
goods.
9 Well done: control is in place.
10 Another control is in place.
11 The security guard performs only one duty; the other one is thus the first weakness.
12 Control is in place.
13 The second part of the cycle that you need to think about deals with controls that should be there: the signed
delivery note filed in a pending file; sequentially numbered invoices prepared; confirmation that invoices have been
prepared for all returned signed delivery notes; checking that invoice dates are correct, missing delivery notes are
followed up, invoices are cross-referenced to internal sales orders and delivery notes, and quantities and prices on
prepared invoices are reviewed, as well as casting and calculations on invoices.
17 The third part of the cycle that you need to think about deals with controls that should be there: the recorded invoices
checked by a second employee – agreeing entries to supporting invoices and agreeing invoice amounts to
amounts in sales journal; the numerical sequence is inspected; and debtors reconciliation is prepared and
reviewed by a senior personnel member.
19 Nothing else is mentioned for this function; the remaining controls, which you expected to find in this function but are
not mentioned, are thus weaknesses.
20 Refer to example question 1.
21 Thus each weakness has to be addressed with the information that follows.
23 Linked to the weakness.
24 Linked to the weakness, and specifically referring to revenue.
25 Thirty-two marks divided by four (weakness, control objective, revenue assertion = 8 weaknesses).
27 Validity, completeness, accuracy.
28 Revenue assertions = accuracy, completeness, classification, cut-off and occurrence.
INTRODUCTION
Refer to the guidance and the example questions contained in Chapter 6, as the principles and the approach remain
the same.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
Control objectives
[6 marks]
Validity, accuracy and completeness of financial information are the control objectives that management seeks to
achieve in order to address the major risks relating to all the cycles.
It is the responsibility of the audit manager on the engagement to ensure that the audit team knows which control
objectives relate to the specific cycle being audited, as well as the consequence for the entity’s financial statements if
these control objectives are not achieved.
REQUIRED
Using the table below, provide a description of the control objectives and the related risks of misstatement for the
purchases transactions.
CONTROL CONSEQUENCE FOR ENTITY’S FINANCIAL
OBJECTIVE STATEMENTS IF CONTROL OBJECTIVE IS NOT
ACHIEVED
Validity
Accuracy
Completeness
[6]

CONTROL CONSEQUENCE FOR ENTITY’S FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

OBJECTIVE IF CONTROL OBJECTIVE IS NOT ACHIEVED
Purchases
Validity Invalid purchases:
Overstatement of expenditure and accounts payable owing to fictitious recorded
purchases (1)
Overstatement of expenditure and accounts payable owing to unauthorised recorded
purchases (1)
Over- or understatement of expenditure and accounts payable if transactions are not
recorded in the year to which they pertain (1)
Overstatement of expenditure and accounts payable if recorded transactions are not
supported by sufficient documentation (1)
Accuracy Inaccurate purchases:

Over- or understatement of expenditure and accounts payable if transactions are recorded
at inappropriate amounts (e.g. calculation errors, incorrect price, incorrect quantity) (1)
Under- or overstatement of expenditure and accounts payable due to incorrect
classification of recorded transactions (1)
Under- or overstatement of expenditure and accounts payable as a result of transactions
being recorded in the incorrect accounts (1)
Completeness Incomplete purchases: Understatement of expenditure and accounts payable due

to unrecorded purchases (1)

Notes:
Six marks for three control objectives equals approximately two per control objective, but you should know that
accuracy and validity have more aspects than completeness.
The risk of misstatement is the consequence to the financial statements. When looking at the suggested solution
take note of the way in which it was formulated, for example overstatement and understatement.
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Assertions
[4 marks]
The following scenarios indicate the relevant risk indicators applicable to the payments cycle:
1. Amounts prepared for payment are incorrectly determined.
2. Suppliers that are not on the payment schedule are paid.
3. Fictitious payments that never took place are recorded.
4. Not all payments made are recorded in the financial records.
5. Fictitious/duplicated invoices are used for payment.
REQUIRED
For each of the scenarios mentioned above, indicate which assertion(s) will be affected. Provide your solution using
the following tabular format:
NUMBER ASSERTION(S) AFFECTED
[4]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses
[7 marks]
You have recently been appointed as the internal auditor of Minor (Pty) Ltd (Minor). During preliminary discussions
with management, it was decided that you would focus on determining the need for goods as well as the ordering
and the receiving of goods within the purchases and payments cycle.
The following extract relates to a purchase transaction you observed:
STAFF JOB DESCRIPTION

Mr Radebe Procurement clerk
Mr Tobias Warehouse clerk
Mr Kromhout Warehouse supervisor
Determining the need for goods

Solly, the sales representative, wanted to make several photocopies of the recent price lists with a view to
distributing them to prospective clients. However, he discovered that there was no more paper left for the machine.
He asked Mr Radebe, the procurement clerk, to order 50 boxes of paper in order to be sure that the company did not
experience further shortages.
Ordering of goods
When Mr Radebe received the request from Solly, he assured him that the paper would be ordered. He then
proceeded to phone the first supplier for whom he could find a number in the Yellow Pages and asked them to
deliver the 50 boxes of paper as soon as possible. He did not think it was necessary to complete any documentation.
Receiving of goods
When the supplier arrived at the warehouse with the boxes of paper, the warehouse clerk, Mr Tobias, realised that
the supplier’s delivery man was a childhood friend whom he had not seen in years. He was so delighted to see him
that he received the delivery without signing the delivery note.
Mr Kromhout, the warehouse supervisor, prepared the goods received note based on the supplier delivery note in
duplicate, after which he sent a copy to the accounting department.
REQUIRED
Identify the weaknesses in the abovementioned system.
[7]
1. Determining the need for goods

a) The company does not have a system in place to determine a need for stationery (e.g. regular checks to
determine low levels). (1)
b) No pre-numbered, multi-copy requisitions are completed and authorised. (1)
2. Ordering of goods
a) The company does not have an approved supplier list – the first available supplier was selected from the Yellow
Pages. (1)
b) No quotation was requested from the supplier and the availability was not confirmed either. (1)
c) No purchase order was prepared. (1)
3. Receiving of goods
a) Goods were not received in a designated receiving area. (1)
b) Goods were not received by dedicated goods receiving staff. (1)
c) The goods received note was not prepared based on the received goods but on the quantities as per the supplier
delivery note. (1)
d) Goods received were not checked for quantity, quality and description as contained on the delivery note. (1)
Notes:
Weaknesses equal functions/duties not performed.
You need to have a thorough understanding of the cycles to be able to identify weaknesses, as you have to match
your knowledge (framework) to the information provided in the case study.
The case study only dealt with the following aspects of the purchases cycle: ‘Determining the need for goods’,
‘Ordering of goods’ and ‘Receiving of goods’, therefore your weaknesses can only include weaknesses in these
three functions.
Question 4 LEVEL 1
Risks
[3 marks]
There are various categories of risks of misstatement relating to the financial information produced in the purchases
and payments cycle. Should a misstatement be material and not be corrected, the financial statements will not be
fairly presented.
REQUIRED
List the various categories of risks of misstatement, whether owing to fraud or error, that apply to the purchases and
payments cycle.
[3]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
Risks
[17 marks]
You are the auditor of High Heels Ltd (High Heels), a shoe manufacturer. You identified the following weaknesses
in the purchases and payments cycle during the audit of High Heels:
1. There is not a process in place to determine which inventory is required for the production process before orders
are placed. Rush orders are sometimes placed at additional cost.
2. Not all orders are placed using a written order form.
3. Not all orders placed are authorised.
4. Orders are placed with only one supplier.
5. A pre-numbered goods received note is not completed upon receipt of the goods by the receiving department.
6. There is insufficient segregation of duties, as the departmental manager places orders, receives goods and makes
payments to suppliers.
7. Goods delivered are not reviewed, nor is a comparison made between what was ordered and what was received.
8. Invoices received from suppliers are not compared with what was ordered and what was received.
9. Creditors’ reconciliations are not performed between monthly statements received from creditors and the creditor
control account.
10. The cheque is submitted to the accountant and managing director for signing without any supporting
documentation accompanying the payment.
REQUIRED
For each of the 10 weaknesses, identify the resulting risk(s) on the financial statements.
Note: Number each risk clearly.

[17]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Risks
[19 marks]
You are the internal auditor on the audit of Protector (Pty) Ltd (Protector), a company that manufactures a wide
range of protective cases and screens for mobile devices. Protector sells the cases and screens to a number of
wholesalers and retailers around the country. The company has a February year-end.
The following is an extract of the key points obtained during a discussion held with Mr Sijeke, the inventory
controller; Mr Jordan, the chief buyer; and Ms Carter, the financial accountant in September of the current year:
Extract
The company is considering implementing a new inventory system as it has not always been able to meet
the demands of its customers. It attributes this primarily to the company’s running out of inventory on a
regular basis, which results in it not being able to process additional orders.
When an employee working on the production line notices that it is running out of a particular item of
inventory, the employee calls Mr Jordan and informs him of the need for the inventory. Mr Jordan
identifies three suppliers on the approved supplier list that are located closest to the factory and calls
them to establish how quickly they would be able to deliver the inventory required. An order is placed with
the supplier that is able to deliver the inventory the fastest. If the supplier requires a purchase order, Mr
Jordan completes one and faxes or emails it to the sales representative at the supplier.
There have been times when the production of certain products has been stopped temporarily while the
company waited for the inventory to arrive at the factory.
For orders where the production has stopped as a result of running out of
inventory
The inventory is received in the west wing of the warehouse by Mr Sijeke. The inventory is offloaded from
the delivery vehicle and Mr Sijeke performs a quick inspection of the inventory to make sure that it is not
damaged. The employee who informed Mr Jordan of the inventory needed is contacted and told to collect
the inventory immediately so that production can continue.
For normal orders

The inventory is received in the west wing of the warehouse by Mr Sijeke. The inventory is offloaded from
the delivery vehicle and Mr Sijeke performs a thorough check to see if the inventory is not damaged. The
inventory is stored in specific locations in the warehouse until a request for the inventory is received. The
employee who identifies the need for the inventory contacts Mr Sijeke, who in turn has the inventory
picked up and delivered to the section of the factory where the employee who contacted Mr Sijeke is
located.
Recording
The creditors clerk records the credit purchase in the accounting records using the information noted on
the invoice that is received from the supplier. Where a purchase order was used, the creditors clerk
compares the information on the purchase order to the information on the invoice. If a difference is noted,
the creditors clerk contacts the supplier to identify the cause for the discrepancy. If a discrepancy is still
noted after the call, the creditors clerk records the credit purchase in the accounting records using the
information located on the purchase order.
Payment of creditors
The creditors clerk performs a creditor’s reconciliation on a monthly basis and uses the reconciliation as
the basis to determine the amount to be paid to the supplier. The creditor’s reconciliation as well as
supporting documentation is presented to Ms Carter for review. If Ms Carter is satisfied that the creditor’s
reconciliation has been performed properly and if she agrees with the amount to be paid to the supplier,
she signs the creditor’s reconciliation and a cheque made out to the supplier. The supporting
documentation and the creditor’s reconciliation are returned to the creditors clerk who is responsible for
cancelling the supporting documentation and posting the cheque to the supplier.
The company intends moving away from cheque payments to electronic funds transfers in the next
financial year.
REQUIRED
Describe the business risks affecting the purchases and payments cycle at Protector (Pty) Ltd.
[19]
Question 7 LEVEL 2
Risks and assertions
[20 marks]
Sky Paints (Pty) Ltd (Sky Paints) manufactures a range of household paints, for which raw materials in the form of
resin, pigment, solvent chemicals and additives are sourced from various local suppliers and stored after receipt in
the factory stores until needed in the production process. A procurement department is responsible for submitting
purchase orders to suppliers, while an accounting department records all purchases and related liabilities. Controls in
place in Sky Paints’ purchases and payments cycle include the following:
On a weekly basis, the factory manager, together with the cost accountant, determines what the expected need for
raw materials in the production process will be for the week ahead. This production budget is reviewed and
authorised by the senior production manager.
For orders placed with suppliers of raw materials, the purchase order must first be approved by the procurement
manager, who requires a cross-referenced purchase requisition before he signs the order as evidence of his
approval.
The procurement manager regularly checks whether the sequence of purchase orders is intact, at the same time
matching each purchase order to a goods received note. He also investigates missing purchase orders, or where an
order does not have a corresponding goods received note.
Buyers in the procurement department are required to obtain at least three quotations from the company’s list of
authorised suppliers before submitting the purchase order for approval by the procurement manager.
When raw materials are delivered by suppliers and received at the factory stores, a receiving clerk scans a barcode
attached to the outside of the packaging. As the materials are being scanned, the computer system automatically
allocates the items to a materials received note containing the item code, a description and the quantity received.
As part of year-end procedures, a senior staff member in the accounting department matches the date of recorded
purchases as per the accounting records, with the date manually written by the receiving clerk on each purchase’s
corresponding materials received note. (Note: The control is necessary, as Sky Paints’s purchases are not recorded
concurrently with the generating of materials received notes.)
Item prices are pre-arranged with suppliers and stored in an item price masterfile. It is not possible for accounting
staff to change prices in the masterfile and a strict control system over item price amendments is in place.
The accounts payable clerk in the accounting department performs monthly supplier statement reconciliations.
The financial manager reviews the reconciliations before payments to suppliers are made.
REQUIRED
Describe the risks that each of the above internal controls seeks to mitigate, and state the financial statement
assertion(s) affected by each risk. Where no assertion is affected, indicate whether or not the risk is operational in
nature.
[20]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
[23 marks]
You are one of the internal auditors of Africa Flight Delight Ltd (AFD), a company distributing food to airlines
throughout South Africa. The company is fully computerised. One of the directors, Mr T. Mofokeng, approached
you to evaluate their purchase cycle (excluding recording of payments). He informed you that, despite the overall
effective internal controls that are in place, the company is still facing difficulties concerning its purchasing system,
which has resulted in substantial financial losses to the company.
On request of a detailed system description on the purchases cycle of AFD, you received the following working
paper:
PREPARED BY: D.J. MOLEFE (AUDIT SENIOR)

REVIEWED BY: A. DU PLESSIS (AUDIT MANAGER)
COMPANY: AFRICA FLIGHT DELIGHT LTD
SUBJECT: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ON PURCHASES
Purchase requisition
Mr Naidoo (storeman) is responsible for preparing the purchase requisitions every month. Previously,
he would telephonically request from the three airlines to which food is distributed the number of food
packages required. Mr Naidoo has now simplified the process by using budgets based on market
research. As a result, he completes the purchase requisition based on these budget figures, files the
original requisition in a pending file and sends the other copy to the procurement department. Owing to
Mr Naidoo’s workload, he sometimes allows junior warehouse staff members to fill in the purchase
requisitions and send them to the procurement department on his behalf.
Mr Naidoo commented that, although the process has been simplified, AFD still overestimates the
quantity of food required, which results in an excess number of food packages being prepared, not sold
and eventually exceeding their sell-by date.
Ordering goods from suppliers
Ms Stumke (buying clerk) electronically processes a purchase order based on the requisition received
from Mr Naidoo or the junior staff member. All calculations on the purchase order are automatically
performed by the computer, which also performs edit checks on the input of data and automatically
addresses the purchase order to the correct suppliers based on the list of pre-approved suppliers
stored in the supplier masterfile. The computer also assigns sequential numbers to all system purchase
orders thus created by Ms Stumke, who then files the purchase order sequentially so as to allow a
senior staff member to follow up on any missing purchase orders on a regular basis. The other copies
of the purchase order are then distributed as follows:
Copy 1 is sent to the supplier.
Copy 2 is sent to the receiving bay of the warehouse.
Copy 3 is filed as mentioned above.
Copy 4 is sent to the accounting department.
Copy 5 is sent to the requisition department.
Receiving goods from suppliers

Mr Swart (goods receiving clerk) is authorised to receive goods at the receiving bay of AFD, which is a
separate, fenced-off area manned by a security guard at the main entrance who inspects every delivery
vehicle that enters or exits. Accompanied by the delivery personnel, he also inspects supporting
documentation. Recently, security cameras were installed to mitigate the theft of goods.
Once they have delivered the goods, the supplier’s delivery personnel hand the delivery note to Mr
Swart. He scrutinises the note for the reference number of the purchase order, which he enters into the
computer. Once the computer has generated an on-screen goods received note (GRN) with standing
data of the order, Mr Swart scans all the boxes received from the supplier, whereupon the computer
automatically indicates any outstanding items, which are indicated as ‘not received’ on the electronic
purchase order. Mr Swart also writes ‘not received’ next to the relevant items on the supplier’s delivery
note. If any items scanned do not match the purchase order, the computer raises a warning and Mr
Swart does not accept these items. As an additional check, Ms Stumke assists Mr Swart in checking a
sample of the boxes scanned in order to perform a quality check and to ensure agreement between the
description on the box and its contents. Ms Stumke also has access to the inventory system and can
generate a GRN if necessary (e.g. if Mr Swart were off sick).
Mr Swart is also responsible for distributing goods received notes to the relevant departments:
Copy 1 is sent to the receiving bay.
Copy 2 accompanies the goods during transfer to the warehouse.
Copy 3 is sent to the accounting department.
Copy 4 is sent to the procurement department.
Recording of purchase
Mr Louw is responsible for reviewing the recording process of purchases in the purchases journal after
it has been generated electronically by the computer. The computer application implements the
recording of a purchase based on the purchase order and goods received note generated electronically
once Mr Swart and Ms Stumke have scanned in the goods received.
The computer application automatically uses quantities on the system-stored GRN and the price per
unit entered by Mr Louw (obtained from supplier-approved price lists) in order to record final prices in
the purchase journal. Nobody checks the values entered by Mr Louw, as they feel he is intelligent and
would notice any error.
Mr Louw reviews the electronic recording of the purchase and the corresponding liability (creditor), and
ensures that the computer system matches the following documents:
The purchase order
The delivery note from the supplier, which has been scanned in
The goods received note
An invoice from the supplier, which has been scanned in
Payment preparation
Mr Vosi, the accounts payable clerk responsible for payment preparation, files all statements received
from suppliers in a pending file, which task he leaves until the end of the month, if possible, or
otherwise until he finds himself with time on his hands. Mr Vosi then performs a creditors reconciliation
on-screen, where he enters the balance outstanding, as per the supplier’s statement, into the
computerised system, where it is compared to the supplier’s balance as per the computerised
masterfile. Mr Vosi follows up manually on reconciling the items.
He is aware that most of the time AFD forfeits the discount that they would have received had they paid
within 30 days, but has explained that he is struggling with the work overload, and believes the problem
will be resolved in the future.
Mr Vosi then accesses the supplier payment module on the computer in order to create the payment.
He manually types in the name of the supplier that needs to be paid, based on the creditors statements
received. The computer subtracts this amount from the creditors reconciliation saved in the masterfile,
whereupon it automatically creates a remittance advice for each supplier needing to be paid.
Ms Barnard (senior bookkeeper), who obtains all the relevant documentation received from Mr Vosi,
performs the necessary checks. She then accesses the suppliers payment module on the computer
system with her own password and indicates that the supplier is ready for payment.
Mr Vosi then prints the payment schedule, attaches the supplier’s statements and reconciliation, as well
as the relevant goods received note, the supplier invoice, the supplier delivery note and the purchase
order for each purchase, making up the balance represented for payment.
Paying the supplier
Mrs Botha (financial manager) receives the relevant documentation from Ms Barnard once the latter
has created the ready-for-payment notice. Mrs Botha then reviews the relevant documentation of the
payment that needs to be made. If she agrees with it, she logs onto AFD’s bank account using her
username and password and creates an ad hoc payment. She then manually types in the details of the
supplier, the supplier’s bank account details and the amount that needs to be transferred, and clicks on
‘pay’.
REQUIRED
Identify and explain the weaknesses in the above purchases system. For each weakness identified, you should also
recommend improvements to be implemented by Africa Flight Delight. Your report should address computerised
controls only. Provide your solution using the following tabular format:
NUMBER IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN WEAKNESS RECOMMENDATION
[23]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
[23 marks]
Mystic Falls Beverages (Pty) Ltd (Mystic Falls) is a distributor of a popular beverage, ‘O’ Positive. It purchases its
beverages from a supplier called Pure Inc. and various other local manufacturers, and thereafter distributes the
beverages throughout South Africa. It is the only supplier in South Africa of ‘O’ Positive.
Mystic Falls has an office and warehouse in Saldanha, Western Cape. The beverages are shipped by sea and
delivered in South Africa at the port of Saldanha. The beverages are then brought to the warehouse by Cape
Winelands Transport where they are stored until they are sold to customers in South Africa. Mystic Falls is a
cash-only business and does not provide any credit.
Mystic Falls has been in existence for the last three years servicing its numerous customers, but has had no
formal control processes in place and has therefore been avoiding the external auditors. The chief executive officer,
Damian Salvatore, has decided to legitimise the business and get control processes in place before the external
auditors arrive at year-end, 31 March 20X1. Because Mystic Falls does not have any control processes in place, you
were approached to provide consulting services.
As you were required to assess all the control processes in Mystic Falls, you decided to start off with the
purchases and the inventory management processes.
You had a meeting with the chief operating officer, Steve Salvatore, the brother of the CEO, and jotted down the
following notes of the purchases process:
Owing to the long lead times to receive inventory, Bonita Bennett, the administration clerk, places an order via
telephone to Pure Inc. to purchase the inventory. This is based on the amount of inventory Mystic Falls will
require to service its customers for at least six months.
The quantity that Bonita Bennett orders is based on her instruction from the Salvatore brothers.
Once the beverages arrive and are delivered to the warehouse, the goods are counted by Jim Gilbert, the
warehouse clerk, and stored in the warehouse until they are sold.
After Jim Gilbert stores the beverages, he takes the documents he receives to Marc Donovan to update the
inventory management spreadsheet that he created in Excel to manage the entire inventory.
Customers place orders for beverages with Carol Forbes. After receiving an order, she calls Jim Gilbert and
instructs him to send Mystic Falls’s driver to deliver the beverages to the customer.
As soon as the driver leaves the warehouse to deliver the beverages, Jim Gilbert calls Marc Donovan to update the
inventory management spreadsheet with the quantity of beverages that has left the warehouse.
After your meeting, you went to your temporary office in Saldanha and analysed the situation. You are aware that
the company’s only assets are the inventory and cash in the safe, as the Salvatore brothers do not have confidence in
the South African banking system. All premises in Saldanha are leased and Pure Inc. is not a creditor as debt is
settled to a trust, the Original Family Trust, once inventory arrives at the Mystic Falls premises.
REQUIRED
1. Identify the weaknesses in the purchases process based on the scenario above. (8)
2. For each weakness identified, recommend an improvement(s) to address the identified weakness. (15)
[23]
Question 10 LEVEL 2
Recommendations
[12 marks]
Your audit client, Universal Ltd (Universal), deals mainly in the retailing of electronic equipment sourced from
various local and international suppliers. The company owns a central warehouse in Gauteng, from which it
distributes its products to its stores around South Africa.
The company follows a set procedure when receiving goods:

The goods receiving department receives a copy of an order confirmation from the ordering department.
The goods receiving department of the central warehouse has a number of goods receiving clerks working in the
warehouse.
Upon arrival of the supplier’s delivery vehicle, goods are offloaded into the goods receiving area.
Any available goods receiving clerk then obtains the delivery note (two copies) from the supplier’s truck driver
and checks that the quantity of the received goods corresponds with the supplier’s delivery note.
The goods are then transferred from the goods receiving department to the warehouse.
REQUIRED
Recommend improvements to the current receiving of goods function of Universal at its central warehouse.
[12]
Question 11 LEVEL 2
Key controls and assertions
[6 marks]
Dexford Ltd (Dexford), a paper-manufacturing client based in the Western Cape, has established a division
publishing magazines and textbooks. One of the current projects on which it is embarking is the publication of an
educational magazine on auditing. Because your audit firm has been engaged in Dexford’s audit for the past three
years, the editor in the publishing division has requested assistance in evaluating a case scenario based on the system
implemented in his division. You may assume that there is no independence issue that might arise from your
participation.
A reputable academic in the field of auditing has supplied the editor with the following definition of key internal
controls: they provide reasonable assurance that material misstatements in the financial statements will be prevented,
or detected and corrected, and respond to risks that could result in misstatements in the financial statements that are
considered material.
Case study
Management style
The division’s management is of the opinion that its recruitment process is of such a high standard that
the staff it employs are responsible, which ensures that the company does not have to supervise and
police them. The purchases and inventory system is open for all staff to access; as a result, all staff can
add and delete masterfile and transaction data.
Requisitioning and ordering of goods and services

When inventory is needed, an email is sent to the buyer, who creates an order and emails it to the
supplier of his choice. The order is printed and filed sequentially. Management does not believe that the
system should include an order number, as it might take up more space on the database. The
procurement manager is responsible for the manufacturing divisions’ orders; he only follows up on
inventory not delivered before year-end.
Receiving of goods and services, and recording of purchases

The delivery note is signed by the receiving clerk after he has checked the quality and agreed the quantity
and description of the received inventory to the details on the supplier’s delivery note. A sequentially
numbered goods received note (GRN) is prepared and printed for all inventory received based on the
actual quantity received before the goods are transferred to the warehouse. The warehouse clerk is
responsible for receiving the inventory items in the warehouse, when they are being transferred from
receiving. He compares details of the items transferred to the details as per the GRN and signs the GRN
after the comparison has been completed.
On a weekly basis, the buyer prints a report that lists deliveries and ordered goods, and follows up on any
long-outstanding orders.
The accounts payable clerk keeps a file containing all the GRNs received from the warehouse, in
numerical order. Upon receipt of the supplier invoices, the invoices are matched to the corresponding
GRN and recorded in the purchases journal, whereafter they are automatically recorded in the creditors
ledger, the inventory system and respective general ledger accounts by the system. The senior
accountant regularly reviews the GRN file for overdue GRNs for which invoices have not been received
and follows up on them.
REQUIRED
Identify and discuss the key internal controls, taking into account the information above, which the auditor can rely
on in order to meet the assertions. Ignore those internal controls that are important for management only. Your
answer should be presented in such a manner that the key internal controls are discussed per purchase assertion.
[6]
ASSERTION: KEY INTERNAL CONTROL
1. Only genuine purchases are recorded. (Occurrence) (1)
Goods received notes are prepared based on actual inventory delivered. (1)
2. Purchases are recorded at the correct amounts. (Accuracy) (1)
The warehouse clerk compares the details of the items transferred from receiving to the warehouse
to the details as per the GRN. (1)
3. Purchases have been correctly classified, summarised and posted by the accounting system. (Accuracy) (1)
Purchase transactions are automatically recorded in the creditors ledger, the inventory system and
respective general ledger accounts by the system. (1)
4. All purchases transactions are recorded and none has been omitted. (Completeness) (1)
The senior accountant regularly reviews the GRN file for overdue GRNs for which invoices have not
been received and follows up on them. (1)
Notes:
The first thing you had to determine was the assertions relating to the purchases, thus the transaction assertions.
In addition, you had to deal only with key internal controls, and a hint was given in the required stating that you
had to ignore those internal controls that are important for management only.
If the required asks you to present your answer in a specific format, present your answer accordingly. In this
instance, you had to present your answer according to the assertions.
Question 12 LEVEL 2
Key controls and control objectives
[16 marks]
The following is a description of the purchase system in use at Funky Toys (Pty) Ltd:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CONTROLS

NUMBER
1 Funky Toys purchases only from approved suppliers. The production manager
and senior buyer will review all new supplier applications, based on the suitability
of their prices and quality of their products. If suppliers are considered suitable,
both the production manager and senior buyer will authorise the new supplier by
signing off the new supplier application form.
2 All approved suppliers are stored on the company’s computer system based on
an authorised new supplier application form. Only the financial manager and
production manager are allowed to capture any new approved suppliers on the
computer system. Both managers have unique usernames and passwords
assigned to them in order to conduct this procedure.
3 The senior accountant in the accounts department will print out the list of
approved suppliers after being informed by the managers of any changes to the
list.
4 The senior accountant distributes the list to all the purchase clerks on the floor.
5 The new suppliers normally send Funky Toys some documents on interesting
special offers provided, as well as their official price list and terms and conditions
on deliveries.
6 All purchases made by Funky Toys are based on an authorised requisition. The
system requires the number of an authorised internal requisition before allowing
buyers to initiate the purchase order. The system is also programmed to select
the appropriate supplier from the pre-approved suppliers stored on the entity’s
computer system.
7 The computer automatically assigns sequential numbers to all system purchase
orders created by Funky Toys.
8 The buyers of Funky Toys will complete the on-screen purchase orders by filling
in the minimum information not already sourced from the requisition.
9 Once the buyers have completed the on-screen purchase order, the computer will
automatically check all calculations on the purchase order. The computer will also
conduct edit checks on input data.
10 The senior buyer will print a log of all purchase orders that are without a
corresponding goods receiving note (GRN) number to follow up on unfilled
orders.
11 The receiving area is a clearly designated area which is safely secured.
12 Once goods are delivered by the relevant supplier, the goods receiving clerk will
obtain the purchase order reference number from the supplier delivery note. The
goods receiving clerk will then key in the purchase order number on his/her tablet
that will link it to the purchase order. The computer will also automatically
populate an on-screen GRN.
13 The receiving clerk will then inspect the quality and the quantity of goods received
against the supplier delivery note and purchase order. If the goods receiving clerk
is satisfied with the delivery, he/she will tick off the items on the GRN as being
received.
14 The computer automatically creates sequentially numbered GRNs upon the
capture of details of goods received by authorised goods receiving staff.
15 Goods received are then sent to the warehouse, where the warehouse clerk will
check the goods received against the GRN.
REQUIRED
Prepare a report, addressed to the audit manager, with reference to the above description of Funky Toys, in which
you report on the following matters: (1)
1. Identify, by stating the appropriate reference number, the key controls you want to rely on to obtain audit
evidence about the validity, accuracy and completeness of purchases; and (7)
2. State the control objective being addressed by each key control. (7)
Present your answer in table format, as follows: (1)
Reference number (e.g. 1) Control objective
[16]
Question 13 LEVEL 3
[30 marks]
You are the auditor of Plumb Supplies (Pty) Ltd, a company that manufactures a wide range of plumbing supplies
for household and commercial purposes. The manufacturing plant is located in Epping and has a December
year-end.
The following extract from the purchases and payments cycle was obtained through discussions held with the
inventory controller, chief buyer and chief financial officer:
Extract
Ordering of goods
When an employee identifies that the inventory used by his/her team is running low, he/she completes a
requisition on the company’s intranet from the computer located in the breakroom. The requisition is
stored on a requisition pending file. An email notification of the requisition is sent to the employee’s
manager. The manager logs onto the inventory system by using his unique user ID and password and
identifies whether or not the inventory levels are low. He has read-only access to the inventory file. He
inspects the existing process costing schedules to identify if the company requires the item of inventory
being requisitioned in order to fulfil orders for the next three months. If he identifies that a need does exist,
he digitally authorises the requisition and it is moved to an approved requisition file.
A notification of the approved requisition is sent to a buyer in the buying department who logs onto the
system and inspects the approved requisition. The buyer contacts three suppliers on the approved
supplier list for quotes and requests them to email the quotes to [email protected]. Once the
three quotes are emailed to the buyer, he scans them and loads them onto the buyers system. He
inspects the quotes and determines the one which best meets the company’s need. He completes an
electronic purchase order on the buying system which is sent to the chief buyer for approval. The chief
buyer logs onto the system and inspects the purchase order. He compares it with the three scanned
quotes and approved electronic requisition, and once he is satisfied, he digitally authorises the purchase.
The buyer receives an email notification that the chief buyer has approved the purchase order and that
the order can be placed by the buyer with the supplier via email.
Receiving of goods
The goods are delivered to the goods receiving area of the warehouse. On arrival of the goods at the
warehouse, the goods receiving clerk asks the driver for the company name and purchase order number.
He logs onto the system with his mobile tablet computer by using his unique user ID and password. He
has read-only access to the purchase order. He pulls the purchase order up on the mobile tablet
computer and proceeds to receive the goods being delivered.
Once the goods are offloaded, the goods receiving clerk counts the goods and inspects them to see if
they are damaged and if they agree with the purchase order.
The goods receiving clerk prepares a delivery note on his mobile tablet computer and both he and the
driver sign it. Once the delivery note is signed, a notification is sent to the credit clerk stating that the
goods have been delivered. The email address to which the buyer sent the purchase order is immediately
emailed with a copy of the goods receiving note.
The goods are moved from the receiving area to the storage section of the warehouse. A transfer request
is signed by the goods receiving clerk and the warehouse clerk on the goods receiving clerk’s tablet after
they have both counted the items being transferred.
Once the goods are stored in the warehouse, the manager who requested the inventory is informed by
the warehouse clerk that the inventory is available and can be collected. The goods are transferred to
production after the manager requesting the goods and the warehouse clerk count the goods and sign the
transfer request on the warehouse clerk’s mobile tablet device.
Recording of creditors
Once the creditors clerk receives an email notification that the goods have been received, he/she logs
onto the system to view the goods received note. He/she has read-only access to the inventory system.
He/she compares the goods received note, the approved purchase order, the approved requisition and
the invoice for any inconsistencies and signs the invoice as proof that he/she has compared the
documents. The creditors clerk re-performs the calculation on the invoice and initials the invoice prior to
recording the purchase on the system.
Where the detail on the invoice is different to the detail recorded on the goods received note, the client is
contacted via email to find out why the difference arose. If the client is adamant that the invoice is correct,
the difference is placed on the creditor reconciliation as a reconciling difference.
The purchase is recorded on the system by the creditors clerk and reviewed by the financial accountant,
who digitally authorises the process.
Payment of creditors
The creditors clerk performs a monthly creditors reconciliation.
The creditors reconciliation and the invoices to be paid are handed to the accountant for review. The
accountant inspects the invoices and re-performs the logic of the reconciliation and signs the
reconciliation as proof of the checks that he performed.
The company has a policy of only making payments to suppliers via electronic funds transfer.
The financial accountant loads all suppliers that the company has had dealings with for more than three
months as approved beneficiaries on the company’s bank account. The chief financial officer reviews the
bank details of all beneficiaries that the financial accountant has loaded onto the company’s electronic
funds transfer (EFT) account by inspecting the documentation (e.g. original bank letter) used by the
financial accountant.
Once she approves of the details, they are stored on the company’s EFT account. She files a report on a
weekly basis, which she signs, indicating all new beneficiaries.
The financial accountant loads all of the payments on the company’s bank account. The chief financial
officer reviews and approves the payment after she checks a sample of the documentation (e.g. creditor’s
reconciliation and invoices). She signs off the documentation she has reviewed.
She hands all of the supporting documents back to the creditors clerk for filing purposes.
REQUIRED
Identify the key internal controls for the purchases and payments cycle included in the above system description and
design the appropriate audit tests to determine whether or not the control is functioning as indicated by management.
[30]
Question 14 LEVEL 2
Tests of controls
[17 marks]
You have been the external auditor of Olympus (Pty) Ltd (Olympus), manufacturers of Greek statues, since the
incorporation of the company five years ago. The company’s year-end is 30 September. The company’s purchases
and payments system operates as follows:
DEPARTMENT PERSON OPERATIONS
Production area; Production Once he has determined what raw materials (or products) are
purchases foreman; needed, the production foreman prepares a pre-numbered
department purchases purchase requisition. When approved, the requisition is sent to
clerk; the purchases department, where a purchases clerk prepares a
purchases pre-numbered purchase order in triplicate. The purchases
manager manager sequence checks the order before signing it. The top
copy is sent to the receiving department, while the third copy is
filed with the requisition.
The purchases clerk, who is responsible for checking the
invoices, agrees the prices and terms to the original order, and
confirms the quantities against the GRN. He checks the
calculations and additions on the invoice, whereupon he initials
the invoice, which is sent to the payments department.
Receiving Receiving Once the raw materials have been received, the receiving clerk
department clerk checks the purchase order and the quality of the goods
delivered, and compares the details of the order against the
physical inventory. Thereafter, he prepares a pre-numbered
GRN in duplicate. He also signs the GRN, one copy of which is
sent with the goods to the storeman, while the other is returned
to the purchases department.
Mail room Clerk On receipt of the invoice, the mail room clerk sends it directly to
the purchases clerk in the purchases department.
Payments Purchases The invoice is recorded by the clerk in the purchases journal
department clerk; and filed according to the due date, at which time the
accountant; accountant issues a number of pre-numbered blank cheques,
financial as required, to the payments department.
director
When the cheques have been made out, the related invoices
are stamped as having been paid and are handed, together
with the cheques, to the accountant, who checks the sequence
of the cheques as well as whether all invoices have been
marked ‘paid’. A cheque-signing machine then signs the
cheques in the presence of the financial director.
Accounting Clerk The cheques are handed to the accounting department, where
department the clerk records them in the payments journal. Thereafter, they
are sent back to the payments department, where the payment
date and the cheque number are recorded in the purchases
journal next to the entry of the relevant invoice.
REQUIRED
Formulate the tests of controls that you will perform relating to the purchases and payments system for raw materials
and/or goods.
[17]
Question 15 LEVEL 2
Test of controls and control objectives
[13 marks]
Pinefresh (Pty) Ltd (Pinefresh) is a large wholesaler of commercial and household cleaning products. The company
is audited by GPT Inc., which is currently planning the audit of Pinefresh’s 20X1 financial year.
Below is an extract from a system description prepared and updated by a GPT Inc. staff member. It pertains to
the purchases cycle at Pinefresh. All key controls are in bold.
Extract
When goods are received from suppliers at Pinefresh’s central warehouse, the receiving clerk on duty
prepares a goods received note (GRN) regarding the quantity, description and quality of items received.
The GRN is made out sequentially and in multiple copies, one of which is sent to the accounting
department together with a copy of the supplier’s delivery note.
On a regular basis, a bookkeeper in the accounting department records purchases in the purchases
journal from the details contained on the GRN. On a weekly basis, the assistant accounting manager
(AAM) reviews the purchases journal to:
check the sequence of the GRNs and to follow up on missing numbers
ensure a purchase order exists for the purchase entry
perform a check on a sample of purchase entries by comparing the recorded details to the supporting
GRN and supplier delivery note.
Upon finalisation of the above review, the AAM signs the purchases journal below the last purchase entry
reviewed.
At the end of each month, the bookkeeper posts the totals in the purchases journal to the general ledger
account for creditors and purchases. The bookkeeper also performs a reconciliation between the total
balances as per the creditors ledger and the creditors control account in the general ledger. The AAM
reviews the reconciliation and signs it as evidence of the review having taken place. According to the
AAM, he signed only 10 of the 12 reconciliations during the 20X1 financial year, even though he reviewed
them all.
For each supplier in the creditors ledger, a second bookkeeper performs a supplier statement
reconciliation between the statement from the supplier and the balance owing as per the creditors ledger.
Each reconciliation is then signed by the AAM as evidence of his having agreed the respective balances
to the statement and creditors ledger and having scrutinised the statement for any unusual items.
REQUIRED
For each key control in the scenario (bold), formulate the audit procedure the auditor should perform to test the
control. For each test of control, also state the control objective(s) being addressed by the procedure.
[13]
INTRODUCTION
Refer to the guidance and the example questions contained in Chapter 6, as the principles and the approach remain
the same.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
Purpose and control objectives
[11 marks]
Bicyclycy (Pty) Ltd (Bicyclycy), a company that manufactures mountain bikes, stores parts (chains, wheels, etc.)
ordered from different suppliers in the raw material warehouse. The assembly factory requests parts from the raw
material warehouse as and when needed. Assembled mountain bikes are transferred in batches of 20 from the factory
to the finished goods warehouse.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the purpose of the inventory and production cycle. (2)
2. List and discuss the control objectives of Bicyclycy’s inventory and production cycle. (9)
[11]
Question 2 141
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Control objectives
[8 marks]
Below is a list of controls that could be implemented by the management of various businesses to design a system of
internal control in the production and inventory cycle:
1. Counters should have clear instructions to keep obsolete, damaged or slow-moving inventory separately.
2. Branch managers must place an order at the central inventory warehouse by making use of a pre-printed standard
order form.
3. With dispatch, the security guard must compare the items being sent with the information according to the
delivery note and should not allow any items that do not appear on the documentation to leave the premises.
4. The staff’s personal belongings must be examined when they leave the premises.
5. Logs are kept for all changes to the inventory masterfile.
6. The warehouse reviewer and the branch managers, respectively, must review the number sequence of order and
delivery documents and follow up on missing numbers.
7. Suppliers should be informed that an inventory count is taking place on that specific day and, where possible,
goods should not be delivered that day.
8. When the branch manager receives the goods, he/she must compare the quality and quantity of the items with the
delivery note and order form, and initial/sign as proof of duty performed.
9. The storeroom must only have one entrance. Any doors or windows on the outside must have security gates/be
closed with iron bars.
10. A price masterfile should be created on which the current sales price of each inventory item is stored (per
inventory code).
REQUIRED
For each of the internal controls stated above, list the main control objective achieved by each.
[8]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Functional areas
[10 marks]
Maiza (Pty) Ltd (Maiza), a South African company that buys maize from farmers, stores the cereal in silos before it
is transferred to the mill. Mr Grain is responsible for determining how much maize needs to be bought from farmers,
as well as when maize has to be milled and the quantities involved in each operation. Once the maize has been
processed, the meal is poured into bags, which are then transferred to the warehouse, where they are stored awaiting
transportation to Maiza’s customers.
REQUIRED
1. List the six functional areas of Maiza’s inventory and production cycle. (5)
2. For each functional area listed, describe how it is applied at Maiza. (5)
Note: Answer the questions in a tabular format.

[10]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses
[13 marks]
Candlelight (Pty) Ltd (Candlelight), which has a 30 June year-end, asked you, as an external consultant, to review
the company’s year-end inventory count procedures.
During the count, you noted the following:

Candlelight has a large warehouse and an inventory value in terms of quantities. As a result, only the high-value
items, which constitute 80% of the total inventory balance, have been selected to be counted.
During the month of May, the company’s inventory management team had a planning meeting for the year-end
inventory count. At this meeting, they discussed:
– the date of the count
– the staff who would be performing the count
– who the inventory count controller, the supervisor and the counters would be
– the stationery required for the day of the count.
All this information was printed and prepared prior to the count.
During the inventory count, which took place on 1 July:
– inventory was despatched for delivery to customers and deliveries were accepted by suppliers
– the inventory count controller issued the three count teams (made up of two members each) with pre-numbered
count sheets for the selected inventory to be counted
– each team counted the selected inventory items twice
– one team member physically counted the inventory, while the other recorded in pen the quantity counted
– for the second count, they exchanged tasks
– in order to enhance the controlling of the two counts, the count sheets were designed to allow for both counts to
be entered onto the same sheet
– all goods were tagged as evidence of their having been counted.
After the count had been completed, the inventory count controller sent the count sheets to the inventory
administration clerk for capturing and comparison with the inventory system. If variances were found, the teams
were notified and sent back to recount the relevant inventory item(s).
REQUIRED
Identify the weaknesses in internal controls of the inventory count evident from the notes that you made.
[13]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
Risks
[10 marks]
Stallion (Pty) Ltd (Stallion), a company manufacturing catalytic convertors for an international motor vehicle
company, has its factory in Cape Town. Once the convertors have been manufactured, they are shipped
free-on-board from Cape Town to the US.
The two key components of the cost of the convertors are:
1. the steel, the price of which fluctuates weekly
2. labour (there has been labour unrest in the motor manufacturing sector over the last few years, which has put
pressure on the industry).
Inventory is held until a shipping container has been filled, which is done under the terms of Stallion’s agreement
with its American customer in order to keep their transportation costs down. However, the customer charges
warehouse rental for the storage and security of the goods up until the convertors are loaded onto the ship.
REQUIRED
With reference to the information provided:
1. list all possible risks that Stallion could face with regard to the manufacture and sale of convertors to its foreign
customer (7)
2. list all possible risks that the foreign customer could face with regard to the purchase of convertors from Stallion.
(3)
[10]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Weaknesses and risks
[8 marks]
Flower Power (Pty) Ltd (Flower Power), a wholesale company based in Cape Town that sells artificial flowers and
arrangements to companies, buys its raw materials in bulk. Owing to staff shortages, the company’s procurement
process currently has a backlog of three months. Orders are placed without supporting documents when the
procurement clerk contacts suppliers telephonically for orders below R100 000. In terms of Flower Power’s
procurement policy, the procurement clerk is allowed to contact a single supplier.
Goods are delivered to Flower Power’s central warehouse, which has a secure receiving area. Once they have
been offloaded, they are left in a demarcated area until a purchase order has been loaded by the procurement clerk.
This allows the goods to be loaded onto the inventory management system by the warehouse manager.
Flower Power has increased its standing in the market as a result of the competitive prices it pays to suppliers,
which allow them to sell their manufactured goods at attractive prices. As the company aims to be the leader in the
market, it would like to tighten up all its internal controls.
REQUIRED
1. Identify the internal control weaknesses evident from the information provided above. (6)
2. With reference to the weaknesses identified, describe the risk of material misstatement for the accuracy, valuation
and allocation assertion of inventory. (2)
[8]
Question 7 LEVEL 2
[15 marks]
You are the auditor of Renewable Energy (Pty) Ltd (RE). RE is a manufacturer of renewable energy products such
as solar products and heat pumps. Management has asked you to review the system of internal control. While doing
walk-through testing, you compiled the following system description:
1. The sales director informs the production manager on a Friday afternoon of which products sold well during the
previous week. Based on this, the production manager allocates responsibilities to the production department.
2. The raw materials used to produce the products are kept in the raw materials warehouse. The raw materials
warehouse has a head storeman and two other storemen working there. Whenever raw materials are needed for
production, the production foreman requests the items with verbal or written authorisation.
3. No perpetual inventory records are kept, but monthly inventory counts are done. You attended one of the
inventory counts and were satisfied with the controls surrounding the inventory count.
4. A re-order level has been set for each product. The head storeman of the raw materials warehouse compares the
inventory count sheets with the re-order levels. If the inventory according to the count is less than the re-order
levels, then a pre-numbered purchase requisition is prepared by one of the storemen and signed by the head
storeman and then sent to the purchases department.
REQUIRED
List the shortcomings in the system of internal control and make recommendations to improve the purchase, receipt,
storage and issue of raw materials.
Weaknesses Recommendations
[15]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
[13 marks]
Candlelight (Pty) Ltd (Candlelight) will be conducting a year-end inventory count for the first time. The company
has brought you in as an external consultant to review its year-end inventory count procedures. Candlelight has a 28
February year-end.
Planning meeting
During the month of February, before year-end, Candlelight’s inventory management team had a planning meeting
for the year-end inventory count. The following is discussed during the planning meeting:
When the count will take place
The staff that will be performing the counts
Who will be the inventory controller
The stationery required for the day of the count
Candlelight has a large warehouse in terms of floor space, and it has a large quantity of inventory. As a result, only
the high value items are selected to be counted, which constitute 80% of the total inventory balance.
Inventory count
The inventory count takes place on 1 March. On the day, inventory is still being dispatched out for deliveries to
customers and deliveries are being accepted from suppliers.
The inventory count controller issues the three count teams (made up of two members each) with count sheets on
the selected inventory to be counted. Each team counts the selected inventory twice. Each team member gets a
chance to count the inventory while the other team member does the recording.
The count sheets are designed to allow for both counts to be counted on the same sheet so that the count can be
better controlled. All inventories are tagged as evidence of their having been counted by the count teams. After the
count is completed by the team, the inventory count controller sends the count sheets to the inventory administration
clerk to capture and compare to the inventory system. If variances are found, the team is notified of the variances
and is sent back to recount the inventory items.
REQUIRED
1. Identify the weaknesses in the internal controls for the inventory count. (4)
2. Recommend improvements to the internal controls for the inventory count procedures. (9)
[13]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
Recommendations
[21 marks]
Glister Ltd (Glister), a company manufacturing gold and diamond jewellery for retail stores, has a standard
catalogue from which such stores can order jewellery. Appointed as the internal auditor of Glister, you have been
assigned the responsibility of reviewing the company’s internal controls over the order, receipt, storage and issue of
gold and diamonds (raw materials only). You have received the following notes on the current system:
Glister has three vaults:

Vault One (referred to hereafter as ‘the store’) is used for the storage of raw materials. The store’s staff, all of
whom are trained in the handling and the safekeeping of gold and diamonds, consists of one supervisor and four
assistants. Raw materials are removed from the store only upon the verbal authority of one of the production
foremen.
Vault Two is used for the storage of work in progress, when the jewellers are not working on a specific piece.
Vault Three is used for the storage of finished goods until they are dispatched to retail stores.
Because inventory levels are low, no perpetual inventory records are kept, and the staff do not keep records of gold
and diamonds received or issued. A monthly physical inventory count is carried out in order to compensate for this.
Procedures for this count are effective and reliable.
After the physical count, the store supervisor compares quantities counted against a predetermined order level. If
the count for a given item is below that level, the supervisor enters the inventory code on a pre-numbered requisition
list, which he then sends to the accounts payable clerk, who prepares a purchase order for a pre-determined order
quantity for each item before emailing the purchase order to the supplier from whom the item was last acquired.
When gold and diamonds ordered are delivered, they are received at the store by any available staff member.
They then count the gold and diamonds and agree the quantity to the supplier’s delivery note, which is initialled,
dated and filed in the store in case of a dispute.
REQUIRED
Make recommendations in order to mitigate the weaknesses in the ordering, receiving, storage and issuing of gold
and diamonds (raw material only). Do not list the weaknesses.
[21]
1. Ordering
a) The pre-determined order levels should be reviewed regularly by a senior staff member so that no under- or
overordering takes place. (1)
b) Prior to requisitions being made, store or production staff should confirm that the inventory (gold or diamonds)
is really needed. (1)
c) A buying function should be established in order to ensure that inventory of the highest quality, and at the best
prices, is ordered. (1)
d) The company should have an approved suppliers list to which the buyer should refer when ordering. (1)
e) Even when ordering from an approved supplier, the buyer should contact the supplier in order to confirm
availability and delivery dates. (1)
f) All requisition lists and purchase orders should be authorised by a senior staff member. (1)
g) Before the order is placed, a supervisor or senior buyer should:
i) compare the order to the requisition list for accuracy and authorisation (1)
ii) review the order for suitability of supplier, reasonableness of price, quantity and the nature of the goods on
order. (1)
h) The ordering department should file the requisition lists sequentially and review frequently the files for
requisitions that have not been cross-referenced to an order. (1)
i) A copy of the order should be filed sequentially, checked and frequently cross-referenced to goods received
notes in order to confirm that either:
i) goods ordered have not yet been received; or
ii) the pending file of orders in the receiving area have been reviewed for long-outstanding orders. (1)
2. Receiving
a) One of the stores staff (receiving clerk) should be given the task of:
i) confirming inventory received. (1)
ii) preparing a goods received note based on the actual goods received as indicated on the delivery note. (1)
He/she should not be involved in any recording functions. (1)
b) The receiving of goods should be designated to a goods receiving section that should be physically secure and
have proper access controls. (1)
c) A copy of the purchase order should be sent to the goods receiving section so that it can confirm that goods
received have in fact been ordered before receiving the goods. (1)
d) When receiving goods, the receiving clerk should inspect their quality and compare the quantity and the
description of the goods to the delivery note. (1)
e) Suppliers’ delivery notes and GRNs should be forwarded to the creditors clerk as evidence that inventory being
paid for has been received. (1)
f) On the transference of the goods to the store, the stores clerk should compare the physical goods to the goods
received note, acknowledging receipt by signing the GRN. (1)
3. Storage
a) Perpetual inventory records should be maintained so that physical counts can be compared to the theoretical
records. (1)
b) Receipts and issues of inventory should be entered into these inventory records. (1)
c) Inventory counts should be carried out frequently by the stores staff, together with an independent person;
shortages and surpluses should be reported to, and investigated by, management. Inventory cards should then
be adjusted accordingly. (1)
d) One of the stores staff (or an independent staff member) should be given the task of maintaining the perpetual
inventory, and should have no responsibility for either the receiving or the counting of inventory. (1)
4. Issues
a) No issues should be made without a written issue note authorised by one of the production foremen. (1)
b) A copy of each issue note should be forwarded to the costing or accounting department for production records.
5. General (1)
5.
a) Purchase orders and issue notes should be pre-numbered. (1)
b) The sequence of all purchase orders and issue notes should be accounted for. (1)
Notes:
The starting point for answering a recommendation question, in which the weaknesses are not required, is first to
identify the weaknesses (but you do not have to include them in your answer) and then to formulate
recommendations to address the identified weaknesses.
An important aspect is the way in which a recommendation is formulated. You will see that each of the
recommendations listed above contain the word ‘should’.
Question 10 LEVEL 2
Key controls
[4 marks]
You are the audit senior on the audit of Canfruta Ltd (Canfruta), a company that cans fresh fruit bought directly from
farmers. The company distributes the cans to numerous retail shops across South Africa.
A first-year articles clerk has summarised the controls over inventory at Canfruta, but is unsure which controls are
key and which are not. Below is an extract from the summarised controls:
Extract
CONTROL
1 All access to the computerised inventory system is controlled with unique user ID codes and
passwords.
2 All inventory documents (manual or computerised) are pre-numbered.
3 Canfruta has a 24-hour call centre, which handles queries relating only to when orders can be
expected to be delivered, available to its customers.
4 All inventory items are counted monthly and the actual quantity at hand is compared to the quantity
per the perpetual inventory records. Any discrepancies are followed up and corrected, if necessary.
5 All amendments resulting from the inventory count (refer to control 4) are filled out on an inventory
amendment form authorised by the warehouse manager before being captured by an independent
administrative clerk. All amendments to the inventory file are followed up by the inventory
warehouse manager.
6 Canfruta’s delivery system determines the most cost-effective route for each delivery.
7 When information is captured onto the inventory system, appropriate edit checks are performed on
the data being captured.
REQUIRED
Identify five key controls from the summarised list provided above.
[4]
Question 11 LEVEL 3
Purpose and tests of controls
[25 marks]
You are the senior auditor on the audit of Utensils (Pty) Ltd, a mining company that manufactures a wide range of
eating utensils. The company is located in Durban and has a December financial year-end.
During the planning phase of the audit, the following internal control questionnaire was used to gain a better
understanding of the internal controls in place at the client:
Internal control questionnaire
NUMBER QUESTION PERSON RESPONSE

TO WHOM
THE
QUESTION
WAS
POSED
1 How do you ensure Mr Rabotli We perform random searches on
that employees will not (factory employees on a daily basis.
steal inventory? manager)
2 How does the Mr Rabotli Both Mr Meyer, the storage manager, and
company ensure that (factory I inspect the raw materials to be
the correct raw manager) transferred and sign the raw materials
material requested by transfer document as proof that we agree
the production with the amount transferred.
manager is transferred
from raw material
storage to the
production facility?
3 How do you ensure Mr Johnson Ms Brittany, the inventory clerk, processes
that the perpetual (financial a journal entry after each transfer of
inventory records are accountant) inventory, which updates the perpetual
accurate and kept up inventory records. I compare the journal
to date? entry with the transfer documentation,
after which I sign off the journal entry as
proof that I have reviewed the journal
entry processed.
4 How does the Mr Johnson Ms Coetzee, the cost accountant,
company ensure that (financial performs a calculation of the raw material,
the cost of the utensils accountant) labour and overheads to be allocated to
accounted for in the the inventory at the end of each month. I
accounting records is review the calculation by checking it to the
accurate? supporting documents and the
assumptions used, and sign the
calculation off as evidence that I have
inspected the accuracy thereof.
5 How do you ensure Mr Johnson Ms Coetzee prepares a journal entry
that the journal entries (financial based on her calculation and I compare
processed to update accountant) the actual costs to budgeted costs and
the inventory account follow up on material differences, after
are accurate and which I sign off the journal entry as proof
reasonable? that I agree with the accuracy and
reasonableness of the journal entry
processed.
Mr Samson We conduct monthly and year-end
(count inventory counts.
controller)
Mr Samson We give the team an instruction list and
(count have a briefing session indicating what to
controller) do during the inventory count.
Mr Samson Counters are required to sign the count
(count sheet register when they receive the count
controller) sheet and when they return it.
All count sheets are numerically

sequenced and I check the numerical
sequence of all count sheets at the end of
each count.
Mr Samson Each inventory item is counted by two
(count counters.
controller)
Each counter records the amount that
he/she has counted on the count sheet
and the two counters both sign the count
sheet as proof that they agree with the
amount recorded on the count sheet.
Inventory count supervisors perform spot
checks on a sample of inventory items
and follow up on differences noted.
10 Mr Samson Mr Abrahams, the financial manager,
(count reviews the reasons for the adjustments
controller) and signs off the adjustment sheet as
proof that he agrees with the adjustment
to be processed.
REQUIRED
For each internal control documented above, list the purpose of the control (mentioned in the response column) and
describe the test of control that you would perform to determine if the control is working as intended by
management.
[25]
Question 12 LEVEL 3
Tests of controls
[20 marks]
You are the audit manager responsible for the audit of Dreamwedding Ltd (Dreamwedding), a company founded by
wedding co-ordinator, Jane Love, when she realised that South Africa did not have a one-stop shop to assist brides
and grooms in planning and organising their dream weddings.
One of the audit team members has prepared the following list of controls that the company has implemented:
Working Paper P2
LIST OF KEY CONTROLS

1 All inventory orders must be authorised by the manager of the department requesting the order,
using his/her user ID code and password, before it can be processed. Any order exceeding R20
000 must be authorised online by the senior buyer.
2 When goods are received, both the quality and the quantity have to be checked. A hand-held
scanner is used to scan the barcodes on all the items in order to generate a goods received note
for the items accepted.
3 A goods received note can be generated by the system only if the inventory received can be linked
to an authorised order (using the order number as reference).
4 As soon as the goods received note has been captured, the system automatically posts a journal
entry for the liability against the creditor’s account in the creditors ledger as well as one for the
asset in the inventory ledger.
5 All manual journals (not system generated) required (such as for corrections, write-offs, etc.) must
be accounted for on an official pre-numbered journal requisition, and supporting documentation
must accompany the requisition which, together with the supporting evidence, must be inspected
and signed by a manager as proof of authorisation. The journal requisition and supporting
evidence are filed sequentially according to the journal requisition number.
6 All access to the system is regulated by specific user ID codes and passwords. Not all users have
the same access rights to the system.
7 All inventory items are counted at least once a month following counting procedures as set out in
a) the entity’s inventory count manual. Inventory count sheets are signed off by the counting team
once they have been completed and are then read into the inventory system before being filed
according to date.
7 The system then generates an exception report of differences between the actual inventory
b) counted and the quantity recorded on the system. Management follows up on all differences and
corrects quantities where necessary. All steps taken are documented on the exception report,
which is filed according to date.
REQUIRED
Describe a maximum of two tests of control you would perform in order to test the operating effectiveness of each of
the controls identified in Working Paper P2.
[20]
Question 13 LEVEL 3
Control objectives, key controls and tests of controls
[24 marks]
You are an audit manager assigned the responsibility of evaluating the inventory system of MasterCake (Pty) Ltd
(MC), a company that bakes and distributes biscuits in the Gauteng region. You have received the following
document from the company’s internal audit department listing some of its inventory controls:
CONTROL
1 Fixed re-order levels are set for all inventory. The warehouse manager reviews these levels
regularly.
2 Before the ordering department places any orders, it confirms that they are goods (flour, eggs, etc.)
generally used by MC.
3 The buying department obtains two quotations from authorised suppliers before any order is placed.
4 The ordering department files requisitions sequentially and frequently reviews the file for
requisitions that have not been cross-referenced to an order.
5 Computerised perpetual inventory records are maintained.
6 No issuing of inventory from the warehouse to the bakery takes place without an authorised issue
note, all of which are filed numerically in the warehouse.
7 All documents utilised in the inventory system (such as purchase orders and issue notes) are
pre-numbered. The computerised system generates a weekly report of any missing or duplicate
numbers. This report is followed up by the head accountant on a weekly basis, signed as proof of
his having performed the control and filed according to date.
8 Whenever an employee performs a control procedure on a document (e.g. compares quantities on
the delivery note to the actual quantity), the employee responsible for the control signs the relevant
document.
REQUIRED
1. For each control mentioned above, list and explain the control objectives MC’s management is attempting to
achieve. (15)
2. Indicate for each of the controls listed above whether it is a key control. Provide an explanation for each of your
answers. (6)
3. Describe two tests of controls that the audit team could perform on each of the key controls identified above. (3)
[24]
INTRODUCTION
Refer to the guidance and example questions contained in Chapter 6, as the principles and the approach remain the
same.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
Risks
[15 marks]
After months of deliberation, you have decided to start an auditing practice with two friends with whom you studied
at university, after which each of you completed your training contracts at different audit firms in South Africa. All
of you are chartered accountants who have recently registered as auditors with the Independent Regulatory Board of
Auditors. Your new firm’s first assignment involves assisting a non-audit client with the design of an internal
control system for their human resources cycle. You have decided the best approach is to identify the risks in this
cycle and thereafter to develop internal controls in order to mitigate these risks.
REQUIRED
Identify the risks involved in the human resources cycle.
[15]
1. Dishonest, lazy or incompetent workers could be employed, resulting in fraud, errors and inefficient operations
which could lead to financial losses. (1)
2. Family members could be employed, thereby disadvantaging more qualified (and/or more suitable) candidates,
resulting in inefficient operations and in effect less profit. (1)
3. Fictitious workers could be added to the payroll, resulting in the salaries account being misstated. (1)
4. Incorrect dismissal procedures might be followed, resulting in law suits which could lead to fines and penalties as
well as reputational damage. (1)
5. The company could contravene labour legislation, resulting in law suits which could lead to fines and penalties as
well as reputational damage. (1)
6. Unauthorised amendments such as salary adjustments could be made to employee records, resulting in the salaries
account being misstated. (1)
7. Details in employee records (e.g. the amount of leave taken) might be inaccurate or incomplete, resulting in
labour disputes which could cause reputational damage. (1)
8. Wage or salary payrolls might not be reconciled from the previous pay-out to the next, resulting in unauthorised
people being paid and the salaries account being misstated. (1)
9. Invalid hours might be recorded on the clock-card system and paid out, resulting in the salaries account being
misstated. (1)
10. The hours registered on the clock cards might have been inaccurately calculated and captured, resulting in the
salaries account being misstated. (1)
11. The calculation of the payroll might be incorrect (if, for example, the incorrect salary or rate per hour is
employed), resulting in the salaries account being misstated. (1)
12. Security might be lacking when cash is drawn or paid out, resulting in theft and financial losses. (1)
13. Cash could be stolen as a result of a poor segregation of duties, leading to financial losses. (1)
14. Unclaimed wages could be misappropriated, resulting in financial losses. (1)
15. Deductions from salaries might be incorrectly made, or deductions payments not made promptly, resulting in fines
and penalties and reputational damage. (1)
16. The company might not have all its employees’ permissions on file for all the non-standard deductions to be
made, resulting in labour unrest and reputational damage. (1)
17. The payroll printout might not be properly approved before payments are made, resulting in payments to fictitious
employees and subsequent misstatement of the salaries account. (1)
18. Security surrounding payroll records, which contain sensitive information, could be lacking, leading to sensitive
information being disclosed and resulting in labour unrest and reputational damage. (1)
Note:
The risks included above are generic risks, as no case study was provided. If a case study is provided, the risk will
relate to the weaknesses identified in the case study. In addition, each of the risks contains a consequence (leading to
…, resulting in …).
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Risks
[23 marks]
You are the auditor of Lbw Engineers (Pty) Ltd (Lbw Engineers), a civil engineering company whose head office is
located in Cape Town. Lbw Engineers employs 1000 employees in various capacities. The following information
was obtained during a walk-through, which you conducted, of the payroll cycle:
Appointments and employee benefits

When managers identify that they need additional workers for a project, they appoint individuals who they feel are
suitably qualified for the task at hand. For the most part, appointments of this nature are done on a project-by-project
basis, but managers are delegated the power to appoint employees on a full-time basis too. Once the appointment has
been made, the manager informs a human resources officer to prepare a contract for the new employee using the
terms agreed upon between the manager and the new employee. All employees are placed on a three-month
probation period, irrespective of whether they have been hired on a permanent basis or for a specific project, unless
the project period is less than three months.
The employee is required to provide the human resources officer with the following information:
A signed copy of the contract
A letter from his/her bank with bank account details
A certified copy of his/her identity document
Proof of address.
Once the employee has provided the documentation to the human resources officer, the human resources officer then
logs onto the payroll system using his/her unique user ID and password. The human resources officer proceeds to
upload the new employee’s details on the employee file.
All employees are expected to work a minimum of 40 hours per week. Employees (with the exception of
management) are permitted to work up to 10 hours of overtime per week at their own discretion. Employees have
the option either to have the overtime paid out at the end of the financial year or to have it converted into paid days
off. Each employee accumulates leave at 1.25 days per month and is entitled to 3 days compassionate leave. The
employee’s leave is carried over for a maximum of one calendar year, after which the employee will lose the days
not taken.
The company pays 50% of the employees’ medical aid contributions as well as 50% of their pension fund
contributions. Management and executives at the company qualify for a car allowance and an annual
performance-based bonus. All other employees are entitled to a 13th cheque, which is paid in December. The
employees can either have the full 13th cheque taxed in December or they can opt to have the tax deferred over the
course of the 12 months. Employees are required to sign a letter at the start of the year indicating how they want the
tax to be treated on their 13th cheque. Most employees opt to have the full amount taxed at the end of the year as
they feel that deferring the tax implications over 12 months affects what they are able to do in their personal lives on
a monthly basis.
All changes made to employee files are made by the human resources officer. The changes made are based on an
instruction received from the financial manager via email in the case of salary increases and special bonuses, and the
returned letter from the employees indicating how they would like the tax on their bonuses to be treated.
Dismissal of employees
If a manager is not happy with the performance of an employee the process followed depends on how long the
employee has worked at the company for:
If he/she has worked for three or fewer months, the manager has the power to dismiss the employee with
immediate effect.
If he/she has worked for four or more months, but not exceeding one year, one weeks’ notice is required.
If he/she has worked for more than one year, two to four weeks’ notice is required, depending on the
circumstances of the dismissal.
Once the employee has been notified of the dismissal, the manager informs the human resources officer, whose duty
it is to remove the employee from the payroll register.
The human resources officer logs into the employees file and changes the employee’s status from ‘active’ to
‘terminated’ and identifies the employee’s last day of employment.
Calculation of gross amount to be paid
When an employee intends taking leave (e.g. annual leave, maternity or paternity leave, or unpaid leave) during the
month, the employee is required to submit a request to take the leave on the leave system. The employee’s manager
receives a notification of the request and is required to approve the leave prior to the employee taking the leave. In
the case of compassionate and sick leave, employees are required to record the days that they were out of work on
the system within two days of being back at the office.
The system calculates the days worked for the month by deducting the approved leave recorded on the system
from the total number of days that the employee was expected to work in the month. The system then determines the
amount to be paid by dividing the gross remuneration that would have been paid if the employee worked for the full
month by the total number of normal days expected to be worked in a normal working month, and then multiplying
the answer by the actual days worked as calculated by the system.
When employees work overtime

When employees work overtime, they are required to record their hours on the payroll system by using their unique
user ID and password. The system automatically calculates the overtime to be paid to them for the month by
multiplying the overtime hours by 1.5, unless the hours were worked on a Sunday or a public holiday, in which case
the overtime hours are multiplied by 2.
Amount to be paid to employees for the month

The system automatically identifies the deductions for each employee from the employee’s personnel file and then
reduces the gross remuneration by the related deduction.
The senior human resources officer logs onto the system using his/her unique user ID and password, and
performs a spot check on a sample of employees to determine if the gross remuneration and deductions used in the
determination of the amount to be paid is correct. If the senior human resources officer agrees with the amount
calculated, he/she digitally authorises the payment, which results in an electronic funds transfer being made to pay
the employees.
Deductions to be paid over

The medical aid and pension fund contribution determined by the company, which is checked by the senior human
resources officer, is paid over to the medical aid and pension fund on the same day that the electronic funds transfer
is made to pay the employees.
Pay-as-you-earn (PAYE), unemployment insurance fund and skills development levy payments are made before
the 7th day of the following month. The human resources officer logs onto the company’s e-filing profile by using
the company’s log-in name and password, submits the EMP 201 tax return and immediately processes the payment.
Pay slips are generated by the system and granted to employees on the request.
REQUIRED
Describe the business risks affecting the payroll cycle at Lbw Engineers (Pty) Ltd.
[23]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Risk of material misstatement at assertion level
[12 marks]
You are the supervisor in charge of the audit of Victoria Falls (Pty) Ltd (Victoria Falls) for the year ended 31
December. Victoria Falls outsources its payroll services to LetsPay (Pty) Ltd (LetsPay). LetsPay is a company that
offers HR solutions to small and medium-sized companies.
LetsPay was established by two university graduate students, Bob and Rob. Both Bob and Rob are the directors
of LetsPay and are studying to become chartered accountants.
LetsPay was established and commenced with its primary mission of offering payroll services just over a year
ago. It is therefore still establishing itself in the market. The company provides a range of payroll services, including
preparation of monthly payslips, payment of salaries and duties related to the South African Revenue Service
(SARS), such as completion of taxation returns and payment of pay-as-you-earn (PAYE), standard income tax on
employees (SITE) and unemployment insurance fund (UIF) amounts.
As part of a job creation campaign, Bob and Rob decided to appoint mostly staff members who are part-time
accounting or marketing students still in the process of obtaining their degrees.
During your discussions with some of the staff at Victoria Falls, it became apparent that:
Victoria Falls had to pay penalties on late payments of PAYE, SITE and UIF to SARS as LetsPay did not meet
the SARS deadline payment dates
at the end of December, the staff members of Victoria Falls received a bonus pay-out, but they complained that
the taxation payable on the bonuses was calculated incorrectly
one of the members at a well-known newspaper got hold of the salaries and bonus amounts of the directors of
Victoria Falls and published these in a story on the front page
REQUIRED
1. Describe the risks of material misstatement at the assertion level relating to the salaries balance in the statement of
profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended. (6)
2. For each risk described, identify the applicable assertion. (6)
A. B.
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISKS OF MATERIAL ASSERTIONS
MISSTATEMENT AT THE ASSERTION LEVEL
RELATING TO THE SALARIES BALANCE
(1 MARK EACH) (1 MARK EACH)
1.……………………………..…… .…………………………
.………
[12]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
[30 marks]
You are the senior auditor for a new client, Galv-Tanks (Pty) Ltd (Galv-Tanks), a company specialising in the
installation of galvanised storage tanks built at the company’s warehouse in Blackheath. On completion, the tanks
are transported for installation by company personnel. Galv-Tanks has a December financial year-end.
The following extract of the systems description, compiled by the second-year audit trainee and based on
information obtained from Mr Tank, the owner of Galv-Tanks (who is also the chief executive officer), relates to the
payroll function of the company:
Extract: System description – Human resources cycle
Employment of permanent employees

All permanent employees have contracts indicating the terms of their employment with Galv-Tanks. The
contracts are stored in a drawer by Ms Steel, the person responsible for hiring administration employees
and for all remuneration-related tasks (e.g. salaries and wages, and the Unemployment Insurance Fund
(UIF) and SARS calculations and payments) for both the salaried and the wage workers at the company.
Ms Steel matriculated two years ago and is engaged to Mr Tank’s youngest son, who also works for the
company.
Mr Tank Snr has delegated the hiring of individuals to the following people:
Ms Steel in the HR office
Mr Cooper in the warehouse
Increases
Mr Tank Snr and Mr Cooper determine the amount of each employee’s bonus, which is paid in December,
as well as the amount of the annual increase to be awarded in the first month of each new financial year.
The increased rate of pay and the annual bonuses to be paid are emailed to Ms Steel by Mr Tank Snr,
whereupon Ms Steel prints the email and uses it in order to compile a document in which she notes the
new rate of pay for each individual. She uses this document as the basis for calculating the amount to be
paid twice a month to wage employees. She prints the email and stores it in the top drawer of her desk in
order to allow for easy access.
Employees are informed of their rate increases in letters drafted by Ms Steel and signed by Mr Tank Snr.
Ms Steel places copies of these letters into her desk drawer in case an enquiry should arise.
Although she sometimes misplaces signed contracts and rate increase letters, she does have soft copies
on her computer that she can print out if an employee approaches her for one. Once she has inserted Mr
Tank Snr’s signature digitally, she has the employee sign the copy of the contract.
The top drawer to Ms Steel’s desk does not have a lock.
Employment of temporary employees

At those times of the year when business picks up, the company employs additional workers, if it is
deemed necessary, in order to fill increased orders. These employees are identified and appointed by Mr
Cooper, who at the start informs them verbally of the length of their respective employment periods and
their hourly rates of pay. A large amount of overtime (as determined by Mr Cooper) is normally worked
during these busy periods.
On Mr Cooper’s request, these temporary employees provide him with a copy of their ID documents, or
their passports if they not South Africans, all of which Mr Cooper stores in his desk drawer. Normally he
does not have time to draft their contracts until the conclusion of their employment periods. They are not
expected to provide utility bills in order to prove where they live, as payments are not deposited into their
bank accounts, but made in cash directly to the employees themselves.
Dismissal of employees
If an employee transgresses, it is documented in his/her employee file. If the transgression is deemed not
severe enough to warrant immediate dismissal, he/she is given a written warning. The company’s policy
of issuing three written warnings within a specific time period before the termination of employment results
in the worker being fired by either:
Mr Tank Snr in the case of permanent employees, or
Mr Cooper in the case of temporary employees.
A transgression is deemed to be anything that displeases Mr Tank Snr or Mr Cooper.
Time-keeping: Warehouse employees
All employees are expected to work from 08h00 to 16h30. The company’s clock-card machine ceased
operating in June, since when it has not been replaced. Mr Cooper considers the employees so
trustworthy that he is content to have them record their times of arrival and departure manually on their
clock cards themselves.
In the event that a deadline needs to be met, employees are expected to work overtime, which Mr Cooper
is responsible for authorising.
The clock cards for all employees, including Mr Cooper himself, are placed at the entrance to the
warehouse by Mr Cooper and collected by him every Wednesday evening. He uses these cards in order
to perform the calculations of the total hours worked. He puts out the new clock cards every Thursday
morning.
Other information
The company has 35 permanent employees, eight salaried individuals and 27 workers who receive their
wages twice a month.
REQUIRED
Identify the weaknesses, as well as the consequences of each weakness, in the human resources cycle described
above.
[30]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
[38 marks]
You have been the partner in charge of the audit of Fishy Fisheries Ltd (Fishy) for the last four years. The company
has a substantial fleet of fishing trawlers and processes fish in its factories on the West Coast. You are currently
engaged in the March 20X1 year-end audit of Fishy, and have been presented with the following system description,
prepared by your audit team.
System description of Fishy

New workers are employed by the human resources department only after interviews and background checks have
been performed in order to establish whether or not they are competent.
The fishermen and factory workers receive their wages every Friday afternoon. The captain of the trawler or the
production foreman at the factory pays out the cash wages of the workers working under his supervision. The
captains and the various foremen are paid a fixed weekly wage by way of EFTs from the company’s main bank
account using one of the terminals situated in the accounting department. Every week, R5 is deducted from each
worker’s wage for the end-of-year staff party.
Each Monday, it being the start of the working week, the foreman or captain hands blank clock cards to each of
the workers under his supervision. These workers write their names and employee numbers on the cards and use
them for that working week. The clocking devices are situated at the entrance to the factory. The fishermen on the
trawlers, who receive the same kind of clock cards, clock in at the harbour near where their clothing lockers are
situated. Workers clock in and out by inserting their clock cards into the clocking machine, which then records times
on the card.
The following Monday morning, the foreman or captain hands the completed clock cards to the wages clerks,
each of whom is responsible for the wages of all the workers at the factory or on the trawlers allocated to him/her.
The wages clerks add up the total number of hours worked per clock card and write the total on the relevant clock
card, all of which are then sent to head office where the clock card hours are entered into the payroll file on the
computer by one of the clerks in the human resources section. In order to ensure completeness of processing, clock
cards are batched in groups of 25 during the capturing process. The computer calculates each worker’s gross pay,
his/her deductions and net pay by using the latest wage rates and deductions according to the information in the
masterfile. A weekly wages report is printed and filed sequentially in the human resources department at head office.
After the human resources manager has reconciled differences between the current and the previous week’s
wages reports, and initialled the report, he prepares a cash cheque for the exact amount of the week’s net wages. The
cheque is then cashed by one of the employees in the human resources department. The computer prints pay
envelopes (each bearing a worker’s name and employee number) for all those being paid. Clerks in the human
resources department fill the pay envelopes with the cash due to each employee as per the wages report. If there is
money unaccounted for at the end, the pay envelopes are double-checked by the clerks and corrections made. The
pay envelopes are then sealed.
On Thursdays, the pay envelopes are collected by the production manager, who then drops them off at the
various factories and at the harbour. On Friday afternoons, the pay envelopes are handed to the relevant foreman or
captain for the weekly pay-out. Each foreman or captain then hands out the wages to the workers under his
supervision. Generally speaking, the foreman or captain calls the workers together and reads out the names one by
one. As soon as each employee has received his/her wages, he/she promptly heads for the factory gate.
During the course of the year, a power failure occurred at head office, which resulted in wages being paid three
days late, on the Monday instead of on the Friday. Since the workers were very unhappy about the late payment, the
accountant, Mrs Arendse, authorised an additional R10 per hour payment to each worker for that week only. In order
to do this, the assistant accountant changed the pay rate per hour by adding R10 for all workers onto the payroll
masterfile. After the payroll for that week had been finalised, the assistant accountant changed the rate back to the
normal rate per hour.
REQUIRED
Identify the weaknesses in the wages system as described and provide an explanation for each weakness. Ignore
unclaimed wages. Use the following format for your answer:
WEAKNESS EXPLANATION
[38]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
[16 marks]
Payroll-Exact (Pty) Ltd (the company) is an IT company that specialises in payroll outsourcing services. It is
responsible for processing electronic payments of wages and salary payrolls, including electronic payments of
employee taxes, medical aids and retirement benefits contributions to the respective third parties.
Interested clients provide the company with a password protected csv file consisting of the client’s monthly
payroll information such as personnel details (name, surname, personnel numbers and bank account details),
monthly gross income and deductions. The company charges 10% of the total gross income as its processing fee.
Upon receipt of the csv file, the customer relationship manager (CRM) is responsible for unprotecting the file
with a unique password obtained from the shared drive. The csv file is then saved on the shared drive. The CRM
checks whether total gross income per the csv file plus the 10% processing fee has been paid to the company’s bank
account. Once completed, he prepares a schedule of the lump sum payments to be made to third parties for employee
taxes, medical aids and retirement benefits contributions. This schedule along with the csv file are sent to the finance
manager.
The finance manager agrees the lump sum payments per the schedule to the totals noted on the client’s csv file
and makes EFT payments to the respective parties. In addition, he uploads the csv file onto their payroll software to
load and pay net income to the client’s employees. This payment run normally occurs at midnight.
The company has experienced two irregularities in the current year:

1. In preparing the monthly bank reconciliation, it was noted that the amount per the bank statement was much less
than the amount per the bank account in the general ledger. On further investigation, it was discovered that the
client deposited an insufficient amount that did not equate to the total amount paid by the company to the client’s
employees and third parties. The contract with this customer had expired before the payments were made. The
company’s efforts to recover the shortfall from the client have been unsuccessful.
2. The company received an email from another client who complained that five of its personnel were not paid. A
consultant was hired to investigate this matter and discovered that the creditors clerk had replaced the bank
account details on the csv file with her own bank account number. Unfortunately, the software does not check
whether duplicate payments are made to one bank account.
REQUIRED
Identify the weakness in controls implemented by management that caused the company to experience the
irregularities and recommend how management can improve its controls.
[16]
Question 7 LEVEL 2
[32 marks]
You are the auditor on the audit of Framing Supplies (Pty) Ltd, a company that manufactures a wide range of photo
and painting frames at their factory in Epping. The company has a December financial year-end.
Mrs Moodley, the chief executive officer, has requested that you review internal controls that are in place over
the payroll system, and to make recommendations where the company can improve.
The following has been noted during a walk-through that you performed at the company:
Time keeping and supervision

Employees gain access to the factory through two entry and exit points. A foreman is present at each entry point
from 7:15 am to 7:40 am in the morning and at the exit point from 4:00 pm to 4:20 pm. The foremen are required to
attend a compulsory meeting from 7:45 am to 8:15 am each morning and normally try to leave the premises by 4:30
pm to avoid peak hour traffic.
Employees are required to complete an eight-hour working day, unless they have decided to work overtime on a
particular day. Employees have the option of starting at either 7:00 am and working until 4:00 pm, or 7:30 am and
working until 4:30 pm.
Blank clock cards are placed in the employee clock card holder on a Monday morning by Mrs Claasen, a payroll
administrator. Employees are required to fill in their unique employee number on the clock card with a pen, which is
located by the employee clock card holder. Mrs Claasen makes sure that there are sufficient pens available for the
190 employees on a Monday morning.
Employees collect their cards and clock in at work on entry to the factory, and they also clock out of work when
leaving the factory in the afternoon. Employees are not permitted to take their clock cards home with them.
On days where an employee decides that he/she wants to work overtime, he/she is required to leave the premises
via the exit on the north side of the factory. He/she is also required to clock out at that exit point.
Mrs Claasen collects the clock cards at the end of each week and hands them to Mr Jacobus in the payroll
department.
Payroll preparation
Mr Jacobus logs onto the payroll administration system with his unique user ID and password. He captures each
clock card into the system using the employee number located on the clock card. Where duplicate employee
numbers are identified, Mr Jacobus identifies an individual for whom no clock card has been submitted and allocates
one of the clock cards to the individual who he believes wrote down the incorrect employee number.
The system automatically calculates the gross remuneration of the employee by using the hours captured (by Mr
Jacobus) × rate tariff (located on the employee’s file).
The system also automatically identifies the deductions to be made from the employee’s gross remuneration and
determines the amount to be paid to the employee via electronic funds transfer at the end of each fortnight.
Once the system has determined the amount to be paid to each employee, a notification is sent to Ms Arendse,
the financial manager, notifying her that the payroll is ready to be paid. Ms Arendse proceeds to log onto the payroll
system using her unique user ID and password, and authorises the electronic funds transfer.
Changes to personnel masterfiles

Examples of changes made to employee files include, but are not limited to:
changes made to the employee’s rate tariff
changes made to the deductions affecting the employee
change made to the employee’s bank details
changes made to the employee’s physical address.
Changes can be made to personnel masterfiles by using the general payroll user ID and password. In the past, Mr
Jonas was the only one who was able to make these changes, using his unique user ID and password. Owing to his
retirement, it was felt that relying on one person to make these changes was inefficient. If the person was away from
the company for a week or two while on vacation, for instance, no changes could be made to the personnel
masterfile during this period.
The general payroll user ID and password only work on computers located in the payroll department.
Changes to personnel masterfiles should only be made on the basis that a payroll masterfile amendment form has
been authorised.
The process involved in making changes is as follows:

The payroll masterfile amendment form is approved by management.
The approved payroll masterfile amendment form is handed to Mrs Claasen.
Mrs Claasen logs onto the personnel masterfile using the general payroll user ID and password, and processes the
changes from her computer or another computer in the payroll department if her computer is not available (e.g. if
her computer is with the IT department for maintenance).
Once Mrs Claasen has processed the changes to the personnel masterfile, she files the payroll masterfile
amendment form in her personal filing cabinet in sequential order. She is not required to file the form in terms of
the company’s policy, but does so in case someone wants to check up on the work that she performs. To date, no
checks have been made on any of the personnel amendment changes that she has processed.
REQUIRED
Discuss the weaknesses identified during the walk-through and make recommendations to address the weaknesses.
[32]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
Recommendations
[9 marks]
Glad Ltd (Glad), a manufacturer of high-end domestic appliances, was recently incorporated and will start
manufacturing appliances at the beginning of next month. The following controls have already been implemented:
1. The manufacturing division is divided into five sections and a foreman has been appointed for each section; 120
wage employees have been appointed. The foreman reports to the factory manager.
2. A clock card system has been purchased and administrative clerks will issue clock cards.
3. The administrative clerk will collect all the clock cards. He will perform the calculations on the clock cards and
hours will be approved by the foreman. The clock cards are then handed over to the wage clerks who will prepare
the wage journal. The wage journal will be authorised by the accountant. The wage cheque will be authorised by
the accountant and the managing director.
4. The wage packets and pay slips will be prepared by the wage clerks.
Glad has not implemented controls surrounding the wage pay-out process and has contacted you to assist with this.
REQUIRED
Design a system of internal control for the wage pay-out at Glad.
[9]
Question 9 LEVEL 3
[32 marks]
You are the auditor of BBQ Delight (Pty) Ltd, a restaurant that specialises in selling slow-cooked BBQ meals. The
company has 10 restaurants which are located in shopping malls around the country. The company has a December
year-end.
The human resources function is centralised at the company’s head office, which is located in Johannesburg.
Appointment of employees
The manager at each restaurant is responsible for the appointment of servers (waiters and waitresses) and cooks at
the restaurant. Managers and assistant managers are appointed by head office.
The process followed when appointing a new server or cook is as follows:

All prospective employees are advised to contact their local BBQ Delight restaurant to inquire if any vacancies
exist.
If a vacancy does exist, the prospective candidate is requested to compile a two-page long curriculum vitae (CV).
The prospective employee is asked to submit his/her CV in person at the BBQ Delight restaurant or to email the
CV to the manager of the restaurant.
The manager reviews all CVs and contacts the prospective employee within two weeks of submission of the CV
for an interview.
The interview is conducted between the manager and the prospective employee, and the individual is informed
within five working days whether or not his/her application has been successful.
All successful applicants are instructed to come to the restaurant and to sign a contract of employment.
All successful candidates are required to submit the following information to the manager on their first day at the
restaurant:
A copy of the contract
A certified copy of their identity document
A utility bill proving where they reside. If the candidate lives with his/her parents or is unable to provide a utility
bill, a sworn affidavit is required.
An original bank letter stating the person’s bank account details
Every manager at a restaurant has a sequentially numbered checklist which he/she goes through to ensure that all of
the information is submitted by the employee. The manager signs and dates the checklist to indicate that he/she has
received all the information.
The documentation is scanned and emailed to the human resources officer at head office who is responsible for
loading the information on the employee personnel system.
The checklist, along with the supporting documentation, is filed in sequential order in a pending hardcopy file in
the manager’s office. The restaurant manager inspects the file on a weekly basis and follows up with the human
resources officer to determine how far along in the process they are with loading the new employee on the system.
The human resources officer emails the manager to acknowledge receipt of the documentation and the manager
files acknowledgment along with the other pending documents.
The human resources officer logs onto the payroll system using his/her unique user ID and password and creates
the new employee on the system using the information sent through by the manager.
The computer system logs out after three incorrect user IDs or passwords have been captured.
Prior to the information of the new employee being finalised on the payroll system, the human resources
manager, who has read-only access to the new employee file, logs onto the system by using his/her unique user ID
and password. The human resources manager reviews the information loaded on the system with the detail sent
through from the manager to the human resources officer and digitally authorises the loading of the new employee
on the payroll system. Once the human resources manager has authorised the loading of the new employee on the
payroll system, an automatic notification is sent to the restaurant manager indicating that the employee was
successfully loaded on the system.
The restaurant manager removes the documents from the pending file and files all the documents as well as the
notification received in a hardcopy ‘approved employee’ file.
All of the restaurants pay their servers the same basic salary. The rest of the servers’ salaries are based on tips
that they make during the month.
Managers, assistant managers and cooks earn a fixed monthly salary.
The directors of the company meet at the end of November and decide on the percentage by which all
employees’ salaries are to be increased in the next financial year. The percentage increase in salary is communicated
to the human resources manager via email. The human resources manager instructs a human resources officer to
calculate the increase for each employee of the company in a spreadsheet and to draft increase letters for each
employee.
The spreadsheet and increase letters are reviewed by the human resources manager and the letters are signed as
proof that the human resources manager agrees that the correct amounts have been transferred to the increase letters
that have to be sent to the employees.
Each employee receives a letter indicating what his/her increase in salary will be in the next financial year.
The employees are required to sign the letter and to submit it to their respective managers by 10 December. The
letters are scanned and emailed to the human resources department. The restaurant managers file the signed letters in
their respective offices.
Once all of signed letters are returned, a human resources officer completes a salary increase masterfile
amendment form in the second week of January, which the human resources manager authorises by signing the
salary increase amendment form.
The human resources officer logs on to the payroll system by using his/her unique user ID and password and
loads the changes, which are effective at the end of January. The changes are reviewed by the human resources
manager, who logs onto the system using his/her unique user ID and password. The human resources manager has
read-only access to the system.
The human resources manager prints a copy of the changes that have been made and files it along with the
authorisation letter from the directors and the salary increase amendment form, after signing the documents as proof
that the review has taken place.
The chief financial officer reviews all changes which have been recorded on a log of changes and compares it to
the documents that have been filed by the human resources manager, and follows up on exceptions.
Determination of amount to be paid
Managers and cooks and servers – basic salary

As they receive a standard salary, the system automatically calculates the amount to be paid by using the information
on their employee file.
The human resources officer compares the gross amount and deduction rates used by the payroll system to the
information in the employee’s file to determine if the correct information has been used.
The human resources officer re-performs the calculation performed by the system and any exceptions noted are
logged by the payroll system and rectified immediately.
The log is printed by the human resources manager and signed as proof that the human resources manager has
reviewed the changes made in terms of the company’s policy.
Servers – tips that have been received via credit card

The company is unable to account for cash tips received by the servers, but accounts for credit card tips as follows:
They are recorded on the system for each person at payment.
The system automatically calculates the amount to be paid over to the employee based on the tip captured at the
point of payment.
The assistant managers at the restaurants perform a sample check on a selection of receipts which are filed
sequentially to determine if the correct tip was recorded on the system at the point of payment. They sign the
receipts as an indication of the check performed.
Where the assistant manager identifies a difference, he rectifies it and documents the reason for the change on
the system. All changes of this nature are logged by the system and followed up by the chief financial officer, who
requests a copy of the receipt to be scanned and emailed to him at head office for inspection. He compares the
receipt to the amount recorded on the system by the assistant manager and signs the log as proof that he has checked
the changes made and approves of them.
Where the assistant manager is satisfied with the tip recorded on the system, he/she logs onto the system using
his/her unique user ID and password and approves of the tips recorded, at which point a notification is sent through
to the restaurant manager. The restaurant manager then checks a sample of tips in the same manner as the assistant
manager, and if he/she is satisfied, he/she digitally authorises the tips on the system. The tips, once authorised, are
automatically included in payroll along with the employee’s basic salary.
Payment
Salary payments take place on the 25th day of the month. The payroll period runs from the 21st of the current month
to the 22nd of the following month.
The chief financial officer logs onto the payroll system by using his unique user ID and password. He has
read-only access to the system. He selects a random sample of three employees from each restaurant and reviews the
documentation (e.g. receipts for tips and signed increase letters) and re-performs the calculations processed by the
payroll system. He signs a control sheet indicating that he has performed the review and agrees with the amount to
be paid, and loads the payroll payment onto the company’s bank account by using the company’s confidential bank
account login details.
REQUIRED
Identify the key controls provided in the information above and, for each key control identified, describe the tests of
controls that you would perform to determine if the control is working as intended by management.
[32]
Question 10 LEVEL 3
Question 10
[28 marks]
You are a first-year audit trainee on the audit of Fresh-Smell (Pty) Ltd (Fresh-Smell), a company that imports body
and skin care products from around the world for marketing to retailers in South Africa, where it is one the largest
distributors.
Allocated the responsibility of auditing the client’s payroll system, you have identified the following while in
discussion with Mr Kingston, the head of human resources:
General
Fresh-Smell has 150 permanent employees on its payroll, all of whom receive a salary via EFTs on the 25th day of
every month, or on the Friday if the 25th falls on a weekend. All employees are entitled to an annual bonus equal to
one month’s salary. The bonus may be taken in full in the month of the employee’s birthday or he/she may opt to
take part of the bonus each month of the year.
Each employee has an employee file that is stored in a fire-proof safe. Access to the safe is limited to authorised
individuals only, as confidential information is stored there. In order to gain access to the safe, an authorised
individual has to sign the log book and indicate his/her reason for wanting access. Once the log book has been filled
out, the chief executive officer’s secretary gives the individual the key to the safe and, on receiving the key back,
notes the time at which it was returned. The log book is reviewed on a regular basis by a senior employee of the
company, who investigates any unusual activity. He signs the log book at the end of each review, indicating whether
or not he is satisfied with the reasons for any such unusual activity.
Updating of employee files

All changes made to an employee’s profile are approved at a human resources department meeting. The changes
noted are recorded in the signed minutes of the meeting, a copy of which is given to Ms Clarke, who is responsible
for completing the triplicate payroll amendment forms. The supervisor, Mrs Kimberly, reviews the information
captured in the payroll amendment book and compares it to the authorised minutes. Once she is satisfied that they
agree, she signs the payroll amendment forms located in the payroll amendment form book.
These forms are sequentially numbered and the sequences of the forms are inspected on a monthly basis by Ms
Clarke’s supervisor for any missing forms. If any are noted, they are investigated and reported to Mr Kingston in a
missing payroll amendment form report. One copy of this form stays in the payroll amendment form book, while
one each is sent to the masterfile clerks, Mr Combrink and Ms Clarke.
Changes to the employee masterfile are made by Mr Combrink and Ms Klink. These changes can be made from
their workstations only and require that they log onto the payroll application using their unique user ID. All such
changes are logged and reviewed by Mr Kingston on a monthly basis. He compares the changes logged to the copy
of the payroll amendment form located in the payroll amendment form book. If he is satisfied with the changes
made, he signs the log; if not, he requests from Mr Combrink and Ms Klink reasons for validating the changes.
Ms Klink is responsible for loading the changes, which Mr Combrink authorises. The procedure is as follows:
Step 1
Mr Kingston sends Ms Klink a sequentially numbered payroll amendment form and a document signed by the
employee as to how he/she wishes to receive his/her bonus. The payroll amendment form indicates the new salary or
any additional remuneration to be paid to the employee, the date on which the new salary or additional remuneration
is to be paid and the appropriate deductions.
Step 2
Ms Klink inspects the payroll amendment form to determine whether it has been signed and authorised by Mr
Kingston and the head of the department in which the employee works.
Step 3
Ms Klink logs onto the payroll system and accesses the payroll masterfile, to which application she has write access,
using her unique user ID. If she inputs her user ID incorrectly three times, the application closes, and she needs to
log a request with IT support in order for them to unlock the application.
The masterfile amendment screen is designed to look like the payroll amendment form in order to reduce input
errors.
Salary changes
Ms Klink enters the employee’s employee number into the system in order to access all his/her details. She then
inputs the amount to which the salary is to be increased.
Both these fields (employee number and the amount to which the salary is to be increased) have inbuilt
alphanumeric protection in order to ensure that only numbers are captured. In addition, a logic test ensures that the
amount to which the salary is to be increased is not above the set threshold.
Ms Klink then makes use of the drop-down date field in order to select the day on which the change is to be
effected. Once she has done so, she clicks on the tab indicating the reason for the change (salary increase or
additional remuneration). If additional remuneration is involved, she captures the reason noted on the payroll
amendment form.
Bonus payment period

Ms Klink agrees the payroll amendment form to the document received from the employee with regard to the period
over which the bonus is to be paid, and signs the payroll amendment form as an indication that the two agree. She
then clicks the bonus drop-down field, which allows her to select the tab either for payment to be made in the
employee’s birthday month or to pro-rata the bonus over a period of 12 months.
Once she has processed the increase and the bonus instruction, she clicks ‘enter’, upon which the system prompts
her to confirm whether or not she is sure she wants to process the information. If she is, she clicks ‘enter’, but if she
is not, she clicks ‘cancel’. Once she clicks ‘enter’ the second time, the information posts to a pending file and Mr
Combrink receives an email notification of the pending changes.
Ms Klink files the copy of the payroll amendment forms sequentially. The sequence is inspected by a colleague
of Ms Klink’s on a monthly basis. Any missing forms noted are investigated and reported to Mr Kingston in a
missing payroll amendment form report.
Step 4
Mr Combrink logs onto the payroll system and accesses the payroll masterfile using his unique user ID. If he inputs
this number incorrectly three times, the application closes and he needs to log a request with IT support in order for
them to unlock it. Mr Combrink has read-only access in this file.
He compares the changes loaded onto the system to the payroll amendment form. If he is satisfied that the
changes are accurate, he clicks ‘accept’ and, following the computer’s prompting, ‘yes’, which updates the
employee’s profile; if he is not satisfied with the changes made, he has the option of rejecting them by indicating his
reason(s) in a text box for the relevant employee.
After receiving notification to correct it, Ms Klink does so. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until Mr Combrink is
satisfied with the changes made.
A log of all rejections is recorded and a report prepared by Mr Combrink for Mr Kingston’s perusal. The latter
reviews the log, which he signs if he is satisfied with the reasons given. Mr Combrink then files the copy of the
payroll amendment forms sequentially. The sequence is inspected by a colleague of Mr Combrink’s on a monthly
basis. Any missing forms noted are investigated and reported to Mr Kingston in a missing payroll amendment form
report.
REQUIRED
Identify the key controls in the payroll system mentioned above. For each control identified, describe how you
would test it.
[28]
Question 11 LEVEL 3
Question 11
Tests of controls
[9 marks]
Happy Chappies (Pty) Ltd (Happy Chappies) is a small entity located near rural areas and was founded in 20X1 in
order to reduce local unemployment. Happy Chappies manufactures bubble gum, which is sold internationally. The
entity mainly employs people from the rural areas for the production process and suitably qualified personnel for the
finance and management function. The current financial year-end of Happy Chappies is 31 October.
Your audit firm, Tick Away Inc., has been the auditors of Happy Chappies since its incorporation. Happy
Chappies’s personnel have always been very helpful during the external audit process. The Happy Chappies audit
has been allocated to your audit portfolio in the current year. The previous partner always followed a combined
approach and after the planning stage of the audit, you, the new audit partner, concluded that you will also
incorporate tests of controls during the audit.
The first-year trainee accountant on your audit team has identified the following controls which are relevant to the
wage cycle of Happy Chappies for the 31 October year-end:
1. All employees have a signed employment contract, which is authorised by the human resources (HR) manager.
2. All employees are provided with a personnel card, which is used to gain access to the workplace.
3. There is only one entrance to Happy Chappies, and employees must swipe their personnel card to gain access. A
card can only be swiped once. A security guard supervises the entrance at all times.
4. Happy Chappies’s computerised system calculates the hours worked by personnel and prints a report which each
division’s head should review.
5. The division heads review all reports for any unusual entries and approve any overtime.
6. After the head has reviewed the hours report and authorised overtime by way of a signature, the report is sent to
the finance department for recording.
7. After the payroll clerk has recorded the hours into the accounting records, a reconciliation is prepared which is
reviewed by the financial manager. The financial manager also re-performs the payroll calculations by comparing
them to the authorised hours report. The financial manager approves the payroll and reconciliation by way of a
signature.
8. All payroll payments are authorised by two cheque signatories, who have to:
scrutinise the payroll records and reconciliation for unusual items
sign the payroll and reconciliation as proof of duty performed.
REQUIRED
Describe the tests of controls that you will perform in order to ensure that the controls identified by the first-year
trainee accountant are operating effectively.
[9]
Question 12 LEVEL 3
Assertions, key controls and tests of controls
[20 marks]
You are the audit partner in charge of Best Wares (Pty) Ltd (Best), a company manufacturing hardware products
sold to retailers and wholesalers throughout South Africa. The company employs over 200 workers at its factory at
Wadeville in Gauteng.
The following control activities have been documented by one of your audit trainees regarding timekeeping and
payroll preparation:
Wages, paid every Friday afternoon, are based on the hours captured on the employees’ clock cards.
All clock cards are prepared by the human resources department.
A senior employee in the department agrees the number of clock cards per division to the latest list of authorised
employees in that division.
The human resources officer then enters this number in the clock card register, which he also signs as evidence of
a control performed.
Afterwards, he takes the clock cards, together with this register, to the foremen of the various divisions, who must
then check whether they agree with the number of clock cards given to them and sign the clock card register in
order to indicate receipt of the cards.
The foremen then place the clock cards on racks at the entry points to their divisions.
The workers take their cards at both the beginning and the end of the daily shift and insert them into the clock
card machine. Clocking in and out is protected by a turnstile, and is strictly monitored by security personnel.
At the end of the week, a staff member from the wages department collects all the clock cards and agrees the
number of cards per division to the clock card register and signs the register indicating that the totals have been
agreed.
The wages clerk then takes these clock cards to the foremen, who scrutinise them for anything out of the ordinary.
They then sign the clock cards as evidence that the cards have been scrutinised, and that overtime has been
approved by them.
The wages clerk then returns to the wages office, where the payroll for that week is prepared. A supervisor at the
wages office will agree the hours worked on the payroll back to the clock cards. After this, he/she verifies any
amendments to the payroll back to the approved masterfile amendment forms. He/she then signs the payroll report
as evidence of duties performed.
The payroll report is then sent to the human resources department, where a senior official reviews the payroll and
performs a week-to-week reconciliation. After testing a sample of changes to approved masterfile forms, he/she
signs the payroll as evidence that payments may now proceed.
The cheque for wages is prepared in the accounting office. Attached to the cheque requisition is the approved
payroll and the week-to-week reconciliation. Two approved signatories then sign the cheques as well as both the
approved payroll and the weekly reconciliation in order to indicate that the cheque amounts agree with those on
the payroll printout.
REQUIRED
By linking them to one of the assertions, discuss the controls implemented by management that the auditor can rely
on in the system as described above. In addition, describe the test(s) of control(s) that the auditor can perform for
each discussed control.
[20]
Question 13 LEVEL 3
Audit procedures
[10 marks]
Audit procedure instructions issued by external auditors:

Inspect the signature of the foreman on a sample of clock cards displaying his approval of overtime hours worked.
Inquire from the human resources manager what procedures the company has implemented in order to identify
employees with criminal records.
Inspect a sample of payroll masterfile changes and agree the log of changes made to approved masterfile
amendment forms.
Perform an analytical review of salaries, and compare them to the corresponding period the previous year in order
to identify any unusual variances that need to be investigated.
Ascertain that the director’s remuneration is properly disclosed in the financial statements and that such disclosure
complies with section 30 of the Companies Act 71 of 2008.
Inspect the signature of the factory manager on the payroll printout in order to indicate that he/she verified the
accuracy of the clock card hours captured, and that the correct rates were employed.
Inquire from the wages clerk about procedures followed regarding leave records.
Attend a wage pay-out and check that unclaimed pay packets are locked away immediately at the conclusion
thereof.
Scrutinise the wages control account at year-end for any unusual journals posted and investigate these journals
together with supporting documentation.
Enquire from the human resources manager what procedures he/she follows in order to ensure that the company
complies with labour legislation.
REQUIRED
Classify the audit procedure instructions in the above scenario as a test of control and/or a substantive procedure
and/or a risk assessment procedure.
[10]
Question 14 LEVEL 3
Risks, internal controls and substantive procedures
[25 marks]
Three Digital (Pty) Ltd (Three Digital) is a highly technological company working on technological products and
market research in its field. Tangible products, such as 3D printers, satellite components, etc., make up 20% of its
business, and 80% is from market research in the field of new advancements in technologies.
All operations take place on its premises in Tokai, south of Cape Town. The premises are split into three floors.
The top floor is used for administration and management, and the floor below is for researchers to conduct their
research. The ground floor is split between a warehouse, where raw materials and finished goods are stored, and the
manufacturing area, where the goods are produced.
Access to the premises and the various areas around the building is controlled with staff cards that should be
displayed on employees at all times. These cards are scanned to allow employees access to particular areas.
Three Digital uses its website to input data, which is then interfaced with its accounting systems. Access to the
website requires a username and password.
You read through the policy document and make the following notes to assist you with future internal audits:
Manufacturing process
Once a sales order is created, an internal job card is created in the manufacturing department. Raw materials are
issued against the job card.
The hours worked against the sales order are also captured in the online time sheet application. Each staff member
logs onto the Three Digital website and allocates his/her time based on a job card number. This is also used to
track productivity.
The time sheet is then approved by the supervisors for whom the work was performed.
Standard costing is used in the process of manufacture. For labour costs, this is based on the job description of
each employee as each job description has its own rates. The labour rates are based on actual payments to
employees. For overheads, it is based on the flat rate per hour determined annually.
Once the goods are completed, an internal purchase order is created against the job card and sent to the warehouse
in order for the staff there to anticipate the goods to be received.
Obtaining components from the warehouse
Components are requested on a weekly basis from the manufacturing department via an internal sales order. This
is an internal online document between the two departments. It can only be created if the manufacturing
department has a valid sales order number.
The picker will then pick the goods, based on the electronic picking slip.
After he/she picks the components, a notification is sent to the warehouse supervisor who then checks whether the
picker has picked the correct goods and quantity. After the supervisor’s inspection, he/she approves it.
The warehouse assistant creates an internal delivery note, which gets approved by the warehouse manager. A
notification is then sent to the manufacturing department to collect the goods.
When the components are collected, the manufacturing business representative inserts his/her user ID, which
serves as acceptance of goods.
Additional information
All goods are sold at a 100% mark-up. The price is determined based on what the market is willing to pay versus the
costs to the manufacturer.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the risks to the payroll preparation phase of the payroll process. For each described risk, recommend
internal controls to mitigate that risk. [14]
2. There has been speculation that the wages payments received by the manufacturing department are inaccurate as a
result of fraud. Describe the substantive audit procedures you would perform on this engagement to satisfy
yourself regarding the following assertions:
a) Occurrence of wages
b) Accuracy of wages[11]
[25]
INTRODUCTION
Refer to the guidance and example questions contained in Chapter 6, as the principles and the approach remain the
same.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 2
Control objectives
[11 marks]
You are general manager at a local charity, Help-Mekaar. You are responsible for organising a raffle in order to raise
funds for the charity. You were able to arrange donations from a local auditing firm as prizes: tablets with wifi and
3G connections, Woolworths vouchers and hampers of homemade dolls. You adapted a system description you
found on the internet to suit your needs as follows:
Price and proceeds

The raffle tickets will be sold from the administration office for R10 each. Tickets are only sold for cash.
Beneficiaries of the charity and their families receive a 10% discount on each raffle ticket bought. This was
approved by the board of trustees of the charity. The price and discount are advertised along with the terms and
conditions on the tickets as well as on all posters.
Tickets
The secretary who sells the tickets has a set of pre-designed, pre-numbered tickets, printed specifically for the raffle
in a book format. The tickets contain the ticket holder’s name, identity number, and contact and residential details.
Each ticket has a carbon copy attached to it which will be used for the draw.
Safeguarding of cash box

The proceeds of the sale will be kept in a cash box, which is kept in a safe. At the end of each day, the secretary
clears out her cash box and hands the cash and ticket book to you, the manager.
Deposit of cash
You are required to record the receipts in the cash book daily. This updates the income system. The cash is then
handed to a security guard who deposits the cash.
REQUIRED
Formulate the internal control objectives for cash receipts from the sale of raffle tickets.
[11]
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Segregation of duties, fraud and error
[9 marks]
You are a third-year audit trainee at the audit firm of EWC Inc. (EWC), which has recently been appointed the
auditors of Electro-Tricks (Pty) Ltd (Electro-Tricks).
Since its inception in 2006, Electro-Tricks has established itself as a leading provider of electrical equipment
such as radios, irons, fridges, ovens, cordless telephones and television sets, which the company provides to both the
general public and corporate clients. Electro-Tricks, which operates through 12 retail stores across South Africa,
aims to offer the most competitive prices for quality equipment. The company owns several delivery vehicles for
transporting the larger appliances (e.g. fridges and ovens) to its clients. The accounting department operates from the
company’s head office in Pretoria.
Every so often, Electro-Tricks purchases property, plant and equipment (PPE) items, which include delivery
vehicles, desktop computers, laptops, printers, and so on. A PPE acquisition form needs to be completed and
approved before any such items may be purchased. A clerk in the accounting department is responsible for updating
and maintaining the PPE asset register. On a quarterly basis, a physical inventory of PPE items is taken by a clerk in
that same department in order to identify any stolen or broken items, and to reconcile the PPE asset register with the
physical items.
The manager in charge of the audit assigned you to review the controls that Electro-Tricks currently has in place
regarding their PPE, specifically those relating to the segregation of duties. During the initial audit planning meeting,
the manager requested that you explain briefly to the team a few of the principles of the segregation of duties in
terms of controls over PPE, as well as the possible errors or fraud that could result if these controls were not in
place.
REQUIRED
List briefly the segregation of duties in respect of controls over property, plant and equipment that you would expect
to see at Electro-Tricks (Pty) Ltd. In addition, discuss the possible errors or fraud that could result in the event of
each of these duties not being segregated.
Answer using the following tabular format:
SEGREGATI ON POSSIBLE ERORS OR FRAUD RESULTING FROM

OF DUTIES DUTIES NOT BEING SEGREGATED
[9]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
[12 marks]
BaAgi (Pty) Ltd (BaAgi), a construction company whose main business is the development of townhouses in newly
established residential areas, is based in Boksburg. The company, which has grown over the years, now employs 320
staff members, including five directors.
The four brothers who founded BaAgi in 1994 are not involved in the day-to-day management of the company.
As a member of the audit team responsible for the audit of BaAgi, you were presented with the following
information:
AMOUNT (R) NOTES

Loans to directors 900 000 1
Long-term loans (3 200 000) 2
Machinery 1 200 000 3
Notes:
1. Loans to directors were authorised at a directors’ meeting. No loan agreement was signed by the directors and the
company in connection with these loans, however, as the directors believed it to be unnecessary since those
awarded the loans are still in the employ of BaAgi.
2. In order to expand into other cities, the directors obtained a five-year term loan attracting interest at prime plus
2% per annum. No other financing options were considered.
3. Certain machinery was acquired during the financial year under review, after a director who is the head of the
operations department made a request for their purchase. Purchases of capital expenditure at BaAgi are decided
when the head of a department determines the need to acquire additional assets. No budgets are prepared. The
machinery was purchased from a company owned by the wife of the director in the operations department (said
director did not mention this fact at the meeting). All directors, including the director in the construction
department, voted in favour of this acquisition.
REQUIRED
Identify the weaknesses in BaAgi’s internal control process of the finance and investment cycle. In addition, explain
the consequence(s) of the identified weaknesses.
Present your answer using the following tabular format:
WEAKNESES EXPLANATI ON OF WEAKNESES
[12]
Question 4 LEVEL 3
Risks: Companies Act 71 of 2008
[12 marks]
As a first-year trainee accountant at Deno & Partner Inc. (Deno), a medium-sized audit firm, you are a member of
the audit team that is responsible for the audit of Techno Ltd (Techno), a company that sells technological products,
such as television sets, music systems and tablets. Techno has a 30 June year-end.
You are assigned to audit the share capital account.
Share capital
Authorised shares 500 000

Issued shares as at 30 June 20X1 480 000
AMOUNT (R) NOTES

Opening balance at 1 July 20X1 960 000 1
Additions: see note 2 27 000 2
Closing balance at 30 June 20X2 987 000
Notes:
1. The opening balance represents 480 000 shares at R2 per share.
2. During the year under review, the board passed a resolution to assist two new non-executive directors in acquiring
30 000 shares in Techno. The two directors insisted that the shares be sold to them at 99 cents per share, each of
which at that stage was trading at R2.50. A loan of R13 500 per director, payable in 24 monthly instalments
earning 1% interest, was approved by the board. The share register was not updated with this share issue.
REQUIRED
Identify the risks relating to non-compliance of the Companies Act 71 of 2008 as discussed in note 2 above. For
each of the risks identified, discuss the procedure/steps that should have been implemented in order to eliminate the
risks of non-compliance with the Act.
Answer using the following tabular format:
RISK PROCEDURES/STEPS
[12]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
[11 marks]
You are the second-year trainee on the audit of the Yest WEG Group (Yest). Yest is the leading supplier of low-,
medium- and high-voltage electric motors, variable speed drives, softstarters, switchgear, transformers,
containerised substations, diesel generator sets and co-generation and energy solutions as well as electrical and
instrumentation engineering and project management services in Africa.
The following document received from the managing director sets out some of the controls implemented to reduce
the risk associated with capital expenditure for the year.
Summary of internal controls implemented by Yest to reduce business risks

associated with capital expenditure
Yest has a capital expenditure committee. The CFO makes recommendations to the board of directors on
all capital expenditure. All capital expenditure is approved by the CFO prior to board meetings. The
decisions are presented only for noting at Yest’s board meetings. It is a long-standing agreement in the
company that any director has the authority to enter into any capital expenditure contract on behalf of
Yest without necessarily obtaining the approval of the board. All capital expenditure recommendations are
based on the CFO’s best estimate of the expected cost. There is no requirement for detailed budgets and
cash-flow projections. The capital expenditure committee has always trusted the CFO to allocate funds as
needed, and has seen no need to review the effectiveness of past capital expenditure decisions on a
regular basis to ensure that returns on the investments are in line with the expectations of Yest’s
shareholders.
Yest has a project management policy document; however, this could not be located and provided to the
auditors at the time requested. Any available staff at the time are appointed on an available project. The
project manager believes he always attracts the best staff and therefore does not feel it is necessary to
ensure staff have the relevant qualification necessary to perform the job. The project manager does not
have to present regular progress reports to the capital expenditure committee. The last time he made
such a presentation was six months ago due to the fact that he is always busy inspecting projects at the
various sites.
REQUIRED
Identify the weaknesses in the controls implemented by Yest to reduce the risk associated with capital expenditure
and provide recommendations to improve them.
[11]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
[33 marks]
You are the senior auditor of Supermart (Pty) Ltd (Supermart), a chain of grocery stores located in the Gauteng
province while their corporate head office is located in Sunninghill. The company has a December financial
year-end.
You met with Mrs Vilakazi, the newly appointed chief executive officer, at the start of the financial year when
she indicated to you that she does not want a repeat of the prior year’s modified audit report that arose as a result of
material misstatements in fixed assets. She has requested you to spend a week at the company visiting stores and
head office to identify all of the weaknesses in the current control system and to draft a report including suggestions
for improvement which they can implement to ensure that the company receives an unmodified audit report in the
current year.
The following was identified during the week spent at the client:
Fixed asset acquisitions

Where a store manager at the company identifies a need for a fixed asset, he/she contacts the closest supplier to find
out if the company has the item in stock. If the supplier indicates that they do, a contract is sent to the manager who
has the authority to enter into the agreement on behalf of the company. Once the contract has been signed by the
manager, a copy is returned to the supplier and the order for the item is then placed.
Once the order is placed, the manager sends a copy of the contract to the accountant at head office.
The accountant uses his unique user ID and password when recording the asset on the accounting records. Prior
to recording the assets in the accounting records, the accountant inspects the contract to determine if the contract and
underlying asset is in the name of the company and uses the detail in the contract (cost, transportation and
installation costs) to capitalise the amount to the accounting records.
For assets requiring that the full acquisition price must be settled on delivery
In some instances, the company is required to settle the full acquisition price on delivery of the asset to a store.
Where this is the case, the accountant records the asset on the accounting system on the date that he receives the
contract from the manager by using the detail (e.g. cost price, installation costs and delivery costs) in the contract
and sets up an automatic electronic payment from the company’s bank account to the supplier for the delivery date
recorded in the contract.
The asset is immediately recognised in the fixed asset register when the asset is recorded on the accounting
system.
For assets where the acquisition price is to be settled over the course of the useful life of the asset
Where the acquisition price of the asset is to be settled over the useful life of the asset, the manager at the store
informs the accountant via an email that the asset has been installed. The accountant uses the email instruction as his
basis for recording the asset on the accounting system.
The asset is immediately recognised in the fixed asset register when the asset is recorded on the accounting
system.
There have been instances in the past where installation and transportation costs have been handled by third
parties (i.e. not the supplier) and store managers have indicated that they were not aware that they needed to furnish
the accountant with this information as the delivery and installation was normally handled by a family or friend in
order to save the company money.
Disposal of assets
Where the manager at the store feels that the asset is not producing as much economic benefit for the store as
expected, he/she has the right to dispose of the asset to whomever he/she wants. Where the asset has passed its
original useful life, the manager has the authority to take the asset for him/herself or to give the asset to an employee
at the store.
Where an asset has been disposed of for cash or zero value, the manager informs the accountant at head office
via email to remove the asset from the fixed asset register.
The accountant logs onto the system and removes the asset from the accounting system and simultaneously from
the fixed asset register. The accountant is required to print and file the instruction emailed to him, but it was noted
during a discussion with him that there were a few email instructions that were not available. He attributed this to
email storage problems and that he must have erroneously deleted the email instructions in order to free up space in
his inbox.
Depreciation
When a new asset is purchased, the accountant inspects the contract with the supplier and, based on the detail
located in it, determines the depreciation rate and useful life of the asset. The accountant checks the internet for
detail on the residual value of assets of a similar kind and records this in the accounting system when initially
capitalising the asset.
The system automatically calculates the depreciation for the month and posts the depreciation to the accounting
records.
Impairment
Managers are informed that if they see damaged fixed assets at their store, they should take a photo of the asset and
email it to the accountant. The accountant assesses whether or not the asset is impaired based on the photo and
writes down the asset to the appropriate carrying value amount in the accounting records and fixed asset register.
The accountant has indicated that it is not feasible to drive out to a store to view the asset, especially considering the
time he would have to spend in traffic.
REQUIRED
Draft a report to Mrs Vilakazi where you identify weaknesses surrounding the fixed assets at the company and make
recommendations to address them.
[33]
Note: [2] marks will be awarded for using the correct format.
Question 7 LEVEL 2
Recommendations
[18 marks]
Wowlands Ltd (Wowlands), founded by Wouter Landman, opened its doors for the first time in Melville,
Johannesburg, on 1 February 1998. Today, the company, which is listed on the JSE, is one of South Africa’s leading
retail chains with over 60 stores across South Africa. The success of Wowlands is driven by Wouter’s belief that
service should be consumer focused and that superior quality food, clothing and home appliances should be made
available at reasonable prices. This belief is shared, and upheld, by Wowlands’s board of directors.
As a member of the company’s internal auditing department, you are currently busy with the internal audit for
the current financial year. The following breakdown, setting out certain transactions that took place during the
current financial year, was received from management:
Transaction 1
Wowlands issued 2 000 8% debentures of R1 000 each during February 20X1 in order to raise long-term debt
financing for an investment in a new branded environmental programme, Enviro-Aware, a programme aimed at
communicating environmental issues to customers via the labels and the logos on selected Wowlands products on
which customers receive discounts.
Transaction 2
During the financial year, Wowlands purchased a new accounting software system called COMPUWARE from
Spectacular Connections (Pty) Ltd as a standard accounting package. Owing to the highly specialised technical
nature of the new system, employees involved with its operation had to undergo specific training.
Transaction 3
Wowlands purchased 35 new desktop computers from Spectacular Connections (Pty) Ltd during the year for use in
the accounting department.
REQUIRED
List the key controls that you, as the internal auditor, would want to see relating to:
1. the occurrence and management authorisation of long-term debt financing in transaction 1 (5)
2. the occurrence and authorisation of the purchase of the COMPUWARE accounting software system in transaction
2 (8)
3. the completeness of property, plant and equipment records for computers purchased in transaction 3. (5)
[18]
1.
a) The long-term debt financing transaction should be properly initiated, reviewed and authorised by the board of
directors. (1)
b) The authorisation for this financing transaction should be properly documented and kept as proof thereof (e.g.
minutes taken at the board meeting at which approval was given). (1)
c) There should be proper debenture agreements or contracts in place with debenture holders. (1)
d) These agreements or contracts should be signed by authorised individuals from Wowlands as well as the
debenture holders. (1)
e) The debenture agreements or contracts should set out all terms and conditions, dates of repayment, interest rates,
etc. (1)
f) A proper segregation of duties should be in place between the execution of and accounting for this transaction.
(1)
Available marks (6); maximum marks (5)
2.
a) A feasibility study should be performed regarding the accounting software. (1)
b) Competitive quotations should be obtained and considered (possibly even tenders). (1)
c) There should be a specific capital budgeting process and provision specifically made in this budget for the
purchase of the COMPUWARE accounting system. (1)
d) The board of directors should take ultimate responsibility for the acquisition of property, plant and equipment
(including the purchase of the new accounting system), and this should be set out in the company’s
memorandum of incorporation (MOI). (1)
e) Approval for purchase should be documented in the minutes of the board meeting at which such authorisation
was given. (1)
f) Management should monitor capital expenditure against the budget. (1)
g) Special approval and authorisation from the board of directors should be obtained for any overruns on the
capital expenditure budget. (1)
h) There should be an authorisation table (setting out which managerial level may approve transactions between
certain monetary ranges) based on the size of the capital asset transaction (e.g. only the board of directors may
authorise a purchase of property, plant and equipment above a certain amount). (1)
i) Both the IT and the accounting departments should have input in the technical specifications of software and
approve it. (1)
j) A proper segregation of duties should be in place between the authorisation for and the accounting of
transactions. (1)
3.
a) Detailed property records (manual or computerised) should be maintained for PPE items, and should be updated
with the purchase of the computers. (1)
b) The following should be documented in these records:
3.
i) Description, location and the asset number (1)

ii) Date of acquisition and the cost (purchase and installation costs) (1)
iii) Depreciation rate, methods, estimated useful life, etc. (1)
c) The PPE subsidiary ledger should be reconciled periodically to the general ledger account in order to ensure that
it is complete. (1)
d) Periodic comparisons should be performed between the subsidiary ledger and the existing capital assets (from
the assets to the ledger). (1)
Notes:
In order to be able to answer the question, you should have a thorough knowledge and understanding of key
controls and the control objectives/assertions.
A further point to take note of is the following part of the required: ‘would want to see’, which is another way of
asking for recommendations. Thus there should be ‘shoulds’ in all the controls that you have written down.
Question 8 LEVEL 2
Recommendations
[5 marks]
You are a trainee auditor at TPC & Co. (TPC), a firm of registered auditors assigned to the 20X1 statutory audit of
Orange (Pty) Ltd (Orange), whose year-end is 31 August 20X1.
The company specialises in a unique South African clothing brand for children that is not only affordable, but
also fashionable and functional. Orange trades from its 15 retail stores across South Africa. Each branch has its own
account with ABBA bank, which allows it to pay certain expenditures on an ad hoc basis. Both the accounting and
the internal audit departments of Orange operate from their head office in Durban.
REQUIRED
Briefly list the key controls over the branch bank accounts that you would expect to see at Orange.
[5]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
Recommendations
[10 marks]
ABC Earthworks (Pty) Ltd (ABC Earthworks) is a civil construction company operating in the field of road
construction, mass earthworks, township development and plant hire. It has extensive experience in all forms of
roads and earthworks, including construction, upgrading, rehabilitation and resurfacing.
The company operates an extensive fleet of modern earthworks plants and equipment, including excavators,
graders, loaders, dozers, trucks, crushers, and asphalt and surfacing machinery. The company attracts and retains
highly qualified and experienced individuals with solid track records in the road construction sector.
In the current year, ABC Earthworks was awarded a tender worth R150 million to demolish, reconstruct and
refurbish rundown buildings in the city centre owned by the local municipality. To meet tender requirements, ABC
Earthworks purchased additional earthworks equipment and increased its staff base.
REQUIRED
List the key controls the auditor can expect over the purchase of the additional earthworks equipment.
[10]
Question 10 LEVEL 3
Tests of controls
[10 marks]
You are the independent auditor of Car Manufacturing (Pty) Ltd, a company that manufactures motor vehicles.
You intend to place reliance on the investment system of internal control. From the previous year’s working
papers, and after discussions with management, you documented the ordering and recording of the fixed asset
system as follows:
Purchases of fixed assets are divided into two categories: purchases below R50 000 and purchases above R50 000.
Different authorisation levels are required for purchases below and above R50 000.
Ordering fixed assets

All orders of fixed assets under R50 000 occur as follows: The financial officer in each division completes a
pre-numbered fixed asset purchase requisition and the manager in the division approves the requisition. The
requisition is then sent to the purchase division.
All orders of fixed assets above R50 000 occur as follows: For all asset purchases above R50 000, a fixed asset
purchase application form is completed by the financial officer in each division and approved by the manager of
that division.
The fixed- asset purchase application form is then sent to the head of the purchasing division. There is a fixed asset
committee that meets once a month and looks at all the fixed asset purchase application forms and decides which
fixed asset items will be purchased. The chairman of the committee signs the fixed asset purchase application form
and sends it to the purchase division.
Purchase division:
The purchases clerk receives the purchase requisition form or fixed asset purchase applications and completes the
pre-numbered orders in threefold.
Purchases are only made from a list of approved suppliers.
The purchases manager compares the requisition or ‘request for purchase’ form, depending on whether the
purchase is above or under R50 000, with the purchase order, ensures that the order is placed with an approved
supplier and signs the purchase order.
One copy of the order is sent to the supplier, one copy is sent to the division that placed the order, one copy is sent
to the creditors clerk and one copy remains in the purchase division. The purchase manager regularly follows up
on long-outstanding orders and reviews the number sequence of orders.
Recording fixed assets

An invoice is received from the supplier. The invoice is compared to the order and goods received note.
The accounts clerk records the purchases in the purchase journal, after invoices are received from suppliers.
The general ledger clerk then transfers the transactions to the general ledger.
The capitalised fixed assets are recorded in the fixed asset register and the other purchases of fixed assets are
recorded as expenses.
The accountant reviews the recordings of the fixed assets.
The calculation of the depreciation is done by the accountant. The financial manager reviews the calculations.
REQUIRED
Formulate the tests of controls you would perform on the internal controls for the ordering and recording of fixed
assets as described above. You have already formulated tests of control for the classification and cut-off of
transactions.
[10]
Question 11 LEVEL 2
Key controls and assertions
[11 marks]
You are a member of the audit team responsible for the audit of Amanzi Ltd (Amanzi), a company that sells natural
spring water, for the year ended 30 June 20X2. You are responsible for the audit of the share capital account.
Share capital
AMOUNT (R) NOTES

Opening balance 1 July 20X1 600 000 1
Share issue: general public 300 000 2
Share issue: directors 90 000 3
Closing balance 30 June 20X1 990 000 4
Notes:
1. The opening balance represents 200 000 shares at R3 per share. The share register is updated every time there is a
change in shareholding. Every month, the balance in the share register is matched to the share capital account in
the general ledger.
2. During the year, 100 000 shares were issued to the general public at R3 per share in order to raise funds for the
expansion of Amanzi’s operations. At the time of the new share issue, the company had 250 000 authorised
shares, which fact, confirmed by the directors, was in line with the company’s memorandum of incorporation. In
order to allow for the additional share issue, the memorandum was amended (by means of a special shareholder’s
resolution obtained by the directors prior to the amendment) in order to increase the number of authorised shares
to 500 000. Payments made in this regard are matched to the cash book and the proof of payments.
3. An additional 10 000 shares at R3 each were issued to the directors themselves by means of a loan granted to
them in order to help them acquire them. For the transactions (which were conducted in line with Amanzi’s
memorandum of incorporation stipulations) to be valid, a shareholders special resolution was obtained.
The financial accountant matched all considerations received during the year with regard to share issues to the
share issue price as determined by the board and then recalculated the amounts.
4. At year-end, the financial accountant agreed the balance of the share capital account in the general ledger to the
trial balance, the statement of changes in equity and the statement of financial position.
REQUIRED
Identify the key controls relating to the share capital account of Amanzi for the year ended 30 June 20X2. For each
key control identified, allocate the applicable assertion(s). Answer using the following tabular format:
KEY CONTROLS ASSERTIONS
[11]
Question 12 LEVEL 3
Internal control vs test of control, control objectives
[9 marks]
You are the auditor of Fast Freight (Pty) Ltd (Fast Freight), a freight company well known in South Africa since its
incorporation in 20X2 that specialises in sea, air and road freight. Customers, ranging from individuals to large
corporations, are all guaranteed valuable advice on the best distribution methods as well as the other options
available to them.
Although their head office is situated in Pretoria, Fast Freight has branches across South Africa, the rest of
Africa and the UK. The company has a large fleet of vehicles and operates an innovative system that prints labels,
waybills and so on.
During the year under review, the following activities took place:
1. A new online tracking system (Track & Trace), which allows customers to log into the system via Fast Freight’s
website in order to view the status of their delivery, was purchased. Owing to its highly specialised nature and the
value of the purchase, the board of directors was directly involved in authorising the purchase transaction for the
addition to property, plant and equipment at a board meeting.
2. The company conducted a physical verification of vehicles during the last month of the financial year. This
entailed employees physically inspecting each vehicle in their fleet and comparing them to the details in the fixed
asset register.
3. One of the vehicles in the fleet was involved in an accident, during which several items for delivery in the vehicle
were damaged. Included in the financial statements of Fast Freight for the year under review is a provision for
damages arising from a pending court case as the driver of the delivery vehicle had been under the influence of
alcohol at the time of the accident. As a result, the company decided to provide for the damages based on the
estimated market prices of the affected items. However, the auditors obtained their own estimated market prices
for the items and compared them to those provided by the company.
4. Having obtained the company’s insurance register, the auditors noted that, as part of their financial records, a
substantial amount had been included for prepaid insurance. In addition, all new insurance policies were inspected
in order to confirm that they had been signed by an authorised individual at Fast Freight.
5. Jamal Daily, a company clerk, is responsible for updating the fixed asset register, while Peter Davies, the asset
manager, is responsible for authorising the low-value purchases and disposals of any property, plant and
equipment.
REQUIRED
For each of the activities referred to above, state whether it is an internal control or a test of control. In addition, state
the control objective(s) applicable.
[9]
Question 13 LEVEL 3
Test of control vs substantive procedure, objective of audit procedure
[13 marks]
You are the audit manager assigned to the audit of BWM (Pty) Ltd (BWM) for the financial year ending 30 June
20X1. Founded in 1998, the company is currently one of the 25 largest vehicle manufacturers in the world.
In August four years ago, BWM opened a new manufacturing plant in Johannesburg boasting a high-tech
assembly line that carries with it the promise of producing the planned capacity of 230 BWM vehicles per day by
December 20X1. The total investment cost relating to the full construction of the plant and machinery totalled R9,8
million for the relevant financial year. The new assembly line, on which operations are performed by both humans
and robots, includes a conveyor belt that transports the vehicles from one station to the next, and allows the vehicles
to be tilted and rotated some 90 degrees from the horizontal.
The plant is divided into three buildings arranged in a circle around the central office building, an arrangement that
divides operations into:
the construction of the main framework
the paint job
the assembly of other remaining car parts.
Audit procedures were performed on the new manufacturing plant and related machinery, both of which constitute
part of the property, plant and equipment (PPE) account balance in the financial statements for the year ending 30
June 20X1:
1. Material expenses relating to the new manufacturing plant in Johannesburg (obtained from invoices, contracts,
etc.) were compared to approved capital expenditure budgets.
2. Minutes of directors meetings were inspected for approval of the capital expenditure budgets relating to the new
manufacturing plant.
3. A sample of plant and machinery assets was extracted from BWM’s asset register (including the material
additions for the year); such selected assets were inspected physically and matched to the descriptions in the fixed
asset register.
4. All purchase documents and documents of title deeds relating to the new manufacturing plant were inspected in
order to confirm that they were in the name of BWM.
5. The dates on material purchase documentation (i.e. invoices) for the new manufacturing plant, as well as the dates
in the relevant ledger accounts, were inspected in order to verify the accounting period in which these expenses
had been incurred.
6. Relevant job descriptions were inspected in order to ensure that the person(s) responsible for the initiation of a
capital asset acquisition had not been the same persons responsible for the final approval thereof.
7. The minutes of directors meetings were inspected in order to ensure that all purchases relating to the new
manufacturing plant upon which the directors agreed were recorded in the financial records of BWM.
8. Amounts in the general ledger (relating to the purchases of the plant and the machinery) were agreed to the
minutes of the directors meetings, the capital expenditure budgets, the invoices, the contracts and other relevant
documentation.
REQUIRED
For each of the audit procedures listed above, state whether the audit procedure is a test of control or a substantive
procedure, and explain what the objective of the audit procedure is.
[13]
Question 14 LEVEL 3
Tests of controls vs substantive procedures
[16 marks]
Owing to the uniqueness of transactions in the investment and financing cycle as well as the fact that the number of
transactions that take place in this cycle is considerably smaller than in other business cycles, the functional areas
depend on the type of transaction.
Authorisation, which is an example of one such area, depends on the type of transaction. When a company
intends issuing shares, the authorisation might have to come from the board of directors and may also be subject to
other authorisation requirements as laid down in the company’s memorandum of incorporation. On the other hand,
authorisation for a prepayment of insurance might only include the signature of an individual authorised staff
member.
Although the functional areas are unique, internal controls are still implemented by management in each of them
in order to ensure the achievement of an entity’s control objectives (occurrence and authorisation, accuracy and the
completeness of financial information).
Auditing the investment and financing cycle may be divided into three categories:
1. Audit of certain current and non-current assets, such as prepaid expenses, intangible assets, goodwill, property,
plant and equipment
2. Audit of financial instruments, shareholders’ equity, long-term liabilities and statement of comprehensive income
accounts
3. Audit of cash and investments
Bearing this in mind, consider the following scenario. Rent-a-Car (Pty) Ltd (Rent-a-Car), one of the leading car
rental companies in South Africa, offers a fleet of approximately 16 000 vehicles at over 98 locations throughout
South Africa. In the performance of your duties as the company’s auditor during the year-end audit, you have:
1. examined copies of debenture agreements in order to confirm that they were in the name of Rent-a-Car (Pty) Ltd
2. inspected a sample of monthly bank reconciliations for the signature of the person performing the authorisation
3. observed whether the function of initiating a property, plant and equipment acquisition had been segregated from
the final approval thereof
4. examined the minutes of the board of directors meetings, as well as any communication with Rent-a-Car’s legal
counsel, in order to determine whether or not there was any pending litigation with regard to trademarks, patents
and/or copyrights
5. verified the mathematical accuracy of the last bank reconciliation for the year under audit and agreed the balance
to the general ledger, trial balance and financial statements
6. determined the basis for valuing investments by tracing values to published quotations for marketable securities
7. inspected the minutes of meetings of the board where the acquisition of a long-term loan had been authorised by
the directors
8. compared the schedule of provisions for the current financial year to that of the previous year, following up on
any provisions not included on the current year’s list or those that had changed significantly in value
9. traced the proceeds from the disposal of vehicles in the fleet to the bank statements of the company
10. confirmed the market value for the listed shares in which the company had invested by means of an inspection of
the relevant stock exchange publications.
REQUIRED
For each of the 10 audit procedures provided above, identify the category of the investment and financing cycle in
which the audit procedure would typically be performed, stating whether such a procedure is a test of control or a
substantive procedure. Present your answer in tabular form.
[16]
CHAPTER 11Overview of the audit process
CHAPTER 12Pre-engagement and planning activities
CHAPTER 13Audit procedures: Essential concepts
CHAPTER 14Audit procedures: Specific considerations
CHAPTER 15Completion of the audit
CHAPTER 16The independent review
CHAPTER 17Additional questions
INTRODUCTION
The topics contained in this chapter provide a background to those included in the rest of the book. Normally, they
are not tested on their own, but a thorough understanding of them will enhance your application of these topics in
later chapters.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
Stages and steps
[13 marks]
External audit is a systematic process of obtaining and evaluating evidence and information objectively regarding
assertions about economic actions and events in order to determine the degree of correlation between those
assertions and predefined criteria, and to communicate the results in writing to the users of the financial statements.
REQUIRED
List the phases of the audit process and discuss the steps or considerations appropriate to each phase.
[13]
LEVEL 1
Question 2
Question 2
Audit evidence
[7 marks]
In order to demonstrate compliance with the International Standards on Auditing when conducting an audit, an
auditor is required to prepare and to retain audit documentation, which is presented in the form of working papers
kept in an audit file.
REQUIRED
List examples of audit documentation that should be prepared and retained by an auditor and explain why an auditor
should prepare audit documentation in a timely manner.
[7]
Question 3 LEVEL 1
Audit evidence
[7 marks]
An auditor’s audit opinion and report are based on audit evidence that the auditor collected during the ‘obtaining
audit evidence’ phase of the audit process and which is contained in his/her working papers (audit documentation).
REQUIRED
Describe the requirements for audit evidence.
[7]
1. The audit evidence needs to be:

a) sufficient (the measure of quantity); and (1)
b) appropriate (the measure of quality). (1)
2. The sufficiency and appropriateness of audit evidence are interrelated. (1)
3. The quantity of audit evidence required is affected by the auditor’s assessment of the risk of material misstatement
(the higher the assessed risks, the more audit evidence is likely to be required). (1)
4. The quantity of audit evidence required is also affected by the quality of such evidence (the higher the quality, the
less audit evidence may be required). (1)
5. When determining the quality (appropriateness) of audit evidence, the relevance, as well as the reliability, of such
evidence needs to be taken into account. (2)
6. The relevance of audit evidence refers to the logical connection to, or bearing upon, the purpose of the audit
procedure and, where appropriate, the assertion under consideration. (1)
7. The reliability of audit evidence is influenced by the source and the nature of the evidence. (1)
Note:
As the concepts/principles of sufficient and appropriate audit evidence are important, they should be kept in mind
when formulating audit procedures in chapters 13 and 14.
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Impact of computerised environment on audit procedures
[7 marks]
Most entities have their financial statements prepared using accounting software packages. As a result of using these
packages for generating the financial statements subject to audit, the auditor has to consider the impact of the
computer environment on the audit process.
REQUIRED
Indicate and discuss the impact/effect of the computer environment on the audit process during the four phases of
that process.
[7]
1. Pre-engagement activities
a) Prior to accepting the audit engagement, the auditor needs to consider the existence of the computer
environment and the complexity thereof, which will influence his/her consideration of his/her professional
competence to conduct the audit with proper care, and specifically the need for an information technology (IT)
specialist (expert), and the availability thereof. (1)
b) If the auditor concludes that an IT specialist is required, but such a specialist is not available at the time of the
audit, the audit should not be accepted. (1)
2. Planning
a) During the planning stage of the audit process, the auditor will consider the influence of the computer
environment when identifying and assessing the risk of material misstatement (i.e. inherent and control risk).
b) Suitable audit procedures should be formulated in order to respond to the assessed risks, which may (1)
include testing the computerised controls implemented by the management of the auditee. (1)
3. Obtaining audit evidence
a) In obtaining audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate, the auditor may consider the use of
computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) in a case where the auditee stores financial information
electronically. (1)
b) CAATs may be used to perform both tests of controls and substantive procedures. (1)
c) CAATs are audit procedures performed through the use of software in order to gather audit evidence in a
computerised environment when it is impractical or inefficient to obtain audit evidence manually. (1)
d) In order to obtain evidence about the effectiveness of the computerised control environment and control
activities, the auditor will use system-orientated CAATs. Data-orientated CAATs are used in order to perform
mainly substantive procedures and, in some instances, also tests of controls. (1)
e) The evaluating, concluding and reporting phase of the audit process is not affected significantly by the existence
of the computer environment. (1)
Question 5 LEVEL 1
Audit opinion: Modified and unmodified
[4 marks]
An audit opinion is an opinion expressed by an auditor in an audit report as to whether the financial statements of an
entity are fairly presented or not. The auditor can express either an unmodified or a modified audit opinion.
REQUIRED
Discuss the difference between an unmodified and a modified audit opinion and list the different types of modified
audit opinions.
[4]
INTRODUCTION
The following types of application question may typically be asked regarding the pre-engagement and planning
phase of an audit:
Discuss the factors to be considered prior to accepting an audit engagement.
Discuss the strategy that an auditor will follow for a specific audit.
Calculate the planning materiality figure for a specific audit.
Describe the audit risk or the risk of material misstatement at financial statement level.
Assess the audit risk or the risk of material misstatement at financial statement level.
Describe the risk of material misstatement at assertion financial statement level.
EXAMPLE QUESTION 1
Pre-engagement
[10 marks]
Solomon & Phillips (S&P) is a firm of registered auditors with offices in Pretoria, Bloemfontein and East London.
In October 20X6, S&P was awarded a tender to be the statutory auditors of Zondi Ltd (Zondi) for the 20X5 financial
year, after the previous auditors resigned, as they could not provide Zondi with a quality audit service as a result of
staff shortages.
Zondi, a company listed on the JSE, supplies paper manufactured at their plant in Mpumalanga, and has
distribution outlets in 10 major South African cities. Zondi’s clientele comprises, among others, universities and
corporate organisations.
The chief executive officer of the company is a qualified chartered accountant who is highly regarded in the
industry. Since his appointment 12 years ago, Zondi has been reporting favourable results and has awarded its
shareholders a handsome dividend.
S&P has allocated eight audit team members, including the partner in charge, who has a 7.5% shareholding in
Zondi, to the audit for the year ended 30 June 20X5.
REQUIRED
Discuss the factors S&P should have considered prior to accepting the statutory audit engagement of Zondi for the
year ended 30 June 20X5.
[10]
GUIDANCE

Discuss the factors1 S&P should have considered prior to accepting2 the statutory audit engagement of Zondi3 for the
year ended 30 June 20X6.
[10]

In order to answer a pre-engagement question, you should know the pre-engagement steps, namely:
Does the auditor want to perform the audit?
Can the auditor perform the audit?
Are there any ethical reasons why the auditor should not perform the audit?
Are there any statutory reasons why the auditor should not perform the audit?
Remember that the last action during the pre-engagement phase of the audit is to finalise the terms of the
engagement by means of an engagement letter.
In order for you to identify the relevant information in the scenario, you should also know what each of the
above-mentioned steps involves. For example, in order to know whether the auditor wants to perform the audit, you
will need to establish:
whether the auditor is satisfied that his/her firm is not prohibited from performing the audit in terms of the ISA
210 requirements
whether the auditor wants to be associated with this industry
whether the auditor wants to be associated with the owners or management of the entity (you need to remember
that the auditor would not want to be associated with management if there were indications that they lacked
integrity: refer to ISQC 1 Guidance on Management’s Integrity)
what the nature of the client–auditor relationship is likely to be
any significant risks of material misstatement that the auditor might be aware of at this stage
whether taking on the engagement would be a sound business decision (i.e. whether the company would be
willing, and able, to pay the audit fee).
Read the question

Solomon & Phillips (S&P) is a firm of registered auditors with offices in Pretoria, Bloemfontein and East London.4
In October 20X5, S&P was awarded a tender to be the statutory auditors of Zondi Ltd (Zondi) for the 2016 financial
year after the previous auditors resigned, as they could not provide Zondi with a quality audit service5 as a result of
staff shortages.
Zondi, a company listed on the JSE, supplies paper manufactured at their plant6 in Mpumalanga and has
distribution outlets in 10 major South African cities.7 Zondi’s clientele comprises, among others, universities and
corporate organisations.
The chief executive officer of the company is a qualified chartered accountant who is highly regarded in the
industry.8 Since his appointment 12 years ago, Zondi has been reporting favourable results and awarded its
shareholders a handsome dividend.9
S&P has allocated eight audit team members, including the partner in charge, who has a 7.5% shareholding in
Zondi,10 to the audit for the year ended 30 June 2016.
Exam technique
In general, there is not a lot of examination technique involved in a pre-engagement question. However, in order to
obtain the maximum marks, structure your answer according to the steps set out above under the heading Identify
the theory applicable to the question.
When dealing with the auditor’s ethical issues, remember to structure your answer according to the Code of
Professional Conduct’s conceptual framework:
Identify the issue.
State the type of threat and the fundamental principle being threatened.
Consider the significance of the threat and, if it is significant, deal with the safeguards.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1. Zondi: the industry11

S&P will not have a problem associating itself12 with Zondi, as the paper manufacturing and supply industry
within which it operates is not a dubious one. (1)
2. The integrity of Zondi’s management 13
The CEO of Zondi appears to have integrity, as he is a qualified chartered accountant14 who is highly regarded in
the industry. (1)
3. Communication with the previous auditor15
S&P needs to contact the previous auditor in order to identify whether or not there is any reason why the audit
engagement of Zondi should not be accepted. It is unlikely that there is a reason16 not to accept the audit
engagement, as the previous auditor resigned as a result of not having adequate staff with which to service Zondi.
4. Zondi’s ability to pay the audit fee17 (1)
Zondi will be able to pay the audit fee, as the company has been paying its shareholders handsome dividends for
the past 12 years.18 (1)
5. Auditor’s ethical requirements19
a) The partner in charge of the audit engagement of Zondi has a 7.5% shareholding in the company. (1)
b) This might create a self-interest threat to objectivity. (1)
c) The threat could be regarded as significant. (1)
d) The safeguard that could be applied in this regard is to let the partner dispose of the shareholding, or not to let
20
him/her be involved in the statutory audit of Zondi. (1)

6. The auditor’s skills, competence and resources21
S&P needs to consider if it has the adequate skills, the competencies and the resources to service Zondi by taking
into account the fact that:
a) the previous auditors resigned owing to a shortage of staff22 (1)
b) Zondi has a manufacturing plant located in Mpumalanga and distribution outlets in 10 major cities across South
Africa. (1)
7. Engagement letter 23
When it is comfortable with accepting the statutory audit of Zondi, S&P needs to draft an engagement letter
highlighting, among other issues, (1)
a) the responsibility of Zondi’s management and that of the auditors of S&P
b) the duty of S&P to report a reportable irregularity, if it exists. (1)
EXAMPLE QUESTION 2
Strategy
[4 marks]
You have been the audit partner of Pink Boyd (Pty) Ltd (Pink Boyd) for the past five years. Recently, the company
decided to expand its business, not only by selling music both online and in its stores, but also by providing online
lessons for various instruments.
This has made it necessary for you to obtain knowledge of the new expansion, in the process of which you gathered
that:
1. Pink Boyd (Pty) Ltd has branches in 10 different cities throughout South Africa
2. the maintenance of the application programs used for online sales are subcontracted to Help Inc.
REQUIRED
Explain how each of the above instances will influence your audit strategy.
[4]
GUIDANCE

Explain how each of the above instances24 will influence your audit strategy.
[4]

In order to answer the question, you need to know that the audit strategy typically consists of:
the scope of the audit (what has to be performed)
the timing of the audit (by when it needs to be performed)
the direction of the audit (how it is going to be performed)
the resources to be deployed in order to perform the audit.
Read the question

You have been the audit partner of Pink Boyd (Pty) Ltd (Pink Boyd) for the past five years. Recently, the company
decided to expand its business, not only by selling music both online and in its stores, but also by providing online
lessons for various instruments.25
This has made it necessary for you to obtain knowledge of the new expansion, in the process of which you gathered
that:
1. Pink Boyd (Pty) Ltd has branches in 10 different cities26 throughout South Africa
2. the maintenance of the application programs27 used for online sales are subcontracted to Help Inc.
Exam technique
There is not a specific way of answering audit strategy questions. In general, though, because the necessary
information is provided in the scenario, you need only to identify the issues and explain how they will affect the
audit strategy and thus the scope, the timing and the direction of the audit, as well as the resources allocated to the
audit.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1.
1.
a) This will affect the scope of the audit, as all the branches will have to be visited28 in order for inventory counts
to be performed and their internal controls reviewed. (1)
b) Therefore it will have to be ascertained whether or not there are enough staff members available in order to
29
perform all 10 audits (1)

c) Timing is also of the essence, as the branches will have to be visited both during the course of the year and at
year-end,30 which places a burden on human resources. (1)
2.
a) This will affect the scope, as the auditors would have to gain an understanding of both the general and the
application controls (computerised controls)31 at Help Inc. in order to ensure that they can place reliance on the
latter’s internal controls. (1)
b) The auditors might have to make use of a computer audit specialist32 to help with the evaluation of the general
and application controls (computerised controls) at Help Inc. (1)
EXAMPLE QUESTION 3
Materiality
[10 marks]
You are a first-year trainee on the audit of Zondi Ltd (Zondi), a company listed on the JSE that supplies paper
manufactured at their plant in Mpumalanga. Zondi’s clientele comprises, among others, universities and corporate
organisations.
Your audit firm has recently been appointed as the auditors of Zondi. The following is an extract from the
company’s financial information:
BUDGETED JUNE 20X1 AUDITED JUNE 20X0

R’000 R’000
Revenue 12 000 9 500
Gross profit 9 600 7 600
Operating expenses 4 650 3 850
Profit before tax 2 830 1 820

Total assets Total 45 000 32 000
liabilities 28 000 19 000
The actual 20X1 financial results are not yet available, as management is currently finalising the closing entries.
Notes:
1. It is anticipated that the sales volume of paper for 20X1 will increase by at least 10%, as a result of Zondi being
able to sell paper in Lesotho and Swaziland.
2. Zondi plans to purchase new machinery to be used in the production of paper, in order to meet increased demand.
Your audit firm applies the following percentages in calculating planning materiality:
Revenue 0.5–1%
Gross profit 1–2%
Profit before tax 5–10%
Total assets 1–2%
REQUIRED
Discuss, with calculations, the planning materiality figure for Zondi for the 30 June 20X1 year-end audit.
[10]
GUIDANCE

Discuss, with calculations,33 the planning materiality34 figure for Zondi Ltd for the 30 June 20X1 year-end audit.
[10]

In order to calculate planning materiality, you need to know the steps involved in calculating the figure, as well as
the reasons for using certain information (figures, etc.):
Choose a set of financial statement figures to use in the calculation.
Choose a base component within the set of financial statements selected.
Determine a range for the base component.
Calculate and conclude on a planning materiality figure within the range (remember to take the inverse
relationship between audit risk and materiality into account).
Conclude on performance materiality and clearly trivial matters.
You also need to know that planning materiality consists of both overall and performance materiality, and that the
latter will always be lower than the overall materiality figure.
Read the question

You are a first-year trainee on the audit of Zondi Ltd (Zondi), a company listed on the JSE that supplies paper
manufactured at their plant in Mpumalanga. Zondi’s clientele comprises, among others, universities and corporate
organisations.
Your audit firm has recently been appointed35 as the auditors of Zondi. The following is an extract from the
company’s financial information:
BUDGETED JUNE 20X1 AUDITED JUNE 20X0

R’000 R’000
Revenue 12 000 9 500
Gross profit 9 600 7 600
Operating expenses 4 650 3 850
Profit before tax 2 830 1,820

Total assets Total 45 000 32 000
liabilities 28 000 19 000
The actual 20X1 financial results are not yet available, as management is currently finalising the closing entries.
Notes:
1. It is anticipated that the sales volume of paper for 20X1 will increase by at least 10%, as a result of Zondi being
able to sell paper in Lesotho and Swaziland.
2. Zondi plans to purchase new machinery to be used in the production of paper in order to meet increased demand.
Your audit firm applies the following percentages36 in calculating planning materiality:
Revenue 0.5–1%
Gross profit 1–2%
Total assets 1–2%
Exam technique
Remember: As the calculation of planning materiality is a matter for the auditor’s professional judgement, you need
to motivate the decisions taken in calculating such materiality. Also remember to deal with the inverse relationship
between audit risk and materiality, and to consider both overall and performance materiality.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1. Decision on financial results to use in calculating planning materiality37
a) The choice38 is between the current year’s budgeted figures and the previous year’s audited results, since the
actual results of the current year are not yet available. (1)
b) The current year’s budgeted figures will be the most appropriate to use, since they take into account the 10%
growth in sales volumes and the acquisition of the new machinery.39 (1)
c) The current year’s budgeted figures also appear to be stable when compared with the previous year’s audited
figures, and no other adjustments will be necessary, as the figures already include the changes in circumstances
(the 10% growth in sales volumes and the acquisition of the new machinery).40 (1)
2. Choose a component in the set of figures selected
a) Zondi is a profit-orientated entity, therefore it would be appropriate to use components from the statement of
comprehensive income. (1)
b) Profit before tax can be considered to be the most appropriate benchmark, because Zondi is a profit-orientated
entity. (1)
3. Determine a range for the selected component
5–10% of R2 380 000 = R119 000 to R238 000 (1)
4. Calculate a materiality figure within the range
a) Given the fact that this is a new audit engagement, inherent risk41 is assessed as high. (1)
b) As a result, it will be appropriate to consider a planning materiality figure towards the lower end of the range.42
c) The lower planning materiality will allow the auditor to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence to (1)
address the high inherent risk, thereby reducing the audit risk. (1)
5. Conclusion on planning materiality figure43
Based on the calculation above and the discussion on the high inherent risk the overall planning materiality44 for
Zondi will be set at R119 000. (1)
6. Conclusion on performance materiality figure
75% can be applied to the planning materiality figure to arrive at performance materiality. A performance
materiality figure of R89 250 has thus been calculated for Zondi’s audit. (1)
7. Clearly trivial matters
Clearly trivial matters will be those below R2 380 (2% of materiality) unless they are qualitatively material. (1)
EXAMPLE QUESTION 4
Risk at financial statement level

[6 marks]
You are the auditor of Fixit Ltd (Fixit), a company listed on the JSE with a financial year-end at the end of February.
You are busy with the planning of the audit for the financial year ended 28 February 20X1.
For five years, Fixit, the holding company for a group of smaller companies, had the contract to supply repair
and maintenance services to 15 municipalities in Gauteng. When the contracts expired in February 20X1, the
company had gentlemen’s agreements with all the municipalities that the contracts would be renewed. In February
20X1, when 13 of the municipalities put their repair and maintenance contracts out to tender, Fixit won only five
contracts.
At the end of January 20X1, the purchase manager had imported R800 000 worth of inventory from China on
credit. This bulk purchase had been estimated to be sufficient in order to conduct repairs for all 15 municipalities
over the following 18 months. Payment for the bulk purchase, on which penalties and interest are payable on late
payment, is due on 1 May 20X1. As Fixit will receive retention fees from the municipalities by the end of March
20X1, the company is expected to be able to meet the payment deadline.
As a result of the loss of clients, Fixit has implemented an incentive scheme: all managers who achieve a total
profit of R500 000 for their department for the year ending February 20X1 will each receive a bonus of R50 000.
While updating your knowledge of the business questionnaire, you have determined that the company has a lack
of internal controls in various departments. The 20X1 audited financial statements are required by 31 March 20X1.
REQUIRED
Describe the risk of material misstatement at overall financial statement level.
[6]
GUIDANCE

Describe the risk of material misstatement45 at overall financial statement level.46

In order to answer the question, you need to know the difference between two important concepts in auditing:
1. Audit risk versus the risk of material misstatement
2. Risk at overall financial statement level versus risk at assertion level
Audit risk comprises three components:

1. Inherent risk
2. Control risk
3. Detection risk
The first two can be controlled by the company, and the third by the auditor. Risk of material misstatement refers to
the first two components only. Thus, the financial statements could be misstated materially as a result of:
fraud
error, or
the incorrect preparation of the financial statements on the going concern basis instead of on the liquidation basis.
You also need to know, and understand, the difference between risk at overall financial statement level and risk at
the assertion level:
Risk at overall financial statement level refers to risks associated with the financial statements as a whole and/or
risks that cannot be linked to a specific line item.
Risk at the assertion level refers to risks associated with specific line items, which could normally be linked to a
specific assertion as well.
Read the question

You are the auditor of Fixit Ltd (Fixit), a company listed on the JSE47 with a financial year-end at the end of
February. You are busy with the planning of the audit for the financial year ended 28 February 20X1.
For five years, Fixit, the holding company for a group of smaller companies,48 had the contract to supply repair
and maintenance services to 15 municipalities in Gauteng. When the contracts expired in February 20X1, the
company had gentlemen’s agreements with all the municipalities that the contracts would be renewed. In February
20X1, when 13 of the municipalities put their repair and maintenance contracts out on tender, Fixit won only five
contracts.49
At the end of January 20X1, the purchase manager had imported R800 000 worth of inventory50 from China on
credit. This bulk purchase had been estimated to be sufficient to conduct repairs for all 15 municipalities51 over the
following 18 months. Payment for the bulk purchase, on which penalties and interest are payable on late payment, is
due on 1 May 20X1. As Fixit will receive retention fees from the municipalities by the end of March 20X1, the
company is expected to be able to meet the payment deadline.
As a result of the loss of clients, Fixit has implemented an incentive scheme: all managers who achieve a total
profit of R500 000 for their department for the year ending February 20X1 will each receive a bonus of R50 000.52
While updating your knowledge of the business questionnaire, you have determined that the company has a lack
of internal controls53 in various departments. The 20X0 audited financial statements are required by 31 March 20X1.
54
Exam technique
When required to describe the risk of material misstatement at financial statement level, you need to establish the
indicators that increase the risk of material misstatement (thus inherent risk and control risk). Therefore, read the
scenario line by line and identify such indicators. Remember that you are looking for indicators that might indicate
that the financial statements are materially misstated as a result of:
fraud
error, or
You cannot write down the indicator only and expect to earn marks (unless you are required merely to list the
indicators). As part of your answer, you need to:
write down the indicator
link it to fraud, error or the incorrect preparation of the financial statements on the going concern basis instead of
on the liquidation basis
explain how the indicator would lead to the risk mentioned (e.g. fraud, error or the incorrect preparation of the
financial statements on the going concern basis instead of on the liquidation basis).
When required to describe audit risk, follow the same approach described above. However, you need to establish the
indicators that increase detection risk. Therefore, read the scenario line by line and identify such indicators.
Remember that you are looking for indicators that might show that the auditor’s procedures might not detect
material misstatements in the financial statements. You need to:
link it the auditor’s procedures that might not detect material misstatements in the financial statements
explain how the indicator would lead to the auditor’s procedures not detecting material misstatements in the
When required to assess or evaluate the risk of material misstatement or audit risk, you need to establish the
indicators that increase and decrease the risk of material misstatement or audit risk. In addition, you need to reach a
conclusion about the risk, indicating whether it is high, medium or low. Read the scenario line by line and identify
the indicators. Remember: this time you are looking for indicators that might increase or decrease the possibility that
the financial statements are materially misstated as a result of either:
fraud
error, or
If asked to do so, look for audit risk indicators that might increase or decrease the possibility that the auditor’s
procedures might not detect material misstatements in the financial statements.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1. As Fixit is listed on the JSE,55 the company’s financial statements might be materially misstated as a result of
fraud56 perpetrated in order to adhere to the JSE’s listing requirements.57 (1)
2. As the company is listed on the JSE, the company’s financial statements might be materially misstated as a
58
result of fraud59 perpetrated in order to improve the financial results with a view to increasing the share price,
thereby attracting investors.60 (1)
3. Fixit was contracted to five municipalities only,61 which might lead to a major loss of income and profit;62
therefore, the company’s financial statements might be materially misstated as a result of the incorrect application
of the going concern assumption.63 (1)
4. The company has already imported inventory for the repairs and maintenance for the contracts that they did not
win;64 therefore, the company will not generate any income,65 and they have already incurred expenses on which
penalties and interest are payable, if late payments are made. The company’s financial statements might be
materially misstated as a result of the incorrect application of the going concern assumption.66 (1)
5. Fixit has a lack of internal controls;67 therefore, their financial statements might be materially misstated as a result
of errors and fraud,68 as a lack of internal controls make it easier to commit fraud. Errors will not be picked up.69
6. Fixit is the holding company for a group of smaller companies.70 Consolidation requires specialised (1)
knowledge,71 and mistakes could be made that might lead to material misstatement in the financial statements as a
result of error.72 (1)
7. The company requires the audited financial statements within a month of year-end, which constitutes a tight
73
audit deadline that might lead to mistakes being made by the compilers of the company’s financial statements,74
the outcome of which might be material misstatement resulting from error.75 (1)
8. Incentive bonuses based on profits are payable to the managers,76 which might lead to material misstatement in
the financial statements as a result of fraud 77 perpetrated in order to increase the profits with a view to achieving
the required profit and thereby the award of incentive bonuses.78 (1)
EXAMPLE QUESTION 5
Risk at assertion level

[4 marks]
You are working on the audit of Inkwe Ltd (Inkwe), a company that has been listed on the JSE for the past five
years. Recently, Inkwe decided to buy a total of 100 properties for use as storage space. As the properties, the
majority of which were financed through the raising of mortgage bonds, are situated across South Africa, it will be
impossible for you to visit them all.
REQUIRED
Describe the risk of material misstatement at the assertion level for property, plant and equipment (PPE).
[4]
GUIDANCE

Describe the risk of material misstatement79 at the assertion level for property, plant and equipment.80

Refer to the discussion of theory for the previous question.
Read the question

You are working on the audit of Inkwe Ltd (Inkwe), a company that has been listed on the JSE for the past five
years. Recently, Inkwe decided to buy a total of 100 properties for use as storage space.81 As the properties, the
majority of which were financed through the raising of mortgage bonds,82 are situated across South Africa, it will be
impossible for you to visit them all.83
Exam technique
When required to describe the risk of material misstatement at assertion level, establish the indicators that increase
the risk of material misstatement (inherent risk and control risk). Read the scenario line by line and identify the
indicators. However, remember to include the inherent risks, such as accounting standards and requirements. In
general, look for indicators that might show that the specific line item might be materially misstated as a result of
error or fraud.
You cannot write down the indicator only and expect to earn marks (unless you are required merely to list the
indicators). In your answer:
link it to fraud or error
explain how the indicator could lead to the risk mentioned (e.g. through fraud or error)
state the relevant assertion.
When required to describe the audit risk, follow exactly the same approach described above. However, you also
need to establish the indicators that increase the detection risk. Therefore, read the scenario line by line and identify
these indicators. Remember: you are looking for indicators that might show that the auditor’s procedures might not
detect material misstatements in the financial statements.
In your answer:
link it the auditor’s procedures that might not detect material misstatements in the financial statements
explain how the indicator could lead to the auditor’s procedures not detecting material misstatements in the
financial statements
state the relevant assertion.
When required to assess or evaluate the risk of material misstatement or audit risk, establish the indicators that
increase and decrease the risk of material misstatement or audit risk, and conclude whether the risk is high, medium
or low.
Read the scenario line by line and identify the indicators. Remember that this time you are looking for indicators
that might increase or decrease the possibility that the specific line item is materially misstated as a result of fraud or
error.
If asked to do so, look for audit risk indicators that might increase or decrease the possibility that the auditor’s
procedures might not detect material misstatements in the financial statements.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1. There is a risk that the properties were not accounted for at the correct amounts,84 because all the costs on
acquisition of the properties might not have been included in the cost of the properties, or might have been
included incorrectly in the cost of the properties (valuation and allocation).85 (1)
2. There is a risk that the properties were not accounted for at the correct amounts, because the useful life of the
86
properties87 might have been incorrectly estimated (valuation and allocation).88 (1)
3. There is a risk that the properties were not accounted for at the correct amounts,89 because their residual value90
might have been incorrectly estimated (valuation and allocation).91 (1)
4. There is a risk that the properties were not accounted for at the correct amounts, because the depreciation
92
method selected93 in order to depreciate them might not reflect the manner in which they decrease in value
(valuation and allocation).94 (1)
5. There is a risk that the properties were not accounted for at the correct amounts,95 because the borrowing costs on
the mortgage bonds96 might have been incorrectly allocated (valuation and allocation).97 (1)
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 2
Planning materiality
[7 marks]
You are the auditor of Took his Toll (Pty) Ltd (Took his Toll). The company, which is responsible for the
maintenance of toll roads, receives a significant amount of fees (turnover) by requiring motorists using the toll roads
to pay a minimum fee at the applicable toll gates. Besides spending approximately 40% of the fees received on the
maintenance of the toll roads and approximately 20% on their labour-intensive site workers, Took his Toll has
invested a significant amount of its profit accrued over the years on tollgate buildings, including an offsite cafeteria
for its employees.
Appointed as the audit manager responsible for the planning of Took his Toll’s audit for the year ending 31 March
20X1, you have obtained the following figures from management on their management accounts of Took his Toll
for the period 1 April 20X0 to 30 September 20X0:
BUDGET FOR ACTUAL YEAR BUDGET YEAR

THE YEAR R TO DATE R TO DATE R
Gross revenue 10 000 000 4 617 853 5 000 000
Construction costs 3 800 000 1 662 428 1 850 000
Gross profit 6 200 000 2 955 425 3 150 000
Operating expenses 3 460 000 1 223 571 1 842 000
(labour and overheads)
Profit before taxation 2 740 000 1 731 854 1 308 000
Property, plant and 4 400 000 4 816 577 4 600 000
equipment
Long-term loans 945 000 1 016 561 875 000
Accounts receivable 1 050 000 1 255 872 900 000
After reviewing the above figures, you believe them to be reasonably accurate. In addition, you anticipate that Took
his Toll will achieve the budgeted figures for the year ending 30 March 20X1. You have assessed the overall risk of
material misstatement as high.
According to audit firm policy, the following indicators and percentages may be used in order to calculate
materiality:
0.5–1% of turnover
1–2% of gross profit
5–10% of operating profit before tax
1–2% of total assets
2–5% of equity
REQUIRED
Determine the planning materiality figure that needs to be used during the planning phase of the audit of Took his
Toll for the year ending 31 March 20X1. Give detailed reasons for your answer, providing all relevant steps in
determining the planning materiality figure. Base your materiality calculation on the guidelines provided above.
[7]
Question 2 LEVEL 2
[10 marks]
You are the senior auditor on the newly awarded audit of Budget Fly Ltd (Budget Fly). The company has been listed
on the JSE for five years and has a December financial year-end. Your audit firm was appointed as auditor in
October. The previous audit firm was a well-established audit firm with a reputable reputation. The previous
auditors issued an unmodified audit opinion in prior years and the former engagement partner has agreed to
communicate with our firm with regard to previous audit work conducted by her firm.
The following information was obtained during the planning stage of the audit:
DESCRIPTION AUDITED BUDGETED UNAUDITED

RESULTS (CURRENT RESULTS
(PRIOR YEAR) YEAR) RAND (CURRENT YEAR)
RAND RAND
Revenue R980 million R1.2 billion R1.4 billion
Profit before tax from R25 million R50 million R53 million
continuing
operations
Total assets R9 billion R9.9 billion R10 billion
Additional information:
The current year’s unaudited results are not finalised as the management of the company are still in the process of
updating the financial accounts for the last month of the financial year and will do so after returning from their
end-of-year vacation.
Budget Fly expanded their flying routes to include two locations outside South Africa:
– three flights a week to Namibia
– two flights a week to Zanzibar
The budgeted figures for the current year take into account the impact of these additional international flights.
Budget Fly acquired two additional aircrafts in December of the current year. They each seat 125 economy class
and 32 business class passengers, which enabled Budget Fly to increase the number of local flights offered on the
Johannesburg-to-Cape Town and Johannesburg-to-Durban routes.
It is estimated that the aircraft will have a 20-year useful life and a 10% residual value.
The company obtained a R1.8 billion loan from a bank in Switzerland to acquire the two additional aircraft.
The acquisition of the two additional aircraft was not included in the 20X6 budgeted figures.
It is your firm’s audit policy to use the following benchmark percentages when calculating planning materiality:
DESCRIPTION PERCENTAGE
Revenue 1–2%
Gross profit 1–2%
Profit before tax from continuing operations 5–10%
Total assets 1–2%
Your overall assessment of the risk of material misstatement is high for the current year.
REQUIRED
Discuss, with calculations, the planning materiality figure for Budget Fly for the December year-end audit.
[10]
Question 3 LEVEL 3
[11 marks]
You are an audit partner at Du Toit & Mbeka Inc., a medium-sized audit firm in Cape Town. Go Travel (Pty) Ltd
(Go Travel) was recently allocated to your portfolio during the year and you requested an audit trainee to commence
with the planning of the audit after the pre-engagement activities were successfully performed. The audit trainee
prepared the following working paper:
Working paper P-1
Client: Go Travel (Pty) Ltd WP P-1

Financial year-end: 31 March 20X1 Prepared by: A.C. Lerk
Section: Understanding of the entity and its environment Date prepared: 15/04/20X1
Reviewed by:
Date reviewed:
Go Travel was founded in April two years ago and is situated 15 km outside Cape Town. Its main
business activity is a travel agency for international tours. This will be the first year that an audit will be
conducted on the financial statements. The previous year’s figures were independently reviewed by
other external auditors and no concerns were highlighted in the review report. Go Travel earns between
5 and 10% commission on all tours, depending on the agreement with its travel partners.
The entity is run by Chloe Vermaak (financial director) and Chris Moloi (executive director), who are
also the founders and shareholders of the entity. Chloe and Chris are planning to expand Go Travel
rapidly and require the audited financial statements within two weeks after year-end in order to apply
for additional financing from Money Bank. Previous communication from Money Bank stated that
additional funding would be considered when healthy solvency and profitability indicators were
achieved.
The directors provided you with the following extract from the financial statements:
Extract from the financial statements
ACCOUNTS 31 MARCH 20X1 31 MARCH 20X0

Commission earned (turnover) R552 749 R305 285
Other expenses R95 489 R76 587
Total assets R157 931 R125 879
Total liabilities R105 682 R117 859
During the 20X1 financial year, Go Travel was awarded a R100 000 one-off contract in order to perform
travel arrangements for a soccer team.
Du Toit & Mbeka Inc. applies the following percentages in calculating planning materiality:
Turnover 0.5–1%
Gross profit 1–2%
Total assets 1–2%
REQUIRED
Calculate, properly motivated, the planning materiality to be used for the audit of Go Travel for the period ending 31
March 20X1. Ignore taxation for purposes of the question.
[11]
Question 4 LEVEL 3
[14 marks]
You are the audit senior on the audit of Pro Gear Ltd (Pro Gear), a company which manufactures a wide range of
sporting apparel and footwear, and supplies it to wholesalers around the country. Pro Gear has a 30 September
financial year-end and is listed on the JSE. The company is highly leveraged.
The following schedule was compiled by you during the planning stage of the current year’s audit, reflecting actual
and budgeted financial figures of Pro Gear:
DESCRIPTION AUDITED BUDGETED UNAUDITED

(PRIOR YEAR) (CURRENT (CURRENT
12 MONTHS YEAR) 12 YEAR) 9
RAND MONTHS RAND MONTHS RAND
Revenue R750 million R850 million R630 million
Profit before tax from R22 million R29 million R97 million
continuing
operations
Total assets R1.15 billion R1.4 billion R1.3 billion
It is your firm’s policy to use the following benchmark percentages when calculating the planning materiality level:
DESCRIPTION PERCENTAGE
Revenue 1–2%
Profit before tax from continuing operations 5–10%
Total assets 1–2%
It is also the firm’s policy to reduce the calculated planning materiality figure by 50% in order to determine
performance materiality, while the clearly trivial level for the audit is calculated at 10% of the performance
materiality figure.
Note:
Management of the company decided at the March board meeting that it was unnecessary for the company to own a
Citation X private plane. Subsequently, the company was able to sell the plane for R125 million on 1 April 20X1.
This resulted in the company making a profit of R75 million, calculated as follows: Cost price of R200 million less
the accumulated depreciation up to 31 March 20X1 of R150 million equals the carrying value of R50 million. Sales
price of R125 million less the carrying value of R50 million equals the profit of R75 million. R10 million
depreciation is charged to the asset on an annual basis.
The sale was not budgeted for and is therefore not included in the company’s current year budget appearing above.
All effects of the sale are however, included in the nine months’ unaudited figures.
Your firm’s past experience as the auditor of Pro Gear has shown that the company’s sophisticated budget
process normally provides an accurate reflection of the actual financial results and position of the company
presented in the final financial statements.
Your overall assessment of the risk of material misstatement was set as ‘high’ for the current year.
REQUIRED
1. Explain the difference between a factual and likely error.
2. Explain the difference between a qualitative and quantitative misstatement that might arise in a set of financial
statements.
3. Discuss with detailed workings how you would calculate the planning materiality, performance materiality and
clearly trivial level for the audit of Pro Gear.
[14]
Question 5 LEVEL 3
[21 marks]
You are the external auditor of Natasha’s Gambling Palace (Pty) Ltd (Natasha’s Gambling Palace) located in Cape
Town. Natasha’s Gambling Palace’s operations consist of various casinos that conduct business across the Western
Cape. The company is listed on the JSE. Its largest development is located at the Western Grand entertainment
complex.
Natasha’s Gambling Palace owns its own equipment, while the buildings from which it operates its casinos are
leased from the company’s main investor. During the 20X1 financial year, Natasha’s Gambling Palace opened a new
casino, also in one of the main investor’s hotels where it leases business space. For this purpose, it took out a sizable
loan from AfriBank Ltd to fund the addition of new roulette tables, slot machines and other equipment for the
gaming area.
You have just completed the assessment of internal controls for all the business cycles within the company and
concluded that control risk should be provisionally evaluated as ‘low’, while the susceptibility of all account
balances and classes of transactions to material misstatement, without considering internal control, is ‘high’ in
general. The audit partner instructed you to calculate planning materiality using the following guidelines:
Income 0.5–1%
Gross profit 1–2%
Profit before taxation 5–10%
Total assets 1–2%
Although the statement of comprehensive income has been fairly unstable over the past three years, the company has
been able to manage and maintain its gross profit percentage to the extent of remaining consistent. Regardless, the
company’s financial situation has changed significantly from the prior year: the statement of financial position is not
as strong as the directors would like it to be as the company is running a large overdraft and its trade creditors are
long outstanding.
Also during the 20X1 financial year, the company’s main investor invested in improving the infrastructure of the
buildings from where Natasha’s Gambling Palace operates – in order to increase the lease income potential of the
buildings. The investor built, among others, an amphitheatre next to one of its hotels which can seat 50 000 people.
Thus far, shows hosted at the amphitheatre by Natasha’s Gambling Palace have been mostly booked out, with artists
like PitBull, Nivo & Vinz, Fallout Boys and 1Direction (less one member) having performed there. It is expected
that these developments will improve income during the next couple of years.
You obtained the following actual financial statement figures from the chief accounting executive:
31/10/20X1 UNAUDITED 31/10/20X0 AUDITED

R’M R’M
Extract of statement of comprehensive income

Income 1 452 1 582
Gross profit 832 870
Profit before tax 195 230
Extract of statement of financial position
Property, plant and 211 180
equipment
Total current assets 575 650
Equity 250 250

Non-current liabilities 211 160
Total current liabilities 464 420
During preliminary enquiries to the accounting staff about the company’s financial performance and position, they
commented that several errors were made in drafting the actual financial statements. These have not been corrected
as yet:
1. It is likely that errors have occurred in the debtors’ book, included in current assets, because a new accounts
receivable clerk was appointed at the beginning of the financial year.
2. Income in the amount of R500 000 was not recorded and is not reflected in the figures above. The effect of this
error on gross profit amounted to R275 000.
3. ‘Operating expenses’ of R700 000 were reflected under ‘other expenses’.
REQUIRED:
1. Calculate, with proper motivation, taking all information into account, the planning materiality figure for the
20X1 financial statement audit of Natasha’s Gambling Palace.
2. Briefly explain the relationship between ‘materiality’ and ‘audit risk’.
[21 marks]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Pre-engagement
[20 marks]
You are a first-year trainee accountant at Ofentse & Kelebohile Inc. (O&K), a firm of registered auditors recently
appointed the statutory auditors of Foodworth Ltd (Foodworth) for the 30 June financial year-end.
Foodworth is a retail company that manufactures its mainly organic food products and sells them to upper- and
middle-income customers. Foodworth, which has 32 outlets situated in upper class suburban areas country-wide, has
a factory in Cape Town and a farm on the outskirts of the city, where it grows its products. Head office is in
Johannesburg. The company has been listed on the JSE since 1999.
O&K became aware that Foodworth would be changing its statutory auditors when Mrs Jacobs, the wife of the
audit partner in charge of the audit of Foodworth, advised him to tender for the audit. She considered O&K to be the
most appropriate auditors for the company, as the majority of O&K’s clients are in the food retail industry. Mrs
Jacobs is the chief financial officer (CFO) at Foodworth.
After O&K was awarded the tender, Mrs Jacobs requested O&K to assist the company with the following
non-assurance services:
The identification of potential investors to invest in Foodworth (the investments will be used to expand into the
East African market)
The preparation of the company’s tax returns (the CFO will take full responsibility for the returns, including any
significant judgement made)
For the year ended 30 June, Foodworth’s reported profit for the year was R13 million. The processing of all
transactions is done using Data-Adapta-System (DAS) accounting software, and, in order to create a greener
environment and cut down on the use of paper, all communications with suppliers and bankers are electronic.
Foodworth has a strong, competent internal audit department that assists in evaluating and monitoring the assessed
risks.
The team members for the Foodworth audit comprise the audit partner, the audit manager and you. The CFO has
informed the audit partner that the audited financial statements, which will be used in order to assist the management
of Foodworth on strategies for expanding its market share in South Africa, as well as the signed audit report, are
required three weeks after year-end.
REQUIRED
Discuss the factors that O&K should have considered prior to accepting the statutory audit engagement of
Foodworth for the year ended 30 June.
[20]
Note:
Refer to example question 1 for guidance on how on to approach answering this question.
1. O&K should have considered the ethical requirements.

a) i) There is a familiarity threat to the independence of the audit partner, as the CFO of Foodworth is married to
the audit partner in charge of the company audit. (2)
ii) Safeguard: The audit partner should not have been involved in the audit. (1)
b) i) There is an advocacy threat to the objectivity of O&K, as identifying potential investors in Foodworth could
be seen as promoting Foodworth’s shares. (2)
ii) Safeguard: O&K should not have been involved in identifying any potential investors in Foodworth. (1)
c) The audit firm will be providing the tax services (the preparation of tax returns) for Foodworth. In terms of
SAICA’s Code of Professional Conduct, the preparation of tax returns will not create any threat to
independence, as the CFO is taking responsibility for the returns, including any significant judgement made.
d) i) O&K should have considered whether there would be any conflict of interest between Foodworth and (2)
existing clients in the food retail industry, which might create a self-interest threat to O&K’s objectivity and
confidentiality. (1)
ii) Safeguards: Notifying all the relevant parties that O&K will be acting for two or more parties; the use of
separate engagement teams. (2)
e) As Foodworth has reported profits for the year of R13 million, its ability to pay the audit fee is not in question.
f) O&K should have considered whether there was a vacancy for the appointment of a statutory auditor in (1)
terms of the Companies Act 71 of 2008 prior to accepting the audit engagement of Foodworth. (1)
g) O&K should have contacted the previous auditors in order to identify whether there was any reason not to
accept the statutory audit engagement of Foodworth. (1)
h) Foodworth is in the food industry. There is nothing that suggests that the audit firm would not want to associate
itself with this industry, given the fact that it has other clients in the same industry. (1)
2. The firm should have considered its skills, competencies and resources.
a) Three people are not sufficient to audit an entity the size of Foodworth. (1)
b) As the audit needs to be completed three weeks after year-end, this will be a tight audit deadline and, given the
limited number of audit team members, the deadline might not be met. O&K should have considered
increasing the number. (1)
c) The audit firm should have considered whether it had the necessary auditing software in order to audit the
financial data stored in the DAS accounting software. (1)
d) Consideration should have been given to engaging an IT expert to assist with auditing the computerised
controls. (1)
e) O&K should have considered the influence that work performed by the internal audit would have on the
statutory audit. (1)
3. O&K should have given consideration to drafting an engagement letter highlighting, among other issues:
a) the responsibilities of both the auditor and management (1)
3.
b) the duty of the auditor to report any reportable irregularity (1)

c) the tax return services to be provided. (1)
Question 7 LEVEL 2
Pre-engagement activities
[12 marks]
Feldmans Inc. has been the auditor of the Eastland Dairy Ltd group (Eastland Dairy) for the past four years and is
currently considering whether to accept reappointment as the company’s auditor for its September 2015 financial
year-end.
Company background
Eastland Dairy was incorporated 22 years ago and is listed on the JSE. Down Under Investment Ltd, a company
based in Sydney, Australia, owns 65% of the company’s shares and the remaining 35% of the shares are owned by
members of the South African public.
The entities in the Eastland Dairy group produce a wide range of cheese, butter, yoghurt, milk and ice cream
products. The group sells its products both in local and in the Zambian, Namibian and Botswanan markets. Some of
the products sold in these foreign markets are produced in the other countries by dairies owned by the group, while
other products are imported from South Africa.
Eastland Dairy has level 1 BBBEE contributor status and was recently recognised for its efforts in leading the
industry in the area of corporate social responsibility.
Other pertinent company information

During the financial period (in July), the company recalled its strawberry yoghurt product sold in South Africa after
it emerged that some consumers had become seriously ill after eating it. It was subsequently discovered that an
ingredient used in manufacturing the strawberry yoghurt was contaminated. The recall cost the company millions of
rands, but the company’s chief operating officer, Mr Ryan, was quoted as saying that the ‘health and safety of the
public was more important to the company than the bottom line’. The company has sourced a new supplier of the
ingredient and plans on re-launching the product in the next financial year.
The recall of the yoghurt product had an effect on the public’s confidence in the other products sold by the
group, which resulted in the group losing a portion of its market share to smaller dairies in South Africa.
The company migrated its accounting records from an old accounting system it had used for the past 10 years to
a newly developed in-house accounting software package. The migration was done in stages and completed in June
during the financial year.
Audit-related aspects
Ms Kelly has been the engagement partner on the audit of Eastland Dairy for the past three years, while Mr Milner
was appointed as the human resources director of Eastland Dairy at the start of the 20X5 financial year. The two
were introduced at a Christmas party at the end of the previous financial year and got engaged in April of the 20X5
financial year. The interim audit is scheduled to take place during the first two weeks of July 20X5.
Feldmans Inc. does on occasion make use of component auditors to assist it with audit work to be performed in
regions located outside South Africa.
As part of planning the audit, significant reliance has been placed on the internal control audit procedures
performed by Eastland Dairy’s internal audit department during the financial year.
A representative of Down Under Investment Ltd has indicated that it requires audited financial statements by the
end of the third week of October in order for the company to consolidate its results.
REQUIRED
Discuss the matters that Feldmans Inc. would have considered prior to accepting the reappointment as auditor of
Eastland Dairy for the 2015 financial year.
[12]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
[15 marks]
You are a manager at Ace Audits Inc. (Ace Audits) a medium-sized audit firm with offices in Johannesburg, Pretoria
and Cape Town. Ace Audits Inc. is currently considering whether to accept the appointment as external auditor of
All Bronze Ltd (All Bronze) for All Bronze’s financial year ending 31 January 20X6. This is as a result of Mr Peach,
the chief executive officer (CEO) of All Bronze, asking Jakes Apricot in January 20X6 to have Ace Audits tender
for the position of external auditor. Jakes Apricot is a trainee accountant at Ace Audits and the nephew of Mr Peach.
Mr Peach also requested that Ace Audits should perform some secretarial and taxation services for All Bronze.
All Bronze is an entity manufacturing chutney and was formed in the early 1980s. The company had a turbulent
period during the first decade of operation, but profitability has increased steadily. Currently, the entity is highly
profitable. All Bronze owns approximately 35% of the chutney product market of South Africa and faces only one
noteworthy competitor, Mr Molls (Pty) Ltd. All Bronze’s manufacturing plant is in Johannesburg, and its head office
is in Pretoria.
The entity imports all product ingredients from various countries around the world in order to ensure high quality
of its final product. Management has always promoted a strong internal control environment and therefore all import
transactions are hedged. Management also strives to fully comply with the requirements of King IV™ and
communicates ethical codes to all levels of employees at All Bronze. The deadline for completion of the financial
statements is strictly adhered to in accordance with the Companies Act.
Most of Ace Audits’ clients’ year-ends are between the end of December and the end of February each year, and
its clients’ type of industries range vastly, from retail to manufacturing to investments. The previous auditors of All
Bronze resigned due to a staff shortage, but are willing to meet Ace Audits, with All Bronze’s permission, in order
to provide Ace Audits with relevant information and prior year working papers.
REQUIRED
Discuss whether Ace Audits should accept the audit engagement of All Bronze for its 31 January 20X6 financial
year.
[15]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
[13 marks]
You are an audit manager at KBNV Inc. (KBNV), which operates primarily from Port Elizabeth and has been
assigned to the 29 February 20X1 audit of Fresh Air Ltd (Fresh Air), a company that has been providing the South
African public with a wide range of fragrant solutions since the company was incorporated 20 years ago. The
company listed on the JSE 10 years ago and has a March year-end. It is the first year that the audit firm you work for
will be auditing Fresh Air.
The company is 65% owned by the Fresh family, from where the company draws its name, and the remaining
35% is owned by other investors. From your initial discussions with the chief operating officer (COO) of Fresh Air,
you gathered the following information:
Product information
The company’s products are produced in a variety of forms and fragrances, from robust aerosols to slow releasing
gels. A total of 75% of its products are manufactured at the company’s newly completed factory located at Coega,
near Port Elizabeth, in the Eastern Cape. The remaining 25% of the products are produced at the company’s other
factories located in Cape Town and Johannesburg. Fresh Air aims to have all production moved to the new facility
over the course of the next two years.
The products are sold to both wholesalers and retailers around the country.
Marketing information
Fresh Air was forced to reconsider its sales and marketing strategy at the start of the 20X1 financial year due to an
unexpected increase in market competition. The increase came about as a result of a number of new fragrance
suppliers importing cheap products from the Far East and then selling these to wholesalers and retailers at prices
much lower than that of Fresh Air’s products.
The company implemented a new state-of-the-art supply chain management computer system during July 20X0.
The new system has enabled the company to produce more products at a reduced cost, which may result in greater
market share through increased sales. All employees involved in the supply chain process were sent on rigorous
training courses.
The change in sales and marketing strategy as well as the implementation of the new supply chain management
computer system has ensured that the company has remained profitable in the midst of the new competition.
Other pertinent information

Mrs Nel, the marketing director, recently got married to Mr Nel, an audit partner at KBNV not assigned to the
audit of Fresh Air.
KBNV was appointed as the company’s external auditor at the company’s annual general meeting held in June
20X0. It was announced at the annual general meeting that the 20X1 audit was awarded to KBNV as a result of
the firm’s excellent reputation and great technical ability.
KBNV increased the number of audit trainees it appointed at the start of the 20X1 calendar year from 50 to 75
new trainees. The decision was made to ensure that the existing employees of the firm do not work unreasonable
hours for months on end.
Fresh Air was previously audited by Canister Inc. (Canister). The engagement partner at Canister, who was the
designated auditor for Fresh Air, indicated at the above annual general meeting that Canister had resigned as a
result of the audit firm changing its focus and strategy: it has decided to grow its advisory services division and to
decrease the amount of time spent on external audits. The partner thanked the board of directors for their
commitment to business excellence and for always paying the audit fees on time, and he wished the executive
leadership and shareholders all the best for the future.
REQUIRED
Discuss the matters that KBNV would have considered prior to accepting the appointment as the auditor of Fresh
Air for its 20X1 financial year.
[13]
Question 10 LEVEL 3
Client acceptance decision
[26 marks]
You are a partner at FZ, a firm of chartered accountants and registered auditors, and you are a member of a
three-person panel tasked with deciding whether or not new clients should be accepted by the firm.
The information below relates to three prospective clients that have to be assessed for client acceptance by the panel
of which you are a member:
1. LifeAfrika Ltd (LifeAfrica), a JSE-listed company, markets life assurance products and related financial services
in South Africa and 14 other countries on the African continent. LifeAfrica was recently fined an amount of
US$2.6 billion by regulators in one of the countries where it operates (one of the most populous countries in
Africa), and may lose its licence to provide services in that country. LifeAfrica’s management released
information about the fine only after journalists became aware of the fine having been imposed and started
contacting the company for comment. LifeAfrica was also fined by regulators in another country less than two
years ago.
2. Breadwinners Ltd (Breadwinners), a JSE-listed company, is a diversified food group. In the previous financial
year, the company had problems with acquisitions that did not prove as successful as had been hoped,
impermissible accounting practices, and lower-than-expected demand in its substantial milling division. In
response to these problems, Breadwinners fired its auditors (after the conclusion of the prior year audit), and all
three of its executive directors (the chief executive officer and managing director, the chief financial officer and
the chief operating officer) who served on the company’s board resigned in the past year. The company’s
chairman, who used to be its chief executive officer, has been acting as its chief executive officer for the past six
months.
3. Upinsmoke (Pty) Ltd (Upinsmoke) is a manufacturer of cheap cigarettes that it distributes in the major cities of
South Africa. Upinsmoke was founded three years ago by former senior management-level staff members of a
multinational cigarette manufacturing company, and has gained a good market share since then. The company has
informed you that it needs loan funding to expand its manufacturing plant in Germiston and will be presenting its
next set of audited financial statements to a number of banks as part of that process. The managing partner of FZ
is a close friend of Upinsmoke’s chief executive officer and is strongly in favour of taking the company on as a
client.
REQUIRED
Discuss how the information provided above would influence your judgement on the acceptance decision relating to
each of the prospective clients.
[26]
Question 11 LEVEL 2
Pre-engagement
[12 marks]
As the audit partner in the medium-sized audit firm of Perfect Services Inc. (PSI), you have had a discussion with a
friend who has recently completed her electronic engineering degree. Three years ago, together with fellow students
from the same faculty, she registered a private company, Special Speech (Pty) Ltd (Special Speech), a company
specialising in speech technology services that has shown significant growth in the last two years. Transactions are
processed using a Unix system.
Because her previous auditors did not apply International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), which would
have presented the company in the most favourable light, she asked you to perform the audit.
You asked the audit senior at PSI to contact your friend with a view to drawing up a potential client
pre-acceptance working paper.
Working paper
Prepared by: H.D.C. du Plessis (audit senior)
Date: 15 March 20X1
Subject: Pre-acceptance working paper
SUITABLE CRITERIA SATISFIED

Independence of the auditor YES
Special Speech (Pty) Ltd has demonstrated the ability to settle the audit fees YES
Issue of engagement letter agreeing to the engagement terms YES
REQUIRED
Describe any additional pre-engagement activities that need to be considered and addressed before you accept the
auditing engagement of Special Speech.
[12]
Question 12 LEVEL 2
[9 marks]
Mereki Platinum Mines Ltd (Mereki) is a small platinum mine situated in Rustenburg, North-West Province with
head offices in Johannesburg. The company, which was established in 1989, is listed on the JSE.
As a first-year trainee accountant at Mbatha Inc. (Mbatha), which has been the auditors of Mereki for five years, you
are responsible for the 30 June audit of the property, plant and equipment section. You have been provided with the
following information:
AMOUNT (R) NOTES

Property 41 250 000 1
Plant 39 689 890 2
Equipment 27 100 300 3
Total 108 040 190 4
Notes:
1. ‘Property’ relates to the land on which the mining operations take place and on which the head offices are located.
2. ‘Plant’ relates to the actual mine and warehouse, which have been provided as security for the bank loan acquired
that year.
3. During the course of the year, additional mining equipment was acquired from a supplier in Germany, as a result
of which such costs as import duties and transportation were incurred. Settlement was made in euros. In order to
ensure that they operate optimally, the machines undergo maintenance every six months.
4. Mereki follows IFRS. Property, plant and equipment (PPE), which is measured at a cost model, is depreciated
using the estimated useful life of each significant component, after the residual value has been deducted on a
straight line method.
REQUIRED
Describe the risks of material misstatement at the assertion level for property, plant and equipment of Mereki
Platinum Mines for the year ended 30 June as evinced in the above scenario.
[9]
Question 13 LEVEL 2
[12 marks]
As a first-year trainee accountant at Motholo Inc. (Motholo), you are currently assigned to a team responsible for the
audit for the financial year ended 30 June of BesaNama (Pty) Ltd (BN), whose financial statements have not been
audited before.
An entertainment outlet that provides facilities for braaiing and for having one’s car washed and valeted while
one enjoys a drink (either non-alcoholic or alcoholic) and snacks, BN operates weekdays between 11h30 and 22h00,
and on weekends between 11h30 and 02h00. On Saturdays and Sundays, which are the busiest days for BN,
customers are entertained by a live band.
BN’s operations are based in Tembisa, a township in the Ekurhuleni municipality, and Mamelodi, a township in
the City of Tshwane municipality.
The company, which was established 15 years ago, is a family business managed by the husband and wife team
of Mr and Mrs Chauke. Until just over a year ago, when an accounting software system was purchased, Mrs Chauke
was responsible for handling BN’s financial affairs, manually recording all transactions. Then, when Thabo Chauke,
the couple’s son, who had just completed Grade 12, was appointed financial manager, he took over responsibility for
the company’s financial affairs and the recording of all transactions.
Although he attended a training course in order to become acquainted with the newly acquired accounting
software system, Thabo has acknowledged that he is not as yet fully au fait with the system, as a result of which he
sometimes makes mistakes while capturing transactions. In addition, as a result of the high volume of transactions
and his being the only responsible person (apart from a cousin who helps with the capturing of transactions at the
Mamelodi outlet) for the recording of transactions, he was not able to record all such transactions. Thabo and his
cousin are paid an annual bonus based on profits for the year.
BN’s monthly revenue averages R600 000. Sometimes, however, when the company operates on weekends
beyond 02h00 in order to sell alcoholic drinks in contravention of the South African Liquor Act, this figure can rise
to R1 000 000.
The company has seen a gap in the market and intends to grow its business to other townships in Gauteng. In
order to do so, BN has applied for a bank loan, approval of which depends on its audited financial statements.
REQUIRED
Identify the risk indicators evinced in the above scenario. In each case, describe the risks of material misstatements
at overall financial statement level of BN the year ended 30 June. Answer using the following tabular format:
RISK INDICATOR RISK DESCRIPTION
[12]
Question 14 215
Question 14 LEVEL 2
Risk at assertion level, the audit approach and the risk thereto
[22 marks]
Dikoloi Ltd (Dikoloi) is an automobile-, motorcycle- and engine-manufacturing company founded in 20X2 with its
head office and manufacturing plant in Brits, North-West Province. Dikoloi adopts IFRS in preparing its financial
statements.
As a first-year trainee accountant at Phillips & Sons Inc. (Phillips & Sons), you have been assigned to the team
responsible for the audit of Dikoloi for the year ended 30 June. You are tasked with the audit of the following
accounts:
Inventory
AMOUNT (R) NOTES

Raw material 410 000 000 1
Work in progress 320 000 000 2
Finished goods 860 000 000 3
Total 1 590 000 000
Notes:
1. Raw material is sourced both locally and in Germany with the German account being settled in euros. Such costs
as import duties and transportation are incurred when raw material is purchased from the foreign supplier. At
year-end, there was inventory, purchased free on board from the supplier, that was still at sea.
2. Work in progress represents automobiles and motorcycles that are incomplete and therefore not yet ready to be
sold.
3. Dikoloi follows a standard costing method in order to account for the allocation of costs to its finished goods.
Loan
Two years ago, Dikoloi obtained a five-year term loan from ABBA Bank in order for the company to increase
production. The loan attracts interest at 12% per annum, with interest payable twice a year.
Share capital
During the year under review, additional shares were issued in order to raise funds to open an additional plant in
East London. The directors issued the shares without first confirming that there were enough unissued shares for
issue in terms of Dikoloi’s memorandum of incorporation.
Salaries and wages
AMOUNT (R) NOTES

Salaries 5 600 000 1
Wages 3 280 000 2
Total 8 880 000 3
Notes:
1. Salaries are payable at the end of each month to permanent employees, who are paid according to set salary
scales.
2. Dikoloi has over 500 employees who earn wages, which are paid weekly on a Friday. Such employees are
employed on a contract basis and earn a specified rate per hour. A higher rate is paid to employees who work
overtime.
3. There are such third-party costs as PAYE and medical aid contributions that Dikoloi withholds from the payment
of employees in order to pay the amount over to the respective authorities.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the risks of material misstatement at the assertion level relating to the identified accounts at Dikoloi as
evinced in the above scenario for the year ended 30 June. Link each of the risks to an assertion. (11)
2. Describe the audit approach/responses appropriate to addressing the risks of material misstatements identified in
the first question. Detailed audit procedures are not required. (11)
[22]
Question 15 LEVEL 3
Risk at assertion level and the response thereto
[20 marks]
You are the audit senior on the audit of Leading-Page (Pty) Ltd (Leading-Page). The company, which is growing at
a rapid rate, manufactures coated paper that it distributes throughout Africa. The company has a March financial
year-end.
The following information was brought to your attention during a meeting held in November with the chief financial
officer of the company:
Leading-Page obtained a loan from Financial Bank in the US for $1 million.
The four-year loan is payable annually in arrears at a rate of 12% per annum on the outstanding balance.
The funds from the loan were used to purchase several of the latest paper-manufacturing machines from a supplier
in the US at a cost of $125 000 each.
Four of the eight machines ordered had arrived by year-end, while the remaining three are scheduled to arrive in
June of the next financial year.
The company has two production facilities: one in Cape Town, which specialises in the production of graphic
paper, and the other in Johannesburg, where a range of coated paper is manufactured.
Leading-Page uses several logistics companies for the transportation of paper within South Africa and to
neighbouring countries. In the case of those foreign cities/towns located more than 4 000 km away, the company
makes use of sea freight in order to transport the paper to the closest port of entry for that country, after which it is
the buyer’s responsibility to arrange transport of the imports to their final destination(s).
All sales to buyers outside South Africa are concluded in US dollars. Leading-Page hedges 40% of its foreign
transactions.
As the company does not accept cash or cheque payments, all sales are concluded via EFTs. The credit terms
stated in the contracts between Leading-Page and its buyers determine the amounts due and the dates by which
payments are required.
A select group of buyers has been granted the right to hold 30% of the inventory ordered on consignment on a
trial basis. If it proves to be profitable, the company might increase the number of such buyers.
REQUIRED
Describe the risk of material misstatement at assertion level as evidenced in the above scenario, in each case giving
your responses thereto in your capacity as the auditor of the company.
[20]
Question 16 LEVEL 2
[10 marks]
You are commencing your third year as a trainee accountant. The senior manager on the client has selected you to
plan the current year’s audit of the Gold Group (Pty) Ltd (Gold Group). The company has a December year-end.
You obtained the following information while preparing your planning working papers:
Inspection of the prior year audit file

The company was incorporated eight years ago and owns a large number of retail stores in South Africa.
The company’s stores are located in and around shopping malls across South Africa. The Gold Group is made up
of the following companies:
– Gold’s Elegant (Pty) Ltd sells high-end clothing from 10 stores with a target market being young and seasoned
professionals.
– Gold’s Bridal (Pty) Ltd sells male and female bridal apparel from five stores with a target market being engaged
couples.
– Gold’s Sporting (Pty) Ltd sells both sporting apparel and a limited number of sporting goods from 10 stores with
a target market being sportsmen and -women of all ages.
– Gold’s Urban and Youth (Pty) Ltd sells urban clothing from 15 stores with a target market being youth and
young adults.
Customers can acquire products from any of the stores in the group by either paying cash or buying on credit
when using their Gold’s customer card which has a predetermined credit limit on it.
– Customers who acquire products on credit are charged interest on their outstanding balance.
– The interest is compounded on a daily basis.
– The interest charged on the outstanding amount is based on the customer’s risk profile and could be charged up
to the maximum interest rate allowed in terms of the National Credit Act.
– Where the customer defaults on a monthly payment, penalty interest will be charged using the maximum interest
rate allowed in terms of the National Credit Act.
Customers qualify for loyalty programme discounts when purchasing certain products.
Customers are permitted to return products up to 60 days after acquiring them. All returns must be accompanied
by an original receipt and are subject to a quality control check.
The chief financial officer estimates that 10% of the products purchased will be returned and it is the company’s
policy to recognise only 90% of the sale until the 60 days has passed by.
Products sold by the stores within the Gold Group are acquired from local suppliers and foreign suppliers in the
Far East. Products purchased from foreign suppliers are generally shipped freight on board to Durban harbour
before being distributed to the various stores.
Discussion with the chief financial officer

The group attributes its success to having built up relationships with good suppliers in the Far East. It is the
group’s policy to make use of foreign exchange hedges to mitigate the effect of exchange rate movements. The
group hedges 50% of its foreign purchases as their transactions are denominated in US dollars.
The company’s primary focus is the sale of clothing to the South African public, but it recently acquired the
Home Specialist Store, a private company with 10 stores around the country which specialises in supplying
kitchen and bedroom related products.
– Customers are able to use their existing Gold Store customer cards to purchase goods on credit from the Home
Specialist Store.
– The ‘Home Specialist Store’ had sold products only for cash prior to being acquired by the Gold Group.
The company obtained a R15 million loan from the Industrial Development Corporation in October of the current
financial year in order to acquire the Home Specialist Store. The loan is repayable over the loan term of seven
years with interest charged at prime +2% payable on a monthly basis.
REQUIRED
Describe the factors that increase the risk of material misstatement at account and assertion level.
[10]
Question 17 LEVEL 2
[16 marks]
You have recently been appointed as auditor of Mobile Connectivity Ltd (Mobile Connectivity). The company is
one of the largest internet service providers in South Africa and was incorporated 10 years ago. The company was
listed on the JSE two years ago. During the preliminary engagement procedures, you held discussions with senior
personal.
Ms Brittany Sumrall, the chief executive officer, indicated the following:

The company’s central administration office is located in Durbanville and it has several branches located in
shopping malls in and around South Africa, as well as four branches in Namibia from which the products (ADSL
available in both South Africa and Zimbabwe, fibre optic cables and wifi on-the-go currently available only in
South Africa) are sold.
The company signed an agreement with the Western Cape Provincial Government to supply fibre optic cables to
several underdeveloped urban areas in and around the City of Cape Town. The project will grant thousands of
people access to high speed internet which they normally would not have had and is part of a drive by the local
government to uplift the social standing of individuals in the province. The contract was awarded to the company
as a result of its excellent track record, the integrity of management, and the fact that the company is a leader in
the field of corporate social responsibility.
The company expanded its ADSL services to Zimbabwe by opening two branches in Harare and two in
Bulawayo. The company has a seven-year plan to expand its footprint into other neighbouring countries.
Invest PLC, the majority shareholder in Mobile Connectivity, requires the audited financial statements within
three weeks of the December financial year-end in order to meet its reporting deadline.
Mr Thabo Vilakazi, the chief financial officer, indicated the following:

The profit margin of the company increased slightly over the past year even though there was an increase in the
number of smaller service providers entering the industry.
The company’s management took a strategic decision half way through the year that it would reduce its rates
substantially in order to compete with the rates being offered by the smaller service providers.
The company imports its fibre optic cables from Fibre Corp, a manufacturer of fibre optic cables, in Dallas,
Texas. The fluctuation of the rand has caused the directors of the company to reconsider the current policy of
hedging 25% of foreign purchases.
Mr James, the human resources director, indicated that the company’s bonus structure works in the following way:
Employees of the company, other than executive directors and senior management, receive a bonus equal to one
month’s salary in the month of their birthday.
Executive directors and senior management receive a bonus linked to the profit generated by the company during
the financial year.
Additional information:
Mobile Connectivity’s previous auditor resigned after servicing the company for nine years. The previous auditors
determined that it was not able to service a client of this size appropriately any longer. The senior engagement
partner on the audit has indicated that his audit firm is willing to assist your audit team with information regarding
previous audits, but has requested that such assistance be communicated in a timely manner as all of his managers
are generally extremely busy at that time of the year.
The firm will make use of an audit firm in Zimbabwe to assist in the performance of audit procedures that are
required to be completed at these branches.
Mobile Connectivity’s reporting currency is South African rand.
REQUIRED
Describe the factors that increase the audit risk at the financial statement level.
[16]
Question 18 LEVEL 3
[12 marks]
The following paragraphs provide information about Collectors’ Emporium (Pty) Ltd (Collectors’ Emporium). The
business is managed by Mr Jonah Abercrombie, who has been involved in art and book dealing for more than 30
years. He also has a 50% shareholding in Collectors’ Emporium. Collectors’ Emporium’s financial year-end date is
31 December:
1. Collectors’ Emporium’s business involves dealing in collectible books and artworks.
2. Books and artworks are imported from and exported to a number of countries. Items are transported by plane, as
far as possible. Items that are sold are despatched or released to the buyer only after receipt of payment, and such
items generally are despatched within 48 hours after receipt of payment. The business closes two weeks before
Christmas and re-opens only in the third week in January.
3. Not long before Collectors’ Emporium’s financial year-end date, Flossie Visagie, the company’s bookkeeper,
managed to delete all Collectors’ Emporium’s receivables records while trying to make backups. She has since
tried her best to reconstruct the receivables records, but due to her poor record-keeping, the process involved a
considerable degree of guesswork.
4. The business operates from Mr Abercrombie’s sprawling house in Houghton, Johannesburg, with most of the
rooms used to display business inventory. Mr Abercrombie is a collector himself, and many of his own artworks
are displayed in the rooms where the business inventory is displayed.
5. Mr Abercrombie takes items in for selling on a consignment basis, but these items are not kept in a defined area.
6. Collectors’ Emporium employs a full-time art and book restorer, who is known for the high quality of his work.
He restores only books and artworks that form part of Collectors’ Emporium’s inventory.
REQUIRED
Explain how the information in each of the numbered paragraphs increases the risk of material misstatement at the
assertion level in the financial statements of Collectors’ Emporium.
Note: Your answer should not deal with risk at the overall financial statement level.
Use the following tabular layout for your answer:
AFFECTED ASSERTION(S) EXPLANATION
1.
2.
[12]
Question 19 LEVEL 3
Audit risk overall level
[19 marks]
You are a senior manager under the employment of Boswell & Sons Audits Inc. (Boswell & Sons). Boswell & Sons
has been recently appointed as the auditors of Sniffindale Ltd (Sniffindale) for the 20X0 financial year-end.
Sniffindale is a ski resort located in a very small town called Sniffindale, South Africa. Sniffindale attracts
thousands of local and overseas tourists and has been in operation for 15 years. The entity is a subsidiary of a group
that is listed on the Australian stock exchange. In order for all entities in the group to have the same year-end,
Sniffindale changed its financial year-end during the current year from 28 February 20X1 to 31 December 20X0. In
order to complete the consolidation, the Australian holding company requested Sniffindale’s financial statements to
be finalised at 21 January 20X1. Sniffindale reports in rand.
Sniffindale’s management promotes a strong internal control environment. The accounting function has 10
highly competent, qualified and experienced accountants. As Sniffindale strives to promote care for the
environment, all transactions within the company occur on a fully integrated, computerised system, limiting any
paperwork to the minimum.
Previously management received earnings-based bonuses. However, on 1 January 20X0, the policy was
amended and management currently earns bonuses based on customer satisfaction.
During the 20X0 financial year, a global recession hit and Sniffindale had approximately 25% less customers
than previous years. Sniffindale therefore had to arrange for overdraft facilities at Money Bank, which requires a
liquidity ratio of at least 2:1.
REQUIRED
Evaluate the audit risk at the overall financial statement level of Sniffindale, for the 31 December 20X0 financial
year-end.
[19]
Question 20 LEVEL 3
[20 marks]
You are the audit senior on the audit of Poison Ltd (Poison) for the year ending on 31 October 20X1. The company
manufactures poisons for use against intrusive plants and weeds. Poison was established approximately seven
months ago by a group of friends who recently obtained their BSc degrees. They inadvertently and successfully
developed the new poison as a result of a failed experiment during which they initially attempted to develop a
kitchen cleaning product. They subsequently formed the company.
The company has been experiencing financial difficulties and has not made a profit to date. The company found
it difficult to gain market share due to strong market competition. As a result, an audited set of financial statements
is required for submission to the bank to negotiate additional financing. The company is also struggling to collect
debts, with an average outstanding debtor period of 101 days at year-end.
The above matter also impacted the company’s ability to pay suppliers. Two large suppliers have already refused
to supply Poison with any further products until the outstanding debts have been settled. The current creditor
payment period is 79 days. The directors have, however, told you that the board managed to source two suppliers
located in China due to past trade talks initiated during a visit by South Africa’s minister for trade and industry and
his business delegation. The products will be imported by Poison free-on-board to South Africa. The minister’s
delegation was able to negotiate a 60-day credit term on behalf of Poison.
REQUIRED
Describe the factors that will increase the risk of material misstatement on assertion level for inventory, accounts
payable and accounts receivable in respect of the audit of Poison for the year ending 31 October 20X1. Ignore
control risks.
Structure your answer as follows:
FACTOR THAT WILL INCREASE RISK ACCOUNT(S) ASSERTION(S)

OF MATERIAL MISSTATEMENT AFFECTED AFFECTED
[20]
Question 21 LEVEL 3
Risk and response at assertion level
[17 marks]
You are the senior auditor on the audit of Power (Pty) Ltd (Power), a company that distributes generators and
transistors to wholesalers and the public from its warehouse in Durban. The company has a December financial
year-end.
The company was incorporated seven years ago by two friends, Miss Chumanga and Mr Casey, on completion
of their undergraduate studies at the same local university. They both have an equal stake in the company. Miss
Chumanga is the marketing director at the company, as she obtained a marketing degree, and Mr Casey is the chief
financial officer, as he obtained a degree in accounting. They both receive a bonus linked to the revenue generated
by the company over the course of the financial year.
The company obtained a R40 million loan from the Industrial Development Corporation on 1 July in order to
finance a plant from which it intended to mass produce generators instead of purchasing generators from the Far
East. It has not yet started constructing the plant and therefore plans to start producing generators and transistors
only in the next financial year.
The terms of the loan are as follows:
The loan draws interest of 22% per annum.
The interest and a portion of the capital on the loan are payable monthly in arrears.
The loan must be paid back in full within seven years from the date of receiving the loan.
The Industrial Development Corporation requires signed financial statements within 30 days of the financial
year-end.
The Industrial Development Corporation can demand immediate settlement of the loan if Power’s current ratio
drops below 2.5:1.
Should the loan be recalled at the year-end, Power’s current liabilities would exceed its current assets by a
substantial amount.
Neither Miss Chumanga nor Mr Casey has any additional money to contribute to the business – part of the loan
conditions from the Industrial Development Council required that they invest R10 million each into the project.
The company hedges 45% of the generators and transistors purchased in the Far East with forward exchange
contracts which it takes out with the company’s local bank.
The generators and transistors normally take 1.5 months to arrive in Durban from the date that the goods leave
the supplier’s warehouse and an additional week to clear customs. Thereafter, the generators and transistors are
transported to the company’s warehouse from which they are sold to the wholesalers and public. R2 million worth of
generators and transistors were on route from the supplier in the Far East to the Durban warehouse at year-end.
Power saw an increase in its sales during the winter months as a result of promotions that it ran during the
month. These included granting customers up to 5% off from their initial invoiced cost if they settled their accounts
within 30 days from the date of purchase. The discounts were approved at the director’s board meeting held on 5
April.
REQUIRED
Describe the factors that increase the risk of material misstatement at assertion level and briefly how you, as auditor,
would respond to the risk.
[17]
Question 22 LEVEL 3
Detection risk
[22 marks]
HKL Auditors Inc. (HKL), with its main office in Johannesburg, is currently engaged in planning the audit of
Diamond Hardware (Pty) Ltd (Diamond Hardware) for the client’s 31 December 20X1 financial year. Diamond
Hardware is a large wholesaler of hardware equipment and is also situated in Johannesburg.
During the audit planning meeting, where only some of the junior audit team members were present, the
susceptibility of the client’s financial statements to material misstatement was discussed. The engagement partner,
Hein Williamson, addressed the audit team members present and made the following comments, inter alia:
The budget for the 31 December 20X1 year-end audit of Diamond Hardware is unfortunately very tight.
The two owner-managers of the company have specifically asked me to keep the audit fees the same as
last year, otherwise HKL might get replaced by another audit firm next year. This, despite Diamond
Hardware having installed a new accounting system in 20X1, which meant a change to a significant part
of the company’s system of internal controls.
I would also like to announce that Karina McKay, a second-year trainee accountant at our firm, will be the
responsible audit senior on the audit seeing that the prior year’s audit senior is currently on study leave. In
addition, the audit manager, who is newly assigned to the audit, should not be bothered with any
questions except in very important cases, as she will be too busy on other audits at that time. Karina,
although we know you have not been on the audit in any prior year, we are forced to throw you into the
deep end. We trust that you will be able to cope!
To take some pressure off the audit team, I will ensure that the sample sizes used in substantive audit
procedures are smaller than usual.
Also keep in mind that the audit manager on the prior year’s audit of Diamond Hardware, Terence
Radebe, has recently been appointed as the financial manager of Diamond Hardware. As you might know
, Diamond Hardware’s previous financial manager was dismissed two months prior to the 20X1 year-end
as a result of possible fraud that took place in the company’s accounting department. They needed a
person with Terence’s skills to restore order in their accounting function.
Please note that we will be making use of many first-year trainee accountants on this assignment to save
on costs. More experienced, senior audit staff members will be too expensive.
REQUIRED
Identify and explain the factors that increase detection risk on the audit of Diamond Hardware for its 20X1 financial
statement audit, evident from the scenario. Structure your answer as follows:
FACTOR THAT EXPLANATION (WHY DOES THE FACTOR

INCREASES DETECTION INCREASE DETECTION RISK?)
RISK
[22]
Question 23 LEVEL 2
Audit strategy
[6 marks]
You were recently appointed as the auditor of People Ltd (People). As part of the planning of the audit, you are
trying to gain an understanding of the company’s operations. The following information has been brought to your
attention.
People Ltd is a holding company with five subsidiaries, two of which reside outside South Africa.
Your audit firm will be responsible for the audit of the holding company only and not the subsidiaries.
REQUIRED
Indicate how each of the above pieces of information will affect your audit strategy.
[6]
Question 24 LEVEL 2
Planning strategy
[9 marks]
You are an audit manager at the audit firm of UHK Inc. (UHK) and have been assigned to the audit of CashNow
Bank Ltd (CashNow), a registered bank in South Africa. CashNow provides banking, insurance and investment
products and services to retail, commercial, corporate and public sector customers. CashNow has a 31 December
year-end.
You acquired the following information during the preliminary engagement phase of the 2015 audit:
1. The bank is listed on the JSE.
2.
2. It has four divisions, three subsidiaries and two associates. One of the subsidiaries is audited by another audit
firm, while all other entities are audited by UHK.
3. CashNow’s trading systems are fully computerised.
4. CashNow has an internal audit department which focuses on areas relating to financial reporting identified by its
audit and risk committee.
5. As a result of an unfavourable economic environment, CashNow has been experiencing high levels of bad debt
write offs and has incurred losses during the 20X1 financial year.
6. The audit reporting deadline is 10 February.
REQUIRED
Explain how each of the matters listed in points 1 to 6 affects the scope, timing and/or direction (whichever is
relevant) of the 20X1 audit of CashNow.
[9]
1 Either good or bad.

2 Pre-engagement.
3 Use the information contained in the scenario.
4 Where the audit firm is located could also be an indication of the size of the firm.
5 This indicates that it was not as a result of wrongdoing on the part of management.
6 As this is not a dubious industry, S&P should not have a problem being associated with Zondi.
7 Does S&P have the resources to travel to all of the outlets?
8 As a CA(SA), he is bound by SAICA’s Code of Professional Conduct, which is an indication of management’s
integrity.
9 This indicates that the company will be able to pay the audit fee.
10 This is an ethical issue for the auditor to consider.
11 Structured according to the pre-engagement steps.
12 You need to supply the information contained in the question, and apply it to the pre-engagement steps.
14 Given that he is a CA(SA), he is likely to have integrity.
16 Given that they resigned as a result of staff shortages, it is unlikely that there is reason not to accept the
engagement.
18 It should thus be able to pay the audit fee.
20 Following the Code of Professional Conduct’s conceptual framework.
22 S&P might thus not have adequate resources.
23 Remember to include the engagement letter as part of the pre-engagement steps.
24 Deal with each instance separately.
25 Background information: the two instances mentioned below are what are required.
26 Scope (what needs to be audited) = branches in 10 cities = resources needed in order to perform the audit.
27 Scope (what needs to be audited) = maintenance of application programs that are outsourced = resources needed in
order to perform the audit.
28 Information contained in the scenario is linked to what needs to be done.
29 This adds in human resources.
30 When it needs to be done. In addition, it adds in human resources.
31 Information contained in the question is linked to what needs to be done.
32 It adds in human resources.
33 You need to do (and explain your reasoning behind) the calculations, thus motivating your decisions.
34 Thus overall as well as performance materiality.
35 New auditor = high audit risk.
36 Use this in your calculation.
37 Choose a set of financial statement figures to use in your calculation.
38 Give the different options.
39 This indicates which is the most appropriate, in addition to motivating why it is.
40 Stable plus motivation.
41 It is appropriate, plus there is motivation.
42 Inverse relationship with risk.
43 Determine a range in which to work.
44 This provides an overall planning materiality figure in addition to motivation.
45 Describe risks only: in other words, those indicators that increase risk plus the risk associated with those indicators.
46 Deal specifically with those indicators affecting financial statements as a whole, or with indicators where you cannot
pinpoint risk to a specific line item.
47 This indicates possible fraud perpetrated in order to meet listing requirements and to attract investors.
48 This is an indication of possible errors, as consolidations are complex.
49 It indicates possible going concern problems, the risk that financial statements might be incorrectly prepared on a
going concern instead of a liquidation basis.
50 Specific line item = assertion level.
51 This indicates possible going concern problems, the risk that financial statements might be incorrectly prepared on a
going concern basis instead of on a liquidation basis.
52 It indicates possible fraud perpetrated in order to receive incentive bonuses.
53 Indicates possible fraud and error.
54 Indicates errors.
55 Indicator.
56 Risk.
57 Explanation.
58 Indicator.
59 Risk.
60 Explanation.
61 Indicator.
62 Explanation.
63 Risk.
64 Indicator.
65 Explanation.
66 Risk.
67 Indicator.
68 Risk.
69 Explanation.
70 Indicator.
71 Explanation.
72 Risk.
73 Indicator.
74 Explanation.
75 Risk.
76 Indicator.
77 Risk.
78 Explanation.
79 Inherent and control risk.
80 Remember the balances assertions.
81 PPE accounting requirements, such as depreciation method, residual value, useful life, allocation of costs, etc. =
inherent risk.
82 Borrowing costs incorrectly allocated = inherent risk.
83 Detection risk.
84 Explanation, error.
85 Assertion.
87 Indicator (accounting requirement).
88 Assertion.
91 Assertion.
94 Assertion.
97 Assertion.
INTRODUCTION
Substantive questions fall into two main categories:

1. Those regarding balances or items appearing on the statement of financial position at year end
2. Those regarding transactions or items included in the statement of profit or loss for the financial year end
It is important to identify whether a substantive question relates to balances or to transactions, since the framework
to be applied in answering questions referring to both types will differ according to the audit assertions. Example
question 1 provides the framework to be applied in answering those questions regarding balances, while example
question 2 provides the framework for answering questions regarding transactions.
Important in an analysis of what, and how much, to write is the mark allocated to each question. Although a
detailed answer may be required if the mark allocation is 20 (for example), the answer should be limited to the
essentials if only five marks have been allocated.
Remember that the solutions provided in this chapter, which have been suggested by the compilers of the
questions themselves, are merely guides to the types of procedures that should be performed. No solution to
substantive questions can be comprehensive, as many other procedures may exist. In addition, because each student
communicates differently, the examiner will not expect him/her to produce an answer set out exactly as in the
suggested solution.
EXAMPLE QUESTION 1
Balances
[17 marks]
Your firm was recently appointed as auditors of Quench (Pty) Ltd (Quench), a company manufacturing a range of
beverages at its plant in Atlantis. The company, which has a December year-end, has a fully integrated computerised
system that runs on local area network (LAN).
You have been assigned to audit the purchases and payments cycle. In the course of the planning stage of the
audit, you met with the chief financial officer, Mrs Price, and the chief buyer, Mr Pravesh, in order to gain an
understanding of this cycle.
Extract from a meeting held with Mrs Price and Mr Pravesh on 5 October
All the ingredients needed in order to produce the beverages are purchased from local suppliers, most of
which are paid via EFT. However, a few of them still prefer cheque payments.
The receiving process is as follows:

The ingredients and the pre-labelled bottles are delivered to the warehouse situated next to the
On the arrival of goods at the warehouse, the receiving clerk calls up the purchase order on a tablet
computer in order to generate a pre-numbered GRN. The computer, which connects to the intranet via
3G cards, has an application loaded onto it that enables the receiving clerk to access the order after
he/she has input the purchase order number, whereupon the accounting system is immediately
updated.
Your firm conducted the inventory count on 31 December, during which it was noted that the last GRN number
was XJ 10980.
You have received a listing of all the trade payables at both the current and the previous year-ends.
In addition to the credit manager, Mr Paton, the credit department comprises two other staff members, namely Ms
Louwrens and Mr Tabane.
Trade payables at 31 December are stated as R9 350 000 (previous year: R12 345 000).
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that you should perform in order to verify (a) the trade accounts payable
balance at year end, and (b) that the amount is not understated.
[17]
GUIDANCE

Describe the substantive audit procedures that you would perform in order to verify (a) the trade accounts payable1
balance at year end, and (b) that the amount is not understated.2

In order to answer substantive questions, you need to:
understand the specific audit assertions to be addressed
understand the audit procedures that are usually relevant to the specific item(s) being audited
identify the specific issues and risks that need to be addressed
identify the IFRS criteria
identify the specific audit standards applicable to the scenario.
The best way to prepare yourself for tests/examinations is to work through as many substantive questions under
examination conditions as possible, noting the different frameworks and the procedures applicable in the various
types of questions.
Read the question
Your firm was recently appointed as auditors of Quench (Pty) Ltd (Quench), a company manufacturing a range of
beverages at its plant in Atlantis. The company, which has a December year-end, has a fully integrated computerised
system that runs on local area network (LAN).
You have been assigned to audit the purchases and payments cycle.3 During the planning stage of the audit, you
met with the chief financial officer, Mrs Price, and the chief buyer, Mr Pravesh, in order to gain an understanding of
this cycle.
Extract from a meeting held with Mrs Price and Mr Pravesh on 5 October4
All the ingredients needed in order to produce the beverages are purchased from local suppliers, most of
which are paid via EFT. However, a few of them still prefer cheque payments.
The receiving process is as follows:

The ingredients and the pre-labelled bottles are delivered to the warehouse situated next to the
On the arrival of goods at the warehouse, the receiving clerk calls up the purchase order on a tablet
computer in order to generate a pre-numbered GRN. The computer, which connects to the intranet via
3G cards, has an application loaded onto it that enables the receiving clerk to access the order after
he/she has input the purchase order number, whereupon the accounting system is immediately
updated.
Your firm conducted the inventory count on 31 December, during which it was noted that the last GRN number
was XJ 10980.5
You have received a listing of all the trade payables6 at both the current and the previous year-ends.
In addition to the credit manager, Mr Paton,7 the credit department comprises two other staff members, namely
Ms Louwrens and Mr Tabane.
Trade payables at 31 December are stated as R9 350 0008 (previous year: R12 345 000).
Exam technique
1. Use the audit assertions of balances as a framework for your answer:
Completeness and existence
Obligations
Valuation
Disclosure
Note: Each assertion contains one or more substantive procedures.
Since the scenario indicates a possible risk of understatement of accounts payable, more procedures than usual apply
to the completeness and existence assertion. However, this is not the case when auditing accounts receivable
(management usually overstates trade debtors in order to increase profits), with the result that fewer procedures need
to be performed for the assertion.
Both the obligations and the disclosure assertions are usually covered by one procedure each.
Valuation, the most important one to address, contains the most procedures, since material misstatement could
easily occur.
Study your textbook in order to:

understand the subtle changes in the auditor’s approaches to substantive testing, and
ensure that you become familiar with these procedures.
1. Start your sentences with the words:

inspect
inquire
1.
re-perform
observe
scrutinise
select a sample (or extract)
OR
agree (or match).9
If you start your sentence with ‘ensure’, ‘check’, ‘confirm’ or ‘verify’, you risk losing marks, since they indicate that
you are not tackling the specifics of how to perform the procedure. Furthermore, the words ‘Check that cut-off
procedures were properly performed at year-end for revenue’ will mean nothing to someone with no experience in
that specific field. Therefore, describe your audit procedure as if you were explaining it to a novice.
1. Communicate properly.
If the examiner is able to write HOW, WHAT or WHY next to your answer, you will forfeit marks. For example, in
the sample answer already quoted (‘Check that cut-off procedures were properly performed at year-end for sales’),
he/she is able to discern the WHY (the cut-off of sales), but not the HOW (the last 20 delivery notes before and after
year-end) or the WHAT (the dates on the delivery note).
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
1. Completeness and existence
a) Obtain a management representation10 letter with specific reference to the completeness and existence assertion
for trade accounts payable. (1)
b) Inquire from Mr Paton about any explanations for the material decrease in the creditors balance from R12 345
11
000 (previous year) to R9 350 000 (current year), and follow up his explanations with supporting
documentation.12 (1)
c) Compare the list of creditors at 31 December to the previous year’s working listing for:13
i) creditors on the latter list who do not appear on the former (1)
ii) creditors balances that are significantly smaller at 31 December than during the previous year. (1)
Elicit reasons from the creditors clerks and corroborate them with Mr Paton where they are material or
necessary. Obtain supporting documentation for all explanations given. (1)
d) Extract a listing of creditors from the creditors masterfile that has an entry in the disputes field. By means of the
number, trace the dispute to the correspondence or supporting documents. Follow up on the status of disputed
accounts with both Mr Paton and the creditor. (1)
e) Perform analytical review procedures14 on the creditors balance and follow up on such material fluctuations as
those revealed when comparing current year purchases and creditors, as well as those for previous years. (1)
f) Inspect working papers relating to the inventory count for any instances where physical inventory materially
exceeded theoretical inventory,15 which could indicate purchases that were received before year-end but were
not raised as a liability at year-end. (1)
g) After stratifying the purchases journal for January, select a sample of 20 material purchases and trace them to
the GRNs. Confirm that the GRN numbers are greater than XJ 10980,16 and that the dates on the notes and the
supplier’s delivery notes are later than 31 December, the financial year-end. (1)
h) Select a sample of 20 material payments made subsequent to 31 December, and by means of an inspection of
the dates on the corresponding GRNs and the supplier delivery notes, confirm whether or not the goods were
received prior to 31 December and if the corresponding creditors had been raised at year-end. (1)
2. Obligation
Inspect from the samples17 selected that source documentation was made out in the name of Quench (Pty) Ltd.
3. Valuation (1)
a) Extract and cast the creditors balances of the creditors located in the masterfile and agree them to the creditors
control account in the general ledger. (1)
b) Re-perform a sample of the cross cast (days outstanding) on the masterfile. (1)
c) Scan the masterfile for such error conditions as duplicate supplier numbers and duplicate addresses. (1)
d) Inspect the masterfile for debit balances, follow up on the reasons for them with Mr Paton, and reclassify the
remaining debit balances to accounts receivable.18 (1)
e) Scrutinise the creditors control account for unusual entries (particularly rounded-off amounts) and follow up
with supporting documentation. (1)
f) Select a sample of creditors reconciliations at 31 December19 (which includes reconciliations prepared by both
the clerks) and:
i) test logic, and re-perform the casts on the reconciliations (1)
ii) agree the balances on the reconciliations to the creditor’s statements and the listing of creditors (1)
iii) inspect the validity of the reconciling items by reference to supporting documentation. (1)
g) Extract from the listing of creditors any to whom payment is outstanding significantly beyond the credit terms
granted to Quench, upon which follow up with Mr Paton and the creditors clerk in order to establish the correct
status of the amount due. (1)
4. Disclosure
Inspect the correct disclosure of revenue in the financial statements, including the accounting policies.20 (1)
Any other valid procedures.21 (1)
EXAMPLE QUESTION 2
Transactions
[15 marks]
You are a senior auditor on the audit of Gracys Ltd (Gracys), a company with a September year-end. Your audit firm
has been Gracys auditors for the past five years.
The company sells clothing, shoes and beauty products at 22 branches located across the country as well as from
their virtual store at which online sales are made.
Management usually pays close attention to the sales figures, as the manager of each store receives a
performance bonus that is linked to sales.
Sales
The chief financial officer, Mr Chris Tommylin, has indicated that total sales (R833 million) for the year have
increased by 7% over those of the previous year (R778 million).
The accounting systems of the company, whose head office is located in Cape Town’s central business district,
are fully integrated and run on a wide-area network. The points-of-sales systems at each of the stores are connected
to Gracys intranet via Telkom’s virtual private network.
In-store purchases
In-store purchases are made with cash, on credit and by using either the Gracys customer store card (on which a
pre-determined credit limit has been set) or the customer’s bank credit card.
Once a transaction has been processed, the sale is immediately posted to the sales account with a unique branch
code in order to identify the branch to which the sale relates. A copy of the invoice handed to the customer is
automatically generated at head office at the conclusion of the transaction. These copies are archived electronically
until needed.
Online purchases
Online purchases are concluded by the customer inputting his/her credit card details. Deliveries are made to South
African addresses only.
Notification is sent to the store located closest to the customer whenever an approved order is received. A
designated sales clerk at the store then processes the order based on the information received in the notification.
Three delivery notes are generated, after which a courier delivers the product(s) to the address indicated by the
customer. However, before the courier leaves the company’s premises, the security guard at the gate checks the
description of the goods on the delivery note against the goods in the courier’s vehicle, signing the delivery note as
proof that he/she has performed this task.
Upon receiving the goods, the customer signs all three copies of the delivery note, one of which he/she retains.
The other two copies are returned to a designated sales clerk at the store from which the products were delivered.
The sales clerk then captures the delivery date on the system and scans one of the delivery notes onto the system in
order for it to serve as proof of delivery. The accounting system then generates an invoice (much like the invoice for
in-store sales). At the end of each week, the sales clerk files one copy of the signed delivery note, sending the third
to head office, where it is filed. The sales manager at head office, Mrs Kobe, has indicated that her team performs
weekly reconciliations between the delivery notes that arrive via courier and those scanned into the system at the
store. To date, they have discovered no discrepancies.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that you would perform in order to verify sales as part of your year-end
audit. Ignore goods returned.
[15]
GUIDANCE

Describe the substantive audit procedures that you would perform in order to verify sales22 as part of your year-end
audit. Ignore goods returned.
Note: The previous example was the audit of balances. We are now going to focus on audit transactions.

Once again, because it is important to know the theory relevant to the auditing of the item at hand, you need to:
understand the specific audit assertions that need to be addressed
understand the audit procedures that are usually relevant to the specific item(s) being audited
identify the specific issues and risks that need to be addressed
identify the IFRS criteria applicable to your answer
identify the specific audit standards applicable to the scenario.
Read the question

You are a senior auditor23 on the audit of Gracys Ltd (Gracys), a company with a September year-end. Your audit
firm has been Gracys auditors for the past five years.
The company sells clothing, shoes and beauty products at 22 branches24 located across the country as well as
from their virtual store at which online sales are made.
Management usually pays close attention to the sales figures, as the manager of each store receives a
performance bonus25 linked to sales.
Sales
The chief financial officer, Mr Chris Tommylin, has indicated that total sales (R833 million) for the year have
increased by 7% over those of the previous year (R778 million).
The accounting systems of the company, whose head office is located in Cape Town’s central business district,
are fully integrated and run on a wide-area network. The points-of-sales systems at each of the stores are connected
to Gracys intranet via Telkom’s virtual private network.
In-store purchases 26
In-store purchases are made with cash, on credit and by using either the Gracys customer store card (on which a
pre-determined credit limit has been set) or the customer’s bank credit card.
Once a transaction has been processed, the sale is immediately posted to the sales account with a unique branch
code in order to identify the branch to which the sale relates. A copy of the invoice handed to the customer is
automatically generated at head office at the conclusion of the transaction. These copies are archived electronically
until needed.
Online purchases27
Online purchases are concluded by the customer inputting his/her credit card details. Deliveries are made to South
African addresses only.
Notification is sent to the store located closest to the customer whenever an approved order is received. A
designated sales clerk at the store then processes the order based on the information received in the notification.
Three delivery notes are generated, after which a courier delivers the products to the address indicated by the
customer. However, before the courier leaves the business premises, the security guard at the gate checks the
description of the goods on the delivery note against the goods in the courier’s vehicle, signing the delivery note as
proof that he/she has performed this task.
Upon receiving the goods, the customer signs all three copies of the delivery note, one of which he/she retains.
The other two copies are returned to a designated sales clerk at the store from which the products were delivered.
The sales clerk captures the delivery date on the system and scans one of the delivery notes onto the system as proof
of delivery. The accounting system then generates an invoice (much like the invoice for in-store sales). At the end of
each week, the sales clerk files one copy of the signed delivery note, sending the third to head office, where it is
filed. The sales manager at head office, Mrs Kobe, has indicated that her team performs weekly reconciliations
between the delivery notes that arrive via courier and those scanned into the system at the store. To date, they have
discovered no discrepancies.
Exam technique
1. Use the audit assertions of transactions as a framework in answering the question:
occurrence
accuracy
classification28
cut-off
completeness
disclosure
2. Start your sentences with:
inspect
inquire
re-perform
observe
scrutinise
select a sample (or extract)
OR
agree (or match).29
3. Communicate properly.
Note: Although a lot of information was given in the question relating to the internal control of Gracys, this will be
relevant only if the auditor needs to perform test of controls. If the questions are substantive, you may ignore this
information, since it will have no relevance to your answer.
SUGGESTED SOLUTION
(Note the difference in headings from the previous example question.)
1. Occurrence30
a) Obtain the sales schedule from Mr Chris Tommylin and cast31 it. (1)
b) Agree the total of R833 million to the general ledger and the trial balance.32 (1)
c) Scrutinise the sales schedule for any such unusual entries as duplicate sales invoices, duplicate account holders
and duplicate addresses. (1)
d) Stratify the in-store sales further (e.g. per region and branch) and select a sample of invoices to be tested. (1)
33
e) Print the sample selected and, using the invoice numbers noted on the sales schedule, agree the invoice numbers
to the signed filed invoices or delivery notes (which have been sent to head office by the store from which the
goods were delivered), in order to confirm that the debtor has acknowledged the debt or the transfer of risk.
2. Accuracy34 (1)
For a sample of invoices selected:
a) cast the invoices (1)
b) recalculate the VAT on them (1)
c) agree the sales prices on the invoices to the approved sales price listing35 (1)
d) scrutinise the sales account for any suspicious journal entries (1)
e) follow up on items noted on any exception reports affecting sales. (1)
Identify the key information (such as product sold, quantity, date, etc.) recorded on the invoices selected and
agree the key information to the detailed audit trail of each sale recorded in the accounting records. (1)
3. Classification 36
Scrutinise the sales account in the general ledger for non-revenue items incorrectly posted to sales, such as
dividend income and interest received. (1)
4. Cut-off
a) In-store sales
As management receive bonuses,37 select a sample of 20 invoices from one month prior to and one month after
year-end and trace them through to the sales account in order to determine whether the sales were recorded in
the correct financial period. (1)
b) Online sales
Select a sample of 20 signed delivery notes from one month prior to and one month after year end and trace
them through to the invoices and the sales account in order to determine by an inspection of the dates on the
delivery notes whether the sales were recorded in the correct period. (1)
5. Completeness
a) For a sample of delivery notes and invoices:
i) inspect the sequences for missing numbers, and, where exceptions arise, follow up on them with
management; and (1)
ii) reconcile the delivery notes and invoices in order to ensure that all transactions are accounted for. (1)
b) Perform the following analytical review procedures:38
i) For each store: Make a year-on-year comparison of credit sales, cash sales, total sales and online versus
in-store sales in order to obtain reasons for any unexpected fluctuations. (1)
ii) For each region: Make a year-on-year comparison of credit sales, cash sales, total sales and online versus
in-store sales in order to obtain reasons for any unexpected deviations. (1)
Any other valid procedures. (1)
6. Disclosure
Inspect the correct disclosure of revenue in the financial statements, including the accounting policies. (1)
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 3
Revenue applying IFRS 15
[14 marks]
Trackster Ltd (Trackster) operates in the private security sector. The company’s external auditor is currently auditing
the revenue figure disclosed in Trackster’s draft annual financial statements for the financial year ended 30
September 20X1. Trackster earns revenue in two ways: the sale of GPS-based tracking services and the sale of
emergency roadside kits, accounted for in two separate general ledger accounts. Trackster applies IFRS 15.
Tracking services
GPS-based tracking services involve Trackster installing a GPS-based tracking device in a customer’s vehicle in a
position that makes the device difficult to find. When a customer’s vehicle is stolen, the customer can identify its
location by means of Trackster’s smart phone app and, at the same time, alert Trackster to the theft. Trackster will
send out an armed response team to attempt a retrieval of the vehicle.
In order to obtain a tracking device, a customer must subscribe to a 12-month contract priced at R100 per month,
invoiced at the beginning of a month. Should the customer want to make use of a discount of 20%, he/she must pay
a one-off (up-front) fee of R960 at the beginning of the 12-month contract and does not have to pay any monthly fee
thereafter. The tracking device remains the property of Trackster throughout the subscription period. New customers
must sign a written sales agreement either at a Trackster retail outlet or in the comfort of their homes in the presence
of a Trackster sales agent. All prices charged are the same as in the 20X0 financial year.
Trackster records the details of all subscribers’ contracts, including amounts recognised each month as revenue,
in a contracts spreadsheet.
Emergency roadside kit

Another product which Trackster offers is an emergency roadside kit for everyday use, sold at a standard price. A kit
consists of various items that enhance vehicle safety, including a fire extinguisher, emergency belt cutter with
attached glass breaker, reflective jacket and triangle warning sign, medikit, jumper cables and a flashlight. In past
financial years, an average of 10% of kits were returned to Trackster for refunds due to product faults and unhappy
customers. Total sales from emergency roadside kits for 20X1 amounted to R1 785 400.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss in detail why Trackster will not be able to recognise the full R1 785 400 revenue from emergency
roadside kits for the 20X1. (3)
2. Describe the substantive audit procedures which Trackster’s auditor must perform in order to test the occurrence,
accuracy and cut-off of revenue derived from the sale of GPS-based tracking services and recorded in Trackster’s
annual financial statements.
Note: Ignore the cost implications of the GPS tracking device for Trackster and do not address the testing of the
presentation assertion or related disclosures in your answer. (11)
[14]
1. Revenue from emergency roadside kits

a) In terms of the requirements of IFRS 15, the amount of revenue that Trackster earns from the sale of emergency
roadside kits constitutes a ‘variable consideration’. (1)
Variable consideration can only be included to the extent that it is ‘highly probable that its inclusion will not
result in a significant revenue reversal in the future when the uncertainty has been subsequently resolved’
(IFRS 15:56). (1)
b) Due to a history of refunds of the kits, i.e. a likelihood of future reversal of the revenue (10% are brought back
by customers), there will be a limit on the amount of revenue that can be recognised from the sale of the kits.
(1)
c) Therefore, because 10% of products are usually returned and the kits are all sold at a standard price,
Trackster will likely only be able to recognise R1 606 860 in the 20X1 financial year (R1 785 400 less 10%).
(1)
2. Revenue from GPS-based tracking services

a) Obtain the contracts spreadsheet from management and select a sample of both ongoing and new subscriber
contracts. (1)
Agree the contract details on the spreadsheet to the sales agreement, ensuring that:
i) a sales agreement exists for the contract, signed by both customer and Trackster (occurrence) (1)
ii) the type of the contract, invoiced month-to-month or paid up-front, is accurate (1)
iii) the amount recorded is supported by the same amount on the agreement to which the customer agreed (
R100 per month or R960 one-off recognised at R80 per month) (accuracy) (1)
iv) the agreement pertains to the 20X1 financial year (either still ongoing with reference to the date started or
signed in the 20X1 financial year). (occurrence and cut-off) (1)
b) For a sample of contracts on the contract spreadsheet, agree the amounts recorded to the cash book and bank
statement to ensure a receipt exists for the revenue. (occurrence) (1)
Note: Service renewals might not involve the signing of a new contract, therefore for contracts renewed in the
20X1 financial period, the above procedure in combination with an inspection of the sales agreement will
verify the occurrence assertion. (1)
c) Inspect the contracts spreadsheet for evidence that the contracts invoiced on a month-to-month basis are
recognised at R100 per month and that the contracts invoiced annually have been recognised at R80 per month
and not as R960 in the month the contract was signed for. (accuracy) (2)
d) Recalculate the contracts spreadsheet by casting each month’s revenue recognised in the 20X1 financial year.
Add up the 12 months’ recalculated totals to arrive at the total annual revenue recognised and agree this (1)
total to the general ledger account for GPS tracking services and trial balance. (1)
e) Inspect the minutes of the board meeting where the decision was taken not to increase the monthly and annual
subscription fees for 20X1 and ensure at the same time that the same fee structure as for 20X0 still applies in
20X1. (accuracy) (1)
f) Perform analytical procedures on the revenue recognised for GPS tracking services by creating an expectation of
what the revenue should be with reference to the number of contracts active in 20X1 and follow up any
unexpected differences with management. (1)
g) Obtain a written representation letter from management in which they confirm the occurrence, accuracy and
cut-off assertions for GPS tracking services revenue. (1)
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Revenue
[15 marks]
Prompt Health (Pty) Ltd (Prompt Health), a private hospital founded 15 years ago, focuses on neonatal and
neurological cases. In addition, the company is the 100% owner of a pharmacy, Health Products (Pty) Ltd (Health
Products), located on its premises, to which it sells medicines and related products at a 5% mark-up.
With the exception of a handful of private patients, all Prompt Health patients have medical aids. Before a
patient in the latter category is admitted, authorisation for treatment is obtained from his/her medical aid. Although
medical aids are able to pay outstanding amounts within 30 days, private patients need to pay in advance.
Currently employed at Auditors4U Inc., you have already completed the first two years of your three-year
articles. Owing to your knowledge and experience, you have been appointed as the senior on the audit, for which the
revenue and receivables sections have been assigned to you. After performing walk-through tests on all the relevant
sections, the audit manager has concluded that a substantive-based audit will be performed for the 30 September
20X1 year-end audit.
You have received the following trial balance extracts from the financial manager of Prompt Health:
ACCOUNT ACCOUNT 20X1 20X0 AUDITED

NUMBER DESCRIPTION ESTIMATED R’000
R’000
BS-025 Gross debtors 25 586 21 586
BS-085 Provision for bad debts 3 587 2 897
IS-001 Revenue 152 475 141 586
IS-042 Finance income 1 475 1 986
IS-095 Bad debts 1 748 1 875
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that you would perform with regard to the 20X1 year-end revenue figure
of Prompt Health in order to obtain appropriate audit evidence regarding the relevant audit assertions (excluding
classification).
[15]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Revenue
[13 marks]
Flowers.Net (Pty) Ltd (Flowers.Net), specialists in the online retailing of flowers and gifts, has appointed RightWay
Incorporated (RightWay) as its external auditors for the 30 June 2016 year-end audit. The auditing firm was
appointed by the shareholders of Flowers.Net at the annual general meeting held on 30 September 20X1, after the
decision had been taken to rotate external auditors in terms of the Companies Act.
Flowers.Net’s sales system operates as follows:

Cash sales only are made.
Customers (mainly private individuals) need to register on Flowers.Net’s website before gaining access to its
catalogue of gifts. This is done in order to build up a database so that customers may be emailed about special
offers.
After customers have placed goods in their online baskets, their credit card details are required before sales may
be transacted. A number of edit checks exist on the system, with the result that orders are accepted only if all the
necessary details (delivery addresses, customers’ names, contact numbers, etc.) have been supplied.
Sales are processed once confirmation has been received from the customers’ banks that the transactions have
been approved.
Customers are emailed automatically with confirmations and the reference numbers for the orders.
Orders are logged automatically onto Flowers.Net’s computer system.
The system automatically generates a picking slip, which is used to pick the goods in the warehouse and signed by
the picker. A warehouse clerk produces a printout of all picking slips.
The goods are delivered to customers by Flowers.Net’s couriers.
Staff members in the delivery section generate a duplicate delivery note from the invoicing module, one copy of
which is signed by the customer on receipt of the goods. This copy is returned with the delivery staff.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that you would perform with regard to the sales system of Flowers.Net in
order to obtain audit evidence regarding the following revenue assertions:
Occurrence
Accuracy
Completeness
[13]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Revenue
[25 marks]
As the audit manager, you are currently busy with the year-end external audit of Advertising Space (Pty) Ltd
(Advertising Space), a company selling advertising space on billboards along the highways of South Africa. The
company was formed by an entrepreneur who wanted to create direct competition to ‘Below the belt advertising’
CC, which he believed provided a poor service to its customers. Advertising Space earns commission on every
square metre of billboard space that it sells. Since the commission account is considered a high-risk balance, you
decided to audit the balance yourself. You are busy with the substantive procedures of the commission account in
the statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 October.
Since Advertising Space does not have the necessary capital with which to build its own billboards, it has signed
contracts with billboard companies (operators) in terms of which Advertising Space sells the billboard spaces
(referred to henceforth as packages) on their behalf. Fees vary, depending on the nature of the billboards, their
location, whether they are static or electronic, etc.
Advertising Space, which has seen much growth of late, has several packages on its books. Commission on the
packages is earned through selling them to clients from other operators. Once the sale of a package has gone
through, a contract is concluded between the operator and the client, the commission being calculated as a
percentage of the purchase price of the package. Clients are obligated to pay a deposit of 10% of the purchase price
of the package on top of the commission to be paid to Advertising Space.
The company uses a bank-clearing account system that records all monies deposited by customers and generates
a pre-numbered receipt, a copy of which is sent to the client as proof of the receipt of payment. Advertising space
then transfers a portion of the amount due to the account of the relevant operator. The commission owing to
Advertising Space is paid into its current bank account by means of a cheque. No electronic payments, cash
payments or transfers are made.
For each transaction, a sales file is maintained, in which all details of that transaction are filed, including a copy
of the contract, details of the terms and conditions and the terms of payment.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures you would perform in order to audit the commission account in the statement of
comprehensive income for the year ended 31 October.
[25]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
Revenue
[22 marks]
You are the audit manager on the 20X1 year-end audit of DreamHomez (Pty) Ltd (DreamHomez), a company with a
31 December year-end that specialises in domestic design and interior decoration. As DreamHomez believes in
investment in the local economy, all building materials are purchased from South African suppliers.
You have assigned one of your second-year trainees, Tim Hanks, to the revenue cycle. After discussions with the
client, Tim drafted the following working paper.
Client: DreamHomez (Pty) Ltd

Year end: 31 December 20X1 Working paper B4
Description: System Description: Income
Prepared by: Tim Hanks Reviewed by: Date: 21-11-20X1
1 All sales are made on credit.

. Potential clients complete credit application forms.
The credit clerk, Tom Willings, allocates credit terms and a credit limit to each customer after
verifying their creditworthiness with the credit bureaux.
After ensuring that all the necessary information and documentation has been received from the
client, the credit manager, Sandy Lee, signs the application form as approval of the credit terms
and limit.
DreamHomez provides financing to creditworthy clients.
2 DreamHomez provides clients with pre-numbered, obligation-free quotations.

. Once a client has accepted and signed the quotation, the project manager, Thabo Mhlangu,
verifies his/her creditworthiness on the approved credit application form and signs the quotation
as proof of his having performed the check.
3 After having received an approved quotation, the legal department draws up a contract, which is
. signed by both the credit manager and the client, thereby legally binding the latter to the repayment
of the loan and the payment of all costs relating to the work done.
4 Revenue recorded is based on the percentage of completion.
. Clients are invoiced monthly on pre-numbered invoices.
Interest on the loans accrues from the date of invoicing.
5 The financial manager performs monthly debtor reconciliations, which she signs as proof of
. performance.
REQUIRED
Design the audit procedures that should be performed in order to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
regarding the revenue figures of DreamHomez for the 31 December 20X1 financial year-end, indicating in each case
whether it is a substantive procedure, a test of control or a dual-purpose test.
[22]
Question 6
Question 6 LEVEL 3
Revenue
[28 marks]
You are employed as the auditors of TOP Fashion (Pty) Ltd (TOP Fashion). TOP Fashion became a market leader in
fashion after it launched its TCL reality show: Say heck yay to the shirt. The company provides fashion advice and
tips to clients. TOP Fashion has two main income streams. One-third of the income is generated from consultation
fee income and ad hoc services the company provides during consultations. The other two-thirds of the company’s
income is generated from the personal shopping service TOP Fashion provides to its customers.
Income generated during consultation

TOP Fashion sends a consultant to a client’s house to review the client’s wardrobe. The consultant then provides the
client with feedback on which clothes would fit them the best. The feedback is contained on a printed feedback
report. The report contains a description of the clothes, recommended sizes and measurements, colours, etc.
Consulting fees are payable, quarterly in advance. Various packages can be purchased, each with a different
number of visits. Entry-level packages allow for two annual visits, while the superior packages include monthly
visits plus two additional ad hoc specialist consultation visits that focus on evening wear for special events. If the ad
hoc specialist consultation visits are not utilised, the sessions are forfeited. Consultants also provide various
value-added services during the consultation. They provide:
a cleaning service to clean one or two clothing items required at short notice (the consultant cleans the clothing
item at the client’s premises)
a tailoring service to jazz up a clothing item or make necessary alterations.
They also carry a line of costume jewelry and semi-precious gems with them, which they can sell to clients during
consultations.
Income generated from the personal shopping services

The feedback report received by the clients after a consultation can either be used by clients to purchase their own
clothing at a retailer of their choice, or clients can make use of TOP Fashion’s personal shopping service. TOP
Fashion has buyers who will source the recommended clothing from various suppliers around South Africa. TOP
Fashion guarantees the best possible price.
Clients who would like to make use of the personal shopping service must review the feedback report, make any
amendments (if necessary) and then sign and date it. It is returned to the consultant, who issues the client with a
quotation based on the signed feedback report. The quotation includes time required to provide the personal
shopping service and the cost per hour. If the client accepts the quotation, a date for the fitting of the clothing is
recorded on the quotation. A TOP Fashion personal shopper sources the clothing and a fitting is held in the comfort
of the client’s home on the agreed date. Once the fitting is complete, the quotation for the personal shopping service
is stamped with a date stamp by the personal shopper and placed in a suspense file until invoiced, if not invoiced
immediately. Two pre-numbered invoices are prepared by the personal shopper based on the completed quotation. A
copy, payable in 30 days, is given or sent to the client, and the other is attached to the stamped quotation. Clothing
sold to the client is invoiced separately, as it must be paid cash on delivery (COD), since TOP Fashion cannot return
worn clothing to its suppliers. A sales invoice is issued immediately together with a cash receipt. The invoices for
sale of goods and for services rendered are recorded daily by the accounting department.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the risks (other than those relating to the presentation assertion) which will increase the chances of
material misstatement on account/assertion level in respect of revenue generated during consultations. Also, list
the assertion(s) affected by the risk. (8)
Presentation (table and assertion) (1)
2. Assuming that the general procedures have already been performed, formulate the substantive procedures that you
2.
would perform in respect of the revenue from services provided. In documenting the test of details, clearly show
how the requirements of IFRS have been met. (18)
Presentation (application of requirements of IFRS) (1)
[28]
1. Audit risk at account and assertion level
The risk exists that consulting fee income is not recognised accurately and completely Accuracy and
according to the different performance obligations: consulting fees, cleaning services, completeness
sewing services, etc. (1) of revenue (1)
Risk exists that revenue is overstated and revenue recorded where consultations did Occurrence
not take place. Alternatively, excessive hours can be recorded to render the service. (1) of sale (1)
The risk exists that income from the various services and sales are incorrectly Classification
classified as: of revenue
1. consulting income
2. sale of goods, or
3. service income.
(1) (1)
A risk exists that income is recognised when it is invoiced and not when the service is Cut-off and
rendered and incorrectly classified as income rather than income received in classification
advance. (1) of revenue (1)
The risk exists that income did not actually occur and that not all fees have been paid, Occurrence
since depending on the consultation, fees are payable at different frequencies, while and
ad hoc payments must also be accounted for. completeness
(1) of revenue (1)
Presentation (table and assertion) (1)
2. Income from services rendered

Analytical procedures
a) Develop an expectation for the revenue from services based on your knowledge of business and operations,
previous year’s revenue from services and budgeted figures as well as industry norms. (1)
b) Calculate the following ratios for the current year, prior year (previous year’s working papers) and budgeted
figures and compare them with each other:
i) Total revenue from services rendered
ii) Revenue from services rendered month to month
iii) Revenue from services rendered per month as a percentage of total revenue from services rendered
iv) Revenue from services rendered as a percentage of total income
v) Net profit percentage (max 2)
c) Compare the data used to calculate the ratio(s) above with the financial information system. (1)
d) Evaluate the results of the ratio analysis and investigate any unusual fluctuations. (1)
Tests of detail
Identify the contract with the customer:
e) Select a sample of transactions from the revenue journal and perform the following:
i) Check that the invoice is made out in the name of TOP Fashion (Pty) Ltd. (1)
ii) Agree the details on the invoice to the signed feedback report and signed quotation. (1)
iii) Agree the amount on the invoice to the bank statement. (1)
f) Select a sample of invoices from the revenue journal and inspect whether the revenue as per the invoice has been
recorded in the correct account as revenue from services rendered and not sales. (1)
Identify the performance obligations in the contract:
g) For the sample of invoices:
i) Inspect the details on the invoice and confirm that they relate only to services rendered and not goods sold,
which is invoiced separately. (1)
ii) Inspect the date of the invoice and the date stamp of the signed quotation to confirm the transaction is
recorded in the correct period. (1)
Determine the transaction price:

h) For the sample of invoices:
i) Recalculate the income as per the invoice by multiplying the price for services rendered with the hours
worked as per the quotation. (1)
ii) Agree the amount on the invoice to that in the revenue journal. (1)
iii) Calculate a reasonable time required to provide the service to evaluate the reasonability of the time allocated
to render the service. (1)
iv) Agree the price on the invoice to the historic prices on the database underlying the feedback report. (1)
Recognise revenue when the entity satisfies the performance obligation:

i) Select a sample of stamped quotations before year-end and after year-end and inspect the date stamped on the
completed quotations. Follow through to the invoice and confirm whether the invoice has been recorded in the
correct period in the income journal. (1)
j) Select a sample of signed stamped quotations and corresponding invoice, and recalculate the income. Confirm
whether the income has been recorded in the income journal and debtors ledger. (1)
k) Select a sample of completed stamped quotations awaiting an invoice (suspense file) and confirm whether these
have been recorded in the revenue journal.
Enquire from management about outstanding invoices. (2)
l) Perform a sequence check on invoices and confirm that all invoices have been recorded in the revenue journal.
m) Select a sample of receipts from the bank statement and agree the receipt to the corresponding invoice. (1)
Note the date of the service rendered and confirm that the income has been recorded in the revenue journal and
has been correctly classified as revenue from services rendered. (2)
Presentation (application of requirements of IFRS) (1)
Question 7 LEVEL 2
Commission paid
[15 marks]
You are currently engaged on the audit of Mobile mania (Pty) Ltd (Mobile mania), a company, which was
incorporated in 2002 by Mr Jenkinson and Mr Sotherby, selling a range of mobile phones, tablet computers and
laptops from their 20 branches located in shopping malls across South Africa.
All of the branches are linked to head office in Sunninghill via a virtual private network. The company’s
financial accounting system (LAN) is housed at head office, where all personnel files are stored.
All administration and finance staff earn a monthly salary and an annual bonus. Employees are paid via EFTs on
the 23rd of each month. While branch managers earn a monthly salary and receive a bonus based on the
performance of the branch during the course of the year, the sales representatives at the branches earn a basic salary
and earn a commission on each sale made.
At the conclusion of a sale, the client receives a hard copy of the contract, while a duplicate is filed at the
applicable branch. The information recorded on the hard copy contract is captured onto the system by the sales
representative, who inputs his/her staff number and the sale code, thereby ensuring that he/she receives the
commission due to him/her for the sale.
The next day, the branch manager validates the legitimacy of the sale by comparing the original hard copy
contract to the information loaded onto the system. Once the sale has been validated, the commission on the sale is
posted to the commission account, whereupon the system identifies all commission due to each sales representative
by the payroll run date and the amount is allocated as part of his/her monthly salary.
Administration and finance staff, as well as the branch managers, belong to the company’s provident fund and
medical aid. Sales representatives do not receive this benefit, as they tend to be students who usually leave the job
after a year or two.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures you would carry out in respect of commission paid during the financial
year under review.
[15]
Question 8 LEVEL 3
Purchases and payments balances
[18 marks]
You are the auditor of Packaging Solution (Pty) Ltd (Packing Solution), a South African company that supplies the
public and wholesalers with a wide range of packaging products. The company has a 30 September financial
year-end.
You are responsible for the audit of the trade payables balance on the audit engagement and the only outstanding
audit work is the substantive audit procedures to be performed on the creditor reconciliations at year-end.
The following is an example of a creditor’s reconciliation that you obtained from Mrs Mary Mhlongo, the credit
manager, who is responsible for approving all pending payments to creditors after she has reviewed each creditor
reconciliation:
CORI SUPPLIES CC
Description Amount Explanation by the client’s creditors clerk
Balance per R297 000
statement on
30 September
Goods (R47 000) Invoice 244 was not recorded because the goods ordered (high-gloss
received after paper material) were still en route from Cape Town to our production
year-end: facility in Johannesburg at year-end. The goods arrived on 10 October.
invoice 244
Error: invoice (R35 000) Invoice 227 indicated that Cori Supplies CC charged Packaging
227 Solution for 10 pallets of high-gloss material, but we received only 9
pallets on 28 September. Each pallet has 1 000 sheets of high gloss
paper on it at a cost of R35 a sheet.
Goods (R74 000) High-gloss paper was delivered to Packaging Solution on 22
returned: September. However, the items were of an incorrect colour. The whole
invoice 229 shipment was subsequently returned to Cori Supplies CC by way of
goods returned note 76. Cori Supplies CC indicated that it would write
us a credit note (for invoice 229), but by year-end the supplier has not
yet done so.
Payment (R52 000) Payment made to Cori Supplies CC on 28 September not taken into
account on the supplier statement.
Balance as per R89 000 M Mhlongo
creditors ledger
on 30
September
REQUIRED
1. Describe what the term ‘dual-purpose test’ means. (1)
2. Describe two tests of controls you could perform on the creditors reconciliation of Cori Supplies CC. (2)
3. Describe the substantive audit procedures you would conduct on the creditors reconciliation of Cori Supplies CC.
Assume that computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) will not be used in the testing of the reconciliation.
(15)
[18]
Question 9 LEVEL 2
Purchases
[14 marks]
You are the auditor of Fitness Supplies (Pty) Ltd (Fitness Supplies), a company with a December financial year-end
that supplies a range of personal training equipment to the public.
Although the company imports its equipment from suppliers in China and the USA, all purchases are
denominated in US dollars. As a result of an increase in demand for training equipment, Fitness Supplies imported
more goods in the current year than in the previous three years combined. The goods are sold from its stores located
in shopping malls across the country.
The company’s integrated computerised system links all the stores’ individual computer systems. When the
inventory level for a particular item of equipment reaches the economic order quantity level pre-set into the
computer system, an order request is sent through to the chief buyer. Once he/she has signed his/her approval, the
order is placed with the relevant overseas supplier.
Once the equipment reaches South Africa and has been cleared by the customs division of SARS, it is delivered to
the company’s warehouse in Epping, Cape Town, in one section of which the administration office is located. The
following reports are then sent to the creditors department:
A completed GRN
The customs report
The clearing agent’s invoice
The logistics company’s invoice
The warehouse manager dispatches inventory to the relevant stores.

Once the invoice for the equipment has been received from the supplier, a corresponding creditor is recognised
by the accountant using the information (the rate of exchange, the transaction date, etc.) located on the order form,
the delivery note and the invoice.
REQUIRED
Discuss the substantive audit procedures that you would perform on the purchases recorded for the financial year
under review. In answering the question, make use of general audit software as far as possible.
[14]
Question 10 LEVEL 3
Substantive procedures: Expenses
[20 marks]
You are the audit senior on the audit of Open Oceans (Pty) Ltd (Open Oceans) for its 30 November 20X1 financial
year. Open Oceans is a deep-sea fishing and fish processing company which is situated close to a large harbour. Its
facilities consist of a processing and fish-freezing factory, which includes several cold rooms and an ice plant (for
making artificial ice). Open Oceans is registered as a VAT vendor.
The company’s operations are electricity intensive. The total electricity expense recorded for the 30 November
20X1 financial year amounted to R1 278 400, which is material for audit purposes. Included in this total is R245 390
spent on diesel that was used to power generators during periods of load shedding. Management prepared a
spreadsheet to show how the diesel-related expense was allocated to the electricity account from diesel purchases.
The spreadsheet shows the litres of diesel used by the generators, the cost allocated per litre for a particular month
and the quantity of kilowatts generated as per the generators’ built-in meters. Municipal and diesel expenses are
recorded separately in the general ledger account.
Electricity bills are received from the local municipality on a monthly basis, but at the time of the audit in
January 20X2, the invoice for November 20X1 has not yet been received by Open Oceans. Accordingly,
management created an accrued expense in the amount of R85 500 relating to November 20X1.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that should be performed to test the electricity expense recorded by Open
Oceans for its 30 November 20X1 financial year. Structure your answer in terms of the relevant assertions and
include any relevant general procedures.
[20]
Question 11 LEVEL 3
Prepaid expenses
[8 marks]
You are a second-year trainee accountant at Q&Z Inc. and are currently busy with the audit of A2Z Ltd (A2Z) for
the 28 February 20XX financial year. A2Z is a clothing wholesale retail company and sells its products to clothing
retail companies across the country. You are responsible for the audit of the company’s accounts receivable balance
as at year-end. You obtained the schedule below, detailing the general ledger accounts that represent the accounts
receivable balance contained in the statement of financial position as at year-end, from the company’s accountant:
GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT DESCRIPTION R

NUMBER
1011 Trade debtors control 58 985
account 356
1014 Prepaid expenses – Note 1 175 982
Accounts receivable balance – 28 February 20XX 59 161
338
You have already performed all the necessary procedures regarding the company’s trade debtors.
Note 1:
This amount consists of additional amounts which the company paid on its municipal and telephone accounts.
REQUIRED
Formulate the substantive procedures that you should perform to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence
regarding the company’s prepaid expenses included in the statement of financial position as at 28 February 20XX.
[8]
1. Obtain a list from management of all the items included in the prepaid expense balance on 28 February 20XX and
recalculate the total on the list. (1)
2. Compare this list to last year’s working paper for completeness purposes. Discuss any changes with the
accountant and corroborate his/her reply with invoices/statements. (1)
3. Agree the total on the list to the balance reflected in the prepaid expense account in the general ledger and on the
trial balance. (1)
4. Inspect correct opening balance to working paper of previous year and confirm this opening balance was reversed
at the beginning of the financial year. (1)
5. Re-perform the calculation on the list to check that it adds up to R175 982. (1)
6. Agree the amounts on the list for the water and electricity and telephone accounts to the actual statements on 28
February 20XX. (1)
7. Inspect the water and electricity, telephone and other periodic expense accounts in the general ledger to determine
whether all amounts have been correctly included (e.g. 13 payments instead of 12). (1)
8. Perform an analytical review of the prepaid expenses in the current year to the prepaid expenses of the previous
financial period for reasonableness and investigate any variances. (1)
9. Obtain a management representation letter regarding the existence, completeness, accuracy, valuation and
allocation, rights and obligations, classification and presentation of the prepaid expenses balance at 28 February
20XX. (1)
10. Inspect the financial statements and the notes to the financial statements to ensure the prepaid expenses have been
included as a separate line item in the accounts receivable balance note. (1)
Question 12 LEVEL 3
Prepayments
[16 marks]
You are the audit senior on the audit of Peru Rocks (Pty) Ltd (Peru Rocks). The company has been your client since
your first year of articles. Peru Rocks imports rocks from South America, against the hills of Machu Pichu, to sell
across South Africa. The rocks are used in building projects, gardens, landscaping and other similar projects.
Peru Rocks discloses two prepaid balances on the face of its statement of financial position.
Marketing campaign
The company has seen a drop in sales and as a result, the sales director approached a marketing company to run a
marketing campaign. Peru Rocks had never previously relied on any form of marketing other than word of mouth.
The marketing campaign would run for a 10-month period. The contract consisted of two elements. An amount of
R250 000 was payable five months after the commencement of the campaign. This amount was payable only if Peru
Rocks realised an increase in sales of R1 million. If this target was reached, Peru Rocks could decide whether it
wanted to extend the contract for another five months for an additional amount of R250 000, due when the target
was reached. Peru Rocks saw an increase in sales in excess of R1 million four months after the commencement of
the campaign and as a consequence decided to make the additional payment a month before year-end, while the
contract still had a further four months to completion.
Other prepayments
Peru Rocks pays various other smaller expenses in advance, which include, inter alia, rental and insurance payments.
REQUIRED
1. Assuming you have already completed the general procedures relating to the marketing campaign account,
formulate the substantive procedures you would perform in respect of the prepaid marketing campaign expense
account in the statement of financial position. (10)
2. Formulate analytical procedures that you would perform in respect of the other prepayments in the statement of
financial position. (6)
[16]
Question 13 LEVEL 2
Wages
[25 marks]
You are the audit manager on the audit of Playground (Pty) Ltd (Playground), a manufacturer of self-assembly
playground equipment. You are currently busy with the audit for the year ended 31 December. The preliminary work
performed by one of the audit trainees involved the documentation of the client’s wages system for its 40 wage
employees.
After evaluating the system description and following discussions with the trainee, you decided that a
substantive-based audit approach with limited reliance being placed on substantive analytical procedures would be
the most appropriate.
Documentation of the wages system of Playground

All potential employees are interviewed by management, after which reference checks are performed. As a result of
the number of high-profile credential frauds published in the media recently, the company has over the past few
months placed greater emphasis on verifying the credentials of each applicant.
Once an offer of employment has been made, both the personnel manager and the new employee sign a letter of
appointment, which is filed in the personnel department.
Annual performance evaluations are performed by the production supervisor and the production manager. These
are used in order to determine annual increases, which are communicated to the personnel department. After the
personnel manager has approved them, the wage increase letters are filed in the personnel department.
Most employees, who are required to wear red overalls while on duty, work in the factory. In order to ensure that
no injuries occur during working hours, all work-based activities are monitored through the deployment of CCTV
cameras. No employee is required to work overtime, but may do so voluntarily.
At the beginning of each week, the wages clerk prepares the wage journal, calculating the gross wage of each
employee by multiplying the hours worked – information on which is gleaned from the computerised clock-card
system – by the appropriate hourly rate. At the same time, deductions for income tax and medical aid contributions
are made. Both the personnel manager and the financial manager sign the weekly net payment schedule that is sent
to the bank. A copy of the schedule is filed in the personnel department.
The company uses a wages control account in order to control the payment of wages, which is made by the bank
directly into each employee’s bank account at the end of each week.
REQUIRED
Formulate the substantive procedures that you would perform on the wage expense of Playground. You are not
required to address salaries or the directors’ remuneration.
[25]
Question 14 LEVEL 2
Salaries
[15 marks]
You are currently engaged on the audit of Maxi-Med Ltd (Maxi-Med), the 10th largest private hospital group in the
world. With nearly 6 300 beds in 32 multidisciplinary hospitals in South Africa and Namibia, Maxi-Med employs
approximately 7 600 people.
Payroll
The accounting system, which includes a payroll module, is run on a LAN at head office in Durban. The payroll
expense for the current financial year end is R3 955 229 340 (the previous year was R3 638 610 839). All employees
are paid via EFT on the 25th of each month.
An employee’s signed contract and appointment letter, which are filed at the administration office at the hospital
in which he/she works, are scanned by the administration clerk at that particular hospital and emailed to the human
resources (HR) officer at head office. The HR officer inspects the letter for the signatures of both the hospital
manager and the employee, and, if he/she is satisfied, inputs the data into the payroll masterfile system.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures you would carry out in respect of salaries at year-end.
[15]
1. In order to establish if an employee is a genuine employee of Maxi-Med Ltd (Occurence):

a) After stratifying the salaries file by hospital (e.g. per hospital name), extract the name of an employee and
request that the hospital where his/her original documents (employment contract, letter of appointment,
certified copy of ID document, etc.) are kept courier the original documents to head office. (1)
b) Inspect the documents for validity. (1)
c) Inspect all third-party correspondence (e.g. with SARS) in order to confirm validity. (1)
d) Perform a positive identification of salary earners whilst visiting hospitals randomly selected during the audit.
e) Through discussion with the staff in the human resources section and an examination of the authorised (1)
employment and dismissal documentation, confirm that staff are introduced to, and removed from, the salaries
register within the correct time period. (1)
f) Using general audit software, identify whether or not any employees have been noted with, for example:
i) duplicate identity numbers
ii) missing names
iii) duplicate addresses
iv) missing tax numbers. (2)
2. In order to confirm accuracy:
a) agree the total salaries expense of R3 955 229 340 (the previous year it was R3 638 610 839) for the year to the
trial balance, the general ledger and the annual financial statements (1)
b) by inspection, agree the employee’s gross salary paid to that authorised in the employee’s contract, and vice
versa (1)
c) compare all deductions (e.g. PAYE/SITE, pension and medical aid) to the appropriate tables and to the
authorised deduction form at the human resources department, inquiring into any discrepancies with human
resources and, if necessary, the employee (1)
d) recalculate a sample of the deduction calculations (1)
e) re-perform some calculations on both the salaries account and the monthly payroll printouts (1)
f) re-perform a sample of postings from the salaries account to the general ledger in order to determine that
postings have been correctly performed (net salaries and all deductions). (1)
3. In the case of classification, scrutinise the payroll accounts for any unusual entries and wrong postings. (1)
4. In order to confirm completeness and cut-off:
a) establish that the payroll account has 12 salary debits for the year in order to ensure completeness of payroll
expense (1)
b) scrutinise monthly reconciliation reports where the current month’s salary has been reconciled to the previous
month’s with regard to new employees, employees dismissed, changes in salary rates, bonuses paid, etc. (1)
c) trace a sample of these changes to masterfile amendment forms and supporting documentation, or personnel
files. (1)
5. During analytic procedures, compare:
a) the salaries for Maxi-Med Ltd on a month-to-month basis and investigate any large fluctuations by means of
supporting documentation (1)
b) the salaries for each hospital on a month-to-month basis and investigate any large fluctuations by means of
supporting documentation. (1)
Question 15 LEVEL 3
Lifetime expected credit losses
[21 marks]
You are auditing Zazo (Pty) Ltd (ZA), a group of exclusive fashion boutiques that operates shops at all the main
shopping centres in South Africa. ZA is a subsidiary of a Spanish company which has been in the fashion industry
for over five decades.
The company allows sales on credit to customers to maximise sales. Before customers can purchase on credit,
they must complete a credit application form which will be followed up by head office’s credit department. Only
creditworthy customers will then be allocated a credit limit which is strictly enforced by the company. ZA’s
financial year-end is 30 June.
Trade receivables
The company will be using a provision matrix approach to calculate the lifetime expected credit loss on trade
receivables as stipulated in IFRS 9. The trade receivables age analysis has the following balances at year-end:
R EXPECTED DEFAULT RATE
Amounts owing 1–30 days 15 000 000 0.3%
Amounts owing 120+ days 2 700 000 12.6%
The expected default rate as shown above was determined by the procurement manager at head office.
Your audit firm has performed tests of controls on the revenue/trade receivables cycle of ZA.
REQUIRED
1. Calculate the lifetime expected credit loss at year-end, using the provision matrix approach on the information
supplied in the question.(3) Also discuss the taxation effect of this provision on the current year as well as the next
financial year. (3)
2. Describe the audit procedures to verify the valuation of the lifetime expected credit loss as calculated in (1) above.
(15)
[21]
1. Provision matrix
1–30 31–60 61–90 91–120 120+ TOTAL

DAYS DAYS DAYS DAYS DAYS
Default rate % 0.3 1.6 4.6 3.6 12.6
Gross carrying 15 m 7.5 m 4m 2.5 m 2.7 m 31.7 m

amount
Lifetime 45 000 120 000 184 000 90 000 340 200 779 200
expected credit
loss
Marks: R779 200 (or R780 000 rounded) (2 marks); framework used (1 mark)
Available marks [3]; maximum marks: [3]
Taxation effect on taxable income

Section 11(j)(i)(aa)(A) applies
Taxable income will decrease by (779 200 @ 40%) R311 680 in the current year (2)
This amount must be added back to taxable income in the following year. (1)
The percentage used can increase to 85% if a directive is obtained from SARS. (1)
1. Valuation procedures for calculation above
1.
Audit of default rate percentage

a) The 3.6% used in the above calculation is suspect and shows bias. It should have been between 4.6% and
12.6%. (2)
b) Enquire from the procurement manager how he decided on the default rate percentages. Corroborate his
explanation with supporting documentation. (1)
c) Determine the competency and experience of procurement manager to calculate the default rate percentage by
investigation of previous work prepared by him/her. (1)
d) Investigate the actual defaults in the current year and compare them to the default rate percentages used in the
prior year. This will indicate how accurate the default rate percentage was calculated in the previous year. (2)
e) Follow up payments after year-end by debtors and have discussions with debtors clerks regarding possible
defaults. Also take into account accounts handed over to attorneys for collection and disputes with debtors. Up
to now, we have only covered possible bad debt that already existed at year-end. Certain ‘good debt’ will also
go bad later after year-end. The auditor must estimate a provision for these losses. (4)
f) Also investigate any other subsequent events after year-end which indicate that debtors need to be impaired.
g) For example, if you calculated that lifetime expected credit loss amounts to R1 200 000 based on (1)
procedures performed under points (e) and (f) above, then you know the amount calculated by the client of
R779 200 used in the provision matrix is too low. (2)
h) Follow up any large discrepancies as revealed by procedures in (e) above with the CFO. If the CFO does not
rectify the matrix, take audit difference to unders/overs schedule. (1)
Audit of gross carrying amount

i) Inspect each amount in the matrix to the amount in the debtors age listing. (1)
j) Agree the total of R31.7 million to amount in the debtors control account/TB. (1)
k) Re-perform the debtors aging to dates on invoices/delivery notes to verify correctness of aging. (1)
Audit of lifetime expected credit loss

l) Re-perform the calculation on the matrix to verify amount is R779 200. (1)
m) Agree the total of R779 200 in the matrix to the amount in the general ledger’s provision for lifetime expected
credit losses. (1)
Available marks: [19]; maximum marks: [15]
Question 16 LEVEL 2
Accounts receivable
[18 marks]
Soft Cloud (Pty) Ltd (Soft Cloud) is a manufacturer and wholesaler of high-quality mattresses, whose clients
comprise such bulk-buyers as hotels and game lodges. You were appointed as the audit senior on the 31 August
20X1 year-end audit.
In the course of the planning phase of the audit, the financial manager, Mr Zuchter, who assigned the revenue
and receipts cycle to you, informed you that during the financial year Soft Cloud adopted a new bad-debt provision
policy.
The following extract from the trial balance was provided to you by Mr Zuchter:
TRIAL BALANCE AS AT 31 UNAUDITED 20X1 AUDITED 20X0

AUGUST R’000 R’000
Credit sales 142 582 125 879
Cash sales 59 142 65 475
Inventory 32 125 25 154
Debtors 52 175 49 487
Allowance for credit losses 11 154 10 475
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures that you would perform in order to obtain appropriate and sufficient audit
evidence for the valuation assertion with regard to the net debtors balance of R41 021 000 at year-end.
[18]
Question 17 LEVEL 2
Provision for future expected credit losses
[14 marks]
You are the auditor of Cape-Dairy (Pty) Ltd (Cape-Dairy), a company producing organic milk at its facility in
Durbanville. The company has a December financial year-end.
The only audit work performed on the allowance for credit losses balance at year-end was an analytical review
procedure:
Extract from the analytical review procedure performed by the auditors

Expectation: We expect the allowance for credit losses to increase in line with the industry average of
11%.
Accepted deviation: Up to 2% either side of the expectation; that is, 9% or 13%
Actual allowance calculated by management: R10 000 000 (gross receivables) @ 7.5% = R750 000
Action: Follow up with management and corroborate explanations through the performance of substantive
audit procedures.
Extract from a discussion held with the chief financial officer

Auditor: My findings following an analytical review procedure indicate that the allowance for future
expected credit losses for the current year is 7.5% of gross receivables, which is substantially lower than
the industry average of 11%.
Chief financial officer: Based on my experience in the industry, and the fact that we have an aggressive
collections policy, I do not see any valid grounds for increasing the allowance for future expected credit
losses, as this would not be a fair reflection of what is taking place within our company. In any event, if we
are wrong, the difference should not be material. We provided for 7.5% in the previous year when the
industry average was 10%, with which figure your firm was satisfied. So I don’t see that there is any valid
reason for increasing the allowance for the credit losses figure in the current year.
Other information
During the performance of subsequent events testing, it was brought to your attention that a debtor included in the
60-days total at year-end had become insolvent, which served to strengthen your view that the provision for future
expected credit losses at the company was understated. You informed the chief financial officer about the debtor and
that you believed that the industry average percentage of 11% would be more reasonable in determining the
allowance for credit losses. The chief financial officer indicated that he did not agree and refused to make any
additional adjustments.
The provision for future expected credit losses for the previous year was R525 000.
Extract from the electronic age analysis
CURRENT 30 DAYS 60 DAYS > 90 DAYS

Age analysis: previous year
Rand value of debtors R4 760 000 R740 000 R875 000 R625 000
% of total amount receivable 68% 10.5% 12.5% 9%
Age analysis: current year
Rand value of debtors R5 400 000 R3 250 000 R500 000 R850 000
% of total amount receivable 54% 32.5% 5% 8.5%
REQUIRED
Discuss the substantive audit procedures that you would perform on the allowance for the credit losses figure at
year-end.
[14]
Question 18 LEVEL 2
Accounts receivable
[20 marks]
An audit manager at Audit Inc., a firm of registered auditors based in Cape Town, you have reached the completion
stage of the December year-end audit of Saucy Ltd (Saucy). A company listed on the Alternative Exchange (AltX),
Saucy manufactures a variety of condiments that it sells to wholesalers, retailers, restaurants and hotels. Your audit
firm has been Saucy’s auditors for the past five years.
All audit work has been sufficient and effectively completed (including a positive and negative debtors
circularisation), except for the outstanding work to be performed on the valuation assertion for accounts receivable.
Accounts receivable
The company’s accounting systems are fully integrated and run on a local area network (LAN). Sales are made on a
credit basis only. By the end of November, customers have been supplied with a product catalogue, together with the
following year’s approved price list. Although prices are generally fixed, they may change, depending on the
quantities purchased and the discounts granted.
Each prospective client completes a credit application. Mr Melapo, the credit manager, compares the information
noted on the form to the information obtained from the credit bureaux in order to determine whether or not he/she
should be granted credit. For each applicant whom he approves, he requests one of the debtors clerks (Ms Mokumbe,
Mr Pienaar or Mr Adams) to load the client onto the system with a pre-approved credit limit.
In addition to all customers receiving 30-day settlement accounts, it is company policy to make an allowance for
credit losses against the customer if he/she has not settled his/her debt within 90 days. In the previous year, the
allowance for credit losses amounted to R220 500.
The current year age analysis obtained from Mrs Newton, the chief financial officer, is as follows:
ACCOUNTS CURRENT > 30 > 60 > 90 > 120
RECEIVABLE (R) DAYS DAYS DAYS DAYS
4 275 000 2 308 500 1 325 250 342 000 171 000 128 250
Percentage of total debtors 54% 31% 8% 4% 3%
The previous year’s age analysis reads:
ACCOUNTS CURRENT > 30 > 60 > 90 > 120

RECEIVABLE (R) DAYS DAYS DAYS DAYS
3 675 000 2 131 500 1 065 750 257 250 109 000 111 500
Percentage of total debtors 58% 29% 7% 3% 3%
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that you would perform in order to satisfy yourself that the accounts
receivable balance is valued correctly at the December year-end.
[20]
1. In order to establish the gross amount:

a) extract a list of accounts receivable from the accounts receivable masterfile and agree the total of R4 275 000 on
the list to the accounts receivable control account or trial balance (1)
b) review the list for credit balances, obtain the reasons from Mr Melapo and, if material, request a reversal of the
amounts (1)
c) reclassify remaining credit balances to the accounts payable balance (1)
d) scrutinise the accounts receivable control account for debtors with unusual credit limits; if there are any, follow
up on them with Mr Melapo (1)
e) re-perform casts of the control account and the accounts receivable list (1)
f) compare the balances on the list of accounts receivable to the responses received from debtors circularisation.
Follow up on any queries or reconciling items. (1)
2. In order to establish provision for future expected credit losses:
a) by inquiring from Mr Melapo and an inspection of the previous year’s working papers:
i) establish the method and the procedures (all balances exceeding 90 days) adopted by Mr Melapo in
determining the allowance for credit losses of R299 250 (R171 000 + R128 250) (1)
ii) assess the basis, the method and the procedures for reasonableness and consistency with the previous year’s
balance of R220 500 (R109 000 + R111 500) (in this scenario, it is consistent) (1)
iii) evaluate the effectiveness and reliability of the procedures adopted in order to authorise the allowance for
future expected credit losses by management (1)
iv) select a small sample of accounts receivable and, by tracing the amounts owed back to the invoices and the
subsequent receipts, confirm that the manual ageing of the amount agrees with the ageing as calculated
per the masterfile. (1)
b) using general audit software, stratify the debtors masterfile into the following categories:
i) A debtor’s amount in an age field that exceeds the accounts receivable individual credit terms (1)
ii) A debtor’s amount in the over-90-days age field (1)
c) for each debtor identified above, discuss with Mr Melapo his/her historical payment history and the likelihood
or not of him/her paying the outstanding amount (1)
d) inspect Saucy’s legal and customers correspondence files in order to identify disputes with customers, and (1)
if there are any, follow up with the Mr Melapo in order to obtain the latest information on the state of the
disputes (1)
e) compare the amount written off in the current year to the allowance made in the previous year in order to assess
management’s ability to provide realistic provision for future expected credit losses (1)
f) perform analytical review procedures on the accounts receivable balance and the provision for future expected
credit losses (2)
g) calculate the days outstanding and compare them to those of the previous year (1)
h) compare the R299 250 to the R220 500 provision (1)
i) compare the accounts receivable age analysis to that of the previous year (1)
j) compare the accounts receivable to the credit sales for both the current and the previous year (1)
k) for all of the above, obtain reasons from management for any unusual variances, and follow up on their
explanations employing source documentation (1)
l) after performing all the above procedures, determine one’s own provision for future expected credit losses based
on the audit evidence obtained, comparing that allowance to the R299 250 calculated by management.
3. Follow up any difference with management, and then conclude. (1)
4. Any other valid procedures (1)
Question 19 LEVEL 2
Positive confirmation and provision for future expected credit losses
[26 marks]
You are the audit senior on the external audit of Leep Frog Ltd (Leep Frog), a company that owns and leases
buildings across South Africa. During the current year, there was a significant decrease in the number of properties
leased as a result of declining interest rates. Consequently, the company’s rentals in arrears account has grown
dramatically over the past few months. In response, the audit manager has decided to send out positive confirmation
letters to lessees.
The lease system in place at Leep Frog operates as follows:

New applications and approvals
Once a prospective tenant has completed a rental application form and successfully undergone a credit check, a
rental agreement, which is pre-numbered, is entered into with the lessee and signed by both parties. A copy of the
agreement, as well as the rental application form, is filed in a correspondence file for the lessee, who is assigned a
unique lessee number.
Invoicing
The accounting department at head office maintains a rent register in which all rentable office space is listed, along
with the details of all lessees.
On the first day of every month, an invoice serving as a reminder of the rent due on or before the fourth day of
the month in terms of the rental agreement, is mailed to each lessee. In addition, the invoice is debited to the lessee’s
account in the rent register.
Receipts
Rentals are paid directly to head office. When payment has been received from a lessee, it is credited to the client’s
account in the rent register.
Month-end procedures
All lessees with outstanding rent payments receive a monthly statement prepared and mailed on the 10th of each
month. Copies of these statements are filed in the respective correspondence files of the lessees.
The credit manager determines the provision for future expected credit losses by inspecting the age analysis at
year-end and considering the recoverability of all individual lessee amounts outstanding for more than 90 days.
According to the audit program, you should perform the following audit procedures:
Verify the existence of lessees and rental in arrear balances relying on positive circularisations.
With regard to the provision for future expected credit losses, inspect and test the procedures performed by the
audit client when calculating such a provision.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the procedures that you would perform in respect of the positive confirmation by lessees of the gross amount of
rental in arrears. (11)
2. Formulate the substantive procedures that you would perform at year-end relating to the provision for future expected credit
losses. (15)
[26]
Question 20 LEVEL 2
Creditors statement reconciliation
[15 marks]
A junior trainee accountant assigned to the 31 December 20X1 audit engagement of Raffles (Pty) Ltd (Raffles), a
large retailer of furniture and electronic appliances with outlets across the country, you have been allocated to the
testing of trade payables and will perform the audit of Raffles’s creditors reconciliations in mid-January 20X2.
The following creditors statement reconciliation, performed for a supplier, Furnley Ltd, by the Raffles creditors
clerk, was included in a sample for testing. The reconciliation for January 20X2 for Furnley Ltd, which closed down
on 23 December 20X1, is not yet available.
DESCRIPTION NOTE R
Balance as per Furnley Ltd statement 23/12/20X1 466 980
Add:
Goods received note GRN681 not yet invoiced 113 750
Correct mathematical adding error on supplier’s statement 15 789
Correct posting error (invoice FRN1078 from Furnley Ltd) 1 75 380
Less:
Discount allowed on invoice FRN1105 not on statement 2 55 320
EFT payment to supplier on 30/12/20X1 184 100
Debit note RFL540D for goods returned to supplier 3 80 550
Balance per creditors ledger account CR408, 31/12/20X1 351 929
Notes:
1. The creditors clerk at Raffles erroneously posted the amount charged as per Furnley Ltd’s invoice FRN1078 to the
1.
creditors ledger account of Hautmanns (Pty) Ltd, indicating the correction on the reconciliation only. FRN1078
has not yet been settled.
2. Raffles qualified for a 5% discount on invoice FRN1105 as a result of making a payment to Furnley Ltd within 30
days of the invoice date, which Furnley Ltd did not take into account on its statement.
3. Raffles purchased several LED television sets from Furnley Ltd. According to Raffles, some of the goods
received were older models than those originally ordered. However, Furnley Ltd disputes this claim, saying that
Raffles never indicated the model number on its order.
REQUIRED
Describe in detail the substantive audit procedures you will perform on the creditors statement reconciliation for
Furnley Ltd prepared by the creditors clerk of Raffles (Pty) Ltd. Consider all amounts and reconciling items
material, ignoring any VAT implications.
[15]
(Notes within brackets are for informational purposes only and do not form part of the required answer.)
1. Agree the supplier’s balance of R466 980 as per the reconciliation to Furnley Ltd’s statement, confirming that the
date on the statement is 23 December 20X1. (1)
2. Agree the balance of R351 929 per Raffle’s reconciliation to the creditors ledger at 31 December 20X1. (1)
3. Re-perform the casting of the reconciliation, testing the logic of the calculations (i.e. where items fall under the
heading ‘Less’, that these were indeed subtracted and not added) in order to ensure mathematical accuracy. (1)
4. Inspect the supplier’s statement for amounts incorrectly duplicated on the reconciliation as well as other unusual
entries not adequately addressed on the reconciliation (e.g. GRN681’s invoice should not appear on the supplier’s
statement as well). (1)
5. With reference to the goods received note:
a) inspect GRN681 for the date of the delivery of the goods in order to confirm Raffles’ acknowledged receipt of
the shipment in December 20X1 (the test for cut-off) (1)
b) request from the creditors clerk the client’s calculation of the amount of R113 750 and agree items/quantity on
the supplier’s delivery note and prices to such supporting evidence as the invoice subsequently received in
January 20X2 (Note: the supplier delivery note might not contain item prices). (1)
6. Recalculate the supplier’s statement in order to confirm that he/she made a mathematical error and agree the result
(R15 789) with the correction as per Raffle’s calculation. (1)
7. With reference to the correction of posting error:
a) inspect invoice FRN1078 for the amount of R75 380 in order to confirm that the date shown is within the 20X1
financial year. Alternatively, ensure that the invoice appears on Furnley Ltd’s December 20X1 statement, as it
should do (1)
b) recommend to the client a correction to the creditors ledger accounts of both Furnley and Hautmanns, as
currently the former’s account is understated and Hautmanns’ overstated by R75 380 (Note: this entry on the
reconciliation should be removed once the correction to the accounting records has been made). (1)
8. With reference to the discount allowed:
a) inspect the invoice, the supplier contract or other correspondence between Raffles and Furnley Ltd for evidence
that Raffles qualifies for a 5% payment discount should it settle an invoice within 30 days of the invoice date
b) compare the date on invoice FRN1105 to the payment date on the bank statement in order to verify that (1)
payment took place within 30 days of the amount having been invoiced (1)
c) recalculate the discount by multiplying the discount percentage by the invoiced amount in order to arrive at the
discount amount of R55 320. (1)
9. With reference to the EFT payment:
a) confirm from the December 20X1 bank statement that payment of R184 100 took place in the 20X2 financial
year (1)
b) agree the amount paid to the corresponding invoice from Furnley Ltd in order to verify that the payment relates
to debt owing to Furnley Ltd and not to another supplier. (1)
10. With reference to the debit note:
a) confirm from the goods return voucher that the goods sent back to Furnley Ltd were returned before the 20X1
year end, which therefore justifies the recording of a debit note (1)
b) if the goods were not returned in the 20X1 financial year (this seems likely, though, owing to the dispute
between Raffles and Furnley Ltd) or returned only in January 20X2, recommend to management a reversal of
the debit note (Note: in terms of generally accepted accounting practice, a debit note may not be processed if
the goods have not been returned) (1)
c) inspect the original purchase order for an indication that the model number of the affected television sets was
not specified by Raffles, as this will lend support to Furnley’s refusal to accept the returns, thereby warranting
a reversal of the debit note (1)
d) if the recording of the debit note is justified, recalculate the debit amount with reference to the quantity and the
description of the goods returned and the original invoiced item prices. (1)
Question 21 LEVEL 2
Trade payables
[12 marks]
You are responsible for the audit of trade payables of Neoplats Trading (Pty) Ltd (Neoplats Trading). The audit
manager requested that you read through the debenture agreements to identify loan covenants that will affect the
audit of trade payables. While reading the agreements, you came across the following section:
Loan covenants
The Borrower undertakes that for each accounting period ending, its financial position shall have been
such that:
a) the ratio of net cash flow to debt service liability shall not be less than 1.3:1; and
b) the current ratio (current assets over current liabilities) shall not be less than 1.5:1.
Upon inspection of Neoplats Trading’s preliminary annual financial statement, you noted that current liabilities
consisted of trade payables and provisions. Through discussions with management, you discovered that management
only raises a provision for management fees payable to its holding company. The provision for management fees
was audited by your audit senior who was satisfied that it was not understated. However, you are now concerned that
trade payables may be understated in order to improve the current ratio.
REQUIRED
Formulate audit procedures that you will perform to test for the completeness of trade payables at year end.
[12]
Question 22 LEVEL 3
Trade and other payables
[25 marks]
You are an audit manager at Q&Z Inc. and are currently busy with the audit of Pick-A-Party Ltd (Pick-A-Party) for
the 28 February 20XX financial year. Pick-A-Party is a wholesale company which buys snacks, sweets, cold drinks
and themed party items such as paper plates, plastic glasses, serviettes, balloons, etc. on credit from various local
and overseas suppliers, which are then sold by Pick-A-Party to retail companies and the public across the country.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the assertion(s) which will normally be at risk when auditing the trade creditor’s balance of a company.
2. Describe the substantive procedures that the audit team should perform to obtain sufficient and appropriate (3)
audit evidence regarding the creditors balance reflected in Pick-A-Party’s notes to its financial statements at
year-end. (22)
[25]
1. High risk assertion(s)

a) Completeness is normally at risk when auditing the trade creditors balance as companies generally tend to
overstate assets and understate liabilities such as trade creditors. (1)
b) In addition to the general tendency to understate liabilities, companies might record trade creditors based on
invoices (which might only be received after year-end) and not on goods received notes, which are prepared as
the goods are received. (1)
c) Depending on whether it is a new creditor or a current creditor who already has an account in the company’s
books, the late recording of the purchase and the corresponding entry in the creditors account will affect either
the completeness (new creditor) or the accuracy, valuation and allocation (current creditor) assertion. (2)
2. Substantive procedures
Completeness
a) Compare the list of creditors at the current year-end to the previous year-end and identify:
i) creditors on the previous list who do not appear on the current list (1)
ii) creditors balances which are significantly smaller at the current year-end than at the previous year end (1)
iii) and by enquiry from management and inspection of the necessary supporting documents, determine and
evaluate the reasons for the differences.
b) Obtain the list of goods received notes (GRNs) which were unmatched to invoices at year-end and inspect the
journal entry which was raised for the corresponding creditors at year-end. (1)
c) Recalculate the amount owed as recorded in the journal with reference to price of the goods received (from the
order or pricelist or corresponding invoice if it has arrived) and the quantity as indicated on the GRN. (1)
d) Select a sample of large payments from the cash payments journal for the month(s) after the financial year-end
and inspect the GRN and delivery note to confirm that if the payment relates to goods or services received
prior to year-end, the corresponding creditor had been raised at year-end (subsequent payment testing). (1)
Accuracy, valuation and allocation

e) Compare a sample of individual creditors’ balances on the list according to the creditors ledger to the individual
creditor’s account in the creditors ledger. (1)
f) Compare the list of individual creditors’ balances according to the creditors ledger to the balance in the creditors
control account in the general ledger. (1)
g) Compare the balance of the creditors control account in the general ledger to the creditors balance on the trial
balance. (1)
h) Recalculate the balance of the creditors control account in the general ledger and the total of the creditors list
obtained from the creditors ledger. (1)
i) Select a sample of creditors (which includes the company’s major suppliers) from the creditors list and obtain
the year-end creditors reconciliations performed by the creditors clerks and perform the following procedures:
i) Re-perform the logic of the reconciliations. (1)
ii) Recalculate the calculations on the reconciliations. (1)
iii) Agree the balances on the reconciliations to the balances as per the creditors statements and the creditors
listing. (1)
iv) Inspect supporting documentation and/or enquire regarding the reconciling items on the reconciliations.
j) Select a sample of overseas creditors from the creditors list and inspect the creditors statements at year-end (1)
(28 February) to determine the amounts owed to the creditors in the foreign denominated currency. (1)
k) Obtain the applicable foreign currency exchange rate at financial year-end (28 February) and using the obtained
rate, recalculate the amounts owed to the creditors at the financial year-end in rands (local currency). (1)
l) Compare the recalculated amounts to the amounts recorded for the creditors on the creditors list. (1)
m) Inspect the creditor’s correspondence file for correspondence relating to unsettled disputes with suppliers, and
by discussion with management, determine whether any adjustments to creditors are required. (This could also
address accuracy, valuation and allocation if the actual delivery or condition of the goods delivered is
disputed.) (1)
n) Inspect the creditors control account in the general ledger for any unusual debit entries and enquire from
management. (1)
Rights and obligations

o) Inspect the supporting documentation such as the creditors statements while auditing the creditors
reconciliations to make sure that the documents are addressed to Pick-A-Party Ltd (this also addresses
existence). (1)
Classification
p) Identify any debit balances on the creditors list and request management to transfer the balances to trade
debtors. (1)
Presentation
q) Inspect the notes to the financial statements to ensure that creditors are included as part of the company’s
current liabilities. (1)
General
r) Obtain a management representation letter addressing the existence, completeness, accuracy, valuation and
allocation, classification, rights and obligations and presentation assertions of the creditors balance as at
year-end. (1)
s) Perform analytical procedures and obtain supporting documentation for any material fluctuations, for example:
i) current year’s purchases and creditors at year-end to prior years (1)
ii) creditors as a percentage of current liabilities at year-end to prior years. (1)
t) If necessary, obtain confirmation of balances directly from a sample of creditors, i.e. conduct a positive creditors
confirmation. (It may be appropriate to obtain direct confirmations of nil balances; major creditors (to confirm
that the balances are not understated despite being large); balances which have significantly reduced since the
prior year, and creditors for which there are no statements.) (1)
u) Scrutinise the creditors ledger and the trade creditors control account in the general ledger for any abnormal
entries and confirm any material adjusting entries with supporting documentation. (1)
Question 23 LEVEL 3
Trade and other payables balance
[23 marks]
You are a trainee accountant at Q&Z Inc. and are currently busy with the audit of Pick-A-Party Ltd (Pick-A-Party)
for the 28 February 20XX financial year. Pick-A-Party is a wholesale company which buys snacks, sweets, cold
drinks and themed party items such as paper plates, plastic glasses, serviettes, balloons, etc. on credit from various
local suppliers, which are then sold by Pick-A-Party to retail companies and the public across the country. As part of
the substantive testing of the trade and other payables balance at year-end, you have selected the following creditors
reconciliation for testing:
Creditors reconciliation – Paper Plates Galore (Pty) Ltd
CREDITORS RECONCILIATION: FEB 20XX

Name: Paper Plates Galore (Pty) Ltd
Account nr: P078
Address: PO Box 2954, Pretoria, 3265
R
Balance according to creditor statement dated 28/02/20XX 146 493.36
Invoices: (17 964.00) (5
Incorrectly invoiced for goods purchased by Pick-Your-Party (Pty) Ltd – invoice nr 920.50)
INV09678 (23/02/20XX)
Overcharging on invoice nr INV0567 – Note 1
Payments: Direct electronic transfer – 28/02/20XX (57 541.73)

Goods returned: Goods returned in respect of invoice nr INV04512 – Note 2 (8 975.00)
Balance according to creditors ledger on 28/02/20XX 56 092.13
Note 1:
This overcharging resulted from an order for 15 boxes of themed serviettes at R499.00 per box which was received
by Pick-A-Party but Paper Plates Galore incorrectly invoiced Pick-A-Party for 51 boxes.
Note 2:
The delivery of the salt biscuits, with comic characters’ pictures printed on them, relating to this invoice took place
on 26/02/20XX, but while moving the boxes to the warehouse, the warehouse clerk noticed that the sell- and use-by
date was 31 January 20XX. Paper Plates Galore was notified and acknowledged the mistake and collected the
expired salt biscuits from Pick-A-Party on 28 February 20XX – goods returned note number GRN0478.
REQUIRED
1. Explain what external confirmations are and why external confirmations are normally obtained as part of the
substantive procedures for debtors, but not for creditors. (3)
2. Describe the substantive procedures that should be performed on the creditors reconciliation of Paper Plates
Galore (Pty) Ltd for the 28 February 20XX financial year-end. (20)
[23]
1. a) External confirmations are written responses obtained directly from a third party, for example a debtor, and are
used by the auditor to obtain evidence regarding the entity’s account balances, etc. (1)
b) When auditing debtors, all the supporting documentation supporting the debtors balances are generated within
an entity, for example delivery notes, invoices and debtors statements. One way of confirming these debtors
balances is by speaking to the debtors directly. (1)
c) Creditors normally send creditors statements to an entity, which serves as external confirmation, which is then
used by the auditor when auditing the creditors reconciliations. (1)
2. Substantive procedures – creditors reconciliation
General
a) Inspect Paper Plates Galore’s creditor statement to confirm that:
i) it is issued to Pick-A-Party Ltd (1)
ii) the date on the statement is 28 February 20XX (1)
iii) the balance owing on the statement is R146 493.36 as reflected on the reconciliation. (1)
b) Inspect Paper Plates Galore’s account in Pick-A-Party’s creditors ledger (and list of creditors) as at 28 February
20XX and confirm that the balance is R56 092.13 as reflected on the reconciliation. (1)
c) Re-perform the logic of the reconciliation and the reconciling items, assessing logic and reasonableness. (1)
d) Recalculate the calculations on the reconciliation. (1)
e) Inspect Paper Plates Galore’s March 20XX creditor statement/creditors reconciliation to confirm that all the
February 20XX reconciling items were resolved. (1)
f) Inspect the creditors correspondence file for any correspondence relating to the reconciling items. (1)
Invoice INV09678
g) Inspect the goods receive note for any deliveries on 22 to 24 February 20XX from Paper Plates Galore and
inspect that such a delivery was not received. (1)
h) Inspect the invoice (if available) and confirm that Pick-Your-Party was invoiced and not Pick-A-Party. (1)
INV0567 (note 1)
i) Obtain INV0567 and inspect for the corresponding goods received note number. Inspect the relevant goods
received note to confirm:
i) the description of the goods received (themed serviettes) (1)
ii) that 15 boxes were received. (1)
j) Inspect invoice number INV0567 from Party Plates Galore and confirm that Pick-A-Party was invoiced for 51
boxes. (1)
k) Inspect the inventory records to confirm the accurate recording of the 15 boxes received. (1)
l) Recalculate the reconciling item amount (51 15 = 36 × 499.00 = R17 964.00). (1)
Direct electronic transfer

m) Inspect the February 20XX creditors statement to check that the payment of R57 541.73 has not been
accounted for in the balance. (1)
n) Obtain the payment requisition/bank statement/proof of payment and confirm that:
i) the transfer took place on 28/02/20XX (1)
ii) payment was made to Paper Plates Galore (1)
iii) the amount of the payment was R57 541.73. (1)
Goods returned
o) Inspect goods returned note number GRN0478 to confirm that:
i) it was signed by a Paper Plates Galore representative, acknowledging receipt of the returned goods (1)
ii) it was for the quantity as indicated on invoice number INV04512 (1)
iii) the date returned was 28/02/20XX. (1)
p) Inspect the inventory records to confirm that the salt biscuits were not included in the inventory balance as at
year-end. (1)
Question 24 LEVEL 2
Inventory
[18 marks]
Berck (Pty) Ltd (Berck) is a leading company for innovative and top-quality high-tech products in healthcare, life
science and performance materials. A substantial part of the business consists of the manufacturing of medical
supplies such as medicine. A large portion of the inventory balance at year-end is made up of medicinal products.
The schedule below is an extract from the notes to the draft 20X1 financial statements detailing the medicine
inventory balance:
Extract from the draft 20X1 financial statements
Medicine
Inventory at 29 February 20X1 prior to adjustments R179 352 177 607
Sundry write-downs: damaged packaging R181 153 262
Inventory obsolescence entry (net realisable value) R2 017 663 325
Inventory at 29 February 20X1 according to financial statements R177 153 361 020
The inventory obsolescence entry is an accounting estimate to write down the remaining inventory to the lower of
cost and net realisable value at year-end. This method of calculation has been consistently applied over the years.
To this end, you were provided with a detailed age analysis of all the inventory items. The inventory
obsolescence entry is based on the age of the inventory items and an estimate of an immediate sales trend of a
product on hand older than 100 days. If a product does not sell, Berck may be left with particular medicine supplies
on hand which will soon reach expiry date and therefore cannot be sold. Once a sales projection of product items is
made and the slow movers are extracted from the inventory list, the inventory obsolescence entry is calculated.
You also have access to the inventory database and the necessary audit software to retrieve any information you
may require for your audit procedures.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures you would perform to test the reasonableness of the inventory
obsolescence entry (net realisable value) disclosed in the draft financial statements in the amount of R2 017 663 325.
[18]
Question 25 LEVEL 2
Inventory and roll forward procedures
[25 marks]
CleanWorxx (Pty) Ltd (CleanWorxx) is a company in the technical industry that specialises in the selling of
industrial cleaning equipment. The company has a 31 December 20X1 financial year-end.
Concerned about inventory levels, the MD of CleanWorxx, Mr Zumba, has requested that a full stock count take
place on 30 September 20X1 and not at year-end, as is normally the case. Mr Yoga, the engagement partner on the
audit, has agreed to this, as CleanWorxx has a record of clean audits, and the internal control environment of the
company is satisfactory.
Assigned as audit manager on the 20X1 year-end audit, you have requested your second-year trainee, Ms Kickbox,
to prepare an inventory audit working paper setting out the audit evidence that she plans to obtain over the year-end
balance of inventory. She has produced the following preliminary working paper:
Client: CleanWorxx WP BS-05
Financial year-end: 31 December 20X1 Prepared by:
Section: Inventory Reviewed by:
Audit procedures on inventory:

1. Attend the inventory count on 30 September 20X1.
2. Verify ownership of inventory at 31 December 20X1.
3. Verify that inventory is carried at the lower of net realisable value or cost.
4. Verify that no equipment is allocated as inventory, and vice versa.
REQUIRED
Redraft audit working paper BS-05 in order to set out the audit procedures you would need to perform with a view to
gathering sufficient, appropriate audit evidence with regard to the gross inventory balance of CleanWorxx as at 31
December 20X1. Disregard the provision for obsolete stock.
[25]
Question 26 LEVEL 2
Inventory
[16 marks]
You are the senior on the audit of Grand Dairy Ltd (Grand Dairy), a company with a September financial year-end.
The dairy, which has five plants across the country, is one of the larger ones in South Africa, and was incorporated
in 2000.
The company, known for its superior quality products, has won several awards at the prestigious SA Dairy
Championships: a testament to the company’s ability to compete with the best in the industry. The company sells a
variety of products: cheeses, milks (long-life and flavoured), yoghurts and butter.
Grand Dairy’s accounting records are fully computerised and include a perpetual inventory module. The
accounting systems installed at the plants are linked to one another via Telkom VPN Professional. The main
accounting and administration functions are handled at head office in Port Elizabeth.
Inventory
In addition to a year-end inventory count, the company performs cyclical counts at all of the plants on the last
Saturday of every month. All differences identified during the counts are recorded on the inventory system, so that
quantities on the system reflect the actual quantities at hand. Accounting policy is to value inventory on the
first-in-first-out (FIFO) method.
The inventory masterfile includes the following information:
Inventory description Milk

Inventory item code MO1Y22
Inventory category Milk
Quantity on hand 1 400 000 litres
Unit cost R6.50 per litre
Selling price R8 per litre
Date inventory was received 30 December
Quantity sold year to date 13 302 342 litres
During the year-end inventory count, no material differences were noted by the audit team.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures that you would perform in order to satisfy yourself regarding the valuation
assertion of inventory of Grand Dairy Ltd at year end.
[16]
Question 27 LEVEL 2
Inventory
[23 marks]
You are an audit manager at Q&Z Inc. and are currently busy with the audit of Dizzy Fizzy Ltd (Dizzy Fizzy) for the
28 February 20XX financial year. Dizzy Fizzy is a wholesale company which buys cold drinks and flavoured
sparkling mineral water from local suppliers, which are then sold by Dizzy Fizzy to retail companies across the
country. The company’s inventory is recorded on the first-in, first-out (FIFO) cost basis.
Dizzy Fizzy makes use of a perpetual inventory system. Regular inventory counts are performed, and the
differences identified as a result of the counts are investigated and corrected. In addition, year-end inventory counts
are performed by the company.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures that the audit team should perform after the inventory count attendance to
obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence regarding the inventory balance reflected in Dizzy Fizzy’s financial
statements at year-end.
[23]
SUGGESTED SOLUTION FOR QUESTION 23

1. Compare the quantities of inventory items on the auditor’s copies of the inventory sheets (obtained during the
inventory count) to the client’s quantities on the inventory records. (1)
2. Recalculate the calculations on the inventory system (e.g. quantity × cost) for each inventory item on each item’s
inventory record and the total of the inventory value in the extension column on the inventory list (adding all the
totals per individual inventory records). (1)
3. Compare the totals as per the individual inventory records to the totals as per the inventory list. (1)
4. Review the inventory list for any negative inventory item values and follow up with management. (1)
5. Compare the total inventory value per the inventory list to the inventory account in the general ledger and on the
trial balance. (1)
6. Select a sample of inventory items on the inventory list and compare the price on the inventory records to the
related suppliers’ invoices. (1)
7. Inspect the selected suppliers’ invoices for any relevant costs (e.g. transportation) that should be included in the
cost of the inventory items. (1)
8. Select a sample of inventory items on the inventory list (or use the same sample that was previously selected) and
obtain the selling price of the selected items from the authorised price list or the most recent sales invoices. (1)
9.
9. Compare the obtained selling prices for the selected inventory items to the cost prices on the selected inventory’s
inventory records. (1)
10. Enquire from management regarding:
a) the process used to determine the inventory obsolescence allowance and evaluate the process for reasonableness
and consistency with prior years (1)
b) the procedures in place for the approval of the final inventory obsolescence allowance (1)
c) any specific events which may have occurred during the year which may have an impact on the allowance (1)
d) any specific inventory items which may already be obsolete (or soon will be) and how this has been recognised
in calculating the allowance for inventory obsolescence. (1)
11. Perform analytical procedures to confirm the reasonableness of the inventory obsolescence allowance (e.g. by
comparison of current year figures and/or ratios to prior year figures/ratios). For example:
a) compare the current year’s inventory obsolescence allowance to the previous year’s (1)
b) compare the inventory obsolescence allowance as a percentage of total inventory for this year to that of the
previous year. (1)
12. Enquire from management regarding indicators of inventory obsolescence problems such as no recent sales or
purchases of particular items, products which have reached their sell by dates in the post-reporting period, or
correspondence relating to inferior products supplied to customers. (1)
13. Compare the inventory obsolescence allowances raised in prior years to the actual write-offs in subsequent years.
14. Inspect the inventory obsolescence allowance for the inclusion of the inventory items that were identified as (1)
damaged/obsolete/slow moving during the attendance and test count at the year-end inventory count as per the
audit working papers. (1)
15. Recalculate the inventory obsolescence allowance and compare to the amount calculated by management. (1)

1. Obtain a listing of inventory of goods in transit at the financial year-end and enquire from management or inspect
the relevant orders/contracts to determine whether ownership has passed to the Dizzy Fizzy. (1)
2. Inspect minutes of directors meetings and bank confirmations to establish whether inventory is in any way
encumbered (e.g. offered as security). (1)
Presentation
Inspect the financial statements as well as the notes to the financial statements for the following:
1. Inventory is a separate line item under current assets on the face of the statement of financial position and is
shown net of impairments. (1)
2. The disclosure in the notes reflects inventories before and after the inventory impairment allowances. (1)
General
1. Obtain a management representation letter addressing the existence, completeness, accuracy, valuation and
allocation, classification, rights and obligations, and presentation assertions of the inventory balance as at
year-end. (1)
2. Perform analytical procedures and obtain supporting documentation for any material fluctuations, for example:
a) current year’s inventory at year-end to prior years (1)
b) inventory as a percentage of current assets at year end to prior years. (1)
3. Scrutinise the inventory records and the inventory control account in the general ledger for any abnormal entries
and confirm any material adjusting entries with supporting documentation. (1)
Question 28 LEVEL 3
Inventory
[15 marks]
You are an audit manager at Q&Z Inc. and are currently busy with the audit of Dizzy Fizzy Ltd (Dizzy Fizzy) for the
28 February 20XX financial year. Dizzy Fizzy is a wholesale company which buys cold drinks and flavoured
sparkling mineral water from both local and overseas suppliers, which are then sold by Dizzy Fizzy to retail
companies across the country. The company’s inventory is recorded on the FIFO cost basis.
Dizzy Fizzy makes use of a perpetual inventory system. Regular inventory counts are performed and the
differences identified as a result of the counts are investigated and corrected. In addition, year-end inventory counts
are performed by the company.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the substantive procedures that the audit team should perform during the attendance of Dizzy Fizzy’s
year-end inventory count which will assist them in obtaining sufficient and appropriate audit evidence regarding
the inventory balance reflected in Dizzy Fizzy’s financial statements at year-end. (5)
2. Describe the substantive procedures that the audit team should perform to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit
evidence regarding the accuracy, valuation and allocation of the inventory balance reflected in Dizzy Fizzy’s
financial statements at year-end. Exclude any procedures dealing with the inventory obsolescence allowance from
your answer. (10)
[15]
Question 29 LEVEL 2
Property, plant and equipment
[20 marks]
You are the auditor of Fitness Extreme (Pty) Ltd (Fitness Extreme), a company that was launched 15 years ago with
10 branches across South Africa. Since then, a further 35 branches have been opened, making it the second largest
fitness club in the country.
The company’s head office is in Sandton, Johannesburg, where the account system, which runs on a LAN, is
housed. Fitness Extreme has a March year-end.
Each branch is run as a profit centre, with branch managers being held accountable if profit targets are not
achieved.
Fitness Extreme has the following categories of property, plant and equipment (PPE):
Buildings
Training equipment
Computer hardware
Office furniture
Asset procurement process

The branch manager completes and submits a budget to the chief financial officer at head office by no later than 31
January. The board of directors reviews the budget and authorises it at a board meeting held in the last week of
February each year.
An asset requisition is completed by the branch manager electronically, after which the financial manager at
head office receives notification of the request to purchase. He logs onto the budget masterfile in order to determine
if the request was approved by the board of directors in February. In the event of it having been approved, the
financial manager approves the requisition, whereupon the buyer receives notification to place an order for the asset
required. In the event that the asset was not originally budgeted for, the branch manager needs to motivate why it
was not and reallocate funds from an asset previously budgeted for. The chief financial officer has the authority to
authorise a reallocation up to an amount of R150 000.
After the branch manager has scanned the original goods received note into the system, he couriers the original
document to head office, where the asset will be loaded onto the system.
The training equipment masterfile contains the following fields:
Asset description Treadmill ADZ 350

Asset number 45693
Branch code KznBell
Original cost R28 000
Date of purchase 14 Jan XXXX
Date of disposal Not applicable
Depreciation method Straight line (25% per annum)
Current year depreciation Rand amount
Accumulated depreciation Rand amount
Carrying value Rand amount
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures you will perform in respect of property, plant and equipment at year-end.
Disregard depreciation and impairment of assets procedures.
[20]
1. Valuation
Cost
a) Compare the opening balances for each category of property, plant and equipment (PPE) to the previous year’s
working papers and fixed asset register. (1)
b) Re-perform a sample of calculations of the carrying value field for all PPE categories. (1)
c) Agree the total of the lead schedule per the PPE category to the closing balance in the fixed asset register. (1)
2. Additions
a) Occurrence and completeness
i) Stratify the asset accounts (the land and buildings, the training equipment, the computer hardware and the
office equipment) per region (e.g. per branch name or the branch with the most valuable PPE assets).
Having done so, select a sample and agree the assets purchased to the minutes of the board of directors
meeting and capital budget for evidence of the authorisation to acquire the asset selected for testing. (1)
ii) Inspect the purchase contract in order to confirm that the contract or the invoice is made out to Fitness
Extreme, and (1)
that it matches the detail of the asset selected in the sample (asset number, erf number, description, etc.).
iii) Agree the new assets on the insurance document of the client to the list of the additions prepared by (1)
management. (1)
b) Accuracy
i) Confirm that the amount posted to the relevant asset account excludes VAT, and that it agrees with the
purchase price reflected on the contract or the invoice and the fixed asset register. (1)
ii) Recalculate the calculations and any applicable discounts on the invoices or the contracts. (1)
3.
3. Disposals
a) Occurrence and completeness
i) Obtain confirmation from Fitness Extreme’s insurers of all the assets that have been removed from the list of
those assets insured during the course of the year and compare this to the list of disposals. (1)
ii) Scrutinise any assets that:
have a date of purchase exceeding the original useful life of the asset category (e.g. if treadmills have a
three-year life-span, search for a treadmill that still appears on the asset register six years after the date
of purchase)
do not have disposal dates.
If any are found, follow up on them. (1)

iii) Inspect the date of disposal field for any disposal dates during the current financial year. Compare these to
the list of disposals prepared by the client. (1)
iv) Review the minutes of the board of directors meeting for all the disposals that were authorised during the
course of the year and compare them to the list of disposals in the asset register. Follow up on any
discrepancies. (1)
b) Accuracy
i) Confirm that the amount posted to the relevant asset account agrees with the sales price reflected on the
contract or the invoice. (1)
ii) Recalculate the profit or loss on the sale and compare this to the general ledger account regarding profit or
losses on disposals. (1)
iii) Scrutinise the fixed asset account for the month immediately following the sale of the asset in order to
determine whether or not the asset has been correctly removed from the fixed asset register. (1)
4. General
a) Using general audit software, scan each of the masterfiles on PPE owned by Fitness Extreme for:
blank or missing fields (asset number, asset description, etc.)
duplicated asset numbers
negative carrying values. (2)
b) Inspect the asset accounts for any repairs and maintenance expenses incorrectly capitalised. (1)
c) Confirm that the accounting policy used with regard to PPE is consistent with that of the previous year. (1)
5. Existence
Physically inspect a sample of high-value items in the fixed asset register, noting their condition for testing
reasonableness of carrying value of the asset. (1)
6. Rights
a) Inspect that all invoices for new additions are made out in the name of Fitness Extreme. (1)
b) Obtain a certificate from the bank in order to identify assets pledged as security. If there are any, they must be
disclosed in the financial statements. (1)
7. Disclosure
Inspect the correct disclosure of PPE in all financial statements, including accounting policies and notes. (1)
Question 30 LEVEL 3
Investment property
[14 marks]
You are an audit manager assigned to the audit of HighRise (Pty) Ltd (HighRise) for its 20X1 financial year.
HighRise operates in the real estate sector. It owns several residential apartment buildings as well as commercial
office complexes that it rents out to tenants under operating leases. (The company refers to these properties as its
‘rental properties’.)
During a recent discussion about how HighRise accounts for its properties, the company’s chief executive officer
made the following statement to you:
HighRise accounts for its rental properties as investment properties in terms of IAS 40. In addition, we use
the fair value model to measure these assets subsequent to initial recognition. During the 20X1 financial
year, the company was faced with the following two matters in regard to its properties:
1. We moved HighRise’s administrative headquarters to one of the office complexes which the company
rented out up to that point. All tenants who occupied the complex were given the legal notice period to
vacate the premises after which HighRise moved in. The board of HighRise decided to continue
accounting for this property as ‘investment property’ for 20X1, because we think it is still a very good
investment despite the change in the nature of the occupancy!
2. One of the company’s residential buildings, located in Milnerton, Cape Town, was identified as having
the potential to be sold, at a good profit, in the next year or two. We decided rather to account for this
property on the cost model in the 20X1 financial year and going forward, until it is sold.
You have been provided with a list of properties that make up the total investment property balance of R145 800 000
disclosed in the 20X1 financial statements of HighRise. The list contains seven properties, indicating the registered
erf number and address of each. It also includes the above two properties mentioned by the CEO.
Audit procedures have already been performed on the opening balance of investment properties, while the
closing balance as per the above list has been agreed to the general ledger account for investment properties, the trial
balance and financial statements.
REQUIRED
1. State whether you agree or disagree with the CEO regarding the accounting treatment of the two matters
pertaining to the head office and Milnerton properties and explain your answer. (5)
2. Describe the additional substantive audit procedures that should be carried out to test the existence, rights and
obligations and completeness assertions relating to the investment property balance of R145 800 000 disclosed in
the 20X1 annual financial statements of HighRise. Ignore procedures to test the presentation assertion and related
disclosures. (9)
[14]
1.
a) I do not agree with the CEO on either of the matters. (1)
b) HighRise cannot continue accounting for its head office as an investment property as it does not comply with
the definition of ‘investment property’ in terms of IAS 40 anymore. (1)
As the property has become ‘owner occupied’, it should now be accounted in terms of IAS 16 Property Plant
and Equipment. (1)
The CEO seems to be under the impression that ‘investment property’ means that a property is a ‘good
investment’; however, this is a misinterpretation, as the term ‘investment property’ for accounting purposes has
a specific meaning in terms of IAS 40.8 and does not describe an economic investment. (1)
c) HighRise will not be able to account for the Milnerton property in terms of the cost model, as IAS 40 makes it
clear that one valuation model should be adopted for all investment properties. (1)
IAS 40 further notes that it is ‘highly unlikely’ that a change from the fair value model to the cost model will
result in more appropriate presentation. (1)
2. Additional substantive procedures
Existence
a) Obtain from management the list of investment properties making up the total balance in the financial
statements and physically inspect each property for existence. Note: (1) depending on physical inspections in
prior years, a sample may be selected; however, all new investment properties to be inspected at a minimum;
(2) the head office will be tested under IAS 16 procedures. (1)
b) Inspect the bank statement and cash book for evidence of large receipts of funds which could indicate that an
investment property might have been sold during the year and therefore should have been derecognised as an
asset. (1)

c) For all properties on the list, request the title deeds from the deeds office and inspect each deed for evidence that
the property is registered in the name of HighRise and that the erf number, property description and address
agree with that on the list. (2)
d) Through inspection of the property’s title deed, minutes of the board meetings, correspondence documents with
financial institutions and enquiry with management, verify that no encumbrances or mortgages exist over the
properties. (1)
Where mortgages exist by means of long-term borrowings, inspect loan statements from financial institutions
to ensure HighRise is not behind on any instalment payments. (1)
e) Request the rental agreements for each investment property on the list and ensure the landlord (owner) is
stipulated as HighRise. (1)
Completeness
f) Through enquiry with management, verify that no other investment properties should have been recorded that
are not on the list (e.g. property acquisitions). (1)
Inspect rental expense accounts to identify properties rented by HighRise under an operating lease which may
comply with the definition of investment property and ensure these have been disclosed as investment
properties accordingly (IAS 40.6). (1)
g) Request a schedule of properties from the deeds office registered in HighRise’s name and agree each property
on the schedule that qualifies as an investment property to the list of investment properties provided by
management. (1)
h) Compare the current year list provided by management to the prior year working papers on investment
properties and obtain reasons for any properties which appear in the prior year working papers, but not on the
current year’s list. (1)
Question 31 LEVEL 3
[18 marks]
You are a trainee accountant assigned to the audit of Bastion City College Ltd (BCC). The financial year being
audited ends 31 October 20X1 and you have been allocated the task of auditing the balance relating to vehicle assets
as disclosed in BCC’s financial statements.
BCC is a large private institution that offers tertiary education to several thousand students across three campuses
located in the province of Gauteng. BCC has a fleet of vehicles it owns, used for various purposes, including staff
and student transport, security services, maintenance, official travel, etc. The balance for vehicle assets, included in
property, plant and equipment, is reflected in the trial balance as at year-end as follows:
20X1 20X0
Vehicles R10 750 000 R12 500 000
During the 20X1 financial year, the company acquired three new minibuses, each at a cost of R450 000, utilised for
transporting students between certain pick-up locations in cities and its campuses. At year-end, BCC owned 40
vehicles in total that are recorded in a fixed asset register which provides details of each vehicle, including
registration and licensing numbers, descriptions, acquisition and disposal dates, accounting values, etc. According to
BCC’s financial manager, there were no disposals of vehicles during the year of which he is aware.
BCC makes use of AutoSure, an insurance company specialising in providing insurance for corporate vehicle
fleets.
Each campus has a facilities management complex where vehicles are cleaned and kept and from where they are
signed out by staff authorised to make use of BCC-subsidised transport. At any given point in time, some vehicles
might not be on any particular campus (e.g. they have been signed out and are located off-campus).
Some vehicles may also be off-campus at vehicle servicing and repair shops, undergoing routine maintenance, or
having faults that have been discovered, or being repaired after an accident. According to a report by the main
campus’s facilities manager, who oversees all facilities management complexes, one vehicle sustained severe
damage in an accident during the 20X1 financial year, but is still listed on the fixed asset register. The manager
confirmed that the accident was reported to AutoSure and that a response from the insurer was sent to the finance
department.
According to BCC’s accounting policy disclosed in its prior year audited financial statements, it accounts for all
its assets on the cost model. Carrying value is arrived at by subtracting amortisation (at 20% straight-line per year)
and any impairment losses.
The following substantive audit procedures have already been performed:

Agree the opening balance for vehicles in the general ledger to the opening balance as per the fixed asset register
and the prior year audit working papers (‘lead schedule’).
Recalculate the general ledger account for vehicles.
Obtain a written representation from management in which they confirm the existence, rights and obligations,
completeness and accuracy, valuation and allocation assertions for vehicles.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that should be performed to verify the fair presentation of the balance
relating to vehicle assets included in property, plant and equipment in the financial statements of Bastion City
College Ltd. Ignore the following in your answer:
Testing of the presentation assertion and disclosures relating to all other assertions
Tax effects
The use of computer-assisted audit techniques
Procedures already performed
[18]
Existence of vehicles and occurrence and cut-off of purchase transaction for new vehicles
1. For a sample of vehicles selected from the fixed asset register, physically inspect the vehicles for existence. (1)
Include the three new minibus vehicles in the sample. (½)
During physical inspection, for each vehicle, agree the VIN (vehicle identification number) and licence
plate number as per the fixed asset register to the numbering on the vehicle itself. (1)
Note: the VIN is usually visible where it is embedded in the dashboard towards the bottom of the
windscreen, whereas the licence plate number should also be confirmed on the licence disc attached to the inner
side of the windscreen.
For vehicles selected that are off-campus on the day the test is performed, request management to arrange for the
vehicles to be available on a particular day when the inspection will be finalised. (1)
2. For the three new minibus vehicles, obtain the purchase documentation (invoice(s) from supplier of the vehicles)
and verify that:
2.
a) the buyer is BCC (occurrence) (½)

b) the invoices are dated within the 20X1 financial year (tests cut-off). (1)
3. Inspect the cash book for large receipts from vehicles sold and correspondence with AutoSure of vehicles written
off/stolen and, if any, verify through inspection of the fixed asset register that these vehicles are shown at zero
carrying value at year-end. (1)

1. For the sample of existing vehicles selected above, inspect their licence renewal documentation to verify that the
assets are still registered in the name of BCC. (1)
For the three new minibuses, inspect their registration documents (original licensing documentation) to
verify the vehicles are registered in the name of BCC. (1)
2. Inspect correspondence from financial institutions from which BCC borrows money (if any), minutes of board
meetings and minutes of the capital acquisitions committee for indications that any vehicle assets might be
encumbered or have been offered as security. (1)
Accuracy, valuation and allocation of vehicles and accuracy and classification of transactions for new vehicles
Cost
1. Inspect the purchase documentation relating to the three new minibuses and to ensure that:
a) the cost of each vehicle is R450 000 (1)
b) any additional costs relating to the purchase of the vehicles that can be capitalised have been included in the
cost (e.g. delivery charges, sales fees, etc.) (1)
c) the total cost of each vehicle has been correctly transferred to the general ledger account for vehicles/PPE. (1)
Carrying values
1. Recalculate the fixed asset register for vehicles by subtracting depreciation and impairment losses from opening
carrying value, in order to arrive at closing carrying value and re-perform all castings. (1)
Depreciation and impairment losses

1. Recalculate the depreciation charge for each vehicle (a sample could also be considered) by applying 20% to the
cost of the vehicles as per the fixed asset register. (1)
For vehicles purchased or sold during the year, apportion the depreciation calculation based on the number
of months the asset was in use by BCC. (1)
2. For the three vehicles that are in for repairs at the ‘shop’, inspect maintenance records for any indication of
possible impairment and follow up on this procedure by discussing with management the necessity to impair the
assets if applicable. (1)
3. For the vehicle that was damaged in an accident, inspect the correspondence from the insurer (AutoSure) to verify
whether it has certified the vehicle as ‘written off’ or repairable. (1)
If a ‘write-off’, request management to remove the vehicle from the accounting records or, if repairable,
discuss with management the need for impairment of the asset. (1)
4. Enquire with management whether they have reviewed the useful lives and residual values of all vehicles and
inspect that there have not been any changes in the accounting policy for vehicles. (1)
5. During physical inspection of vehicles across the three campuses, note any indication of possible damage to
vehicles or vehicles which appear not to be in working condition and, if any, discuss with management the
necessity for impairment. (1)
Completeness
1. Inspect the latest list of insured vehicles received by BCC form AutoSure and agree all vehicles on the list to the
fixed asset register to verify the register is complete. (1)
2. Enquire from the facilities manager and client staff assigned to assist the auditor with physical inspection of
vehicles whether they are aware of any other vehicles which might not be on the campuses at the time of physical
inspection and which are not in the fixed asset register. (1)
Question 32 LEVEL 3
Intangible asset
[10 marks]
You are the trainee accountant assigned to the audit of Veripoint (Pty) Ltd’s financial statements and have been
tasked with the audit of its intangible asset balance. Veripoint (Pty) Ltd (Veripoint) is an importer of electronic
‘gadgets’, security systems and remote-controlled toys. It sells its products through Veripoint outlets located in malls
throughout the country. The company’s year-end is 31 December 20X1.
On occasion, Veripoint also buys patents that describe ‘high-tech’ gadgets destined for future release onto the
market. The latest patent that Veripoint acquired during the current financial year documents a new invention for a
sophisticated ‘security drone’ used with alarm systems. This drone can automatically proceed along a
pre-programmed path of a building’s perimeter towards the area where motion has been detected by the alarm
system, taking video footage as it proceeds. The patent was bought from an American company specialising in
product design and development. The total purchase price was $150 000, or R2 100 000, and the patent was
registered in the name of Veripoint on 1 July 20X1. The patent has an expected useful life of 10 years.
At year-end, Veripoint disclosed the above security drone patent as an intangible asset at R1 995 000 in its
financial statements, after having expensed the appropriate amortisation. The accounting policy of the company
indicates that intangible assets are measured using the cost model.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures necessary to test the transaction relating to the acquisition by Veripoint in
the current financial year of the security drone patent.
[10]
This answer is limited to the acquisition of the intangible asset only, not the audit procedures at year-end on the
balance.
1. Inspect the minutes of the board meeting where the decision was taken to acquire the security drone patent and
verify that the board authorised its acquisition. (1)
2. Inspect the sales agreement between Veripoint and the American company which sold it the patent for evidence
that:
a) the buyer is Veripoint (½)
b) the purchase price is $150 000 (½)
c) the date of transfer of ownership is 1 July 20X1 (½)
d) both parties’ representative signed the contract. (½)
3. Inspect the letters patent (the legal document evidencing the registration of the patent) to ensure it has been
registered in the name of Veripoint (Pty) Ltd, effective 1 July 20X1. (1)
4. Obtain in the financial media the rand:dollar exchange rate applicable on 1 July 20X1 to verify that the correct
exchange rate (R14) was used in the calculation of the rand value of the patent. (1)
Recalculate the conversion of the purchase price of R2 100 000 ($150 000 × R14). (1)
5. Inspect the minutes of the board meeting (or sales agreement) for an indication that the expected useful life of the
patent is 10 years and discuss with management the reasonability of this assumption. (1)
Recalculate the amortisation expense of R105 000 (R2 100 000 over 10 years, apportioned for six months in
20X1 since its acquisition). (1)
6. Enquire from management whether there has been any change at year-end in the future economic benefits
6.
expected from the patent, which may necessitate an impairment charge. (1)
7. Corroborate management’s answer with a prepared discounted cash flow forecast to verify that future benefit will
exceed amount capitalised as at year-end.
8. Inspect that items appearing on discounted cash flow forecast with supporting evidence, for example sales with
future sale forecasts, expenses taking inflation into account, etc. (2)
9. Obtain from management a written representation letter on the occurrence, accuracy, classification and cut-off
assertions pertaining to the acquisition of the security drone patent. Transactions and events assertions are
confirmed, as a transaction is tested instead of a balance. (1)
Question 33 LEVEL 3
[24 marks]
You recently qualified as a CA(SA) and accepted full-time employment at Patagonia CA(SA) Inc. Patagonia
CA(SA) Inc. has been the auditor of Ice CAPS (Pty) Ltd (Ice CAPS). Ice CAPS consists of a group of companies
that imports bottled water harvested from the glaciers in the Patagonia Mountains in Argentina, near Ushuaia. These
bottles are then resold to supermarkets across South Africa.
During the course of the previous financial year, Ice CAPS launched a new line of flavoured water. Ice CAPS
used a previously dormant company in the group to house the production. The only asset on the dormant company’s
statement of financial position at the beginning of the financial year was land and buildings purchased 10 years ago.
In order to add the flavour to the water, Ice CAPS purchased two machines. One machine was purchased locally
from a registered VAT vendor and the other imported from Ushuaia for Argentinian pesos.
In terms of the group policy, land and buildings that are in use should be revalued annually by independent
experts, while other assets are depreciated over their economic useful life on the straight-line method, depending on
the class of the asset. Expected residual values are taken into account in determining the depreciable values of assets.
Patagonia CA(SA) Inc. makes use of its own independent, suitably qualified expert to determine the value and the
residual value of assets.
REQUIRED
Formulate the substantive procedures that you will perform relating to property, plant and equipment of the dormant
company owned by Ice CAPS. You are not required to address substantive analytical procedures, nor procedures
relating to the disclosure and presentation assertion.
[24]
Question 34 LEVEL 3
Goodwill
[22 marks]
You are the auditor of Global Furniture Ltd (GB), a large listed entity. The company’s year-end is 30 September.
You have been the auditor of GB for the last three years.
Over more than a few decades, GB has developed into a global retailer that provides everyday household
products at affordable prices, serving customers at their convenience. GB aims to be the number one retailer of
choice for household goods for quality and value, with more than 8 500 stores in more than 22 countries. To achieve
this, various subsidiaries were acquired during the previous few years. Two loss-making subsidiaries were also sold
during the current year. To obtain finance for these acquisitions, numerous shares were issued during the last five
years. GB disclosed R85 million goodwill at year-end, that was all related to acquisition cost when subsidiaries were
acquired all over the world. GB’s main objective is to provide everyday products at discount prices.
From big box destination stores, to store-in-store concepts, to focused speciality stores, GB’s goal is to make
shopping as easy and convenient as possible. Customers can view, experience and buy in ways that are most
convenient to them. Shopping can be done in-store or online, with purchases being delivered to homes, or collected
in-store via click-and-collect.
To support the retail stores and ultimately provide the best shopping experience to customers, GB has a
well-established supply chain in place. This means that various specialist group divisions ensure that the final
product is provided at the best quality and price. These divisions control or manage everything from raw material
sourcing, manufacturing and product sourcing to shipping and delivery. Owning or managing these activities not
only enhances the group’s ability to deliver, but also benefits the customer in terms of providing products at
affordable price points.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures you would perform to gather sufficient appropriate evidence regarding the R85
million goodwill amount in the consolidated accounts of GB.
[22]
Opening balance
1. Agree opening balance to prior year working paper. (1)
Current year
Valuation
Impairments made in the current year by management:
1. Recalculate all impairments made by management in the current year. (1)
2. Inspect cash flows and other documentation (e.g. budgets, marketing reports) to verify their impairments made.
(1)
Audit of impairments:
1. Inspect working paper of goodwill that all possible impairments have been calculated:
a) Inspect discounted cash flows of every division/subsidiary to verify that future benefits/profits will exceed
amount capitalised at year-end. (1)
b) Agree discount rate used to that used on popular sites like Moneyweb and to rates used on other audits where
discounted cash flows were used. Also obtain rates used by merchant banks which are involved with takeovers
and mergers. (1)
c) Inspect marketing reports of every division/subsidiary to verify that revenue stated in cash flows is achievable.
d) Inspect current year’s budgets regarding expenses of every division/subsidiary to verify that expenses (1)
adjusted for inflation stated in cash flows are achievable. (1)
e) Enquire from divisional managers and perusing operating reports the reasonableness of the assumptions made in
the cash flows. (1)
f) If a division/subsidiary is continuously making a loss, its goodwill should be impaired. (2)
g) If future profits of a division/subsidiary do not exceed the amount capitalised at period end, calculate the
amount that needs to be impaired. (1)
h) Discuss your possible additional impairments with the audit committee since there might be other factors that
you did not consider. (1)
i) After your discussion, calculate final impairments that need to be made. If management is not prepared to adjust,
take differences to overs/unders schedule. (1)
j) Scrutinise that GB is not trying to write back goodwill which was previously impaired since this is not allowed.
(1)
Additions
1. Inspect contracts for any new subsidiaries acquired in the current period and recalculate goodwill on purchase
date. (2)
2. Inspect management’s goodwill calculation and compare this to your calculation made in 8 above. Discuss any
variances with CFO. (1)
Disposals
1. Inspect contracts for any disposals of subsidiaries in the current period. (1)
2. Inspect that all goodwill amounts relating to disposals have been removed in the general ledger account. (1)
3. Inspect minutes for board approval for any disposals. (1)
Rights
1. Inspect shareholders’ registers and minutes of board meetings that GB does hold substantive rights to control all
the subsidiaries where goodwill was calculated. (1)
Completeness
1. Compare this year’s goodwill working paper that you prepared to that of last year to verify any goodwill that
might have been left out. (1)
2. Write to the legal advisors and merchant banks regarding any new or any disposal of subsidiaries/divisions that
needs to be taken into account. (1)
General
1. Obtain a management representation letter regarding the valuation of all goodwill. (1)
2. Agree the balance of the goodwill as calculated on your working paper to the amount disclosed as goodwill in the
statement of financial position as at year-end. (1)
Disclosure
1. Inspect that goodwill has been properly disclosed in the statement of financial position under non-current assets.
2. Inspect that a note shows all the movements in the goodwill amount for the 12 months ended (IFRS 3 – par. (1)
B67). (1)
Question 35 LEVEL 3
Loans
[10 marks]
You are the auditor of Hip & Hap (Pty) Ltd, a company that sells a wide range of clothing from its stores located in
shopping malls around the country. The company has a December year-end.
The company’s majority shareholder is Mr Hip, the founder of the company, who owns 51% of the company.
The remaining 49% is owned by 37 other shareholders.
In order to fund the expansion plans of the company, the following two loans were made during the course of the
year (the schedule was prepared by Mr Jones, the financial manager):
DESCRIPTION LOAN NUMBER RAND
Foreign loan 1 R10 664 202.25
Loan from Industrial Development Corporation 2 R9 796 084.68
Loan balance as disclosed in the financial statements R20 460 286.93
Loan 1
The company obtained a loan from Mr Hip’s uncle in London to the amount of £500 000 on 1 July of the current
year. The loan is repayable over a period of five years with equal monthly instalments at an interest rate of 1%.
The rand:pound exchange rate at the initiation date of the loan was R20.50:£1.
The loan was therefore recognised in the accounting records at R10 250 000 on 1 July.
The balance on the loan at 31 December was £459 663.89.
The rand:pound exchange rate at 31 December was R23.20:£1.
The balance of the loan is therefore stated at R10 664 202.25 on 31 December in the financial statements.
Loan 2
The company obtained a loan of R10 million from the Industrial Development Corporation on 1 August of the
current year. The loan is repayable over a period of seven years with equal monthly instalments at an interest rate of
prime + 3%.
The ruling prime lending rate at the time of taking out the loan was 9.5% and it has remained unchanged at year-end.
The balance of the loan is therefore stated at R9 796 084.68 on 31 December in the financial statements.
General
Both loans are loaded into the loan system by Mrs Naicker, the accountant, who uses her unique user ID and
password to gain access to the loan system. The system automatically calculates the interest charged on the loan
using the detail loaded onto the system, which is based on the terms located in the loan contracts.
Payment is made via EFT into the bank accounts stated on the contracts.
Mrs Naicker processed a manual journal entry at the end of the financial year to take into account the foreign
exchange loss made on the first loan as a result of the rand depreciating in value.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures that you would perform on both loans at year-end.
[10]
Question 36 LEVEL 3
Long-term borrowings
[20 marks]
You are a trainee accountant employed by an audit firm and have been assigned to the audit of Letsatsi Printing
(Pty) Ltd (Letsatsi) for its financial year ended 31 October 20X1. Letsatsi owns several premises throughout South
Africa from where it provides printing and copying services to government departments and schools. In order to
fund its properties, Letsatsi makes use of loans it acquires from various financing institutions. In this respect,
mortgages (long-term borrowings) exist over all its properties.
You are in the process of auditing Letsatsi’s long-term borrowings, disclosed under liabilities in its 20X1 annual
financial statements. Management provided you with a list of what the year-end balance of R12 340 000 for
long-term borrowings comprises:
R R
Provider of loan Note 20X1 20X0
Samatra Mutual 1 4 500 000 -

African Investments Inc. 2 990 000 3 100 000
Easbank Financiers 3 650 000 4 200 000
Gerald Dean 2 1 200 000 1 200 000
Second National Bank 3 - 3 500 000
Topstarr Holdings 3 - 1 950 000
12 340 000 13 950 000
Notes:
1. The loan from Samatra Mutual was obtained during the 20X1 financial year in order to fund a newly acquired
property.
2. The account for the loan from Gerald Dean did not show any movement during the year. Gerald Dean is the chief
executive officer of Letsatsi. The financial manager indicated that there is no written loan agreement for this
amount and that it was provided by Dean based on a verbal agreement between him and Letsatsi.
3. Both loans from Second National Bank and Topstarr Holdings were settled in full during the 20X1 financial year.
REQUIRED
1. Explain why, in general, it may be challenging for an auditor to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence
regarding the completeness assertion for long-term borrowings. (4)
2. Describe the substantive audit procedures that should be performed to verify the fair presentation of long-term
borrowings as disclosed in the annual financial statements of Letsatsi. Assume the nominal and effective interest
rates of each loan are the same. Exclude from your answer:
procedures relating to the testing of opening balances
analytical procedures. (16)
[20]
1.
a) Management may have an incentive to keep long-term borrowings off the statement of financial position in
order for the financial statements to reflect a stronger net asset position. (1)
They may therefore engage in active manipulation of the long-term borrowings balance by attempting to hide
some loans from the auditor. (1)
Because the direction of testing for the completeness assertion generally is from supporting
documentation to the financial records, the hiding of evidence will result in the auditor finding it particularly
challenging to test for completeness of long-term borrowings. (1)
b) The non-recording of loans may encompass error rather than fraud: there is the possibility that management
might not be aware of all the company’s long-term borrowings and, as a result, the loans do not all get
recorded. (1)
Where a company’s system of internal control fails to identify long-term borrowings or misidentifies them as
not being long-term borrowings, the possibility exists that not all loans are recorded. (1)
2. Substantive audit procedures
Existence and rights and obligations

a) For the newly obtained loan on the list of long-term borrowings (from Samatra Mutual), obtain the underlying
loan agreement between Letsatsi and the provider of the loan. Inspect each loan agreement for: (1)
i) the parties to the loan and signatures of each party’s representative (½)
ii) the initial loan amount and repayment details (½)
iii) interest rate and any special clauses that may affect the rate (½)
iv) loan period, including final repayment date. (½)
Inspect the company’s memorandum of incorporation to ensure the board has the authority to obtain new loans
and that they have not exceeded the company’s borrowing powers by obtaining the loan from Samatra Mutual.
Inspect the bank statement for the month when the loan was received to verify receipt of the R4.5 million (1)
in funding. (1)
b) Obtain the original loan agreements between Letstatsi and the financial institution for each loan not yet settled
at year-end and verify that the agreement is in the name of Letsatsi as borrower of the loan.
Note: The extent of this procedure will depend on the audit evidence obtained for long-term borrowings on
previous years’ audits and the risk of material misstatement. (1)
c) Consider the need to request positive confirmations from all the providers of the loans on the list to verify the
outstanding balance and to confirm that the provider has made the loan to Letsatsi. Also addresses the
accuracy, valuation and allocation assertion. (1)
Request from the CEO, Gerald Dean, a written confirmation that he has provided a loan to Letsatsi, in addition
to the amount outstanding, requesting any additional information on repayment terms, etc. (1)

d) For each loan, obtain the latest loan statement (will likely have been sent by the provider to Letsatsi) and agree
the outstanding balance as per the statement to the year-end balance recorded by Letsatsi on the list. (1)
Note: Where loan statements do not cover the month of October 20X1 (i.e. year-end statements will only be
received after the audit procedures are performed), obtain a direct confirmation from the lender.
e) Request from management an amortisation schedule (or draw up amortisation schedules) for each long-term
loan and recalculate the year-end balance with reference to the particulars of the loan as per the latest loan
statement from the financial institution. (1)
Follow the amount through from the recalculated amortisation schedule to the list of long-term borrowings
obtained from management. (1)
Agree the total (year-end balance) of the loans on the list to the corresponding account in the general
ledger account and the trial balance. (1)
Completeness
f) Inspect the minutes of the board meetings and if applicable, capital acquisitions committee as well as the fixed
asset register, for indications of new properties bought during the year and any decision taken on the source of
funding of the asset. (1)
Note: Since the company finances all properties with long-term borrowings, each property likely will have a
corresponding loan.
g) Inspect the general ledger account for interest paid on long-term loans and reconcile all interest to a
corresponding loan on the list of long-term borrowings. (1)
h) Inspect the bank statements for the year and cash book for indications of large amounts of funding received,
discuss the nature of these receipts with management and agree the receipts to the list of long-term borrowings
(new loans obtained). (1)
i) Compare the prior financial period’s list of long-term borrowings with the current year’s list to ensure that all
loans have been included in the current year, except where settled in 20X1. (1)
Presentation and disclosure

j) Inspect the (draft) financial statements of Letsatsi to ensure that management has disclosed the short-term
portion of the loans under current liabilities. (1)
With reference to the amortisation schedules used above, recalculate the short-term portion of each loan,
consisting of the outstanding capital amount repayable within 12 months from year-end. (1)
k) Inspect the notes to the financial statements for evidence that management has disclosed the details of security
(properties) provided for loans. (1)
General
l) Obtain a written representation from management in which they confirm the existence, rights and obligations,
accuracy, valuation and allocation, completeness and presentation assertions regarding Letsatsi’s long-term
borrowings included in the company’s 20X1 financial statements. (1)
Question 37 LEVEL 3
Loans
[22 marks]
One of your audit clients is experiencing financial difficulties. You are the engagement partner on this audit. During
the course of the previous financial year, the company which you now have to audit took out a R5 million long-term
loan with Zero Bank to ease its short-term cash flow burden. The loan bears interest at prime minus two basis points
per annum and is repayable in 20 equal instalments of which the first is payable three months after year-end. The full
loan amount received was used to settle some of its overdue short-term debts and purchase much needed inventory.
The audit client has no other long-term liabilities, however in a discussion, the chief financial accountant
informed you that the company is in the process of obtaining additional financing in the form of other long-term
loans from external parties, while also making arrangements with Zero Bank and current trade creditors on extended
repayment terms. Management is also trying to convince debt suppliers to grant the company a debt holiday so that
the company can trade out of its current financial difficulties. Debt suppliers will then be required to sign
subordination agreements regarding debt amounts that do not have to be paid till the company is once again
financially secure. Management is prepared to give certain of its assets as security to debt suppliers.
REQUIRED
1. Formulate the substantive procedures your audit team have to perform in respect of the long-term loan as at
year-end. (11)
2. Describe the additional audit procedures you would perform in order to substantiate management’s statements
relating to the additional financing arrangements. Do not address any Companies Act requirements. (11)
[22]
Question 38 LEVEL 3
Interest paid/debentures
[25 marks]
You have recently been promoted to audit manager at the auditing firm Brazil Inc. You are excited because the
promotion comes with an office with a lovely view. You are busy planning the year-end external audit of Rio (Pty)
Ltd (Rio). Rio imports parrots from South America to be sold as pets in South Africa.
During the middle of the financial year, Rio sold three of its delivery vehicles for R1 800 000. The CEO wanted
to use the funds to expand inventory of parrots, however the financial director heard of a good investment
opportunity. Rather than use the proceeds from the sale of the delivery vehicle to purchase inventory, the financial
director decided to invest the proceeds in a debenture and borrow money for inventory from Bankrupt Bank, since
the interest rate offered on the debentures exceeded the borrowing costs from the bank. This would be Rio’s first
investment in debentures, and therefore would be recorded at amortised cost. You may assume that the IFRS
requirements have been met.
Loan from Bankrupt Bank

Rio negotiated a 9% fixed interest rate per annum on the loan from Bankrupt Bank. The interest is calculated
monthly on the outstanding balance of the loan in arrears. Interest is payable before the 10th of the following month.
Rio receives a monthly loan statement from the bank.
Investment in debenture
Rio purchased a five-year debenture with a nominal value of R2 000 000 at a discount of 10% and therefore
recorded a first-day profit in its general ledger. Rio would incur transaction costs payable on initial of the
transaction. The debentures bear interest at 13% on the nominal value of the debenture, payable biannually in the
middle of the year and at year-end. A market-related interest rate on similar investments was 15% per annum
(compounded biannually). Rio received its first coupon payment at year-end, much to the excitement of the financial
director.
REQUIRED
1. Formulate the substantive procedures you would perform regarding the interest paid expense included in the
statement of comprehensive income of Rio. You are not required to provide analytical procedures. (10)
2. Formulate the substantive procedures you would perform in respect of the journal entries relating to the
debentures in which Rio invested during the current financial year. Ignore any Companies Act requirements, as
well as allowances for credit losses. (15)
[25]
Question 39 LEVEL 3
Warranty provision
[14 marks]
RCA Stores (Pty) Ltd (RCA Stores) is a large retailer of electronic equipment and appliances to the public. It
operates from several stores located in malls across the country. Each year, the company includes a provision for
warranty claims in its financial statements based on an estimate of the costs the company could incur on faulty
products returned by customers.
The draft 20X1 financial statements of RCA Stores indicate a provision for warranty repairs of R1 150 000. The
previous year’s audited financial statements included a provision of R1 100 000.
While waiting for the audit senior to brief him on the audit procedures for warranty provisions, Jeff Solomons, a
trainee accountant assigned to the audit of the company’s 20X1 financial year, made the following remarks to other
team members:
I think it is unnecessary for me to be briefed on audit procedures for the warranty provision, because the
auditing of estimates involves low risk. In fact, it is an area where an auditor can save much time on an
engagement by simply ticking the boxes. In the case of RCA Stores, the increase of R50 000 in the
provision for warranty claims is in line with a 5% inflation adjustment and may therefore be considered
reasonable. All I have to do is to obtain a written representation letter from management confirming that
they have taken the necessary care in calculating the estimate and that the data on which the estimate is
based are complete and accurate. I then simply recalculate management’s estimate in order to ensure
mathematical accuracy.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss why Jeff Solomons’ views are inappropriate, not only as to the audit of estimates generally but also to
RCA Stores’s 20X1 warranty provision in particular. (8)
2. Describe briefly the additional substantive audit procedures that should be performed in order to determine the
reasonableness of RCA Stores’s 20X1 provision for warranty claims. (6)
[14]
Question 40 LEVEL 3
Provision for bonuses
[18 marks]
Poolsure Ltd (Poolsure) is a manufacturer of chemicals used in the treatment of swimming pool water (i.e. chemicals
such as chlorine, sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and stabilising agents). The company has a large footprint on the
African continent and supplies its products to 15 countries. Its head office is situated in Johannesburg, while three
factories are located across South Africa. The company employs over 270 salaried and 180 wage employees and has
a financial year-end of 31 December.
You have been assigned to the audit team that audits Poolsure’s 20X1 financial year, in your capacity as a trainee
accountant. One of your first tasks is to audit the bonus accrual included in Poolsure’s financial statements as a
provision under current liabilities. The balance included in the notes to the draft financial statements appears as
follows:
20X1 20X0
Provisions
Bonus accrual 2 175 200 1 854 500
Bonuses are payable to all salaried employees in January of each year in addition to their normal remuneration for
that month. A bonus equals the preceding December’s salary, excluding benefits. However, employees who are
appointed during a financial year receive a bonus that is apportioned in accordance with the number of months they
have worked for the company up to the end of December. In order to determine the total provision for bonuses for
the year, the financial manager of Poolsure logs in to the human resources system and generates, from the December
payroll, a list of all salaried employees. The list displays each employee’s gross remuneration including benefits,
together with the amount excluding benefits, equalling the provision required. The total on the list becomes the
‘new’ provision balance for the year, consisting of the bonus accruals of around 270 salaried staff members.
The monthly payroll for salaried staff is generated by the computer from the employee masterfile. Standing
information for each employee in the masterfile is supported by a paper-based employment contract and salary
adjustment form indicating the latest approved gross salary of the employee and shows the various benefit amounts
included. Salary increases occur only at the beginning of July of each year.
One of your fellow trainee accountants was unsure as to whether a provision for bonuses is allowed as an
acceptable accounting practice. The trainee argued that a payment for the bonuses will take place in a subsequent
financial year, which therefore does not pertain to the 20X1 financial year of Poolsure and which should therefore
rather be expensed in its 20X2 financial year.
REQUIRED
1. Explain, from an accounting perspective, why Poolsure may recognise a provision for bonuses at year-end. (3)
2. Describe the substantive audit procedures that should be performed to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence
about the provision for bonuses included in current liabilities in Poolsure’s 20X1 financial statements. Ignore the
following:
Tax implications and the use of computer assisted audit techniques
Procedures relating to the audit of the presentation assertion (15)
[18]
1. Recognition of a provision
Poolsure may create the provision for bonuses at year-end given that the amount complies with the definition of a
‘provision’ in accordance with IAS 37.14:
a) A legal, present obligation has arisen at year-end to pay future bonuses as a result of a past event, the signing of
a contract with employees in which Poolsure promises to pay salaried employees a bonus in January of each
year. (1)
b) Payment is probable as there are no indications the bonuses are not paid every year. (1)
c) The amount can be reliably estimated, given that the amount is clearly equal to one month’s salary excluding
benefits. (1)
2. Substantive procedures: bonus provision

a) Obtain and inspect Poolsure’s company policy on bonus payments and verify that:
i) salaried employees are entitled to a bonus in January of each year (1)
ii) wage workers are not entitled to a bonus payout (1)
iii) bonuses are calculated on an employee’s December gross monthly remuneration excluding benefits (1)
iv) there has been no change from the prior year in how bonuses are accounted for. (1)
b) Obtain from the financial manager the December 20X1 provision list which indicates the provision to be created
and:
i) inspect the list for any unusual entries (as it is a computerised list, it is unlikely that a casting of the list will
be performed, especially if reliance is placed on general controls) (1)
ii) agree the total on the list to the gross remuneration excluding benefits as per the payroll for December 20X1
iii) agree the number of salaried employees on the list to the number of salaried employees on the (1)
December 20X1 payroll (1)
iv) re-perform all calculations on the list (1)
v) agree the total provision as per the list to the corresponding general ledger account and the trial balance.(1)
c) For a sample of employees selected from the provision list, perform the following:
i) Agree the gross remuneration of each employee as per the list to the gross remuneration on their employment
contract in their employee file. (1)
ii) Subtract their benefits as per their employment contracts from gross remuneration and compare the amount
excluding benefits to the amount displayed on the provision list. (1)
iii) For employees whose employment contracts indicate they have been employed during the financial year
(date of appointment in 20X1), recalculate their provision by apportioning their gross remuneration
excluding benefits in terms of the months they have been working at Poolsure and agree this amount to
the provision list. (2)
d) Select a sample of salaried employees from the December 20X1 payroll and agree their details against the
provision list to ensure they have been included. (Completeness) (1)
Inspect the bonus provision general ledger account to ensure the prior year’s provision has been reversed and
for any unusual entries (especially abnormal debit entries decreasing the balance). (1)
e) Perform analytical procedures by comparing the bonus provision made in the 20X1 financial year to the
provision made in 20X0 and discuss unexpected differences if any with management, taking into account: (1)
i) the average increase in salary in July 20X0 (½)
ii) the average number of employees across the two years. (½)
f) Obtain a written representation letter from management with regard to the existence, rights and obligations,
completeness and accuracy, valuation and allocation assertions pertaining to the provision for bonuses. (1)
Question 41 LEVEL 3
Provision created for environmental rehabilitation costs
[15 marks]
You are the audit manager on the 20X1 audit of Ityuwa Lakes Ltd (Ityuwa), a company that manufactures table salt.
Ityuwa owns several large salt evaporation ponds in the Eastern Cape from which it extracts and harvests the salt and
from where it is sent to a nearby factory for further processing. Most of Ityuwa’s products are manufactured for the
export market.
During the 20X1 financial year, Ityuwa established a new salt evaporation pond after limited rock salt deposits
were found next to a natural lake near Coega. However, before it could commence with evaporation activities, in a
designated area to the side of the lake, the company had to agree to terms and conditions laid down by the
Department of Environmental Affairs. The agreement indicated the various aspects of rehabilitation required. An
important condition was that Ityuwa had to rehabilitate the land after 10 years of operation when the rock salt
deposits were expected to become depleted.
The company obtained the services of Jerome Randall, an environmental engineer employed by an external
company, Green to Go Consultancy Inc., to determine the amount of the provision that needs to be created in the
20X1 financial year. In his report, Mr Randall indicated that the provision to be accounted for covers the following
rehabilitation costs:
Drying of the salt evaporation pond
Levelling of any sand banks created
Re-establishment of the natural vegetation
Consulting fees of conservation specialists who will assist with the rehabilitation
At first, management of Ityuwa questioned Mr Randall’s calculation of the provision, indicating that it appeared too
high compared to what it cost to establish the evaporation pond in the first place. However, management
nevertheless relied on Mr Randall’s calculations and recorded a provision for rehabilitation costs at R3 350 000 in
the company’s 20X1 financial year.
REQUIRED
1. Describe in general why a company’s management might want to understate a provision for environmental
rehabilitation costs in its financial statements. (3)
2. Describe the substantive audit procedures that should be performed to verify the existence and accuracy, valuation
and allocation assertions relating to the provision for environmental rehabilitation costs as disclosed by Ityuwa in
its 20X1 annual financial statements.
Ignore any tax implications and the future value of the provision. Do not address related disclosures or the
presentation assertion in your answer. (12)
[15]
1. Incentives to understate the provision

a) Management may want to overstate the net assets of the company, in order to portray a stronger financial
position to potential financiers and shareholders, perhaps with the aim of obtaining additional finance. (1)
b) Management may want to overstate net profits by reducing the expense associated with the recording of the
provision in order to earn greater bonuses or other profit-based remuneration. (1)
c) Management may want to downplay the impact of future rehabilitation costs, which, if very high, may put off
potential investors, who may doubt whether the company will be able to comply fully with future mandatory
rehabilitation requirements. (1)
2. Substantive procedures to audit the provision: existence and accuracy, valuation and allocation
a) Perform the following procedures to determine whether reliance can be placed on the environmental specialist,
Mr Jerome Randall, as a professional:
i) Evaluate Mr Randall’s competence and expertise by requesting and inspecting evidence of his qualifications
and certification with professional bodies. (1)
Furthermore, request his curriculum vitae or client portfolio and inspect the document for evidence of
environmental assessments he undertook for similar projects in the past. (1)
To assess his reputation and reliability as a professional, contact, with permission, previous clients of
his and enquire about the quality of his service. (1)
ii) Evaluate Mr Randall’s objectivity by enquiring from both his employer and management of Ituywa whether
he has performed any previous work for Ituywa and the nature of the work if relevant as well as the effect
of any possible personal and professional relationships with Ituywa personnel. (2)
b) Evaluate the scope, adequacy and correctness of Mr Randall’s work by inspecting the report he prepared and in
which his calculations of the provision appear. (1)
i) Scrutinise the report for any indications of restrictions placed by Ituywa management on his work. This may
also be determined through discussion with the expert. (1)
ii) Determine whether the assumptions and data used in the calculation appear reasonable and complete. (1)
iii) Recalculate any calculations Mr Randall performed in order to arrive at the provision he proposed and agree
the result to the R3 350 000 recorded in the accounting records. (1)
c) i) Inspect the report for the ‘aspects of the rehabilitation’ (what the provision consists of) and agree these to the
agreement between Ituywa and the Department of Environmental Affairs for completeness (i.e. this procedure
will affect the accuracy and valuation of the provision). (1)
ii) Inspect the agreement for any other pertinent requirements relating to the department’s conditions of
establishing the evaporation pond, including the date of the agreement and signatures of the parties
involved. (1)
d) With reference to other audit evidence obtained during the course of the audit, and in light of the auditor’s
experience and knowledge of similar provisions created, consider whether the conclusions reached by Mr
Randall in his report appear reasonable and appropriate. (1)
e) i) Recalculate the provision for rehabilitation costs account in the general ledger and agree the amount to the
balance in the trial balance. (1)
ii) Scrutinise the provision for rehabilitation costs account in the general ledger for any unusual or unexpected
entries and discuss these with management. (1)
f) Obtain a written representation letter from management in which they confirm the existence and accuracy,
valuation and allocation assertions for the provision for rehabilitation costs balance as per Ituywa’s 20X1
financial statements. (1)
Question 42 LEVEL 3
Provision for leave pay
[14 marks]
You are a trainee accountant employed by the audit firm of Sabata & Lerato Inc. and have been assigned to the audit
of Tecnika (Pty) Ltd (Tecnika) for the company’s 31 December 20X1 financial year-end. It is your task to audit the
provision for leave pay.
Tecnika employs about 200 permanent staff members. Each staff member may take 21 days’ vacation leave per
annum, of which 10 days may accrue during a calendar year (i.e. 10 of the 21 days’ leave may be untaken and rolled
over to the next year). Seeing that accrued leave will have to be paid out to a staff member should he/she leave the
employment of Tecnika, the company creates a provision at year-end for all leave days which have not been used
during the year, but which have accrued to its personnel. The amount provided per staff member is based on a staff
member’s monthly salary payable for the last month of the year divided by 21 business days, multiplied by the
number of leave days that have accrued as at year-end.
At 31 December 20X1, the ‘provision for leave pay’ balance amounted to R1 204 290 as per the trial balance. You
are aware that, in the prior year and pertaining to the previous provision, the audit team found that:
some employees were never included in the provision
for some who were included in the provision, the incorrect number of leave days accrued was used in the
provision calculation – in all cases, fewer days than should have been used.
The following is an example entry for a staff member on the schedule of accrued leave pay. The schedule is
maintained in electronic format using a spreadsheet application installed on the company’s computer system:
EMPLOYEE EMPLOYEE SALARY SALARY LEAVE PROVISION

CODE NAME DECEMBER PER DAYS FOR
20X1 DAY ACCRUED LEAVE PAY
AT 31
DECEMBER
20X1
EMP114 H.G. Wellz R58 625.00 R2 791.67 8 R22 333.33
Each staff member has a paper-based employee file stored in the office of the human resources manager. Inside the
file, there are, among other documents, printouts of monthly pay slips and a leave schedule for each employee
indicating leave days taken and leave days accrued at the end of each month.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the major risks of material misstatement relating to the provision for leave pay created by Tecnika for its
20X1 financial year, evident from the information provided. (2)
2. Describe the substantive audit procedures that should be performed to verify the existence, completeness and
accuracy, valuation and allocation assertions relating to the provision for leave pay balance as at 31 December
20X1. (12)
Do not use computerised assisted audit techniques in your answer and ignore any tax implications.
[14]
Question 43 288
Question 43 LEVEL 3
Provision for leave pay/share option scheme
[31 marks]
You are an audit specialist employed by the Zondo Inc., a forensic auditing firm. You have been tasked by the newly
appointed CEO of a state-owned entity (SOE) Gold Pot Power Utility to review its human resource policies and, in
particular, its remuneration policy. The new CEO was appointed after a whistleblower implicated some of the senior
management team of the SOE in state capture and self-enrichment. One senior management team member had been
implicated in a fictitious employee scheme worth millions of rands.
The CEO also requested that you formulate substantive procedures that the internal auditors could perform that
would form the foundation of work that the SOE’s external auditors could place reliance on during the next financial
audit. The SOE has a 30 June year-end.
The CEO provided you with the following information relating to the most recent financial year:
The SOE employs 291 employees and consists of a senior management team of eight members. All permanent
employees receive a basic salary, which includes a 13th cheque. All employees are entitled to receive a
long-service award equalling one month’s extra salary every 10th year of employment. At the most recent
directors meeting, the company approved a general increase of 12% in the basic salaries of all staff. The increase
was significantly above inflation due to pressure from the unions following labour action.
The SOE is expecting further labour action because of a change in the leave policy of the SOE. The change in the
policy resulted in a decline of the provision for leave pay in the statement of financial position. As from 1 July, it
was decided that only the senior management team are allowed to transfer their leave from one financial year to
the next, whereas previously, all personnel were allowed to transfer unused leave from one year to the next.
Other than the senior management team, no other members of staff receive bonuses. In terms of their employment
contract, the senior management team receive bonuses and share options. A new incentive scheme was approved
at a directors’ meeting for the senior managers at the beginning of the financial year. At the beginning of the
financial year, each senior management team member will be entitled to 20 000 share options. This will allow
them to purchase shares after a three-year period at R55 per share, provided they remain employed by the
company and reach their annual individual sales targets during this period. At the end of the financial year, the
programme was amended to reduce the purchase price by R10. None of the senior staff from the senior
management team had resigned or had been fired since the inception of the scheme. One senior management team
member who had been implicated in state capture did not reach his individual target. The fair value of the share
options is being determined by independent professional valuers.
REQUIRED
Assuming the external auditors will rely on the work performed by the internal auditors:
1. Formulate only the general (generic) substantive procedures that you would recommend be performed to
substantiate the amount shown in the statement of financial position for both the senior managers’ share option
scheme and the provision for leave pay. (6)
2. Other than the procedures in part (1) above, formulate the additional substantive procedures that you would
perform to substantiate the amount disclosed in the statement of financial position for the senior managers’ share
option scheme. You are not required to formulate substantive analytical procedures, nor any procedures relating to
the Companies Act. (9)
3. Other than the procedures in part (1) above, formulate the additional audit procedures you would perform in
respect of the provision for leave pay. You are not required to formulate substantive analytical procedures. (9)
4. Using computer-assisted audit techniques, list the exception reports the external auditors would extract, to
determine whether fictitious employees are present on the payroll system. (7)
[31]
Question 44
Question 44 LEVEL 3
Provision for bonuses
[14 marks]
Given all the accounting scandals that have occurred in South Africa recently, your audit practice has gone through
hard times. Your practice has lost some clients, however you were able to retain some of your long-standing ones.
One of these is Stones, Rocks & Tiles (Pty) Ltd (Stones, Rocks & Tiles), a retailer of tiles and stone cladding,
situated outside Paarl. Stones, Rocks & Tiles has a 30 September year-end.
You have completed the audit of payroll. You followed a system based audit approach. The test of controls
confirms the preliminary low control risk assessment. You only need complete the audit work relating to the
provision for the bonuses.
Stones, Rocks & Tiles has had a good financial year and the management decided to pay bonuses to all
employees. The payment is expected to be included on the December payslip. Permanent employees receive a 13th
cheque equal to one month’s salary at date of payment. Casual employees will receive a gift worth 25% on their net
wage of the last work week in December. The only requirement for a bonus to be paid is that the employee should
still be employed at payment date. Management indicated that historic resignation patterns show that approximately
10% of the casual staff and 5% of the permanent employees would resign before payment date. They used this
assumption when raising a provision for bonuses at year-end.
REQUIRED
Formulate the substantive procedures you would perform in respect of the provision for bonuses. You are not
required to perform substantive analytical procedures.
[14]
1. Obtain a schedule from HR manager of the bonus provision calculation and re-perform all calculations and
castings. (1)
2. Agree the total of this schedule to the account in the general ledger, trial balance and financial statements. (1)
3. Obtain a management representation letter confirming the completeness and accuracy of the provision. (1)
4. Inspect minutes of meetings of the board for any reference to the bonuses and the approval of them. (1)
5. Inspect the financial statements to confirm whether the provision has been disclosed as a current liability in
accordance with IFRS. (1)
6. Enquire from management to gain an understanding of the process management used to calculate the provision.
Evaluate the reasonableness of the estimate based on your knowledge of the business. (1)
7. Select a sample of employees from management’s schedule and confirm the payroll (for both permanent
employees and casual staff) for existence of the employees (or by physical verification). (1)
8. Select a sample of employees from the bank statements and confirm that they appear on the schedule. (1)
9. For a sample of employees on the schedule:
a) Agree the monthly salary for December as used in the calculation with the payroll for December. (1)
b) Recalculate the salary to be paid out in December (taking into account potential increases in salary) and the cost
of the gift (being a week’s wages × 25%). (1)
c) Should employees receive an increase after year-end, obtain a copy of any approved increase letters in
recalculating the adjusted salary. (1)
d) Confirm the nature of employment (permanent vs casual staff) by inspecting a sample of employees’
appointment letters in their staff files. (1)
10. Inspect the payroll and employee records between year-end and payment date to identify resignations. (1)
11. Enquire from the human resources department of any resignations after year-end, other than the two resignations
that you are aware of. (1)
12. Confirm the reasonableness of the management’s percentage (%) of resignations before payment date by
12.
inspecting the employee records for the trends in resignations during the year as well as after year-end. (1)
13. Develop an expectation of a reasonable bonus and provision by discussions with management, industry
knowledge, etc. (1)
14. Calculate the following ratios:
a) Bonuses as a percentage of salaries
b) Bonuses per class of employee (e.g. permanent vs casual staff)
Investigate any unusual fluctuations through discussion with management and obtaining corroborating
documentation. (max 2)
Question 45 LEVEL 3
Provision for rehabilitation of land
[20 marks]
Your firm, UNIVEN Inc., specialises in high-risk audit clients. It has a team of specialists, each focusing on a
specific industry. Your area of expertise is the specialised weapon industry and you have been asked to assist one of
your clients, Denel Advanced Weapons SA Ltd (DAW), in the audit of a provision for the rehabilitation of land
around DAW’s advanced weapons development facility in Somerset West. New weapons are developed and tested
at the advanced weapons development facility.
During the course of the financial year, an environmental pressure group began protesting outside the gates of the
advanced weapon development facility. They claim that one of DAW’s facilities, where the chemical weapons and
weapons of mass destruction are tested, is polluting the environment and killing the native species of tortoises.
Publically, DAW is denying any responsibility. Internally, a confidential memo from DAW’s lawyers confirms the
following:
DAW has a 20-year lease of the land from the Western Cape government that contains a clause that any damage,
caused by DAW’s activities, to the land and surrounding areas must be rectified.
Statements in DAW’s previous integrated reports that they are a socially responsible company that causes no
harm to anyone gives rise to a constructive obligation for DAW to rehabilitate the land.
An environmental study conducted by DAW’s maintenance department found sufficient evidence that DAW is
having a negative impact on the surrounding environment. Moreover, they prepared a discounted cash flow
calculation of the expected cost to rehabilitate the land when the lease expires. The maintenance department is
headed by an environmental specialist who reviewed the study.
Although DAW does not want to admit guilt, the financial director decided to raise a provision for the rehabilitation
of the environment.
REQUIRED
Formulate the audit procedures that you would perform in respect of the provision for rehabilitation.
[20]
Question 46 LEVEL 3
Provision for chemical spill
[25 marks]
You are an audit manager at Mabusa Inc., a medium audit firm situated in Cape Town. You are currently at one of
your clients, African Chemicals (AC), performing the audit of a provision for the rehabilitation of land around AC’s
testing facility in Paarl. The company’s year-end is 30 April. Mabusa Inc. has been the auditor of AC for the last
four years. New chemicals are developed and tested at the Paarl facility which caused damage as discussed below.
The site manager at the Paarl facility has alerted the management of AC regarding a chemical spill at the facility
during the year, which polluted the environment and killed the indigenous species of plants and various small
animals. The groundwater has also been affected, which resulted in livestock from neighbouring farms also dying.
Publically, the firm is denying any responsibility regarding damages. A letter from AC’s lawyers confirms, however,
that the site manager is correct in his assessment that environmental damage did occur. Some of the farmers in the
vicinity sent water samples to a laboratory, which found traces of toxic chemicals used by AC and confirmed that
their livestock were killed from drinking it.
An environmental study was conducted by an external environmental expert regarding possible damage that
needs to be rectified. Moreover, he prepared a discounted cash flow calculation of the expected cost to rehabilitate
the land where the Paarl facility is situated as well as to clear the groundwater of the toxic chemicals. The expert
estimates that it will take at least three years to eradicate the effects of this chemical spill.
Although AC does not want to admit guilt to the farmers, the chief financial officer (CFO) decided to raise a
provision of R14.2 million at year-end for the rehabilitation of the environment.
REQUIRED
Formulate the audit procedures that you would perform in respect of the R14.2 million provision for rehabilitation at
year-end.
[25]
Obligation/existence
1. Obtain legal representative’s letter where it was stated that the chemical spill did have a negative impact on the
environment. (1)
2. Inspect correspondence and other audit evidence from farmers indicating damage due to chemical spill. (1)
3. Obtain and analyse laboratory reports indicating that toxic chemicals used by AC were found in the groundwater.
4. Enquire from the site manager at the Paarl facility how he discovered the environmental damage due to (1)
chemical spill. (1)
5. Conclusion: All the above clearly indicate a present obligation which will lead to future payments that can be
reasonably estimated. (1)
Completeness/cut-off
1. Inspect the site and ask the site manager if there are other areas of AC that also experienced damage. (1)
2. Inspect board minutes for any discussion on the additional provision that is needed regarding the rehabilitation of
the environment. (1)
3. Inspect claims from farmers who surround AC’s facility to determine the total extent of damages that need to be
rectified. (1)
Valuation
1. Obtain a schedule of the discounted cash flow calculation from the external expert and re-perform the calculations
on the discounted cash flow calculation. (1)
2. Enquire from the environmental specialist about the assumptions used and evaluate the reasonability of these
assumptions to source documents and reports/claims from farmers in the surrounding area. (1)
3. Determine that the damage to groundwater was included in the cash flow forecast. Chemicals tend to infiltrate the
groundwater, which has led to death of livestock on the surrounding farms and claims for losses suffered by
3.
farmers. (2)
4. Enquire from the external expert about the procedures and methods that were followed in the preparation of the
discounted cash flow forecast. Scrutinise the logic of these procedures and methods used; for example, was
inflation taken into account? (1)
5. Was livestock loss on neighbouring farms verified to claims instituted by farmers? (1)
6. Evaluate the reasonableness of the estimates in the cash flow, relying on your knowledge of the business, the
environmental expert’s report and discussions with the Paarl site manager. (1)
7. Corroborate the cost estimates by inspecting the underlying documents/quotes/invoices to repair damage to the
environment and contaminated groundwater. (1)
8. Compare the discount rate used with that of a similar market rate obtain from a financial institution. (1)
9. Verify the reliability of expenses on cash flow to payments already made after year-end regarding cleaning up of
chemical spill. (1)
Conclusion: After performing all the procedures on cash flow as mentioned above, the auditor must
determine his/her own point estimate with ranges which can be supported by audit evidence obtained. If AC’s
point estimate of R14.2 million does not fall within this range, discuss with the CFO and resolve the difference,
otherwise take difference to overs/unders schedule. (2)
10. Before you can rely on the environmental expert’s workings you must:
consider his independence/objectivity by doing a background check
determine his qualifications and membership of a professional body and corroborate with the professional body
determine his experience in this industry and reputation by obtaining his CV and investigate any internet posts
regarding this
determine any possible bias when he prepared the report
determine his reputation and standard of work previously performed on similar engagements. (max 5)
11. Inspect the minutes of the audit committee meeting approving the present value of the cash flows and the
provision itself. (1)
12. Enquire from the external expert and site manager about the nature of the rehabilitation required and extent of
work required to rehabilitate the environment. (1)
13. Confirm the discussion with the expert and site manager by inspecting relevant correspondence and corroborative
technical documentation. (1)
Analytical review
1. This is the first year that this provision is raised and therefore no analytical review will be possible.
Disclosure
1. Inspect the note disclosure relating to the provision of R14.2 million as a long/short-term liability in the financial
statements and confirm the compliance with IFRS. (1)
General procedures
1. Compare the total of the calculation to the year-end balance of R14.2 million in the general ledger and trial
balance. (1)
2. Obtain a letter of representation from management confirming the completeness and accuracy of the provision.
(1)
Question 47 LEVEL 3
Provision for defective work
[13 marks]
You firm, UNIVEN Inc., specialises in high-risk audit clients. It has a team of specialists, each focusing on a
specific industry. Your area of expertise is the specialised weapon industry and you have been assigned to the audit
of Big Guns SA Ltd (Big Guns). Big Guns sells customised heavy calibre weapons to clients across South Africa.
Clients can order heavy calibre weapons from Big Guns with any specifications they might require. Big Guns holds
a large inventory of weapons and spare parts and if it does not have a particular weapon or spare part in its
inventory, it can source it from reliable suppliers. It is rumoured that Big Guns even has some illegal gun dealers on
its books. Big Guns does not assemble the weapons itself, rather sub-contracting this task. Big Guns then sells the
weapons to licensed dealers approved by the government.
At the beginning of the financial year you are currently auditing, Big Guns sold a vehicle with a mounted
high-calibre machine gun with extended ammunition storage to a security company. Since this was the first time it
mounted a weapon on a vehicle, Big Guns subcontracted the assembly as well as the mounting of the weapon on the
vehicle to Vin Petrol, an auto body shop. Big Guns struggled to find a body shop that was willing and able to mount
the weapon. Vin Petrol agreed to mount the weapon only after an immunity agreement was signed in terms of which
no claim could be instituted against it. The vehicle was delivered in the middle of the year.
Shortly after receiving the vehicle, the security company complained that the gun kept on jamming and that the
weapon had become faulty due to the vibration of the vehicle. In terms of Big Guns warranty policy, it appears as if
Big Guns is responsible for rectifying any product defects. Because of the immunity agreement signed with Vin
Petrol, Big Guns will not be able to recover anything from Vin Petrol. One of Big Guns’ supervisors inspected the
vehicle and the weapon and concluded that the jamming resulted from poor workmanship of a sub-contractor that
installed the large ammunition storage unit and Vin Diesel’s assembly. He also contracted an independent specialist
who confirmed this and recommended that the vehicle undergo a full inspection. Rectification work will be
necessary to reduce the impact of the vibration on the assembly unit which attaches the weapon to the vehicle.
Shortly before year-end, a new contactor was appointed to perform the necessary work. He commenced the work but
still had a lot of work to complete after year-end. The independent specialist prepared an estimate of the total costs
involved, which was approved by management and formed the basis of the provision.
Estimated cost of remedial work to be incurred 550 000

Inspection costs of independent specialist Costs of other work done to date 22 000
22 500
594 500
REQUIRED
Describe the audit procedures you would perform in respect of the provision for defective work at year-end.
[13]
Question 48 LEVEL 3
Issue of shares: Equity
[15 marks]
You are a trainee accountant at the audit firm of Glass and Cupp Inc. and have been assigned to the audit of High
Lights (Pty) Ltd (High Lights), a wholesaler of electrical lights and fittings. The company’s financial year under
consideration ends 31 December 20X1. During the year the following two transactions, which require your further
attention, occurred:
Issue of shares
According to your prior scrutiny of High Light’s memorandum of incorporation (MOI), the company had 500 000
authorised and issued shares as at July 20X1, the day its board of directors decided to issue another 100 000 shares.
In terms of the decision, the shares are to be issued at R10 each and no directors are allowed to take up any of the
shares. You also confirmed through inspection of the MOI that the directors do not have the power to change the
number of authorised shares. After the necessary legal requirements were considered, all shares were duly issued
and monies received in full. Inspection of the general ledger revealed that the share capital account was credited with
R1 million and the bank account debited with the same amount.
Dividends declared
In December 20X1, the board of directors declared the only dividends for 20X1, payable to all shareholders, at R3
per share. The amount of the dividends declared has not yet been paid by the time the dividend declaration was
audited.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive audit procedures that should be performed to test the fair presentation of the transactions in
High Lights relating to:
the issue of shares in July 20X1 (9)
the declaration of dividends. (6)
Do not repeat any procedures already performed as per the above scenario and ignore any procedures relating to
presentation and disclosure of the matters in the financial statements.
[15]
Question 49 LEVEL 2
Equity
[21 marks]
Greyfox Protection Services Ltd (Greyfox) is a large, but unlisted company that provides security services
throughout the country. The auditor of Greyfox required audit evidence for the following matters that applied during
the course of the company’s most recent financial year:
NO. MATTER MARKS: MARKS:

DOCUMENT(S) EVIDENCE
a. The board of directors resolved to issue an (½) (2)
additional 200 000 shares in Greyfox (the only
share issue that took place).
b. The shareholders have allowed the above shares (½ × 2) (4)
to be issued.
c. Some of the above shares were issued to directors (½) (1)
of Greyfox.
d. Funds were received from all shareholders who (½ × 2) (1)
took up the above shares.
e. The shares taken up by each shareholder were (½) (1)
documented by Greyfox.
f. A dividend was declared for the 2019 financial year. (½) (1)
(Note that you have already confirmed that there
are no restrictions to this extent in company’s MOI.)
g. The company had the financial means to pay the (½ × 2) (3)
above dividends.
h. The finance committee of Greyfox, carrying out its (½ × 2) (2)
mandate as obtained from the board, decided to
obtain a long-term loan for Greyfox from West-end
Bank and subsequently agreed to terms and
conditions with the bank for the loan.
REQUIRED
For each of the above controls/activities:
1. name the document on which you will find evidence for the matter (6)
2. for each document named, briefly describe the nature of the evidence that it provides for audit purposes. (15)
[21]
Note: More than one document may apply for each matter. Do not address matters for which you have already
obtained audit evidence as described in the scenario.
NO. (1) (2) NATURE OF THE EVIDENCE

DOCUMENT(S)
a. Minutes of the board Evidence of a resolution by the directors to issue shares (1)
meeting (½) Any pertinent matters relating to the share issue, including whether
shares are to be issued to directors, share price, financial
assistance to any party to take up shares, etc. (1)
b. MOI (½) Any restrictions that may apply to the directors’ ability to issue
Minutes of the shares (1)
shareholders’ Evidence of there being a sufficient number of authorised shares in
meeting (½) respect of the prospective share issue (1)
Rules regarding the directors’ ability to change the MOI in order to
increase the authorised number of shares (otherwise, a special
resolution by shareholders will be required) (1)
Evidence of the shareholders’ approval, by means of a special
resolution, to increase the authorised share capital should there not
have been a sufficient number of authorised shares (1)
c. Minutes of the Evidence of the shareholders’ approval, by means of a special

shareholders meeting resolution, either for this particular issue of shares, or made within
(½) the past two years, allowing the directors to take up shares in the
company (1)
d. Bank statement (½) The bank statement provides evidence that funds were in fact
Cash book (½) received from shareholders and the cash book provides evidence
that the receipts were recorded in the accounting records. (1)
e. Shareholders’ register The shareholders’ register is prepared by Greyfox to record the
(½) particulars of each shareholder, including the number of shares held
by each.(1) Note that the number of shares can also be calculated
by taking the total amount of funds received and dividing it by the
share price. However, this is a calculation more so than a ‘
document’.
f. Minutes of the board Evidence of a resolution passed by the directors to declare a

meeting (½) dividend (1)
g. Minutes of the board Evidence that the directors applied the solvency and liquidity test as
meeting (½) per section 4 of the Companies Act (1)
Trial balance at Indication that the board, subsequent to the performing the test,
time of dividend concluded that Greyfox will satisfy the solvency and liquidity test
declaration/other valid immediately after completing the proposed distribution (1)
accounting Evidence that the assets of the company, as fairly valued, equal or
information (½) exceed the liabilities of the company, as fairly valued and it appears
that the company will be able to pay its debts as they become due
in the ordinary course of business for a period of 12 months
following the distribution of the dividends to shareholders (1)
h. Minutes of the finance Evidence of approval for the loan to be acquired from West-end
committee’s meeting Bank (1)
Loan agreement (½) Indication that both parties (Greyfox and the bank) agreed to the
with West-end terms of the contract and that an authorised representative of
Bank (½) Greyfox signed for the loan (1)
Question 50 LEVEL 3
Other reserves
[14 marks]
Matchstix Ltd (Matchstix) is a large manufacturer of matchsticks used for lighting fires. During its most recent
financial year, the company’s auditor was concerned about the board of directors’ treatment of the following matters
affecting the 20X1 statement of profit and loss and other comprehensive income and statement of changes in equity:
The company owned three properties during its 20X1 financial year, consisting of open pieces of land in the
following locations: Midrand, Pretoria and Mbombela. By year-end, the company owned only two of these
properties as the land in Pretoria was sold. Further details are as follows:
A revaluation surplus to the value of R380 000 existed on the Pretoria property at the time when it was sold. The
Pretoria property was last revalued seven years ago. This surplus amount was transferred to the 20X1 retained
earnings through profit and loss.
The directors decided to revalue the Midrand property on which the company is planning to build a future match
stick factory. As a result, the board requested property agent Mark Shaw, a cousin of the chief executive officer,
to perform the revaluation. The revaluation resulted in the Midrand property increasing in value by R550 000 and
was duly recorded as such in the 20X1 financial statements.
The Mbombela property was not revalued for the 20X1 financial year.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the possible reasons as to why the auditor of Matchstix was concerned about the company’s accounting
treatment of the matters relating to the three properties. (5)
2. Describe the substantive audit procedures you would expect the auditor of Matchstix to have performed to gather
sufficient appropriate audit evidence about the accuracy, valuation and allocation assertion and related disclosures
of the revaluation surplus of R550 000 (Midrand property) recorded in the financial statements. Assume all
amounts are material and that use will not be made of an auditor’s expert. Ignore any tax consequences. (9)
[14]
1. Other concerns of the auditor

a) The auditor may have been concerned that the accounting policy of Matchstix Ltd did not allow for the
revaluation of land, i.e. that the cost model is in fact used for the accounting of land and not the revaluation
model. (1)
b) The motives for why the directors would transfer the Pretoria property’s revaluation surplus through profit and
loss seems questionable, given that IAS 16.41 requires a revaluation surplus on disposal to be transferred
directly to retained earnings, but through other comprehensive income and not through profit and loss. (1)
c) According to IAS 16.31, under the revaluation model which Matchstix seems have adopted, revaluations should
be carried out regularly, ‘to avoid instances where the carrying amount of an asset differs materially from its
fair value’. However, the disposed Pretoria property was last valued seven years ago, begging the question as
to whether other classes of properties subject to the revaluation model may also have been valued too long ago,
resulting in understatement of assets. (2)
d) The auditors may have been concerned about whether the R550 000 revaluation surplus of the revalued
Midrand property was appropriately transferred through other comprehensive income and accumulated in
equity under a revaluation surplus, rather than through profit and loss (IAS 16.39). (1)
e) There is a possibility that the Midrand property’s revaluation surplus is materially overstated, given that the
property valuator is not independent from the CEO (his cousin performed the revaluation), which could have
provided opportunity for upward manipulation of the amount. (1)
f) If an asset is revalued, the entire class of assets to which that asset belongs should be revalued, according to IAS
16.36. However, the Mbombela property was not revalued during the year under audit. (1)
2. Substantive audit procedures: revaluation surplus of R550 000

a) Discuss with management any concerns about the objectivity of the property valuator who valued the property,
given that he is the cousin of the CEO, and consider any measures taken by management to mitigate the risks
of a conflict of interest. (1)
b) Request from Mark Shaw, the property agent and valuator who performed the revaluation, evidence of his
qualifications and experience and inspect the evidence to determine whether he:
appears competent and skilled in property valuations (1)
is registered or certified with a professional property valuation body. (1)
c) Request from management the agreement signed between Mark Shaw and Matchstix to determine whether the
scope of the property valuator’s work is adequate and enables the valuator to perform his work without
restrictions or influence from management. (1)
Discuss with Mr Shaw whether he was free to perform the valuation without limitations placed on his work.
d) Inspect the valuator’s valuation report and: (1)
i) confirm by means of this inspection that the Midrand property’s fair value at year-end results in an increase in
R550 000 as per the accounting records (1)
ii) recalculate any calculations made by the valuator in the report (1)
iii) assess the reasonability of any assumptions used by the valuator given the auditor’s knowledge of the
industry and any other audit evidence obtained during the course of the audit of Matchstix. (2)
e) Inspect the statement of other comprehensive income and note the increase of R550 000 transferred through
retained earnings. (1)
f) Inspect the statement of changes in equity and note the increase in R550 000 under revaluation surplus. (1)
Question 51 LEVEL 2
Bank reconciliation
[7 marks]
You are a second-year trainee accountant at Q&Z Inc. and are currently busy with the audit of NOCDE Ltd
(NOCDE) for the 28 February 20XX financial year-end. NOCDE is a clothing retail company with branches across
the country. You are responsible for the audit of the company’s bank balances at year-end and were presented with
the following bank reconciliation by the company’s accountant:
BANK RECONCILIATION – BMX BANK: FEB 20XX

R R
Balance according to bank statement 28 Feb 20XX 146 493.36
Less: outstanding electronic fund transfers 1 794.68 (8 131.89)
EFT transfer nr 749 746.96
EFT transfer nr 752 5 590.25
EFT transfer nr 756
Plus: outstanding deposit 7 541.73
28 Feb 20XX
Plus: other adjustments 897.50
Bank charges Feb 20XX
Balance according to cash book 28/02/20XX 146 800.70
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures that you should perform on the bank reconciliation presented to you as part of
obtaining sufficient and appropriate audit evidence regarding the company’s bank balance at year-end.
[7]
General
1. Obtain a bank confirmation confirming the balance according to the bank statement on 28 February 20XX and
agree the bank balance per the reconciliation to the balance on the bank statement or the bank confirmation as at
28 February 20XX. (1)
2. Recalculate the calculations on the reconciliation. (1)
3. Re-perform the logic of the bank reconciliation and the reconciling items on the reconciliation. (1)
4. Agree the balance according to the cash book on the reconciliation to the balance in the cash book as at 28
4.
February 20XX. (1)
Outstanding electronic funds transfers

1. Follow the outstanding electronic funds transfers as at 28 February 20XX through to the March 20XX bank
statements. (1)
2. Agree the date and the amount of the outstanding electronic funds transfers to the February 20XX cash payment
journal. (1)
Outstanding deposits
1. Agree the amounts of the outstanding deposit to the March 20XX bank statements. (1)
2. Agree the date (28 February 20XX) and the amount R7 541.73 to the cash receipt journal to ensure that it was
recorded in the correct period. (1)
3. Inspect the deposit slip for the amount of R7 541.73 and the date of the deposit (28 February 20XX). (1)
Bank charges
1. Agree the amount of the bank charges (R897.50) to the February 20XX bank statement. (1)
Question 52 LEVEL 2
Bank confirmation letters
[10 marks]
You are a second-year trainee accountant at Q&Z Inc. and are currently busy with the audit of NOCDE Limited
(NOCDE) for the 28 February 20XX financial year-end. NOCDE is a clothing retail company with branches across
the country. The company has multiple bank accounts and you are responsible for the audit of the company’s bank
balances as at year-end and are in the process of preparing bank confirmation letters for the company’s bank
accounts at year-end.
REQUIRED
1. List and explain the assertions relating to the cash and bank balance contained in the financial statements for
which evidence will be obtained by means of bank confirmation letters. (2)
2. Discuss any other information (other than the cash and bank balance) which will also be obtained as part of the
bank confirmation process and how it can be used by the auditor. (8)
[10]
1.
a) Existence, as the banks will confirm that the bank accounts existed at year-end (1)
b) Accuracy, valuation and allocation assertions, as the banks will be confirming the balance of the various bank
accounts at year-end (1)
Available marks [2]; Maximum marks [2]
2.
a) Interest paid and received during the financial year for all the entity’s bank accounts (1)
2.
This will be used by the auditor to verify the occurrence, completeness and accuracy of the entity’s interest
expenses and interest revenue. (1)
b) Details of any pledged and ceded balances and any collateral provided for liabilities (1)
This can be used to verify the accuracy and completeness of disclosure and the presentation of, inter alia,
contingent liabilities in the financial statements as well as rights and obligations and completeness of the
related assets and liabilities. (1)
c) Details of any forward contracts (1)
This can be used to verify the financial instrument, including the relevant year-end disclosures and presentation
in the financial statements. (1)
d) Available overdraft facilities that the entity may use and the date of the review of these (1)
This can assist in the going concern evaluation because it provides information regarding the availability of
short-term funding to the entity. (1)
e) Information regarding the authorised signatories on the entity’s bank accounts (1)
This can be used during the audit of payments made by the entity during the year to identify invalid payments
which would assist in the identification of fraudulent transactions. (1)
Question 53 LEVEL 3
Deferred taxation
[16 marks]
Since you recently completed your MCom (Taxation) the audit partner on the audit of Screen Capture (Pty) Ltd
(Screen Capture) requested that you assist in the audit of the deferred taxation asset balance. Screen Capture is a
firm of private investigators that specialise in electronic surveillance.
Following the revelations of the State Capture commission of bribery, fraud and corruption by government
officials, Screen Capture has seen a significant increase in demand for special investigations and has been awarded
various contracts to conduct electronic surveillance. In order to store all the data that is generated by the new
contracts, Screen Capture purchased 10 new servers during the financial year. Electronic equipment is written off on
a straight-line basis over the period of expected use and is impaired where necessary.
Screen Capture estimates that the expected period of use of the electronic equipment is shorter than the write-off
period allowed by the South African Revenue Service. The financial directors recommended that the equipment be
written off using the official tax wear-and-tear rates, however the board of directors agreed that the actual useful life
would result in a better reflection on the statement of financial position. This resulted in a deferred taxation asset,
arising from the deductible temporary differences in respect of the servers purchased.
REQUIRED
Assuming that the fixed assets have already been audited and that the deferred taxation asset account is separately
disclosed from the deferred taxation liability account, formulate the substantive procedures that you would perform
in respect of the deferred taxation asset account.
[16]
1. Scrutinise the general ledger account (for both the deferred taxation liability and asset accounts) for unusual
entries and enquire from management about any such entries. (1)
2. Inspect the deferred taxation liability account as well as the related deferred taxation liability calculation for any
unusual items. (1)
3. Inspect all material journal entries processed during the preparation of the financial statements and enquire from
3.
management about their purpose. (1)
4. Obtain the deferred taxation calculation;
5. agree its total to the general ledger, trial balance and financial statements. (1)
6. Recalculate the:
a) carrying amount of the asset
b) tax base
c) deferred tax asset. (max 2)
7. Compare the tax rate and wear-and-tear rate used in the calculation with current (‘enacted or substantially
enacted’) legislation. Note the date of the enactment. (2)
8. Obtain forecasts from management and review whether it is probable that sufficient taxable income will be earned
in future, against which the temporary difference can be deducted.
a) Enquire from the accountant about the procedures and methods that were followed in the preparation of the
forecast. (1)
b) Enquire from the accountant about the basis of the assumptions made in respect of the taxability, tax planning
events, probabilities, possible variances and timing of future cash flows, and compare it with trends and
industry norms considering the knowledge of the business and the industry. (1)
c) Compare the discount rate used by the accountant with the ruling interest rate in the media or on the internet.
d) Recalculate all calculations and projections. (1) (1)
e) Confirm the details in the projections with the underlying evidence and consider the taxation impact of the
projections (evaluate whether there will be sufficient taxable profit earned, against which deductions can be set
off; also refer to other requirements of IAS 12, para 36) and the recoverability of the deferred taxation asset.
f) Evaluate events after year-end that provide additional information in respect of the above-mentioned (max 2)
assumptions (e.g. changes in the interest rate and the economy which may impact future sales and sales
volumes; timing when temporary difference could potentially reverse; tax planning opportunities) in order to
confirm that the loss will be realised. (max 2)
g) Inspect the minutes of management meetings to verify that the requirements of IAS 12, para 36 are discussed.
9. Inspect the disclosure of the deferred taxation in the financial statements to confirm that it is disclosed in (1)
Question 54 LEVEL 3
Taxation payable
[22 marks]
You are the audit senior employed by Wingman Accounting Inc. (Wingman). Wingman received a phone call from
the local university. The chairman of the School of Accountancy at the university urgently needs a guest lecturer
with taxation experience as well as audit experience. Wingman’s managing partner suggests that you present the
lecture, since it would assist Wingman’s recruitment activities on campus. The brief you received from the
university via email states the following:
Dear Wingman
Thank you for agreeing to lecture next week. I would like to request that you give a 50-minute lecture on
the various forms of taxation, and since we (at the university) have started implementing the CA2025
framework, you must please integrate taxation with auditing during your lecture. Please focus on
substantive procedures. Integrated thinking is a key principle in the CA2025 framework.
Thank you again.
3.
management about their purpose. (1)
4. Obtain the deferred taxation calculation;
5. agree its total to the general ledger, trial balance and financial statements. (1)
6. Recalculate the:
a) carrying amount of the asset
b) tax base
c) deferred tax asset. (max 2)
7. Compare the tax rate and wear-and-tear rate used in the calculation with current (‘enacted or substantially
enacted’) legislation. Note the date of the enactment. (2)
8. Obtain forecasts from management and review whether it is probable that sufficient taxable income will be earned
in future, against which the temporary difference can be deducted.
a) Enquire from the accountant about the procedures and methods that were followed in the preparation of the
forecast. (1)
b) Enquire from the accountant about the basis of the assumptions made in respect of the taxability, tax planning
events, probabilities, possible variances and timing of future cash flows, and compare it with trends and
industry norms considering the knowledge of the business and the industry. (1)
c) Compare the discount rate used by the accountant with the ruling interest rate in the media or on the internet.
d) Recalculate all calculations and projections. (1) (1)
e) Confirm the details in the projections with the underlying evidence and consider the taxation impact of the
projections (evaluate whether there will be sufficient taxable profit earned, against which deductions can be set
off; also refer to other requirements of IAS 12, para 36) and the recoverability of the deferred taxation asset.
f) Evaluate events after year-end that provide additional information in respect of the above-mentioned (max 2)
assumptions (e.g. changes in the interest rate and the economy which may impact future sales and sales
volumes; timing when temporary difference could potentially reverse; tax planning opportunities) in order to
confirm that the loss will be realised. (max 2)
g) Inspect the minutes of management meetings to verify that the requirements of IAS 12, para 36 are discussed.
9. Inspect the disclosure of the deferred taxation in the financial statements to confirm that it is disclosed in (1)
Question 54 LEVEL 3
Taxation payable
[22 marks]
You are the audit senior employed by Wingman Accounting Inc. (Wingman). Wingman received a phone call from
the local university. The chairman of the School of Accountancy at the university urgently needs a guest lecturer
with taxation experience as well as audit experience. Wingman’s managing partner suggests that you present the
lecture, since it would assist Wingman’s recruitment activities on campus. The brief you received from the
university via email states the following:
Dear Wingman
Thank you for agreeing to lecture next week. I would like to request that you give a 50-minute lecture on
the various forms of taxation, and since we (at the university) have started implementing the CA2025
framework, you must please integrate taxation with auditing during your lecture. Please focus on
substantive procedures. Integrated thinking is a key principle in the CA2025 framework.
Thank you again.
Regards
Chairperson of School of Accountancy
In preparing for the lecture, you decide to explain the substantive procedures using a case study of a company that
had seen an increase in revenue and a decline in expenses due to cost-cutting measures. Payments to SARS consisted
of provisional payments for income tax as well as payments made for penalties and interest incurred during the year.
In order to make the scenario more realistic, you decide that the company will pay penalties and interest only when it
receives a request for payment from SARS, however the company does not raise a provision for potential penalties
nor interest due.
REQUIRED
Ignoring capital gains taxation and other taxes, formulate the substantive procedures which you would include on
your lecture slides to audit the SARS balance in the statement of financial position giving consideration to the facts
in the scenario.
You are not required to formulate analytical procedures. Moreover, do not address the disclosure and presentation
assertion.
[22]
1. Obtain the calculation of the tax liability and recalculate the amounts on the schedule. (1)
2. Compare the balance in the tax calculation with the balance in the general ledger to the trial balance and financial
statements. (1)
3. Inspect the general ledger account to identify any unusual entries. Enquire from management reasons for the
unusual entries. (1)
4. Obtain a management representation letter confirming the completeness and accuracy of the tax liability. (1)
5. Compare the opening balance of the general ledger to the balance in the prior year’s signed financial statements as
well as the prior year’s tax return and assessment received. (2)
6. Recalculate the amount of any over/under provision and compare it to the amount in the general ledger account.
7. Inspect the journal entries transferring over/under provisions to the statement of financial position to ensure (1)
that these are not carried forward. (1)
8. Compare all the payments (provisional taxation) in the general ledger with:
the bank statement as well as with the receipt as received from SARS (1)
the provisional returns completed by the client (1)
statements from SARS in respect of penalties and interest and with
the amount of interest and penalties as recalculated by you. (1)
9. Inspect the SARS general ledger account to confirm that payments for penalties and interest made during the year
are not allocated to this account, but rather expensed. (1)
10. Obtain a schedule with the income taxation calculation and recalculate the income tax expense by multiplying the
taxable income with the statutory rate. (1)
11. Inspect income taxation calculation:
Agree the profit before taxation with the amount in the statement of comprehensive income. (1)
a) Evaluate the nature of all items and
i) confirm the classification and treatment of non-taxable items against supporting documentation (1)
ii) confirm that all items that are non-deductible are added back (1)
iii) confirm that all special allowances are appropriately claimed. (1)
b) Review the detailed financial statements for any other items requiring adjustment. (1)
c) Enquire from management whether there are any other items that are non-taxable/non-deductible. (1)
12. Recalculate the amount of capital allowances. (1)
13. Inspect the general ledger and ensure that the taxation expense per the tax calculation (per schedule) agrees with
the entry/journal of the provision in the general ledger. (1)
14. Enquire from SARS or investigate documentation and payments after year-end to identify any unrecorded
14.
outstanding penalties and interest. (1)
15. Compare the balance on the financial statements to the amount on the tax return as well as assessment. (1)
a) Inspect the prevailing tax legislation for the prevailing tax rate and other relevant provisions. (1)
b) If necessary, obtain the assistance of a tax expert. (1)
c) Review the calculation for completeness and reasonableness using your taxation knowledge. Inspect last year’s
tax calculation and return, and enquire from management regarding any differences (i.e. new or missing
amounts). (2)
Question 55 LEVEL 3
Audit of unlisted investment/accruals
[24 marks]
You are working for a small audit firm, FMA Inc. You are currently busy with the audit of Body Beautiful (Pty) Ltd
(BB). The company has a 30 June year-end. FMA Inc. has been appointed as the new auditor in the current year.
Background information
BB was established eight years ago by Mr Mangaliso, the company’s largest shareholder. The purpose of the
company was to import into South Africa Chinese products which had a price advantage compared to other similar
products available in the South African market. Due to the poor quality of certain of these products, this was not a
satisfactory long-term proposition.
Currently weight-loss products are very popular in South Africa. These products supposedly act as appetite
suppressants, fat burners, metabolism enhancers and energy boosters. BB has therefore changed its strategy and now
only focuses on these products. BB imports these products from suppliers in China that it has worked with
previously and with which it has good working relationships.
Investments
Three years ago, BB made a 10% investment in Wonder Slim (Pty) Ltd (Wonder Slim). At year-end, the investment
is stated at R2 250 530 in the general ledger. There was no movement in this account during the current financial
year.
Accruals
Mr Mangaliso provided you with a list of accruals as at year-end that he had prepared himself, because the post of
chief financial officer is currently vacant. He ‘hopes’ the balance of R245 540 includes all the relevant accruals at
year-end. Your audit senior has now delegated the task of verifying the accruals amount to you. You have already
agreed the balance of his list of R245 540 to the accruals amount per the trial balance and general ledger.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the audit procedures that you would perform to verify the valuation of the investment of R2 250 530 of
BB at year-end. (12)
2. Describe the audit procedures that you would perform to verify the accruals of BB at year-end. (12)
[24]
1. Audit of investments – valuation assertion only

As this is a new audit, the opening balance of valuation needs to be verified to check for any material
misstatement:
a) Agree opening balance of R2 250 530 to previous year’s closing balance in the general ledger investment
account and AFS. (1)
b) Investigate and obtain corroborative supporting documentation for any difference relating to the above. (1)
c) Inspect share certificate to verify the 10% shareholding and investment amount at year-end. (1)
Valuation assertion only

Obtain audited AFS for Wonder Slim and perform the following:
d) Inspect that equity/net asset value is at least R22 505 300 to justify investment amount of R2 250 530 at
year-end. (2)
e) Perform a valuation to verify 10% holding of at least R2 250 530 by using:
i) the discounted cash flow model (1)
ii) the price-earning model (1)
iii) the dividend yield model/Gorden growth model (1)
to identify if any impairment is needed.
f) Inspect the statement of comprehensive income to verify that Wonder Slim is making a reasonable profit and
that no impairment is needed. (1)
g) Inspect the AFS to verify that Wonder Slim is a going concern to verify that no impairment is needed. (1)
h) Scrutinise chairman’s report to determine viability and profitability of future operations to verify that no
impairment is needed. (1)
i) Inspect that an unmodified audit report was issued. (1)
j) If not, determine what effect the qualification will have on the equity and profit figures, to verify that no
impairment is needed. (1)
k) If management are not prepared to do the necessary impairments identified in your audit work above, take
amount to overs/unders schedule. (1)
2. Substantive procedures regarding accruals

As this is a new audit, the opening balance of accruals needs to be verified to check for any material misstatement:
a) Obtain a list of opening balances from the previous auditor or management or prepare your own list. (1)
b) Inspect the accuracy of this list with payments made subsequent to last year’s year-end to verify the accuracy of
the opening balance of accruals. (1)
c) If there is any material difference regarding the above (or procedures performed below), discuss with
management and take any audit differences to overs/unders schedule. (1)
d) The current year-end accruals list was prepared by a person who is not a qualified accountant, therefore
extended audit procedures need to be performed. (1)
e) Cast the current year’s list and agree if total does add up to R245 540. (1)
f) Compare the list of accruals given to you by Mr Mangaliso and compare the list that you prepared regarding
opening balances; identify and follow up differences with Mr Mangaliso. (1)
g) Since Mr Mangaliso ‘hopes’ the list is correct, which does not inspire any confidence, extended procedures will
need to be followed to identify further the completeness of the list, therefore review telephone, electricity, rent
and other expenses to verify 12 payments/debits were made during the year, otherwise follow up differences
with Mr Mangaliso. (2)
h) Review all agreements, contracts, board minutes, etc. to determine whether the accruals list is complete. (1)
i) Select invoices and statements for services rendered, and other documentation received before year-end to
ensure these are recorded as accruals at year-end. (1)
j) Trace payments after year-end to identify payments made regarding accruals that existed at year-end but which
do not appear on the list of Mr Mangaliso. (1)
k) Enquire from staff members/payments clerk whether they are aware of any unrecorded accruals at year-end.
l) Trace the amounts on the list of Mr Mangaliso and test them to invoices, statements and other supporting (1)
documentation. (1)
m) Re-perform calculations on documents above to confirm accuracy of accrual amount. (1)
n) Perform an analytical review of each accrual and inspect documentation for any abnormal increases/decreases
that are not in line with inflation. (1)
Available marks [15]; maximum mark [12]
Question 56 LEVEL 3
Directors emoluments
[26 marks]
Nat Jafta Kitchen Cupboards (Pty) Ltd (Nat Jafta) engaged your firm to perform the external audit for the financial
year ending 31 December. The company was founded by Mr Nathaniel Jafta and his wife. Nat Jafta manufactures
custom-made kitchen cupboards from its warehouse in Rylands. There are 61 permanent employees working in the
warehouse, including five administrative staff members. Nat Jafta also employs five four-man crews that install the
cupboards at client’s premises. Nat Jafta had a good financial year with revenue doubling. The growth in sales
started after Mr Jafta was selected as one of the Mail & Guardian Top 200 entrepreneurs and a SAICA Top under-35
finalist.
A month before the close of the financial year, Mr Jafta wanted to thank his employees for their hard work and
made an announcement that all salaried employees would receive a cash bonus, payable two months after year-end.
The bonus was calculated pro-rata on the employees’ December salary, based on the number of months they were
employed during the financial year ending 31 December. The employees were excited since it was the first time that
they received a bonus. There were, however, two employees who had resigned after year-end and were unhappy
since they were not included in Mr Jafta’s calculation of the bonus payable (i.e. ‘provision for employee bonuses’).
Mr Jafta argued that they did not qualify for the bonus since they would no longer be on the company’s payroll.
Moreover, he decided not to include the directors in the bonus payment.
The following procedures have already been performed regarding the disclosure of salary- and remuneration-related
balances:
1. Obtain a payroll printout of all salary and remuneration amounts (including bonuses) and supporting calculations
and re-perform all calculations and castings. Agree the totals of these schedules and supporting calculations to the
relevant account in the general ledger, trial balance and financial statements.
2. Review the relevant general ledger accounts of all salary- and remuneration-related balances (including bonuses)
and investigate any unusual entries, including journals.
3. Obtain a management representation letter confirming all relevant assertions relating to all salary- and
remuneration-related amounts (including bonuses).
4. Inspect minutes of meetings of the board and the remuneration committee for any reference to salary- and
remuneration-related matters (including bonuses).
5. Review the financial statements and complete the firm’s standard disclosure checklist based on the disclosure in
the financial statements. Confirm that all salary- and remuneration-related matters (including bonuses) have been
disclosed in accordance with IFRS.
6. Compare the salary- and remuneration-related payments (including bonuses) and related disclosures to that as
disclosed in the prior year’s financial statements and investigate variances.
REQUIRED
1. Draft a working paper that describes the additional substantive procedures that you would perform in respect of
the directors’ remuneration account in the statement of financial performance.
You are not required to describe any substantive analytical procedures, nor any substantive procedures relating to
the presentation and disclosure assertions. (14)
2.
2. Describe the risks of material misstatement at account and assertion level in respect of the provision for employee
bonuses in the statement of financial position.
You are not required to describe risks relating to the presentation and disclosure assertions. (6)
3. Assume that sufficient appropriate audit evidence has already been obtained in respect of salary records of both
employees and directors, and formulate the additional test of details that you will perform in respect of the
provision for employee bonuses in the statement of financial position.
You are not required to describe any substantive analytical procedures, nor any substantive procedures relating to
the presentation and disclosure assertions (6)
[26]
Question 57 LEVEL 3
Audit procedures regarding legal matters
[14 marks]
You are the audit manager on the 31 December year-end audit of OwnWay (Pty) Ltd (OwnWay), a company
founded 20 years ago that owns most of the country’s school tuck shops. During the planning phase of the current
audit, while you were inspecting the minutes of the company’s board meetings, the following transactions came to
your attention:
Transaction A
Bob Owny, the managing director, borrowed R50 000 from the company in order to purchase a boat. The loan was
approved by the directors at an interest rate of 1.5%.
Transaction B
OwnWay declared a dividend of 50 cents per share during the year.
Transaction C
Carli von Dagel, one of the executive directors, proposed a contract with SweetsUnlimited (Pty) Ltd
(SweetsUnlimited) for the supply of crisps to OwnWay. Although Carel von Dagel owns 55% of the shares in
SweetsUnlimited and is married to Carli, the contract was approved by the board.
REQUIRED
1. Based on the information supplied, discuss in terms of the Companies Act requirements and contraventions (the
theory and the application thereof) the validity and the consequences of:
a) transaction A (5)
b) transaction B. (4)
2. Formulate the audit procedures that you would perform in order to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence as
to the legality of transaction C. (5)
[14]
Note:
Although audit procedures include tests of controls and substantive procedures, transactions regulated by the
Companies Act occur only once in a while, as a result of which there are no internal controls to test. Your approach
in answering this type of question is to verify compliance with the Companies Act.
1.
a) i) As the award of the loan made to the director was not within the scope of the normal trading activities of
OwnWay, it was not in the ordinary course of business. (1)
ii) OwnWay is not a bank or a financial institution in terms of section 45(1)(a) of the Companies Act 71 of
2008. (1)
iii) Although the loan was approved by the directors, it should have been authorised by means of a special
resolution of the shareholders in accordance with section 45(3)(a)(ii). (1)
iv) As the loan was approved at an interest rate of 1.5%, which is much lower than the repo rate, the terms may
not be considered reasonable and fair to the company (section 45(3)(b)(ii)). (1)
v) The loan is thus void (invalid). (1)
vi) The directors, whether they approved of or failed to vote against the loan, could be held liable.
(consequence) (1)
b) i) Inspect the minutes of meetings of the directors for:

the board resolution authorising the distribution (1)
the acknowledgement of the application of the solvency and liquidity test immediately after the proposed
distribution was completed as well as the conclusion that the company satisfied the solvency and liquidity
test. (1)
ii) Having recalculated the solvency and liquidity ratios, agree them to management’s calculation in order to
verify that the company was solvent and liquid after the distribution. (1)
iii) Inspect the bank statement in order to verify that the distribution was made within 120 days of the solvency
and liquidity test having been performed or inspect the minutes of board meetings for references to the
subsequent solvency and liquidity test. (1)
iv) Inspect the memorandum of incorporation in order to verify whether there are any restrictions on interim
distributions. (1)
2.
a) Inspect the minutes of the board meeting in order to verify that Carli:
i) disclosed her interest in the contract (1)
ii) disclosed all the necessary details and information regarding the contract (1)
iii) left the boardroom after the disclosure of her interest (1)
iv) formed part of the quorum of the meeting, but did not take part in the vote on this contract. (1)
b) Inspect the conflict register in order to verify that Carli registered her interest in the contract. (1)
c) Inspect the memorandum of incorporation in order to verify that there are no restrictions with regard to contracts
involving conflicts of interest. (1)
1 Auditing of a balance.
2 In order to detect possible understatement, more completeness procedures need to be performed.
3 You are a member of the audit team.
4 All this is irrelevant, since you have to perform substantive procedures and not tests of controls.
5 Use this information in your cut-off procedures.
6 Use this information in your answer.
7 Use Mr Paton’s name in your answer.
8 As the amount is lower than that of the previous year, the completeness assertion needs more procedures.
9 In performing substantive tests, the auditor will try to obtain external audit evidence with a date as close as possible to
year-end.
10 This is the only time you will earn a mark in tests and exams if you start your sentence with the word ‘obtain’. You
are not required to write ‘Obtain an invoice for’ and then ‘Inspect an invoice for’ when describing substantive
procedures.
11 Inquiry from management is a poor audit procedure, since they may tell the auditor what he/she wants to hear,
rather than the truth. Your procedure should therefore include a follow-up in order to corroborate management’s
answers.
12 This is essential in order to earn a mark, since answers to inquiries from management are poor audit evidence.
13 By performing these procedures, the auditor is testing for possible understatement, as required in the question.
14 Always mention analytical review procedures if they are relevant.
15 This procedure specifically addresses the risk of understatement presented in the scenario.
16 Observe how the information contained in the question was brought into the solution.
17 Samples are often taken, since it is impossible for the auditor to inspect all documentation.
18 This procedure is applicable only to accounts payable and accounts receivable.
19 This procedure is unique to accounts payable.
20 This is a generic procedure that you may mention if the item is separately disclosed in the financial statements.
21 This serves only to indicate that many other alternative procedures exist.
22 Audit of transactions.
23 You are the senior auditor on this audit.
24 Remember to address this issue in your cut-off and analytical review procedures.
25 Management has therefore an incentive to overstate sales.
26 This detailed information is not really needed, since the question does not ask for test of controls.
27 This detailed information is not really needed, since the question does not ask for test of controls.
28 Notice the three different assertions in auditing transactions compared to balances.
29 When auditing transactions, the auditor is vouching for many of the company’s internal documents. By comparison,
when auditing balances, he/she is trying to obtain external audit evidence.
30 Occurrence is used as a heading since the auditor is verifying transactions.
31 The mark is allocated for ‘cast’ and not ‘obtain’.
32 This is a generic statement that may be used for most substantive questions.
33 Usually no mark is allocated for this. In this scenario, where the client has 22 outlets, you will need to stratify.
34 Accuracy is used as a heading since the auditor is verifying transactions.
35 Using information given in the scenario.
36 Classification is used as a heading since the auditor is verifying transactions.
37 This is a risk identified in the scenario.
38 Once again, discuss analytical review procedures. Note: In this solution, it has been given its own heading, which
you can do if you forget to address analytical review procedures.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter also deals with substantive procedures.
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 2
Revenue
[15 marks]
You have recently been appointed as an audit manager at Sexy Audit Inc. Your first audit client is Investex Ltd
(Invest), a company that sells investment textbooks. The audit for the year ended 31 September is almost complete,
with only the audit of the asset management fee accounts still outstanding.
Investex has a R15 million investment on the statement of financial position at year-end. The investment, which
was acquired four years ago as capital reserves and has already been verified, is classified and recognised as
available-for-sale in terms of International Accounting Standards (IAS) statements. The investment is managed by
Investex at a fee of 0.5% per month calculated on the market value of the said investment. The fee is payable in cash
15 days after month end.
An audit trainee accountant has requested your assistance in auditing this balance.
REQUIRED
Formulate the substantive procedures that you would perform relating to the asset management fee in the statement
of comprehensive income.
[15]
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Opening balances
[16 marks]
CA(SA) Inc. was appointed as the external auditor of Corricraft (Pty) Ltd (Corricraft) on 1 April. The success of the
company, which sells the furniture it manufactures at its Durban plant from showrooms across South Africa, lies in
the fact that its products are durable. In addition, lounge suites have removable, washable covers. The company’s
year-end is 31 December.
During the planning phase of the current year’s audit, the CA(SA) Inc. audit team experienced difficulty in
reconciling opening balances to the financial statements audited by the previous auditor, who had issued a qualified
audit opinion of the previous financial year. In an attempt to resolve the issue, CA(SA) Inc. contacted the previous
auditor, who replied in writing that he had resigned from the audit, and that there is no reason why CA(SA) Inc.
should not accept the appointment. As he was now retired, he was not able to assist with them further.
During the course of the previous financial year, Corricraft had embarked on a large capital expenditure
expansion project with a view to improving aspects of its infrastructure, the result of which, it was hoped, would be
an increase in sales and a decrease in costs. In anticipation of this, at the time of the previous financial year-end,
Corricraft had large inventory, accounts receivable and PPE balances.
Although increased sales did materialise after the expansion, customers purchasing on credit with 24 months to
repay struggled with repayment, which resulted in significant credit losses for the company.
Management uses a provision matrix that specifies fixed provision rates (based on past experience and industry
trends) for the number of days a debt is overdue.
REQUIRED
Formulate the substantive procedures you would perform during the current year’s audit on the opening balance of
trade accounts receivable. You are not required to perform substantive analytical procedures or consider the
presentation and disclosure assertions.
[16]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Accounts receivable
[23 marks]
For the past three years, your audit firm has been the external auditor of Pamala Ltd (Pamala), a company that owns
and leases buildings across South Africa. During the current year, there has been a significant decrease in the
number of properties leased as a result of declining interest rates, with the result that it has become more cost
effective for those seeking office space to purchase premises. The company’s year-end is 31 August.
The company’s draft financial statement reflects the following balances:
Income
Rent received** R4 656 641
Current assets
Rent in arrears # R341 000
Current liabilities
Rent received in advance R93 500
VAT payable R264 000
**The income figure was obtained from the monthly rental registers.
# Rent in arrears refers to the unpaid invoices for August as well as those for previous months.
The rental system operates as follows:
New applications and renewals

Once a prospective tenant has completed a rental application form and successfully undergone a credit check, a
rental agreement, which is pre-numbered, is entered into with the lessee and signed by both parties. A copy of the
agreement as well as the rental application form is filed in a correspondence file for the lessee, who is assigned a
unique lessee number.
Invoicing
The accounting department at head office in Johannesburg maintains a rent register in which all rentable office space
is listed, along with the details of the lessees. On the first day of every month, an invoice, serving as a reminder of
the rent due on or before the 5th of the month in terms of the rental agreement, is mailed to each lessee. In addition,
the invoice is debited to the lessee’s account in the rent register.
Receipts
Rentals are paid directly to head office. Pamala’s policy is to grant terms of rental payable in advance only. When a
payment is received from a lessee, it is credited to the client’s account in the rent register.
Month-end procedures
All lessees with outstanding rent payments receive a monthly statement prepared and mailed to the lessee on the
15th of each month. Copies of these statements are filed in the correspondence files of the lessees.
REQUIRED
Describe the substantive procedures you would perform in respect of the gross amount of rentals in arrears before
any provision for irrecoverable losses is included in the statement of financial position for the year ended 31 August.
You are not required to address any matters concerning either taxation or the procedures relating to debtors
confirmation letters.
[23]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Accounts receivable
[25 marks]
You are a second-year audit trainee on the audit of ComfortAir (Pty) Ltd (ComfortAir), the largest supplier of
commercial and residential air conditioners in southern Africa. The company, which has a December year-end,
requires the financial statements by the third week of January.
As a result of the tight year-end, your audit firm opted to confirm the existence of debtors at 30 September
during the interim audit conducted during the first two weeks of October. Roll-forward procedures for October,
November and December were performed during the year-end audit. The reason for adopting this approach was the
delayed response from debtors returning debtors confirmations for the previous financial year, which threatened to
delay the issuing of the audit report.
The following additional information is available at year-end:

ComfortAir signed contracts with several commercial building developers and building suppliers, who sell
directly to the public in Namibia and Zimbabwe, to supply them with air conditioners. The first purchases, which,
as with all transactions, were settled in US dollars, were made in February of the current financial year.
Although it is not the policy of ComfortAir to hold air-conditioning units on a consignment basis, Building
Warehouse Supplies (Pty) Ltd (BWS), which accounts for 32% of the total accounts receivable balance at
year-end, requested that an exception be made for it. The directors of ComfortAir approved this request at a board
meeting held in January of the current financial year, since which date all goods to BWS have been held on a
consignment basis.
ComfortAir’s accounts receivable masterfile contains the following fields:
FIELD EXAMPLE
Account number Prod430
Name Productive (Pty) Ltd
Address and contact details 430 S Poplar Avenue, Parow 7501
Date account opened March 20XX
Total amount owed R53 000
Aging of total amount owed 52 days
Credit limit amount R120 000
Credit terms 30 days
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the audit procedures you would have performed during the interim audit in order to confirm the existence
of the accounts receivable balance on this date. (6)
2. Discuss the audit procedures you would perform in order to confirm the valuation of the accounts receivable
balance. In answering the question, use general audit software as far as possible. (19)
[25]
Question 5 LEVEL 2
Audit procedures
[13 marks]
You have been the auditor of the ABC Ltd Group (ABC), a company with a 30 June financial year-end, for the last
six years. ABC is a leading toy manufacturer in Africa with five manufacturing facilities, three of which are located
in South Africa, one in Kenya, and one in Nigeria.
The company has production capabilities for a wide variety of toy products. It employs a substantial workforce.
ABC’s products are renowned for their quality and affordability. Results from research conducted by the South
African Bureau of Standards show that no toxic paints are used in toys manufactured by ABC. In addition, they have
no small parts that could be harmful to children.
During the course of the current year, ABC implemented a new payroll system that is more effective than that
used over the last seven years. All payroll data is now stored at PayrollCloud Inc., a designated cloud site.
Extract from minutes taken at a directors meeting held on 8 June 20X1
Note 1: Feedback on new payroll system

All payroll applications and modules have been successfully transferred from the previous payroll system
to the new. The initial problem encountered with PayrollCloud Inc. over the storage of the payroll data has
been successfully resolved. As far as we are aware, there have been no other malfunctions. From that,
we conclude that everything is functioning normally.
Note 2: Consultation with labour unions

It was decided that all workers at the Cape Town manufacturing facility will be retrenched on 30 June
owing to this facility making continuous losses. Since the retrenchment packages, which were approved
by the labour union, will be paid out only during July (after the year-end), it was decided by management
that no provision needs to be made for this at year-end.
REQUIRED
Discuss the impact that Note 2 above would have on your audit, and describe the audit procedures that you would
perform in order to verify the retrenchment payment.
[13]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Audit procedures
[15 marks]
For the first time, your audit firm will be conducting the audit of XARO Ltd (XARO), a South Africa-based group
specialising in the mining of coal. You are a junior audit clerk assigned to the 30 June 20X1 year-end audit.
Because the company is currently the largest coal producer in the country, EXCOM, the national power utility,
as well as several other municipal power stations, are XARO’s biggest clients. The company has been listed on the
JSE for the last seven years.
On 5 April 20X1, a strike involving approximately 2 000 miners took place at the Arnox mine in Mpumalanga,
one of six mines owned by XARO. The strike, sparked by the non-payment of performance bonuses as a result of
certain operations not achieving their performance targets, led to a production stoppage of several weeks. In
addition, the event gained international attention after the strike, which had become violent, had led to the serious
injury of 38 striking mineworkers.
Legal action against XARO resulted, with the men claiming damages of R23 million for injuries sustained
during the strike. According to XARO’s legal advisors, the mineworkers have a 90% chance of being granted
compensation. Consequently, XARO raised a provision for R23 million in its financial statements for the year
ending 30 June 20X1.
Working Paper H/100 provides a breakdown of the audit procedures performed:
Working Paper H/100

Entity name: XARO Ltd Year-end: 30 June 20X1
WP H/100
Prepared by: J. Jackson Date: 2 August 20X1
Reviewed by: P. Masanabo Date: 4 August 20X1 Page 1 of 1
Audit section: Provisions
Activity 1: Audit procedures performed on provisions in general
AUDIT PROCEDURE TYPE OF ASSERTION/CONTROL

PERFORMED AUDIT OBJECTIVE
PROCEDURE ADDRESSED
Compared the schedule of provisions for the Test of control Valuation of provisions
current year to that of the previous year.
Certain major provisions for the previous
year were not present in the current year. No
further audit work was performed on these
provisions, as they had no impact on the
current year’s audit.
Discussed with the previous auditor the Test of detail: Segregation of duties
process used to develop provisions, substantive
including the approval process thereof. procedure
Activity 2: Audit procedures specifically performed on the provision for R23 million raised in the financial
statements for the year ending 30 June 20X1 with regard to damages for injuries sustained during the
strike
AUDIT PROCEDURE TYPE OF ASSERTION/CONTROL

PERFORMED AUDIT OBJECTIVE
PROCEDURE ADDRESSED
Obtained the schedule from management Test of control Presentation and disclosure
making up the balance of R40 million for this
provision. Re-performed all calculations on
the schedule.
Evaluated, tested and discussed the basis Analytical Isolation of responsibilities
on which the amount of the provision was procedure:
determined in order to decide whether or not substantive
it is a reliable estimate. procedure
REQUIRED
Discuss the concerns you have with the audit procedures, the type of audit procedures and the assertions or control
objectives addressed as documented in Working Paper H/100. Where there are concerns, make recommendations on
how these could be mitigated. Present your answer in tabular form.
[15]
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 3
Series ISA 560 Phase 1–3 (the same scenario will be used and tailored to explain the various possibilities)
[66]
SCENARIO 1 OF 6: SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

[10 marks]
You are a chartered accountant and an audit manager at Audit Inc., a medium-sized audit firm. One of your major
audit clients is FlyAway Ltd (FlyAway), a listed company. FlyAway is an airline company that specialises in
providing an exclusive private jet service to wealthy individuals, including government officials and celebrities.
FlyAway’s assets include a fleet of luxury jets and, as it has been in operation for a number of years, it also has
access to a substantial network of other luxury aeroplane service providers.
The following dates are relevant to the audit:
ACTIVITY DATE
Financial year-end 30 September 2019
Financial statements to be approved by board of directors 30 November 2019
Financial statements to be sent to shareholders 5 December 2019
The final and overall materiality figure for the financial statements was calculated as R8.5 million. The audit
fieldwork has been completed and you are reviewing the completion and finalisation findings. Below is Working
Paper L1 – LITIGATION AND POSSIBLE CLAIMS, which you are currently reviewing:
Working paper
Client name FLYAWAY LTD Prepared by M Hilton Date prepared 25 October 2019 L1
Year-end 30 September 2019 Reviewed by You Date reviewed
Audit section LITIGATION AND POSSIBLE CLAIMS
Discussions with the company’s legal advisor revealed the following:
A legal claim has been made against the company by six passengers who assert that the airline served
them contaminated food. It came to management’s attention that the passengers were admitted to
hospital shortly after landing in Durban on 28 August 2019.
The passengers have instituted a claim for damages against the company. The medical reports, dated
3 October 2019, revealed that the passengers suffered from food poisoning. Upon investigation, traces
of an industrial cleaning chemical were found in the food that the passengers were served.
The legal advisor is of the opinion that the passengers will be successful in their claim, however the
value of the claim could not be determined at year-end.
On 15 October 2019, the following estimate of the claim was made by the legal advisor: R10 million.
This estimate was based on other similar cases in the past. This estimate is considered to be
reasonable for audit purposes.
Management disclosed a contingent liability in the draft financial statements regarding this matter.
REQUIRED
Discuss the appropriate audit responses (all steps and further audit procedures) in reaction to the relevant
information provided. Assume the date is 27 October 2019 today for the purpose of answering the question. (10)
Notes:
Ignore any taxation and deferred taxation implications of this information.
Ignore any aspects regarding possible fraud or a reportable irregularity.
Ignore the effect of the matter on the formulation of the audit opinion.

[15 marks]
ACTIVITY DATE
Financial year-end 30 September 20X9
Financial statements approved by board of directors 30 November 20X9
Financial Statements to be sent to shareholders 5 December 20X9
The final and overall materiality figure for the financial statements was calculated as R8,5 million. You have issued
an unmodified audit report (dated 1 December 20X9) pertaining to the 20X9 financial year.
On 2 December 20X9, you read the following in the newspaper:
There is a legal claim against the company by six passengers who assert that the airline served them
contaminated food. It came to management’s attention that the passengers were admitted to hospital
shortly after landing in Durban on 28 August 20X9. The passengers have instituted a claim for damages
against the company. The medical reports, dated 3 October 20X9, revealed that the passengers suffered
from food poisoning. Upon investigation, traces of an industrial cleaning chemical were found in the food
that the passengers were served. Legal experts whom this newspaper interviewed are of the opinion that
the passengers will be successful in their claim. The claim is estimated to be R10 million according to the
legal experts.
Management did not disclose this information to the audit team during the audit, nor was it disclosed in the audited
REQUIRED
information provided. Assume the date is 2 December 20X9 today for the purpose of answering the question. (15)
Notes:
Do not discuss detailed audit procedures as per ISA 540.
Do not address the formulation of the audit opinion.

[15 marks]
ACTIVITY DATE
Financial statements sent to shareholders 5 December 20X9
There is a legal claim against the company by six passengers who assert that the airline served them
shortly after arriving in Durban on 28 August 20X9. The passengers have instituted a claim for damages
against the company. The medical reports, dated 3 October 20X9, revealed that the passengers suffered
from food poisoning. Upon investigation, traces of an industrial cleaning chemical were found in the food
that the passengers were served. Legal experts whom this newspaper interviewed are of the opinion that
the passengers will be successful in their claim. The claim is estimated to be R10 million according to the
legal experts, based on similar cases in the past.
REQUIRED
Notes:

[8 marks]
ACTIVITY DATE
Financial statements to be sent to shareholders 5 December 20X9
In the chairman’s report, there is a section that deals with ‘flight incidents’. In that section, the company’s
chairman highlighted that during the current financial year, there was one incident ‘where passengers did not feel
well after a flight to Durban’. He also stated that ‘the matter was investigated and preventative measures were
instituted’.
A legal claim has recently been laid against FlyAway Ltd by six passengers who assert that the airline
served them contaminated food. It came to the company’s attention that the passengers were admitted to
hospital shortly after landing in Durban on 28 August 20X9. The passengers have instituted a claim for
damages against the company. The medical reports, dated 3 October 20X9, revealed that the passengers
suffered from food poisoning. Upon investigation, traces of an industrial cleaning chemical were found in
the food that the passengers were served. A legal expert whom the newspaper interviewed is of the opinion
that the passengers will be successful in their claim. The claim is estimated at a value of R4,5 million,
given similar cases in the past.
REQUIRED
Notes:

[10 marks]
ACTIVITY DATE
Financial statements to be approved by the board of directors 30 November 20X9
Financial statements to be sent to shareholders 5 December 20X9
The final and overall materiality figure for the financial statements was calculated as R8,5 million. The audit
Paper L1 – LITIGATION AND POSSIBLE CLAIMS that you are currently reviewing:
Working paper
Client name FLYAWAY LTD Prepared by M Hilton Date prepared 25 October 20X9 L1
Year-end 30 September 20X9 Reviewed by You Date reviewed
There is a legal claim against the company by 60 passengers who claim that the airline served them
shortly after landing in Durban on 3 October 20X9. The passengers have instituted a claim for damages
against the company. The medical reports, dated 5 October 20X9, revealed that the passengers
suffered from food poisoning. Upon investigation, traces of an industrial cleaning chemical were found
in the food that the passengers were served.
On 15 October 20X9, the following estimate of the claim was made by the legal advisor: R60 million.
This estimate was based on other similar cases. For audit purposes, this estimate is considered
reasonable.
REQUIRED
information provided. In addition, discuss the impact on the audit report. Assume the date is 27 October 20X9 today
for the purpose of answering the question. (10)
Notes:

[8 marks]
ACTIVITY DATE
Year-end 30 September 20X9
Financial statements send to shareholders 5 December 20X9
The final and overall materiality figure for the financial statements was calculated as R8,5 million. The audit
Paper L1 – LITIGATION AND POSSIBLE CLAIMS that you are currently reviewing:
Working paper
Client name FLYAWAY LTD Prepared by M Hilton Date prepared 25 October 20X9 L1
Year-end 30 September 20X9 Reviewed by You Date reviewed
There is a legal claim against the company by one passenger who asserts that the airline served him
contaminated food. It came to management’s attention that the passenger was admitted to hospital
shortly after landing in Durban on 28 August 20X9. The passenger has instituted a claim for damages
against the company. The medical reports, dated 3 September 20X9, revealed that the passenger
suffered from food poisoning. There was, however, evidence of several other food products in the
contents of the passenger’s stomach. These food products were not served during the flight.
At the moment, the value of the claim cannot be estimated as legal discussions are still in progress.
Legal counsel did, however, conclude that they think there is an 85% probability that FlyAway will have
to make a payment. Although the amount is still unknown, the legal counsel expects with 90% certainty
that the amount to be paid as an out-of-court settlement will be less than R100 000.
REQUIRED
information provided. In addition, discuss the impact on the audit report. Assume the date is 27 October 20X9 today.
Notes:
Ignore any aspects regarding possible fraud or a reportable irregularity. (8)
[66]
Question 2 LEVEL 3
Subsequent events
[15 marks]
GLTM Inc. was appointed as the auditor of Perfect Tile Ltd (Perfect Tile), a national retailer of tiling products, for
the 20X8 financial year. The final (performance) materiality figure set by the auditor amounted to R1,5 million. The
following timeline exists:
31 December 20X8: Financial year-end
27 January 20X9: Commencement of fieldwork at client’s premises
10 February 20X9: Last day audit team was present at client’s premises
4 March 20X9: Financial statements signed off
4 March 20X9: Audit report signed off
11 March 20X9: Financial statements distributed and made available to shareholders and other stakeholders
Several events occurred after Perfect Tile’s year-end of 31 December. None of these matters were addressed in any
form in the 20X8 financial statements by Perfect Tile:
1. In January 20X9, Perfect Tile acquired the outstanding non-controlling interest in one of its subsidiaries,
Tile-O-Matic (Pty) Ltd (Tile-O-Matic). The purchase price is R3,6 million, payable over a three-year period and
subject to Perfect Tile achieving pre-determined levels of financial performance as per the sales agreement signed
on 21 January 20X9.
2. On 5 February 20X9, the management informed the auditor that revenue amounting to R720 000 was overstated
in the month of October 20X8 as a result of a junior salesperson who manipulated sales figures in order to obtain a
larger performance bonus. The salesperson resigned in November 20X8. By 4 March 20X9, management was still
in the process of investigating the matter.
3. On 9 March 20X9, the financial manager phoned the engagement partner on the audit. Sounding embarrassed, he
informed the partner that a rental expense amounting to R162 500 for December 20X8 and pertaining to one of
Perfect Tile’s branches was accidentally not recorded in the financial records. The audit team did not detect this
misstatement.
4. On 21 March 20X9, the engagement partner read an article in the business section of a newspaper stating that
several of Perfect Tile Limited’s creditors have applied to have the company liquidated due to outstanding debt.
REQUIRED
Discuss, with reasons, GLTM Inc.’s responsibilities in regard to each of the above-mentioned events that took place
at Perfect Tile after the 20X8 financial year-end. Detailed audit procedures are not required. Assume that
management is amicable to any full amendment or disclosures to the financial statements, where required, for the
matters at hand.
[15]
Question 3 LEVEL 3
Subsequent events
[16 marks]
You are the senior auditor on the audit of Strawbs (Pty) Ltd (Strawbs), which has a 31 December financial year-end.
The company is one of the largest suppliers of strawberries in South Africa. The company supplies many of the
major local shopping chains as well as several foreign grocery stores. The fresh strawberries are harvested from their
farms from October to March of each year. In addition to the sales made to the stores, the company allows members
of the public to pick their own strawberries at the company’s farms from November to January.
Mr and Mrs Strawbs started the business 25 years ago. The equity of the company is currently divided as follows:
Harvest Limited Group: 66%
Mr Strawbs: 17%
Mrs Strawbs: 17%
A representative of Harvest Ltd has requested that the audit be completed by the third week of January as the
group’s results are to be released to the public at the end of the last week of January. An unmodified audit report was
submitted to the chief financial officer of Strawbs on 21 January. The annual general meeting will be held on 31
January.
The following two unrelated articles appeared in a local newspaper on 24 January and were brought to your attention
for the first time by a first year audit trainee the following morning:
Extract from article 1 which relates to one of Strawbs’ creditors
Fire destroys Somer-grocers, a community grocery store that has served the community of Somerset
West for over 30 years. A fire broke out in the early hours of Friday morning and by the time the fire
department reached the premises, the entire building with all its products were destroyed.
Extract from article 2
Strawbs’ spokeswoman Ms. Sharon Mhlanga stated, ‘A lawsuit was filed against us on 28 December
and we decided not to announce it until some background checks had been performed. A family of five
people claim that while picking strawberries at one of our farms they were poisoned by the methyl
bromide pesticide that we use on the strawberries, but we cannot provide any further comment at this
point as the legal process is underway.’
Somer-grocers
Somer-grocers owed Strawbs R75 000 at year-end. The company was up to date with its payments at year-end.
Law suit
Two members of the family are still in hospital recovering from the poisoning.
The remaining three were released from hospital after spending two weeks under the watchful eye of specialists.
The family’s cumulative medical bill to date exceeds R3 million.
The family is suing Strawbs for R10 million to cover their total medical costs, damages suffered due to not being
able to return to work on time and inconvenience caused.
Legal representatives confirmed that there is a 90% probability that Strawbs will have to pay the R10 million.
The materiality figure at the client for the December financial year-end was calculated as R2,5 million.
REQUIRED
Discuss the impact of the two newspaper articles on the current year’s audit of Strawbs.
[16]
Note: You are not required to discuss whether the requirements for IAS 37: Provisions and contingent liabilities are
applicable. You are also not required to draft detailed audit procedures.
Question 4 LEVEL 3
Subsequent events
[17 marks]
You are an audit manager at Lbw Auditors. The information below relates to two unrelated audit clients of yours.
The audit senior requested your assistance.
Company 1 – Terminator Pest Control (Pty) Ltd

Terminator Pest Control (Pty) Ltd (Terminator Pest Control) is currently involved in discussions to have its
controlling interest acquired by Diverse Investments (Pty) Ltd (Diverse Investments). Terminator Pest Control is the
largest pest control company in the Western Cape and was incorporated 15 years ago. It has a December year-end.
Diverse Investments indicated that it would be relying on the financial statements when making its decision. Ms
Turner, the chief operating officer of Terminator Pest Control, has indicated that she would like to submit the
financial statements to Diverse Investments on 28 January so that they can finalise the acquisition by the middle of
February.
As another matter, Mr Warner, the company’s chief executive officer, resigned on 29 January. He indicated that
his decision was based on his wanting to spend more quality time with his family and that he would complete his
four weeks’ notice. Mr Warner is entitled to receive two months’ worth of untaken leave, which equates to R200
000, when he officially leaves the company. You were informed of Mr Warner’s resignation on 30 January.
The final materiality figure for the audit is R150 000.
Company 2 – Electro Frames (Pty) Ltd

Electro Frames (Pty) Ltd (Electro Frames) assembles and distributes digital photo frames from the warehouse
located in Epping and has a December year-end.
The company sold a large portion of its inventory at below the inventory’s cost during the month of January. A
second-year audit trainee enquired of the chief financial officer on 1 February if this was an indication that inventory
was valued at an amount above the net realisable value at year-end. The chief financial officer responded by saying
that such a question was a clear indication that we did not know what we were doing and that he would ensure that
we were not reappointed as the company’s auditors in the following year. The audit trainee has indicated that she
believes that inventory is overstated by R650 000 at year-end.
The final materiality figure for the audit is R600 000.
REQUIRED
Discuss the impact of the information noted above on the financial statements of each of your clients for their
respective financial years under review.
[17]
Question 5 LEVEL 3
Subsequent events
[17 marks]
You are the audit manager on the audit of Citrus Fruits (Pty) Ltd (Citrus Fruits), a company which exports the
majority of its harvest to Europe from its farm in the Northern Cape. The company has a February year-end. The
financial statements were issued on 4 April.
The following matters were brought to your attention by a member of your audit team at the end of April:
Settlement of a contingency
The company created a provision for damages of €500 000 (R7,5 million) at year-end, assuming a 60% probability
that it will lose the legal case made against it by a customer in Europe who claims that the fruit was contaminated
with fungal black spot disease. The disease is harmless to humans, but has the ability to affect the quality and
quantity of the harvest. The exchange rate used in providing for the damages at year-end was R15: €1. The court
ruled against Citrus Fruits on 23 April.
Damages suffered
On 17 April, a portion of the production plant was severely damaged by flooding caused by heavy rains. The cost of
the damage to the building was R10 250 000. It is expected that the proceeds from the insurance claim will cover
only about 60% of this. A provision has not been made in the financial statements regarding this loss.
REQUIRED
Discuss the impact of the two issues identified by your audit team member at the end of April on the current year’s
audit, assuming final materiality was set at R4 million. You may assume that the company does not intend to recall
the financial statements to make the necessary amendments.
[17]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Subsequent events
[11 marks]
You are a partner at the auditing firm Karma and Partners and responsible for the audit of Woods (Pty) Ltd (Woods).
Woods has a 31 October year-end. In carrying out the post balance sheet review, you identified the following issue:
Wood supplies imported wood to manufacturers of furniture and other wooden products. At year-end, a large
amount of inventory of wood was on hand. On 1 December 20X1, certain trading restrictions on wood were lifted,
causing the cost of these products to drop drastically.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the above situation, indicating how the matter should be dealt with in the financial statements for the
year-end 31 October. (5)
2. List the procedures commonly performed by the auditors to identify subsequent events. (6)
[11]
Question 7 LEVEL 3
Going concern
[12 marks]
You are the manager on the 20X9 audit of Lead Balloon Ltd (LB), a company that provides administrative services
to larger South African municipalities on a contract basis. These contracts are renegotiated on an annual basis.
Below is LB’s statement of financial position at 31 March 20X9, drafted on a going concern basis after the
company’s management did its going concern assessment:
20X9 (R) 20X8 (R)

Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 4 879 000 4 694 000
Intangible assets 320 000 2 686 000
Deferred tax 416 000 2 852 000
5 615 000 10 232 000
Current assets
Inventory 0 76 000
Current tax receivable 0 1 328 000
Trade and other receivables 6 328 000 14 988 000
Cash and cash equivalents 4 563 000 1 422 000
10 891 000 17 814 000
Total assets 16 506 000 28 046 000
Equity and liabilities

Capital and reserves
Share capital 18 122 000 18 122 000
BEE reserves (9 923 000) (9 923 000)
Revaluation reserve 1 706 000 615 000
Retained earnings (30 963 000) (21 677 000)
(21 058 000) (12 863 000)
Non-current liabilities
Interest bearing borrowings 86 000 22 760 000
Deferred tax 478 000 1 543 000
564 000 24 303 000
Current liabilities
Current tax payable 906 000 1 768 000
Interest bearing borrowings 23 678 000 88 000
Trade and other payables 12 416 000 14 750 000
37 000 000 16 606 000
Total equity and liabilities 16 506 000 28 046 000
Additional information: the R23 678 000 current liability as at March 20X9 relates to preference shares that are all
held by a single shareholder and are redeemable on 1 October 20X9.
REQUIRED
1. Per the International Standards on Auditing, what are the auditor’s general responsibilities regarding the going
assessment that was done by the client entity’s management? (3)
2. Given the financial information provided to you, what further audit work would you do regarding Lead Balloon
Ltd’s going concern status? (9)
[12]
Question 8 LEVEL 3
Going concern
[18 marks]
You are the auditor manager assigned to the audit of Super Cabs (Pty) Ltd (Super Cabs), a privately owned taxi cab
service. The company has a fleet of 50 vehicles which operates in Cape Town and Johannesburg. The financial year
under audit is 31 December 20X8.
The company has a wide range of vehicles available and operates from 5 am until midnight, seven days a week.
Prospective customers are able to reserve a cab via the company’s website or by calling the company’s central
operations office. The company employed a software developer to build an application for mobile devices which
will offer customers a third option for requesting a cab. The developer indicated that he hopes that the application
will be ready by the middle of 2020.
Super Cabs applied for a transport licence from OR Tambo and Cape Town international airports, which would
have allowed the company to pick up customers on the airports’ premises. However, the company was allowed only
the right to drop customers off at the airport, not to do pick-ups. The reason given by the airports for declining the
licence, which would have meant lucrative business for Super Cabs, is that too many private licences had already
been issued to other transportation companies.
During the financial year, legal proceedings were initiated against Super Cabs by one of the approved
transportation companies regarding illegal pick-ups made at the Cape Town International Airport. The pick-ups in
question were made whilst Super Cabs awaited the approval of its transport licence. The value of the lawsuit is R100
000.
The increasing popularity of individuals registering with the Ubuntu transport network system, a major
competitor of Super Cabs, has seen a massive decrease in the number of customers using the company’s services and
has translated in the company recording its first financial loss since incorporation. The Ubuntu transport system give
customers with smart phones the ability to submit a trip request which is routed to Ubuntu drivers in close proximity
of where the request was made. The Ubuntu drivers use their personal cars to transport customers to destinations.
The company signed a two-year contract, which is set to start on 1 January 20X9, with a large luxury hotel in
Cape Town as the sole shuttle service for the hotel. The contract was awarded on the basis that Super Cabs
purchased two luxury vehicles which were to be used solely for transporting the hotel’s guests over the next two
years. The company purchased the two vehicles at a cost of R500 000 each in December 20X8.
Certain drivers at the company have demanded an increase in wages as a result of their having to drive certain
‘dangerous’ routes at night. They have indicated that if their 10% wage increase is not met in January 20X9, they
will refuse to drive these routes or may embark on a wage-related strike.
Super Cabs defaulted on payment of its petrol bill in November 20X8. This outstanding bill amounts to R100
000. The company has indicated that it needed to retain cash funds in its bank account in order to qualify to purchase
the two additional vehicles needed for the contract with the luxury hotel. The petrol supplier indicated that it is no
longer allowed to purchase petrol on credit and has initiated legal proceedings against Super Cabs in order to collect
the outstanding bill.
The company is currently purchasing petrol at other petrol stations on a cash basis for its ongoing operations.
The chief operating officer has indicated that the company fully intends on settling its account within the next few
months and hopes that the petrol supplier will understand that withholding payment was purely a business decision
and that the company hopes to be able to resume the regular agreement once payment has been made.
The chief financial officer of Super Cabs resigned from the company two months before year-end and, to date, a
suitable replacement has not been found. A consultant has been contracted who comes in one week a month to
review the financial accounting records processed by the accounting clerk (a part-time financial accounting student
in his second year of studies).
The company does not have access to any other funds as its bank overdraft has been fully extended at year-end.
All of the company’s vehicles are under three years old, are in good condition and can be sold for cash quite
easily, albeit at an accounting loss.
The following is a schedule of key financial figures extracted from the annual financial statements at year-end:
DESCRIPTION RAND
Total assets 12 000 000
Current assets 450 000
Total liabilities 11 000 000
Current liabilities 540 000
Total equity 1 000 000
REQUIRED
Discuss whether or not Super Cabs will be able to disclose in its 20X8 financial statements that it will continue as a
going concern into the foreseeable future.
[18]
Question 9 LEVEL 3
Going concern
[16 marks]
You are the auditor of SA Videos (Pty) Ltd (SA Videos), a provider of home movie and video game rental services.
The company has 125 video rental stores located across the country. Its financial year currently subject to audit ends
31 December 20X8.
The company was incorporated in 1982 and was the number one video rental chain in the country for many
years, boasting as many as 275 video rental outlets at one point. With the increasing number of options being made
available to the South African market to stream movies and TV shows via their smart televisions and mobile
devices, the company has been making a loss for the past two years and has seen 25 of its outlets being closed down
during the 20X8 financial year.
Mr Hoskins, the former chief operating officer, retired in October 20X8 after faithfully serving the company for
20 years and is intent on travelling the world from 20X9 onwards. Mr Hoskins was replaced by Mrs Plaatjies as the
chief operating officer on 10 November 20X8. Mrs Plaatjies is known as a visionary and the board of directors is
confident that, with her leading the company, it will be profitable again in the near future.
Mrs Plaatjies believes that the vast majority of South Africans are not able to stream movies and TV shows due
to the high cost of internet services compared to other countries as well as the current bandwidth restrictions in the
country. She is of the opinion that the company needs to reconsider the current manner in which it offers its products
to customers.
Mrs Plaatjies appointed Mr Stewart, a marketing expert, to rebrand the company beginning in the 20X9 financial
year, with the aim of better servicing the needs of its customers. This includes launching a website as well as having
a greater social media presence.
During Mrs Plaatjies’s short tenure at the company, she has been able to negotiate contracts with several petrol
stations, convenience stores and large grocery stores to house automated video and game rental kiosks on their
premises. The first rental kiosks are expected to be installed by the end of January 20X9. Mrs Plaatjies envisions
having 1 000 mobile kiosks installed by the end of the 20X9 financial year.
The board voted five to one in favour of the project. One of the board members had a concern about the new
project as it requires customers to use their credit cards in order to rent the movies or games at the rental kiosks,
instead of having a cash option too. She felt that the South African market was not ready for a product of this nature.
Mrs Plaatjies indicated that the reason why rentals had to be made using a credit card arose due to the possibility of
customers not returning the products on time or at all. A credit card allows a ‘deposit’ to be reserved when the
transaction takes place. Where a customer returns the product within four days, the customer will receive his/her
deposit back via the credit card and will be charged a rental fee only for the four days. Where a customer fails to
return the product within four days, his/her credit card will be charged the full reserved deposit price, equal to
acquiring ownership of the product. A customer who falls into this category will not be permitted to return the
product to the rental kiosk from where he/she obtained the product.
The company suffered losses in the past when customers did not return movies and games, and Mrs Plaatjies
envisions rolling this particular payment system out to local stores too in the next couple of years. For this purpose,
SA Videos approached its bank for a R5 million loan, but was rejected as the company’s credit was already totally
extended. The company was able to negotiate a loan with another bank on 30 December 20X8, despite the company
having made losses over the past two years. The bank indicated that the money will be paid into the company’s bank
account on 2 January 20X6. The bank manager indicated that the reason he is willing to grant the loan is based on
Mrs Plaatjies’s reputation – he believes that she will ensure that the company honours its monthly repayments until
the loan is settled in five years’ time.
Part of the money will be used to fund the initial roll-out of the mobile kiosks and the remainder of the loan will
be used to settle some of the company’s existing debt, which it was unable to repay over the past six months. The
company has been informed by one creditor, whom it owes R250 000, that if it is not able to settle its debt by 15
January 20X9, the creditor will be forced to take steps to make sure that the company is put into liquidation.
The shareholders of SA Videos are unable to contribute any more money to the company and are hoping for a
quick turnaround in the financial situation as they have not received a dividend in nearly three years.
The following is a summary of the key financial figures of the company at year-end:
DESCRIPTION RAND
Total assets 14 500 000
Current assets 1 050 000
Total liabilities 12 000 000
Current liabilities 1 600 000
Total equity 2 500 000
REQUIRED
Discuss whether or not SA Videos will be able to disclose in its 20X8 financial statements that it will continue as a
going concern into the foreseeable future.
[16]
Question 10 LEVEL 2
Going concern
[15 marks]
You are a partner at the auditing firm Karma and Partners and responsible for the audit of Universal Projects (Pty)
Ltd (Universal Projects), a company that specialises in organising large corporate events. You are currently busy
with the final phase of the audit for the 30 October year-end.
You have identified various issues concerning the financial position of the company, including the following:
The company has a very significant long-term loan that is due to be repaid. The cash flow of the company has
suffered severely due to fewer projects being undertaken this year and, as a result, it appears that the repayment
terms may not be met.
The liquidity ratio is less than favourable and far below the industry norm.
There is a large claim against the company. Inspection of the letter from the company’s attorneys confirmed that
the company will most likely lose the case and will have to settle. The settlement is substantial and will severely
impact its trading future.
After issuing the appropriate audit report to the client but before the release of the report to the organisation, you
read a report in a financial newspaper regarding the liquidation of one of the largest debtors of Universal Projects.
You are aware that if this debt is not recovered, the company will not be able to continue trading.
REQUIRED
List the additional procedures that you, as the auditor, would perform in order to assess the ability of the company to
continue as a going concern.
[15]
Question 11 LEVEL 2
Going concern
[21 marks]
You are the audit manager on the 31 December 20X8 audit of Seatron (Pty) Ltd (Seatron), a manufacturer of
specialist vehicle seats. Responsible for producing the complete seating structure, including the frame, the
adjustment mechanism, the safety systems, the upholstery and the head restraints, the company supplies the
completed seating units (according to strict design specifications) to vehicle manufacturers, who install them into
their vehicles with virtually no need for further modification.
At present, Seatron supplies products to one customer only, DNW Ltd (DNW), an international manufacturer of
luxury motor cars with a plant situated close to Seatron’s own factory. Although DNW exports most of the vehicles
it manufactures to Europe and Asia, the company indicated early in 20X8 that it might relocate its manufacturing
operations from South Africa to South America in 20X9 as a result of continuous local labour problems.
Accordingly, the management of Seatron has entered into negotiations with DNW with a view to continuing to
supply their seating units to DNW at their proposed South American plant. However, Seatron intends retaining their
factory in South Africa.
The news that DNW will discontinue its South African manufacturing operations has led to several technicians
and engineers leaving Seatron in order to join their biggest overseas competitor. As a result of the consequent skills
shortage, some manufacturing errors in seat production have occurred, with the result that DNW have had to return
faulty units to Seatron.
In addition, Seatron’s sales to DNW have steadily decreased during 20X8 owing to a worldwide drop in demand
for the latter’s luxury vehicles. Seatron’s profit margins have thus become tight, as attempts at cutting costs have
proven futile.
The above difficulties prompted Seatron’s management to prepare a going concern assessment, in which it outlined
the current risks to the company’s ability to continue operations into 20X9. In addition, the assessment includes a
profit forecast detailing Seatron’s expected sales and profits, as well as a description of several mitigating factors
that management hopes will ensure that the company remains viable:
Headhunting experts from across the globe and offering them competitive remuneration packages in order to
replace those staff members who have resigned
Entering into negotiations with other manufacturers of luxury vehicles in South Africa with a view to supplying
them with seating units
Expanding into additional and highly profitable lines of business, such as advanced vehicle audio and digital
electronics, which, it is hoped, will increase sales and customer base
Despite the challenges facing the company, Seatron’s management prepared the company’s 20X8 financial
statements on the going concern basis of accounting. The company has two non-executive directors on its board.
REQUIRED
1. With reference to the information provided, describe the detailed audit procedures you will perform on the
appropriateness of the going concern assumption used in the 20X8 annual financial statements of Seatron (Pty)
Ltd. (16)
2. Discuss the effect of the audit report on Seatron’s 20X8 financial year should it be concluded that material
uncertainty exists about the company’s ability to continue as a going concern. (5)
[21]
Question 12 LEVEL 2
Materiality
[14 marks]
You are the audit manager on the audit of Teatime (Pty) Limited (Teatime), a company that produces tea and related
products at its manufacturing facility in Malmesbury. Teatime has a March financial year-end. Final materiality has
been calculated at R200 000.
In order to finalise the audit, you have requested the third-year audit trainee to summarise all the misstatements
arising from the individual audit sections that were audited. She presents you with the following:
Matter 1
The financial manager presented the audit team with the following schedule in respect of the building in which the
tea is processed:
Opening balance 13 390 000

Add: improvements 210 000
Less: depreciation 1 000 000
Closing balance 12 500 000
Sufficient audit evidence has been performed on the opening and the closing balances for the year under review.
The R210 000 capitalised by the chief financial officer relates to material and labour costs incurred repairing a
portion of the building damaged by fire, costs that neither improved the capacity of the building nor resulted in
Teatime being able to process more tea.
The improvements were completed on 30 June of the current year, and the company started accounting for
depreciation on the improvement from 1 July. The total depreciation expensed through the statement of
comprehensive income for the current financial year under review was R1 million, of which R5 250 related to the
improvements.
Matter 2
During the course of the year, the company installed a new machine that increases the rate at which tea is processed
by 20%. The total cost of the machine was R1,5 million.
The company paid a logistics firm R25 000 to transport the machine to Malmesbury from Durban, whereupon an
engineer from the manufacturer installed it at a cost of R75 000. The machine was available for use on 31 March. No
journal entries were processed by the financial accountant relating to the machine purchased. It is company policy to
depreciate such machines over a period of five years.
Matter 3
As a result of an inspection of the minutes of board of directors meetings and discussions held with the chief
financial officer, it was established that Teatime has been sued by a Mr Samuels for an amount of R5,5 million. Mr
Samuels claims that he had to undergo an emergency operation after drinking tea processed by Teatime. The
application was served on the company during February of the current financial year. The hearing is scheduled to
take place in June of the following financial year. The claim, if successful, will settle Mr Samuels’s outstanding
medical bills and compensate him for lost remuneration.
The man claims that he purchased caffeine-free tea, as he is allergic to caffeine, but caffeinated tea had been
incorrectly packaged in a caffeine-free box. Based on the evidence presented to them, legal advisors have indicated
that there is a 95% possibility that Mr Samuels’s claim could be successful. A provision for the lawsuit was not
made by year-end.
REQUIRED
Discuss the materiality impact of each misstatement identified on the financial statements of Teatime for the
financial year under review.
[14]
Matter 1
Maintenance
a) It is a factual difference. (1)
b) The building account is quantitatively misstated. This arose as a result of management inappropriately
capitalising maintenance costs. The amount is above the final materiality figure. (1)
c) Each of the building and the maintenance accounts is overstated by R210 000. (1)
d) The management of Teatime will be required to adjust the financial statements in order to achieve fair
presentation. (1)
Depreciation
b) The depreciation is overstated by R5 250 and is immaterial. (1)
c) The management of Teatime is not required to make any adjustments. The amount may be transferred
to the overs/unders list. (1)
Matter 2
b) The machinery account is quantitatively misstated. This arose as a result of management not
processing any journal entries related to the acquisition of the machine. The amount is above the final
materiality figure. (1)
c) The machinery account is understated by R1,6 million (R1 500 000 + R25 000 + R75 000). (2)
presentation. (1)
Matter 3
a) It is a judgemental difference. (1)
b) The provision for the lawsuit is quantitatively misstated. This arose as a result of management not
providing for the lawsuit. The amount is above the final materiality figure. (1)
c) The provision for the lawsuit is understated by R5,5 million. (1)
presentation. (1)
Combined effect of immaterial errors

The only error is the R5 250 depreciation, which will not be material. (1)
Question 13 LEVEL 3
Final materiality
[13 marks]
Central Prime Ltd (Central Prime) owns and manages a number of shopping malls and office buildings across the
country. The company’s financial year currently under audit by Barnes and Belken Inc. ended 31 December.
The planning materiality level for the audit was set at R8,5 million by means of applying the revenue figure of
R850 million (1%) in the draft set of financial statements as a benchmark. The company’s revenue consists primarily
of rental income on its various properties.
During the course of the audit, it was discovered that the financial accountant, who had been appointed during
the financial year, had erroneously misapplied accounting standards, with the result that the revenue figure had to be
restated. Accordingly, the audited revenue figure amounted to R730 million, and not R850 million as per the draft
set of financial statements.
The assistant audit manager proposed that the audit team ‘not waste time’ in considering adapting the materiality
level of R8,5 million, despite the restatement of the revenue figure. In the assistant audit manager’s opinion, no
adjustment to materiality is necessary owing to the planning work papers on the audit file having already been
reviewed and signed off by the engagement partner.
REQUIRED
1. Comment on the assistant audit manager’s opinion that it is not necessary to consider adapting the planning
materiality level for the audit. Provide reasons for your answer in terms of the International Standards on
Auditing. (6)
2. Discuss in broad terms the impact that the revelation of the erroneous application of the accounting standards will
have on audit risk and the extent of audit procedures. (3)
3. State whether the materiality level should be increased to R9 million if, by the conclusion phase of the audit, the
audited revenue figure of Central Prime for its financial year ended 31 December was R900 million, adjusted
from R850 million as a result of the misapplication of accounting standards. Explain your answer briefly. (4)
[13]
Question 14 LEVEL 2
Audit differences
[10 marks]
You are the partner in charge of the audit of the financial statements of Blunder Ltd (Blunder) for the year ended 31
December 20X1. You are now busy with the evaluating, concluding and reporting stage of the audit process, and
have to consider the impact on the audit report of misstatements as per the schedule of unadjusted audit differences.
Final materiality for the audit has been set at R6 000 000.
Scenario 1
The schedule of unadjusted audit differences reflects that:
the sales line item has been overstated by R7 200 000
the cost of sales line item has been overstated by R7 800 000.
Scenario 2
The schedule of unadjusted audit differences reflects that:
the property, plant and equipment line item has been overstated by R2 900 000
the inventory line item has been overstated by R900 000.
Scenario 3
The schedule of unadjusted differences reflects that the company incurred a fine of close to US$1,5 million during
the 20X1 financial year. Management is unwilling to disclose this in the financial statements and you are of the
opinion that it is highly unlikely that the company will be able to pay the fine amount when it becomes due the next
month.
REQUIRED
For each of the above scenarios, discuss the impact of the information provided on the audit report.
[10]
Question 15 LEVEL 2
Audit differences
[12 marks]
You are the senior auditor on the audit of Linen World (Pty) Ltd (Linen World), a company that sells a wide variety
of linen from its stores located around the country. The company has a December financial year-end. The materiality
at the company has been set at R300 000. During the completion stage of the audit, the following audit difference
was brought to your attention by the audit team:
1. In order to increase the company’s net asset value, the directors changed the accounting policy for the buildings
owned by the company from the cost basis to the revaluation basis. The company revalued all of its buildings on
31 March and stopped depreciating its buildings on the same date. Management has indicated that they have not
processed any depreciation as the revaluation method of accounting indicates that they do not have to. The total
depreciation that should have been expensed through the statement of comprehensive income should have been R
800 000 had the revaluation basis been applied properly.
2. The company changed the useful life of its entire delivery vehicle fleet from five years to 10 years. Management
could not justify why they changed the useful life of all the vehicles and it is your opinion that the depreciation
charge for the year has been understated by R200 000.
3. The executive directors at the company refuse to disclose their remuneration separately in the company’s year-end
financial statements and have opted to disclose their remuneration and other emoluments along with the other
employees’ salaries at the company. The total of directors emoluments for the current year is R800 000.
REQUIRED
Discuss the impact the audit differences had on the audit opinion. In doing so, compile a summary of these
unadjusted audit differences. From the summary, conclude if these differences are individually material and indicate
the impact it will have on the audit opinion.
[12]
Question 16 LEVEL 2
Audit differences
[12 marks]
You are the senior auditor on the audit of Tasty (Pty) Ltd (Tasty). The company supplies a wide range of spices and
condiments to wholesalers as well as the public. Materiality has been set at R500 000 for the current year’s audit.
The audit has reached the finalisation stage and the following has been documented on file:
Improvements made to the administration building
The buildings account has been satisfactorily audited but the following has not yet been resolved. An amount of
R700 000 has been capitalised as improvements to the building. On further investigation, the audit trainee found that
the amount related to repairs that were made to the administration building as a result of a fire which had destroyed a
portion of the building. A faulty cable caused the fire.
Impairment of assets
Machines with a collective carrying value of R2 100 000 (cost: R3 million; accumulated depreciation: R900 000)
were damaged beyond repair or salvage when a sprinkler system malfunctioned in a section of the production
facility three days before year-end.
The chief financial officer processed the following journal entry for the affected machines:
DESCRIPTION DEBIT CREDIT

Retained income R2 100 000
Accumulated depreciation R800 000
Assets R3 million
Allowance for credit losses

Tasty’s allowance for credit losses provided for in the statement of comprehensive income during the current year is
R750 000. The value determined by a member of your audit team for the allowance for credit losses amounts to R1
100 000.
Labelling on certain condiments

It was brought to your attention by one of the audit trainees that the label used on certain of the products
manufactured was in fact misleading as the ingredients that were used the most were stated last on the list instead of
first as prescribed by regulation R146 in terms of the South African food labelling regulations.
REQUIRED
Advise the audit clerk what he/she should do and what the impact would be on the audit report if Tasty failed to
heed the advice (where applicable).
All audit differences must be discussed in isolation and income tax implications should be ignored.
[12]
Question 17 LEVEL 2
Evaluation of misstatements
[15 marks]
You are the manager on the 28 February 20X1 audit, currently in its finalising phase, of Musicon (Pty) Ltd
(Musicon), a national retailer of music CDs and DVDs. The following misstatements in the financial statements
have not been corrected by management:
1. Musicon purchased a large number of CDs featuring the music of an international artist, Frightening Freddy, who
1.
was due for a concert tour of the country in March 20X1. However, the tour was cancelled after Freddy became
embroiled in a scandal involving him locking his girlfriend in a closet for almost a whole day after a domestic
altercation. A public outcry followed, with even ardent fans boycotting Freddy’s music. Audit evidence suggests
that Musicon’s inventory consisting of Freddy‘s music CDs at 28 February 20X1 should be valued at R500 000 at
year-end, instead of the recorded value of R750 000. This is based on calculations by Musicon’s sales department
which show that the CDs will not trade if they are not sold below cost.
2. In February 20X1, Musicon was sued by a customer for R500 000 in damages when the facility that allows
customers to preview music malfunctioned: the volume of the music automatically rose so high that the customer
experienced a degree of hearing loss. The company’s legal representative indicated to the audit team that at
year-end it was highly likely that the aggrieved customer would be successful in his lawsuit. The management of
Musicon has not recorded any compensatory amount or made any disclosure in its 20X1 financial statements, in
relation to the lawsuit.
3. Inspection of the bank statement for April 20X1 revealed a payment of R150 000 made by Musicon to a supplier
for inventory recorded as assets (and a related trade creditor raised) at 28 February 20X1. Further investigation
revealed, however, that the GRN generated for said inventory was signed and dated 3 March 20X1.
The final materiality for Musicon’s 20X1 audit is R350 000.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the materiality and the nature of the above misstatements, both separately and on aggregate. Ignore any
VAT implications. (12)
2. Assuming that management will correct misstatements 1 and 3, but not misstatement 2, discuss the effect that
misstatement 2 will have on the audit report to be issued for the 20X1 financial statements of Musicon. (3)
[15]
Question 18 LEVEL 3
Audit conclusion
[12 marks]
You are an audit manager at a well-known audit firm. The following matters have been brought to your attention in
the finalising of the audits of several of your clients with a September 20X1 year-end:
Company 1 – Light Distributors (Pty) Ltd

Light Distributors (Pty) Ltd (Light Distributors) has used Super Logistics CC to transport lights from its warehouse
to retailers for the past five years. However, Super Logistics CC was put into sequestration on 25 September. Light
Distributors was unable to find another transport company capable of satisfying its logistical needs.
As a temporary emergency measure, the company subsequently decided to lease two trucks on 28 September.
The lease contract was for one month and ended on 28 October. The trucks were not depreciated, but were
capitalised at R220 000 each at year-end.
You advised the chief financial officer of Light Distributors that the treatment of the trucks was not in
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, but he indicated that the company is not willing to
amend the financial statements.
The final materiality for the audit has been set at R200 000.
Company 2 – Dynamic Investments Group

Dynamic Investments (Pty) Ltd (Dynamic Investments), a holding company in the Dynamic Investments Group
being audited, is 51% owned by Mr Jack Peterson (who is also the company’s chief operating officer) and Mrs Betty
Peterson (who is the chief financial officer). The remaining shares are held by 19 other investors. The company
acquired a controlling stake in Cape Town Diners (Pty) Ltd (Cape Town Diners), a well-established restaurant chain
located in the Western Cape. The acquisition was concluded on 5 September of the year under audit, when the R12
million acquisition price was settled.
Dynamic Investments has, however, not consolidated its new investment at the end of the financial year into the
group financial statements, stating that due to Dynamic Investments and Cape Town Diners having two different
financial year-ends, it will be too complex to consolidate the results. Mrs Peterson has indicated that they plan on
changing Cape Town Diners’ year-end in the next year in order for consolidation to be possible going forward. The
investment in Cape Town Diners is accounted for at cost in Dynamic Investments’s financial statements at year-end.
The following note has been included in the financial statements:
Note 24: Acquisition of new business

Dynamic Investments (Pty) Limited has acquired Cape Town Diners (Pty) Limited during the financial
year. This is the company’s biggest acquisition to date and the board of directors believe that the return
on investment for shareholders as a result of this acquisition will be significant. Due to differing financial
year-ends however, the investment will not be consolidated into the group financial statements.
The final materiality for the consolidated financial statements of the Dynamic Investments Group has been set at R1
500 000.
Company 3 – Wealthy Investments (Pty) Ltd

Wealthy Investments (Pty) Ltd has been forced to shut down temporarily while investigations are being conducted
by the South African Police Service. The police allege that the company is being used to launder money from illegal
activities conducted by friends of the company’s chief executive officer.
The police seized all of the company’s accounting records on 7 October and have indicated that they will return
the records once the police investigation has been completed, which is expected to take at least two months.
The year-end audit commenced on 5 October and the financial statements were expected to be signed off by 24
October, as the company’s bank requested a copy of the financial statements on this date.
The audit firm you are employed at was appointed one month before year-end and an interim audit was therefore
not possible.
The final materiality level for the audit of Wealthy Investments has been set at R3 000 000.
REQUIRED
Discuss the impact that each of the above-mentioned matters will have on the audit opinion of the respective clients.
[12]
Question 19 LEVEL 1
Reporting
[10 marks]
The International Standard on Auditing (ISA) 700 (forming an opinion and reporting on financial statement) states
that an auditor should form an opinion on the financial statement based on the evaluation of the conclusion drawn
from the audit evidence.
REQUIRED
Consider whether the following statements are true or false, and if false, motivate your answer.
The auditor shall evaluate whether:

1. the financial statements adequately disclose the significant accounting policies selected and applied
2. sufficient appropriate audit evidence has been obtained
3. the accounting policies selected and applied are consistent with the applicable financial reporting framework and
are appropriate
4. all material events occurring 12 months after the reporting date have been appropriately dealt with
5. all qualitative aspects of the entity’s accounting practices, including indicators of possible bias in management
judgement, have been considered
6. the information presented in the financial statements is relevant, material, complete and understandable
7. all misstatements (including clearly trivial misstatements) which have been identified during the audit result in a
material misstatement of financial information
8. the financial statements, including the related notes, represent the underlying transactions and events in a manner
that achieves reasonable presentation
9. the accounting estimates made by management are reasonable
10. the terminology used in the financial statements is appropriate.
[10]
Question 20 LEVEL 2
Reporting
[11 marks]
Rhaindeer (Pty) Ltd (Rhaindeer) manufactures a wide range of clothing for the local and overseas market. For its
20X1 financial year, ending on 31 December, its auditor came to the conclusion that a material uncertainty exists
which may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern. Management did not disclose
this observation in the financial statements, but did mention the possible going concern difficulties in the directors’
report.
Since the matter affects the auditor’s opinion, the auditor concluded, based on audit evidence obtained, that
Rhaindeer’s financial statements as a whole are not free from material misstatement. The auditor further concluded
that the effect is material, but not pervasive.
This decision was based on the following pertinent information:

Rhaindeer incurred a loss of R32 593 400 in its 20X1 financial year.
Liquidity is under significant pressure as a result of an inability to sell inventory and collect long-outstanding
debts from its trade debtors.
The company has lost much of its overdraft facility and creditors have restricted their credit terms.
Subordination agreements from large creditors and Rhaindeer’s parent company have been sought, but to no avail.
These agreements are important in the company’s ability to remain technically solvent.
A long-term loan of R20 million becomes payable on 30 April 20X2. Management is in the process of negotiating
extended terms – an important factor in ensuring solvency.
The financial manager of Rhaindeer made the following comments during a meeting with senior staff (of Rhaindeer)
and the engagement partner on the audit:
It is ridiculous to think that an auditor should report on the going concern ability of a client company. The
auditor is there to report on the financial statements – not the business itself. Auditors should involve
themselves with the accounting aspects of a company and leave the running of the business to
management.
REQUIRED
1. Prepare the ‘basis for qualified opinion’ and ‘qualified opinion’ paragraphs for inclusion in the audit report that
will be issued along with the 20X1 financial statements of Rhaindeer.
2. State whether you agree or not with the comments made by the financial manager of Rhaindeer and provide
reasons to support your answer. You are not required to address matters impacting on the Companies Act 71 of
2008.
[11]
Question 21 LEVEL 2
Reporting
[17 marks]
PART A
The engagement partner on the audit of Burtrams (Pty) Ltd (Burtrams) concluded that a qualified audit opinion
should be expressed on the company’s financial statements for the year ended 30 September 20X1.
The auditor obtained sufficient appropriate audit evidence in order to conclude that Burtrams will more than likely
not be able to finance its operations in the near future or pay off its short-term debt, as the company has been unable
to extend its bank overdraft facilities or renegotiate an extension of a short-term loan that becomes payable in full on
14 November 20X2. Additional finance is necessary in order to acquire inventory and continue payment of
month-to-month expenses, including salaries and wages, and it is as yet uncertain whether the additional finance can
be obtained.
In formulating his opinion, the engagement partner considered the following four scenarios:
A: B:
The use of the going concern assumption is The use of the going concern assumption is
appropriate, but material uncertainty exists, and appropriate, but material uncertainty exists, and
disclosure in financial statements is adequate. there is inadequate disclosure in financial
statements.
C: D:
The use of the going concern assumption is The auditor is unable to obtain sufficient
inappropriate, but financial statements have been appropriate audit evidence in order to support the
prepared on the going concern basis of going concern assumption. The effect is pervasive
accounting. in nature.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the effect that each of the four scenarios above will have on an auditor’s report. (6)
2. Given the conclusion reached by the engagement partner, draft the appropriate Basis for Qualified Opinion
paragraph for inclusion in the audit report to be issued for the 201X1 financial statements of Burtrams. (3)
PART B
Nortums (Pty) Ltd (Nortums) is incorporated in South Africa, while its holding company, Gordums Holdings
(Gordums), which has an 80% shareholding in Nortums, is registered in the Bahamas. Gordums issues consolidated
A South African-based audit firm was appointed to express an opinion on the separate annual financial statements of
Nortums in terms of the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). The audit engagement team noted the
following from Nortums’s 20X1 draft financial statements:
1. No disclosure is made of the relationship between Nortums and its parent company, Gordums. In addition,
purchases by Nortums from Gordums to the value of R2.5 million were not disclosed, even though the
transactions were fully recorded in the subsidiary’s financial records and included in its statement of profit and
loss. The amount is below the final materiality level.
2. Despite Nortums’s requiring a statutory audit in terms of the Companies Act 71 of 2008, no separate disclosure is
made in the financial statements of directors’ emoluments. However, the applicable amounts are included under
expenditure in the statement of profit and loss.
Management indicated that they are not willing to make any amendments to the financial statements in relation to
the above issues.
REQUIRED
Discuss separately the effect that the two issues above will have on the audit opinion and audit report for the 20X1
financial statements of Nortums. (8)
[17]
PART A
1. For A to C, ISA 570 (Going Concern) outlines the requirements in relation to the audit report.
a) A: An unqualified opinion will be expressed on the financial statements, (1)
but an Emphasis of Matter paragraph highlighting the existence of a material uncertainty as disclosed by management in
the financial statements will be included. (1)
b) B: Either a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion will be expressed on the financial statements, depending on
the pervasiveness of the non-disclosure. (1)
In such a case, ISA 570.20 further requires the auditor to state in his/her report (in the Basis for Qualified Opinion
paragraph) that there is material uncertainty that could cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going
concern. (1)
c) C: An adverse opinion on the financial statements will be expressed. (1)
d) D: A disclaimer of opinion will be expressed on the financial statements. (1)
2. Basis for Qualified Opinion
The company’s financing arrangements expire, and amounts outstanding are payable on 15 November 20X2. The
company has been unable to renegotiate or obtain replacement financing, which indicates the existence of a
material uncertainty that could cast significant doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern.
Therefore, it may be unable to realise its assets and discharge its liabilities in the normal course of business, which
is not disclosed in the financial statements. (3)
Available marks [6 + 3]; maximum marks [9]
PART B
1. Failure to disclose related party transactions
a) In terms of IAS 24.9, Gordums is a related party to Nortums, and this relationship should be disclosed as such in
1.
the notes to the financial statements (IAS 24.13). (1)

b) The purchase transactions undertaken by Nortums from Gordums should be disclosed separately from their
inclusion in the statement of profit and loss. (1)
c) Both the subsidiary–parent relationship and the purchase transactions are qualitatively material (that is, material
in nature), as users of Nortum’s financial statements will likely be interested to know not only about the
ultimate controlling entity of Nortums, but also the extent of intercompany transactions. (1)
d) A qualified opinion will therefore have to be expressed on the financial statements of Nortums should
management not be willing to correct this matter. (1)
e) In the Basis for Qualified Opinion paragraph, the auditor will state the details around the non-disclosure of the
related party, as well as the nature of, and the amounts involved in, the related party transactions. (1)
2. Failure to disclose directors’ emoluments
a) In terms of IAS 24.17, a company has to disclose the compensation paid to its key management personnel,
which includes remuneration paid to its directors. (1)
i) The non-disclosure of the remuneration, despite it having been recorded in the accounting records and
included in the statement of profit and loss, results in a qualitative material misstatement (and a
quantitative one, should any or all of the amounts in question be above the final materiality level). (1)
ii) The auditor will express a qualified opinion on the financial statements and the auditor will describe the
reasons for the qualification in the Basis for Qualified Opinion paragraph, (1)
since the misstatement is confined to a specific element of the financial statements only, and is therefore
not pervasive in nature. (1)
(b) i) In addition, section 30(4) of the Companies Act 71 of 2008 requires companies subject to a statutory audit to
include particulars of their directors’ remuneration in its annual financial statements. (1)
ii) Non-disclosure will give rise to a reportable irregularity, which will have to be reported in a paragraph under
the Report on Other Legal and Regulatory Requirements included in the audit report. (1)
Question 22 LEVEL 2
Reporting
[21 marks]
You are the manager on the 31 December 20X1 statutory audit of Ithuta Education Ltd (Ithuta), an unlisted national
company providing private schooling services. Based on the conclusions reached from the audit evidence obtained,
an unqualified audit opinion is to be expressed on the financial statements. A reportable irregularity did exist, in that
the directors knowingly held back returns from SARS relating to VAT on account of cash flow constraints.
The reportable irregularity was reported to the Independent Regulatory Board for Auditors. No material
misstatement to the financial statements resulted.
A junior trainee accountant on the audit, who requested an opportunity to draft the audit report in order to expand his
understanding of the reporting phase of the audit, has submitted the following report:
Report of the External Auditor

To the board of directors of Ithuta Education Ltd
We have audited the financial statements of Ithuta Education Ltd as set out in the annual report, which
statements comprise the statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X1, the statement of
comprehensive income, the statement of changes in equity and the statement of cash flows for the year
then ended.
Directors’ responsibility for the financial statements
The company’s directors are responsible for:

the preparation and fair presentation of these financial statements in accordance with International
Financial Reporting Standards and the requirements of the Companies Act of South Africa; and
such internal control as the directors deem necessary in order to enable the preparation of financial
statements free from material misstatement, whether as a result of fraud or error.
The auditor hereby does not accept any responsibility for either the fair presentation of the financial
statements or the effectiveness of internal controls.
Basis for unqualified opinion
As a result of the sufficient appropriate audit evidence obtained, there was no reason to modify the audit
opinion. A clean audit report is therefore issued.
Unqualified opinion
In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of
Ithuta Education Ltd as at 31 December 20X1, as well as its financial performance and cash flows for the
year then ended in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards and the requirements of
the Companies Act of South Africa.
Emphasis of matter
The International Standards on Auditing require us to alert users of the financial statements where any
form of non-compliance with laws and regulations have occurred. We hereby emphasise the fact that a
reportable irregularity took place, in that the board of directors did knowingly hold back returns from the
South African Revenue Service relating to value-added tax in contravention of the Value Added Tax Act
89 of 1991.
[Insert auditor’s signature here]
JDF & Lovitz Incorporated

Registered Auditors
Per: S Johnston CA(SA) RA: Director
31 Graceway
Blue Hills
Crowburgh
REQUIRED
Indicate the errors in, and omissions from, the draft 20X1 audit report of Ithuta Education Ltd submitted by the
junior trainee accountant, describing the appropriate treatment for each error/omission identified. A rewrite of any
particular paragraph is not required.
[21]
Question 23 LEVEL 2
Reporting
[13 marks]
You are an audit manager at Tickbird Inc. (Tickbird). The following issues have been brought to your attention in
the finalising of the audits of three of your December year-end clients:
Client 1: Fast-Food (Pty) Ltd (Fast-Food)

A class A lawsuit has been brought against Fast-Food. Mr Roberts, the attorney representing the class, has indicated
that over the course of the year claimants had received spam SMSs offering fast-food deals, with some customers
receiving up to 10 SMSs over a period of a few weeks.
As a result, many of the claimants had suffered a lack of sleep. He indicated that the franchise had obtained the
claimants’ mobile numbers when they had requested that orders be delivered. The total value of the lawsuit at
year-end was R10 million.
Mrs Leagel, the attorney for Fast-Food, has advised that the company is likely to be found guilty as charged, but
could not give an estimate of the damages to be awarded. Owing to the fact that the matter was still unresolved at
year-end, the directors are not willing to account for or disclose this transaction.
Final materiality for the Fast-Food audit has been determined at R6.7 million.
Client 2: Easy-Travel (Pty) Limited (Easy-Travel)

The profitability of the travel agency has been greatly affected by the increasing number of individuals making use
of online resources when planning and booking vacations, because often they are able to obtain better rates than
those offered by Easy-Travel.
The company has disclosed in the annual financial statements the impact that the decrease in the number of
clients has had on the ability of the company to continue as a going concern. The financial statements have been
drafted accordingly.
Client 3: Island Hospitality (Pty) Ltd (Island Hospitality)

The only hotel operated by this company burnt down two hours before the end of the financial year when a sprinkler
system malfunctioned after a fire broke out during a New Year’s Eve party. Although there were no casualties, by
the time the fire department arrived, 95% of the hotel (including the office where all the accounting records had been
stored) had burnt down.
The financial statements have been prepared from the information that the accountant had stored on his personal
computer.
REQUIRED
Discuss the impact that the above-mentioned issues will have on the audit opinion of the respective clients.
Mark allocation
Client 1 (5)
Client 2 (4)
Client 3 (4)
[13]
Question 24 LEVEL 2
Reporting
[13 marks]
The audit team engaged in the external audit of Rolotech (Pty) Ltd (Rolotech) for its financial year ended 30
September 20X6 is currently finalising its audit.
During the year, Rolotech suffered a fire at head office that caused the destruction in its accounting department
of some masterfile data relating to the company’s accounts receivable and inventory. Unfortunately, management’s
attempts at restoring backups were largely unsuccessful, as a result of which the audit team is unable to audit a
significant part of the accounts receivable and inventory balances.
A first-year trainee accountant on the audit made the following comment:
Companies should take greater care in protecting their financial data. Rolotech (Pty) Ltd would not have
been subject to data loss of this magnitude if it had had stronger internal controls over its backup
procedures. We should therefore express an adverse opinion on Rolotech (Pty) Ltd’s 20X6 financial
statements in order to make it clear to shareholders the extent of our difficulty in obtaining audit evidence
about debtors and inventory.
REQUIRED
1. State the three different types of modifications to an audit opinion. (2)
2. Explain the terms ‘scope limitation’ and ‘pervasive’ in the context of modifications to audit opinions. (5)
3. Explain why the first-year trainee accountant’s comment is misguided as to the type of modified audit opinion that
should be issued for the 20X6 financial statement of Rolotech (Pty) Ltd. (3)
4. Assuming that the auditor will disclaim his/her opinion on the financial statements of the company, draft the audit
opinion paragraph – with a heading – for inclusion in the audit report. (3)
[13]
1. Qualified opinion (1)

Adverse opinion (1)
Disclaimer of opinion (1)
2.
a) A scope limitation applies where an auditor is unable to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence for specific
amounts and/or disclosures in the financial statements on which to base the audit opinion. (1)
b) The auditor will conclude that the possible effects on the financial statements of undetected misstatements, if
any, as a result of the limitation of scope, are either:
i) material but not pervasive, in which case the auditor will express a qualified opinion; or (1)
ii) pervasive in nature, in which case the auditor will disclaim his/her audit opinion accordingly. (1)
c) ‘Pervasive’ is a term used to describe the effects of uncorrected misstatements on financial statements, and the
effects of possible undetected misstatements (in the case of the latter, as a result of a scope limitation). (1)
d) Such misstatements are typically not confined to specific aspects of the financial statements only, but are rather
substantial in proportion to the financial statements as a whole or are fundamental to the users’ understanding.
e) Where misstatements are pervasive in nature, the auditor either expresses an adverse opinion or disclaims (1)
his/her opinion. (1)
3.
a) As the audit was subject to a scope limitation, either a qualified opinion or a disclaimer of opinion (and not an
adverse opinion), depending on the pervasiveness of the scope limitation, is required. (1)
b) An adverse opinion does not signal an auditor’s inability to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence. (1)
Such an opinion is expressed rather when the auditor did obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence, but
concluded, as a result of the evidence, that the financial statements were materially misstated in a pervasive
way. (1)
4.
4. Disclaimer of Opinion (1)
Because of the significance of the matters described in the Basis for Disclaimer of Opinion paragraph, we
have not been able to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence in order to provide a basis for an audit opinion.
Accordingly, we do not express an opinion on the financial statements. (2)
[13]
Question 25 LEVEL 2
Reporting
[15 marks]
You are the financial accountant at Saniprise Ltd (Saniprise), a large, unlisted manufacturer and exporter of
hand-sanitising and chemical cleaning products. The company’s financial year end was 30 September 20X1, and it is
management’s intention to issue the financial statements to shareholders on 1 December 20X1.
It is now mid-October 20X1 and the draft financial statements have been prepared for the purpose of the external
audit, which is due to commence shortly. However, the following issues have not yet been dealt with in the 20X1
financial statements:
On 6 October 20X1, management declared cash dividends to the value of R22.5 million, payment of which to
shareholders is due on 5 December 20X1.
On 17 October 20X1, one of Saniprise’s debtors, KayLee Distributors (KayLee), with an outstanding balance of
R17.4 million (as disclosed in the draft financial statements), entered into business rescue. Saniprise’s attorneys
indicated that it was premature to assume that Kaylee would be liquidated, given the financial support that the
company has received from its business associates. However, the attorneys did not rule out a potential loss for
Saniprise, which has, without success, struggled since July 20X1 to collect the debt in question.
On 12 October 20X1, a fire engulfed one of Saniprise’s chemical raw materials warehouses, leading to what the
media dubbed a ‘spectacular explosion visible from kilometres away’. According to the company’s inventory
records, material worth R32 million was destroyed in the blaze. The company’s insurer indicated that Saniprise
would more than likely be able to recover most of the losses by means of an insurance claim. However, as a result
of fire damage to surrounding buildings not owned by Saniprise, litigation is expected to be instituted by third
parties against the company.
On 5 October 20X1, Saniprise repaid in full loan debt to the value of R15.8 million, using internally generated
cash resources. The debt, recognised as short-term debt in the draft 20X1 statement of financial position, was
previously acquired from a third party financial institution. The R15.8 million was the only short-term borrowings
Saniprise had at 30 September 20X1.
Inventory disclosed in the draft financial statements at R11.25 million had to be sold at a loss on 10 October 20X1
as a result of a production error discovered shortly after year-end. The sales price of the affected inventory
amounted to R8.5 million.
On 16 October 20X1, the company’s board of directors announced that, after negotiations that had begun in April
20X1, they had signed an agreement with the shareholders of Elmo Chem (Pty) Ltd to purchase 100% of the
shares in Elmo Chem (Pty) Ltd for a total consideration of R32 million.
REQUIRED
Discuss the effect that each of the above issues will have on the 20X1 financial statements of Saniprise. Consider all
information and amounts as being material.
[15]
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
Audit and review engagements
[10 marks]
Consider the following statements:

1. The practitioner expresses a conclusion on the fair presentation of the financial statements.
2. Quality control systems, policies and procedures in terms of the International Standard on Quality Control 1
(ISQC 1) apply to the engagement.
3. The practitioner expresses reasonable assurance on the fair presentation of the financial statements.
4. The practitioner needs to comply with relevant ethical requirements concerning independence when performing
the engagement.
5. Client management needs to confirm in writing that they accept responsibility for the preparation and the fair
presentation of the financial statements.
6. The practitioner designs and performs primarily inquiry and analytical procedures in order to address all material
items in the financial statements.
7. The practitioner determines materiality for the financial statements as a whole.
8. The greater the reliance a practitioner wishes to place on an internal control’s operating effectiveness, the more
persuasive evidence he/she needs to obtain in this regard.
9. In performing the engagement, the practitioner considers the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.
10. The practitioner reports that nothing has come to his/her attention that causes him/her to believe that the financial
statements have not been prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with the applicable financial reporting
framework.
REQUIRED
For each of the above, indicate whether it applies to an external audit engagement, an independent review
engagement, or both.
[10]
Question 2 LEVEL 2
Audit and review engagements
[16 marks]
As a senior trainee accountant at the firm of Doodles Inc. (Doodles), you have been assigned to the review
engagement of Scribbles (Pty) Ltd (Scribbles). When the company’s financial statements were audited last year, a
substantive audit approach was followed. However, owing to a change in its public interest score, the company now
requires an independent review for its 31 March 20X1 financial year, which it has requested that your firm perform.
The manager on the review engagement, Kevin Karr, who has already performed the necessary engagement
continuance and planning procedures, has:
citing a lack of time on his part to design procedures specifically for the review engagement, instructed you to
refer to the previous financial year’s audit file and simply to duplicate the procedures performed during the 31
March 20X0 audit for the purpose of gathering evidence for the 20X1 review; and
stated that review engagements are ‘not as complicated as audits’ and ‘would therefore only require a few
first-year trainee accountants to do most of the work’, explicitly stating that he would thus not expect either you or
him to be involved in the engagement to any significant extent.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the validity of the engagement manager’s instructions as evinced in his first comment. Your answer
should be substantiated by an explanation of the typical procedures commonly performed on a review engagement
in terms of the International Standards on Review Engagements. (8)
2. Discuss in detail the merits of the statements made by the engagement manager in his second comment. In
formulating your answer, include reference to the typical procedures performed on a review engagement and the
use of professional judgement by a reviewer. (8)
[16]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Independent review
[14 marks]
You are an audit manager at the firm Trolls Inc. (Trolls), a well-known audit firm in Johannesburg, one of whose
clients is Toshoes (Pty) Ltd, a shoe manufacturer whose public interest score is 250. The audit partner who
completed the pre-engagement activities for this client has provided you with the following approach and strategy
document:
Client: Toshoes (Pty) Ltd Prepared by: Partner Date: 31 May 20X1
A3
Year end: 28 February 20X1 Reviewed by: Date: 31 May 20X1
Subject: Approach and strategy document
After analytical procedures were performed on the linked information (not provided for the purpose of the question),
the following line items were considered for additional review procedures:
Trade and other receivables

Since the balance is above our expectation, additional review procedures will be performed.
Trade and other payables

Since the balance is above our expectation, additional review procedures will be performed.
Revenue
Since the revenue is above our expectation, additional review procedures will be performed.
REQUIRED
1. Discuss the additional review procedures that you would perform on trade and other receivables. (6)
2. Discuss the additional review procedures that you would perform on trade and other payables. (4)
3. Discuss the additional review procedures that you would perform on revenue. (4)
[14]
1.
a) The monthly age analysis for the 12 months should be scanned:
i) in order to compare the totals as per the age analysis with the previous month’s; and (1)
ii) for such unusual items as debtors with credit balances that should be reclassified to creditors, since this will
influence the outcome of the review procedures. (1)
b) Management should be asked:
i) if the items mentioned in 1(a)(ii) above had been noted and addressed by them; and (1)
ii) with regard to individual debtors, where the balances decreased or increased significantly from month to
month, substantiating their explanation by obtaining supporting documentation. (1)
c) The client’s calculation for the allowance for doubtful debt should be obtained and the debtors age analysis at
year-end scanned for customers with an outstanding balance above 120 days. (1)
d) The debtor’s supervisor or credit manager should be asked about debtors over 120 days not included in the
allowance for doubtful debt, and their answers analysed. (1)
e) The correlation between debtors and revenue should be investigated (since revenue is above expectation, it is
not unusual for debtors also to be above expectation). (1)
2.
a) The age analysis should be scanned for unusual items; for example, creditors with debit balances that should be
reclassified to debtors since this will influence the outcome of your review procedures, inquiring from
management if such items had been noted and addressed by them. (1)
b) The current year’s creditors age analysis should be compared to the previous year’s age analysis, and inquiries
made with regard to significant creditors in the previous year who are not on the current year’s creditors list.
c) The creditors reconciliation for the 10 highest creditors should be scanned for unusual items, and inquiries (1)
made as to whether such items had been noted. (1)
d) The correlation between creditors and revenue should be investigated (because revenue is above expectation, it
is not unusual for creditors also to be above expectation, since more goods need to be purchased in order for
the higher revenue figure to be achieved). (1)
3.
a) The sales report for the current year should be scanned for:
i) significant credit entries; and (1)
ii) large credit notes that were processed, as these need to be investigated. (1)
b) The sales manager should be asked if unusual items had been noted and followed-up with supporting
documentation. (1)
c) Analytical procedures on the gross profit percentage ratio and the correlation between sales and cost of sales
should be performed; in addition, the sales manager should be asked about variances noted and it should be
followed-up with supporting documentation. (1)
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Report
[14 marks]
You are the engagement partner on the independent review of Compucache (Pty) Ltd (Compucache), a company
selling computer products to customers via the internet, for its financial year ended 31 December 20X1.
The board of directors of Compucache has adopted the International Financial Reporting Standards for small and
medium-sized enterprises (IFRS for SMEs) as the company’s financial reporting framework. Based on the results of
this review, there was no reason to doubt the reasonableness of this basis of accounting, to modify the review report
or to report on other legal and regulatory requirements. A directors’ report accompanied the annual financial
statements.
At the conclusion of the engagement, the manager on the review team, after having taken the previous year’s
audit report and adapting it for the purpose of the review, prepared the following report for your attention. Although
the company opted for an audit last year, it undertook a review for the current year as per the requirements of the
Companies Act 71 of 2008.
Independent practitioner’s review report

We have reviewed the accompanying financial statements of Compucache (Pty) Ltd comprising the
statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X1; the statements of comprehensive income, of
changes in equity and of cash flows for the year then ended; a summary of significant accounting policies,
and other explanatory information.
Management’s responsibility for the financial statements
The company’s financial accountant is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these
financial statements in accordance with the company’s standard accounting procedures and the
requirements of the Companies Act 71 of 2008.
Practitioner’s responsibility
Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the accompanying financial statements. We conducted our
review in accordance with the International Standard on Review Engagements (ISRE) 2400, which
requires us to conclude whether the financial statements, when taken as a whole, were prepared in all
material respects in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework.
A review of financial statements in accordance with ISRE 2400 is a limited assurance engagement. The
practitioner performs procedures, consisting primarily of making inquiries, where appropriate, of
management and others within the entity, applying analytical procedures and evaluating the evidence
obtained.
Conclusion
[To be prepared by engagement partner]
Engagement partner’s signature to be furnished, together with the date and the audit firm’s address.
REQUIRED
1. Identify and discuss the deficiencies (including omissions) in the above independent review report in terms of the
requirement of the International Standards on Review Engagements (ISREs) and the Companies Act 71 of 2008.
2. Draft a conclusion for the independent review report above. (2) (10)
3. Without referring to the above scenario, state the different types of review conclusions applicable to independent
review reports. (2)
[14]
QUESTIONS
Question 1 LEVEL 1
Internal controls: Various cycles
[10 marks]
As the auditor senior at Brainstorm Corporate (Pty) Ltd (Brainstorm), you have been provided by one of the
first-year trainee accountants with a list of key controls that have not yet been matched to a relevant cycle.
Internal controls: Brainstorm

Access to the warehouse should be restricted to authorised personnel only.
Goods may be ordered based only on a properly authorised requisition form.
One person should be responsible for the payment of taxes and contributions (the isolation of responsibilities).
All cash should be kept in a secure place, such as a safe.
All invoices should be compared to purchase orders, delivery notes and GRNs before being posted to the
purchases journal.
A complete employee file containing all the required documentation for all employees should be kept.
The receiving clerk should obtain the purchase order and compare the quantity and the description against the
delivery note and the actual goods.
Any unmatched documents should be followed up.
Clock cards should be prepared by the personnel department in accordance with a valid and current employee
list.
REQUIRED
From the list provided above, group the internal controls to the relevant cycles, as indicated below.
INTERNAL CONTROL CYCLE
Each internal control matched to the correct cycle (1 mark)

[10]

Internal controls
[24 marks]
PART 1
Internal control activities have to be performed properly in order to be successful. As human error can occur, the
possibility exists that internal controls will not function as intended. The internal control system may have
weaknesses, and thus inherent limitations.
REQUIRED
Explain the inherent limitations of an internal control system. (6)
PART 2
Internal controls are classified as controls that may prevent, or detect and correct, possible weaknesses. A
combination of these controls is sufficient if they are functioning as intended.
The following controls are those that may either prevent or detect an error or control weakness:
1 All purchase invoices are compared to payment advices after payments have been made.
2 The procurement manager conducts spot checks on a quarterly basis on the authorisation of
purchase orders.
3 The system does not allow any user to exceed his/her limit with regard to an order being placed or
payment being approved.
4 All cheque payments are approved by managers in the company’s finance department.
5 Security does not check products leaving the premises, as a result of the company’s belief in each
person’s right to privacy.
6 Only the financial director may transfer funds electronically, using passwords on the banking
system.
7 All employees may order products by submitting an electronic purchase requisition. The system
does not have any control in order to verify the validity of the purchase and the budget for the
product.
8 Budgets are prepared for capital expenditure and are reviewed quarterly by the financial director.
No actions are taken, and the expenditure is accepted.
9 The storeman receives the products and signs as proof of delivery. The delivery note and the
purchase order are filed.
10 Payments for products are processed based on the invoice and the monthly statement received.
11 Assets below R10 000 are strictly controlled. A purchase requisition and a purchase order should
be authorised by the responsible supervisor and approved by the department’s finance manager
before the order may be placed.
REQUIRED
Indicate whether the controls listed above are preventative controls, or detective and corrective controls. Supply
reasons for your answers, which should be presented in tabular form. (18)
[24]
Question 3 LEVEL 2
Key controls, control objectives, tests of controls: Receipts
[25 marks]
Glassnovations (Pty) Ltd (Glassnovations), a large wholesale distributor of household glass items, has been an audit
client of your firm for many years. Last year, the audit team placed reliance on the internal controls in the company
as part of the audit of cash receipts. The company’s financial year for the current audit is 30 June. During the interim
audit, the following updated system description based on an interview with staff members was prepared by a
second-year trainee accountant responsible for the audit of cash receipts:
All sales by Glassnovations are to retail customers, and on credit. Customers settle their accounts either by EFT or
by paying cash in person at the company’s administration office.
1. Controls over cash receipts
a) When receiving cash, the company’s cashier, Ms Bonny Blue, generates a receipt from the computerised cash
register to hand to customers. The transaction is automatically posted to a pending cash receipts file on the
computer system to await reconciliation with the bank deposit slip (see (e) below).
b) At the end of each business day, Ms Blue counts the cash received and compares the total to the daily receipt
report printed from the computerised till. She prepares a daily deposit slip indicating the total cash takings to
be banked.
c) Ms Blue places the cash with the deposit slip into a cash bag and places it in a drop safe located on the premises,
to which only the company’s general manager, Mr Danny Goldberg, and the guards of the company’s security
agent have a key. Both keys are needed in order to unlock the safe.
d) Cash is banked on a daily basis by the security agent’s personnel, whereupon a copy of the bank-stamped
deposit slip is returned to the company’s cash book clerk, Ms Bulelwa Mthuba.
e) Ms Mthuba releases on a daily basis the batch of pending cash receipts file on the computer system (see (a)
above) for recording to the cash book, after having agreed the total amount pending to the bank-returned
deposit slip. The total of each day’s deposit, together with the individual receipts making up the total, is
displayed on the on-screen cash book.
f) On a weekly basis, the company’s financial manager, Ms Ruby Padayachee:
prints an exception log from the system of all missing or cancelled receipts in the cash book for review and
follow-up with the cashier
reviews the sequence of dates in the cash book for recorded cash deposits in order to ensure that daily
batches of receipts as per (e) above have been released
agrees the total amount of daily deposits recorded in the cash book to the bank-stamped deposit slip.
g) Ms Padayachee attaches the exception log to the deposit slip, signs both documents as evidence of the above
review having taken place and files them with the daily receipt report.
2. Controls over EFT receipts
a) Ms Mthuba checks the online bank statements on a daily basis in order to identify EFT deposits from individual
debtors and to post these to the cash book.
b) She records any unidentified deposits on a list of unidentified deposits, indicating all pertinent information
relating to such deposits, such as the dates, the deposit references (if any) and the amounts.
3. Controls applicable to both cash and EFT receipts
a) At the end of each month, Ms Mthuba prepares a bank reconciliation in order to reconcile the balance in the
cash book to the balance on the bank statement.
b) Ms Padayachee reviews the bank reconciliation by comparing all balances to supporting documentation, thereby
ensuring that valid reasons exist for reconciling items.
c) Ms Padayachee also agrees the total of unidentified deposits to the latest list of unidentified deposits prepared
by Ms Mthuba and follows up on any differences until they have been properly resolved.
d) Debtor queries are handled by the company’s credit controller, Ms Thabo Mabenge.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the key internal controls evident from the system description that you would rely on for the purpose of
auditing cash receipts in the company’s financial statements. Ignore controls over the segregation of duties,
computerised controls and logical access controls. (5)
2. State the control objective(s) achieved by each of the key controls identified in question 1. (5)
3. Describe the test of control procedures the audit team should conduct on each of the key controls identified in
question 1. (10)
For each of the above questions (1–3), present your answers in tabular form.
4. Comment on whether you consider the segregation of duties over cash receipts to be strong or weak in
Glassnovations. Explain your answer. (5)
[25]
Question 4 LEVEL 2
Key controls, control objectives and tests of controls
[30 marks]
You are the senior on the audit of Vivaldi Trading (Pty) Ltd (Vivaldi Trading), a large distributor of self-assembly
furniture (procured mostly from overseas suppliers) to numerous retailers around the country. All sales are on credit,
and deliveries are made using the company’s own fleet of trucks.
Your audit manager has indicated that, as in the previous year, the audit team intends to rely on the company’s
system of internal controls for the purpose of auditing the financial statements. You have already obtained sufficient
appropriate audit evidence of such controls over credit background checks for customers (i.e. the approval and
awarding of credit limits). Other pertinent details about the company’s revenue and receipts cycle are as follows.
The company’s sales office, staffed by two sales order clerks, receives customer sales orders by fax. For each order,
the sales clerk on duty makes out a carbon-copied and sequentially numbered internal sales order (ISO), all of which
are submitted to the sales manager, Mr Mozart, who:
approves each order by checking that the customer is still within his/her credit limit
signs the ISO as evidence of approval
checks the quantities on the ISO with the original fax order in order to ensure that the ordered quantities have
been correctly included on the ISO.
Thereafter, a duplicate picking slip is prepared by the sales clerk. Using this slip in order to select the goods from the
warehouse shelves, a storeman requests the warehouse manager, Mr Bach, to authorise the issue of the goods. Both
of them sign the picking slip, if they agree that the correct goods and quantities are being transferred to the dispatch
area as per the slip. The storeman then prepares a carbon-copied, four-part and sequenced delivery note, based on the
physical goods being transferred to dispatch, for submission to the dispatch section.
This section, working from a separate fenced-off area in the warehouse, receives the goods from the storeman,
only if the latter can produce both an authorised picking slip and the delivery note. The chief dispatch clerk, Mr
Schubert, checks all goods before giving instructions for the goods to be loaded onto a delivery truck. At the exit
gate, security guards perform a spot check on boxes leaving the premises. Each box clearly indicates the item
number and the description of the kit inside (e.g. VT 3482 Bookcase).
Upon delivery of the goods, the driver requests the customer to sign the four-part delivery note after the latter
has checked the quantities and the descriptions of the goods in terms of the delivery note. The first copy is handed to
the customer for his/her records. When the driver returns to the company, the second copy is sent to the sales office
as confirmation that the order has been filled, while the third copy is given to Ms Strauss, the invoicing clerk in the
accounting department. The delivery book containing the first copy of the delivery note is returned to the storeman
for filing with the picking slip. Ms Strauss prepares a sales invoice based on the quantities as per the delivery note
and refers to the company’s authorised price list for the sales amount of each product sold. Afterwards, Mr Chopin,
the bookkeeper, casts and recalculates each invoice, and agrees the quantity on the invoice to the delivery note and
each product’s sales amount to the price list. He stamps the invoice as having been checked, as proof of his having
performed this duty. Ms Strauss sends the original invoice to the customer, while the first copy is given to Mr
Chopin for posting to the sales journal. Ms Strauss files the second copy with the supporting documentation in the
number order of the delivery note, in the cleared delivery notes file.
The assistant financial manager, Ms Elgar, carries out weekly control procedures on sales transactions recorded in
the sales journal. While doing so, she performs spot checks on sales entries in the sales journal in order to ensure
that:
each transaction selected is supported by an invoice, a delivery note and an ISO (referring to the second copy of
the invoice kept in Ms Strauss’s office)
no duplicated invoice entries exist
the amount recorded agrees with the amount invoiced.
At the same time, Ms Elgar carries out a sequence check on the invoice numbers in the sales journal in order to
ensure that no gaps exist in the recorded sequence. She also reviews the cleared delivery notes file in order to ensure
that there are no gaps in the delivery note sequence. Any discrepancies are followed up with the dispatch and the
accounting staff members concerned. Ms Elgar signs a weekly control checklist as proof of having performed the
control procedures, noting any exceptions on the checklist. When an exception is resolved, she indicates thus next to
it.
REQUIRED
1. Identify and describe the internal controls that would be relevant to the audit of the revenue figure in the financial
statements of Vivaldi Trading (Pty) Ltd evident from the above system description.
2. State the control objective for revenue that management intends to achieve with each control identified in the first
section.
3. State the management assertion regarding revenue being addressed by each of the controls identified in part A.
4. For each control identified, describe the test of control procedure(s) you would perform in order to obtain audit
evidence of the operating effectiveness of the control.
Present your answers to all four questions concurrently in tabular form.

[30]
NO. (1) CONTROL RELEVANT TO THE (4) TEST OF CONTROL
AUDIT (2) CONTROL OBJECTIVE PROCEDURE
ACHIEVED (3) ASSERTION AFFECTED
a. 1. Mr Mozart approves sales orders by checking that the 4. For a sample of sales transactions
customer is still within his/her credit limit. (1) selected from the sales journal,
2. Validity of recorded sales (1) inspect the corresponding internal
3. Occurrence of revenue (1) sales orders for the signature of
approval of Mr Mozart authorising
the sale (the ISO will most likely be
attached to the invoice). (1)
b. 1. Security guards at the exit gates perform spot checks on the 4. Observe the security guards
boxes leaving the premises. (1) checking the contents of a truck
2. Completeness of sales transactions (1) leaving the premises. (1)
3. Completeness of revenue (1)
Inquire from management as to
Note: By checking the goods leaving the premises, the the reliability and consistency of
security guards confirm that the goods have been the security checks applied
recorded on delivery notes. If they have not been throughout the financial year,
recorded, the sales will be lost (incomplete) if the noting any problems of which
customer accepts the goods without evidence of the they might be aware.
goods having been delivered. This risk applies especially
where invoice quantities have been prepared based on (As observation by the auditor
delivery note details. will be a one-off procedure,
possibly only after the financial
year has ended, additional
evidence as to the operating
effectiveness of the control
during the year is also required
[see the points made above].)
(1)
Inquire from the security guards

about their checking function in
order to determine whether they
understand, and are aware of,
their duties. (1)
c. 1. Customers are required to sign the delivery notes as 4. For a sample of sales transactions
acknowledgement of having taken ownership of the delivered recorded in the sales journal (it may
goods. (1) be the same sample as in 1 above):
2. Validity of sales transactions (1) a) trace the entry to the
3. Occurrence of revenue (1) supporting invoice and to the
attached delivery note (1)
b) inspect the delivery note for
an indication of the client’s
acknowledgement of receipt
of the goods (either a
signature or a stamp). (1)
d. 1. The costs and calculations on the invoices are checked by a 4. For a sample of sales recorded in
second person (Mr Chopin), who also agrees quantities to the sales journal (it may be same
the delivery note and prices to the authorised price list. (1) sample as in 1 above), trace the
2. Accuracy of recorded sales transactions (1) entries to the corresponding invoice
3. Accuracy of revenue (1) and inspect the invoices for the
stamp made by Mr Chopin as
evidence of the checking control
having been performed. (1)
In order to verify the operating
effectiveness of the control:
a) Re-perform the costs and
calculations on the invoices.
b) Agree the item quantities (1)
on the invoice to the
quantities on the attached
delivery note. (1)
c) Agree the prices on the
invoice to the authorised
price list applicable at the
time of sale. (1)
e. 1. Ms Elgar reviews the sales journal on a weekly basis in order 4. Scrutinise the weekly control
to ensure that all entries are supported by an invoice, a checklist obtained from Ms Elgar for
delivery note and an ISO, and that no duplicate entries exist. any indications of weeks for which
2. Validity and accuracy of recorded sales transactions (2)(1) she did not sign as proof of having
3. Occurrence and accuracy of revenue (2) performed the weekly review on the
sales journal. (1)
When performing the above control
test, note any exceptions for which
‘resolved’ has not been written next
to it, and follow them up with Ms
Elgar as to the reasons for the
delay in action. (1)
In order to confirm the operating

effectiveness of the control
(especially since only spot
checks are performed by Ms
Elgar), select a sample of sales
transactions recorded in the
sales journal (note the direction
of the testing) and:
a) re-perform the control
procedure by tracing each
selected transaction to its
supporting documentation,
and verify whether a
corresponding invoice,
delivery note and ISO exist(1)
b) scrutinise the sales journal
for duplicated sales entries(1)
c) agree the amount recorded
in the sales journal to the
amount on the invoice. (1)
f. 1. Ms Elgar, the assistant financial manager, carries out a 4. The control procedure as per (e)
sequence check on the invoice numbers in the sales journal above will apply equally to the
in order to ensure that there are no gaps in the recorded following completeness control test.
sequence. (1) In order to confirm the operating
effectiveness of the control,
She reviews the file of delivery notes in order to re-perform Ms Elgar’s sequence
ensure that there are no gaps in the sequence of note checks by inspecting:
numbers, and that an invoice has been attached to a) the sales journal for the
each of them. (1) sequence of invoice
2. Completeness of recorded sales transactions (1)
3. Completeness of revenue (1)
numbers in order to verify
that there are no gaps in the
recording thereof (1)
b) the cleared delivery notes file
for the sequence numbers of
delivery notes in order to
detect any missing delivery
notes and thus possible
unrecorded sales
transactions. (1)
Question 5 LEVEL 2
Control objectives and tests of controls
[20 marks]
You are a trainee accountant assigned to the audit of the revenue and receipts cycle of Sure Surf (Pty) Ltd (Sure
Surf) for its financial year ended 30 November 2015. A wholesaler of swimming and surfing gear, the company
operates from an administrative complex in Durban next to a warehouse used for storing and dispatching the
company’s inventory. Sure Surf sells its products to numerous retailers across the country. All sales are on credit.
During an interview with the company’s financial manager, Valerie Rizzo, you posed several questions concerning
key controls in the revenue and receipts cycle:
1. Are all applications for credit approved after creditworthiness checks have been performed on the prospective
customers applying for credit?
Client response: Yes. I personally approve all credit applications only once the credit controller, Cara
McLaren, has allocated a credit limit to the customer on the application form. Cara attaches her
worksheet to the application form on which the result of the creditworthiness check appears, which I
then approve by signature.
2. Are all sales orders approved in order to ensure that the customer’s account will still be within the allocated
credit limit after the sale has been processed?
Client response: Yes. The company takes the approval of customer orders seriously, and has
assigned this duty to the sales manager, Bongani Mantewu. The sales clerk on duty has to submit a
daily sales order schedule (a summary of the day’s sales orders) together with the attached pending
internal sales orders (ISOs) to Bongani, who then stamps the sales schedule as approved after a
careful review of each customer’s credit status.
3. Are spot checks performed on dispatched goods at the exit gate before delivery vehicles leave the company’s
premises?
Client response: We employ an external courier to deliver goods to customers. After the trucks have
been loaded at the warehouse, they do not get checked at the exit gate. However, our inventory
supervisor, Ron Deacons, is present when boxes are loaded in order to ensure that the contents of
the boxes agree with the delivery notes. He stamps each delivery note as evidence of the check.
4. Are customers requested to sign delivery notes as proof of having received ordered goods?
Client response: We regularly remind the courier company’s delivery personnel to request customers
to sign the delivery notes, owing to the fact that we experienced instances in the last financial year
where customers did not always sign them.
5. Does management review the financial records for evidence of missing sales entries (sales that have not been
recorded)?
Client response: In order to check for evidence of missing sales entries:

I review the sales journal on a weekly basis to check for any missing invoice numbers by referring to
their number sequence. The journal has a space for a reviewer to sign, which I duly do.
I also go through the file of unmatched delivery notes in order to follow up on any missing delivery
notes for which no invoice, and thus no entry in the sales journal, exists. However, I do not sign as
evidence of this check.
REQUIRED
1. State the control objective(s) for each of the controls listed above in the internal control questionnaire, explaining
the purpose of each. (8)
2. Assuming each control in the questionnaire is relevant to the audit, describe the tests of controls you would
perform in order to obtain evidence of the operation of the controls. (12)
Assume that the company does not make use of computerisation in its business and accounting processes.
[20]
Question 6 LEVEL 2
Control objectives and purpose: Computerised systems
[18 marks]
You are the senior in charge of the audit of Cutting Edge (Pty) Ltd (Cutting Edge), a company that provides weekly
gardening services to private residences. You have prepared the following system description relating to sales:
Interested new customers open a credit account with the company by completing a credit application form and
supplying a copy of their ID document. Cutting Edge has requested a credit bureau, Credit Investigations CC, to
perform credit background checks on all potential customers. Based on the results, a credit limit is awarded to
each customer by Cutting Edge’s senior sales agent. New customers are added to the service module on the
company’s computerised system. On a weekly basis, the company’s financial manager requests the computer
system to print a report of all new additions to the service module in order to compare them to the credit bureau’s
credit report and the customer application forms.
The service fees for garden services charged to each customer, which are determined by the senior sales agent, are
entered by him onto the service module. The financial manager prints a report of customers who have exceeded
their credit limits in order to flag such customers on the system. However, this does not limit the processing of
sales should a sale lead to a customer’s credit limit being exceeded. Flagged customers are not eligible to receive
any further garden services until they have settled their outstanding accounts.
At the start of each week, the chief gardener prints a service register from the service module containing a listing
of all those customers eligible to receive garden services that particular week. The register is completed by the
gardening supervisors at the end of each day in order to indicate which customers received a service (it does
occasionally happen that entry cannot be gained to a residence). The chief gardener reviews the register on a daily
basis, following up with the gardeners as to why certain gardens were not serviced.
At the end of a week, the company’s data capturer captures the details of the services provided to customers from
the service register onto the service module. She can select from an on-screen drop-down list only those
customers who are already on the service module, as the system does not allow her user ID to add new customers.
Afterwards, the company’s debtors clerk compares the service register with the data-capturing results.
At the end of each month, Cutting Edge’s debtors clerk prepares from the service module electronic invoices for
emailing to all customers. After completion thereof, an invoice report is generated indicating the number of weeks
the customer received services and the weekly rate at which he/she was invoiced (e.g. four weeks of services at
R75 per week = R300). The financial manager compares the service register with the invoice report in order to
check for any customers who received services but for whom no invoice has been prepared.
REQUIRED
By stating the control, as well as the control objective(s), identify the internal controls from the above scenario that
affect the recording of sales transactions. In addition, describe the purpose of each control.
[18]
1.
a) Control: A credit bureau performs a credit background check on all potential customers, to each of whom a
credit limit is awarded. (1)
b) Control objective: Validity of sales transactions (1)
c) Purpose of the control: In order to prevent credit sales to customers who are unlikely to pay their debts, thereby
curbing or mitigating possible financial losses. (1)
2.
a) Control: The financial manager compares all new additions on the service module to the credit bureaux credit
reports and the customer application forms. (1)
c) Purpose of the control: In order to ensure that only valid and approved customers, with whom the company can
transact without excessive risk being taken as to the collectability of debt, are added to the service module.
a) Control: The financial manager prints a report of customers who have exceeded their credit limits and (1)
3.
flags the customers on the system. (1)
c) Purpose of the control: In order to prevent future services (sales) to the customer for which he/she will not be
able to pay, which could result in financial losses for the company. (1)
4.
a) Control: The chief gardener reviews the service register on a daily basis and follows up with the gardening
supervisors as to the reasons for certain gardens not having being serviced. (1)
b) Control objective: Completeness of sales transactions (1)
c) Purpose of the control: In order to ensure that all services rendered have been indicated on the register. Owing
to the fact that sales are captured from the service register, they will not be complete if a service was rendered
but not recorded on the register. (1)
(Note: This control has an operational objective, in the sense that customers could accidentally be overlooked and not have
their gardens serviced. The chief gardener’s review might pick up such instances, which would avoid making such
customers dissatisfied.)
5.
a) Control: The data capturer may select only those customers already on the service module; the system does not
allow her to use her user ID in order to add new customers. (1)
c) Purpose of the control: In order to prevent the data capturer from creating fictitious debtors or debtors who are
not creditworthy (i.e. credit customers who might not pay their debts). (1)
6.
a) Control: The debtors clerk compares the service register with the results of the data capturing in terms of
services rendered. (1)
b) Control objective: Accuracy and completeness of sales transactions (2)
c) Purpose of the control: In order to ensure that the number of services per customer has been accurately captured,
and captured in full (i.e. no input data are missed): if a service has not been captured, it will not be invoiced, as
the data on the service module are used for invoicing purposes. (1)
7.
a) Control: The financial manager compares the service register with the invoice report. (1)
7.
b) Control objective: Completeness of sales transactions (1)
c) Purpose of control: In order to ensure that all revenue transactions have been recorded that should have been
recorded (based on actual services rendered). (1)
Question 7 LEVEL 2
Control objectives and purpose: Computerised systems
[20 marks]
Kim Kleyn is an internal auditor at Techpoint (Pty) Ltd (Techpoint), a company that distributes computer hardware
to retailers from a large store on the East Rand. The company, whose system is computerised, records its sales only
after a customer-signed delivery note has been returned.
During a particularly busy day, Kim observed the following controls in place:
1. After performing a credit background check, the company’s credit controller denied a request for an increase to a
customer’s credit limit.
2. The senior bookkeeping clerk scrutinised the file of unmatched delivery notes in the invoicing section in order to
identify any delivery notes for which no invoices had as yet been prepared by the invoicing clerk.
3. The security guards at the gate compared the physical goods in a delivery truck leaving the premises to the
delivery note dispatched with the consignment.
4. The invoicing clerk was prompted by the sales system on the computer to supply an internal sales order number
before she could proceed with preparing an invoice on the system.
5. While the invoices were prepared by the invoicing clerk on the computer, the computer automatically assigned a
number to each invoice in numerical sequence.
6. The invoicing clerk did not have to input sales prices manually on the on-screen sales invoice while the item
numbers were being input by the clerk. Rather, the computer automatically allocated to items prices sourced from
the approved price list masterfile stored on the computer system.
7. The cash takings for the day were stored in a secure fireproof safe overnight while awaiting deposit the next day.
8. The senior bookkeeping clerk compared the deposit slip returned from the bank with the cash recorded in the cash
receipts journal.
9. The financial manager reviewed the most recent bank reconciliation for any unusual entries and signed the
reconciliation as proof of review.
10. When the sales clerk tried to create a credit note on the sales system, the system denied her access to the sales
adjustments module.
REQUIRED
State the control objective(s) of the internal controls listed above, explaining the purpose of each.
[20]
Question 8 LEVEL 2
Risks and substantive procedures
[24 marks]
Your audit firm is conducting the year-end audit of ADACO (Pty) Ltd (ADACO), a leading South African
healthcare company that manufactures, markets and distributes a range of branded and generic prescription and
over-the-counter medicines, as well as personal care products. The following transaction took place during the
financial year ended 31 July 20X1.
PHARMA (Pty) Ltd (PHARMA), a medium-sized pharmaceutical sales and marketing business in South Africa,
was acquired on 1 February 20X1. Both parties agreed to the purchase price of R782.4 million. The fair value of the
identifiable assets as at the date of acquisition is outlined below:
ASSETS R’000
Property, plant and equipment 32 000
Marketing-related intangible assets 618 748
Customer-related intangible assets 55 498
Contract-related intangible assets 13 040
Manufacturing-related intangible assets 1 630
Total identifiable net assets at fair value 720 916
Goodwill arising from acquisition 61 484
Purchase consideration 782 400
The major factor contributing to the recognition of goodwill of approximately R61.5 million was related mainly to
the fact that PHARMA has an established presence in the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) and acquired
immunodeficiency syndrome (Aids) pharmaceutical markets in South Africa. PHARMA plays a vital role in the
continuous battle against both the virus and the syndrome in South Africa through the manufacture of antiretroviral
drugs and HIV testing kits for supply to such stakeholders as the South African government.
Included in the property, plant and equipment balance of ADACO as at 31 July 20X1 are the following items
(including the PPE items obtained through the acquisition of PHARMA):
The land and the buildings on which the production plant and the four distribution centres are situated
Production plant equipment and machinery
Delivery vehicles
Office equipment and furniture (including computers, servers, etc.)
REQUIRED
1. Provide the factors that you, as the auditor, would consider in assessing the control risk of intangible assets and
goodwill of ADACO. (7)
2. Describe the substantive audit procedures that you would perform in order to address the rights and obligations
assertion pertaining to intangible assets and goodwill acquired in the acquisition of PHARMA (Pty) Ltd. (4)
3. Provide examples of substantive analytical procedures that you would perform in the audit of property, plant and
equipment of ADACO as at 31 July 20X1. (7)
4. Describe the substantive procedures that you would perform in order to verify the existence of PPE items, as well
as the rights of ADACO relating to these as at 31 July 20X1. You need not discuss those procedures relating to
disposals or unrecorded disposals. (6)
[24]
Question 9 LEVEL 3
King IV™ report
[17 marks]
As audit senior working at FZ Auditors (FZ), a firm of registered auditors, you have been assigned to the audit of
Bestfurn Ltd (Bestfurn), a JSE-listed furniture retailer. The following information pertains to the company:
Board of directors
James Kirk (69): chairperson
It is to the leadership of James Kirk, who founded Bestfurn in 1996, that much of the company’s growth and success
may be attributed. Although he holds some 22% of the issued shares in the company, these are loaded with voting
rights, which enable him to control the company. James Kirk is involved in the day-to-day operations of the
company.
James Kirk is also the chairperson of the remuneration committee, the social and ethics committee, and the risk
committee.
Gary Porter (67): chief executive officer

Gary Porter is a close friend and a long-time colleague of James Kirk. Last year, his total remuneration package of
some R28 million attracted considerable media attention in the light of Bestfurn’s relatively poor performance and
the low salaries of other employees of Bestfurn that year.
Gary Porter is a member of the nomination committee as well as the remuneration committee.
Reginald Khumalo (67): chief operating officer
Jenny Parbhoo (36): marketing director
Arnie Becker (43): non-executive director

Arnie Becker is a director of Secretariat (Pty) Ltd, the company that provides secretarial services to Bestfurn, and
attends Bestfurn’s board and board committee meetings in order to ensure that members are kept informed of
regulatory requirements. Secretariat (Pty) Ltd is deemed to be a significant service provider of Bestfurn.
Samuel Bloomberg (61): non-independent, non-executive director

Samuel Bloomberg, who holds an MBA from a highly regarded US business school, serves on the boards of
numerous large companies and non-profit organisations. He is a close friend of James Kirk, who approached him to
join Bestfurn’s board.
Other information about staff

Pat Johnson is Bestfurn’s chief financial officer. She is a CA(SA), and has been with Bestfurn for eight years.
Audit committee
Bestfurn has an audit committee that oversees the effectiveness of Bestfurn’s assurance function and ensures that it
results in:
an effective internal control environment
integrity of internal reports for decision making.
The audit committee members are:

James Kirk
Reginald Khumalo
Samuel Bloomberg.
External auditors
FZ Auditors has been Bestfurn’s auditors since the company’s incorporation, with Ms Helen Harper, the engagement
partner, responsible for the audit since 2015. FZ Auditors audits only Bestfurn’s annual financial statements.
REQUIRED
With reference to the information provided, discuss any concerns that you may have about Bestfurn’s corporate
governance practices in the light of relevant guidance in the King IV Report on Corporate Governance for South
Africa 2016™ (King IV™). The involvement of the chairperson of the board as well as the chief executive officer
on the various board committees should be included in your answer. However, you do not have to address the
composition of the nomination committee, risk committee, remuneration committee, and social and ethics committee
in your answer.
[17]
Question 10 LEVEL 2
Integrated question
[30 marks]
PART A
You are the senior on the year-end audit of Fusion Ltd (Fusion), a company that manufactures a range of organic
cleaning products. The manufacturing manager, Mr Maker, has explained to you that Fusion’s products are very
popular owing to their being environmentally friendly and obtaining excellent cleaning results. In the complex
manufacturing process, chemicals are mixed at the company’s plant situated in Gauteng using machinery imported
from Germany. Times when the machines lie unused could lead to material losses for the company. Mr Maker added
that, because the chemicals are so expensive, Fusion carries as little inventory as possible. He also indicated that the
staff in the chemical warehouse consists of one manager, Mr Stocks, and four clerks. Fusion’s internal audit
department provided the following system description:
Orders
The inventory control department orders chemicals weekly, as requested verbally by Mr Maker. Orders
are placed telephonically with one supplier only, Joy Chemicals, it being the sole supplier of organic
chemicals. After delivery notes have been compared to orders placed, the orders are marked off as
received as soon as delivery notes have been obtained from the chemical warehouse (see Received in
chemical warehouse below). The delivery notes are then sent to the administration department.
Received in chemical warehouse
Any available staff member in the manufacturing department at that specific time receives inventory at
the back of the plant in the goods receiving area. He/she receives the goods, counts them and signs the
supplier’s delivery note. This note is then handed to Mr Maker, who sends it to the ordering department
at the end of the day. The receiving department has two security doors:
One to the outside, through which chemicals are delivered
The second to the plant, through which chemicals move to the rest of the plant
All manufacturing staff members have keys for both these doors, since they should be able to receive
chemicals at any given time, or remove chemicals so that the manufacturing process does not come to a
halt.
Cost department
The costing department calculates the unit costs for the manufactured products as follows:
The materials, labour and factory overhead cost specifications are obtained from each product’s formula
(prepared by the chemical engineer), the plant’s capacity (as per the plant’s manual received from the
German suppliers) and historical results and costs as per the yearly budget. The standard variances are
calculated using the actual chemicals purchased, the price lists and the actual wage rates.
Finished goods warehouse
As soon as one hundred items of a product have been completed, they are packed into a crate and
moved to the finished goods warehouse. Throughout the year, Mr Stocks makes use of a perpetual
inventory system in order to determine inventory on hand. Fusion performs an inventory count at the end
of the financial year only.
REQUIRED
1. Under the headings ‘Orders’, ‘Received in Chemical Warehouse’ and ‘Finished Goods Warehouse’, describe the
weaknesses evident from the information. (15)
2. Draw up an audit programme for auditing the standard costs of the completed inventory at year-end. (10)
PART B
You are of the opinion that inventory forms a material part of the entity’s assets. As a result, when you contacted Mr
Stocks during the last week of February with a view to your attending the year-end inventory count, he informed you
that Fusion had performed the inventory count three days before, since the company’s staff has a team-building
event on 28 February, the date originally planned for the year-end inventory count.
REQUIRED
1. Describe the procedures you should perform in order to confirm both the existence and the condition of Fusion’s
inventory at year-end. (2)
2. Discuss the effects on the audit opinion if you cannot perform sufficient procedures on the existence and the
condition of inventory. (3)
[30]
PART A
1.
a) Orders
1.
i) Orders are placed without an authorised requisition. (1)
ii) No order forms are issued for orders placed. (1)
iii) The entity does not follow up on long outstanding orders. (1)
iv) The entity does not make use of re-ordering levels. (1)
v) Before goods are ordered, there is no check in order to confirm that the goods are needed. (1)
vi) The person placing the order does not check with the supplier as to the availability of the goods. (1)
vii) Orders are not checked and authorised before they are placed. (1)
b) Received in chemical warehouse
i) There is no designated goods receiving area. (1)
ii) Access is not controlled, as all staff members have keys to the security doors. (1)
iii) The delivery truck driver is not required to sign delivery notes. (1)
iv) There are no dedicated goods receiving personnel, as any staff member receives orders. (1)
v) On receipt of the goods, the description of such goods is not checked. (1)
vi) No superficial quality tests are performed on goods received. (1)
vii) No goods received notes are issued. (1)
viii) The movement of delivery notes is not controlled. (1)
ix) There is no control over the movement of inventory from the manufacturing plant to the finished goods
warehouse. (1)
c) Finished goods warehouse
Inventory counts take place only once a year, and physical inventory is not compared regularly to the perpetual
inventory system. (1)
d) General
No management supervision controls are in place. (1)
2.
a) Quantity
i) Attend the inventory count and perform test counts. (1)
ii) For the items selected during the inventory count, compare the quantity counted against the perpetual
inventory records. (1)
iii) Discuss with management any differences found. (1)
iv) Perform analytical procedures for the reasonability of the inventory quantity (e.g. compare the quantity on
hand (per item) for the current year to that of the previous year). (1)
b) Unit cost
i) Confirm the specifications by inspecting:
product recipes (½)
the capacity of the plant (½)
historical results (½)
management projections. (½)
ii) Confirm the cost per unit through inspecting:
the price lists or the invoices (½)
the contracts with suppliers (½)
wage rates or agreements (½)
the trade unions (½)
the effect of inflation. (½)
iii) With reference to variances:
recalculate them (½)
discuss with management the reasons for them (½)
consider whether standards are still appropriate, or whether variances are:
material (½)
permanent (½)
uncontrollable. (½)
iv) Other:
Compare the information with that contained in the previous year’s working papers. (1)
and
select a sample of inventory items on hand at year-end in order to recalculate the standard cost calculation.
(1)
PART B
1. The auditor should:
a) undertake a physical count on an alternative date, if unable to attend the physical inventory count on the date
planned as a result of unforeseen circumstances (1)
b) when necessary, perform audit procedures on intervening transactions. (1)
Available marks [2]
2. The effects will be that:

a) the fair presentation of the financial statements will be compromised (1)
b) sufficient and appropriate audit evidence will not be able to be obtained, which constitutes a limitation of scope
c) the audit report would be qualified, since inventory is material (1) (1)
d) the audit report opinion would be a disclaimer, if the auditor determines the inventory figure to be material and
pervasive. (1)
Available marks [4] maximum marks [3]
[30]
List of references
BOOKS
Prinsloo, F & Von Wielligh, P (eds) (2018) Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context
(second edition), Cape Town: Oxford University Press.
REPORTS
Institute of Directors Southern Africa (2009) King Report on Governance for South Africa 2009, King
Code of Governance Principles for South Africa, Cape Town: Juta Law, 2010.
Institute of Directors Southern Africa (2016) King IV Report on Corporate Governance™ for South
Africa 2016.
LEGISLATION
Auditing Profession Act 26 of 2005
Companies Regulations 2011 (Companies Act 71 of 2008)
INTERNET SOURCES
Independent Regulatory Board for Auditors (IRBA) (2014) (Revised) Rules Regarding Improper
Conduct and Code of Professional Conduct for Registered Auditors. [Online] Available: https:/
/www.irba.co.za/upload/Rules%20and%20IRBA%20Code%20(Revised%202014)%20Issued
%2017%20March%202014.pdf
South African Institute of Chartered Accountants (January 2014) Code of Professional Conduct for
Chartered Accountants. [Online] Available: https://www.saica.co.za/Technical/Discipline
/CodeofProfessionalConduct/tabid/701/language/en-ZA/Default.aspx

Auditing Graded Questions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Auditing Graded Questions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

All rights reserved.

© Oxford University Press Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd 2019

The moral rights of the author have been asserted.

First published 2014

Auditing Fundamentals in a South African Context: Graded Questions (third edition)

Print ISBN: 978-0-190738-58-7

ePUB ISBN: 978-0-190732-21-9

Typeset in ITC Franklin Gothic Std 10.5pt on 13pt

PART A: The context within which the external auditor operates

PART B: The auditee’s responsibility for financial information

Chapter 4 Basic concepts of governance and internal control

PART C: The external audit process

Chapter 11 Overview of the audit process

PART A: The context within which the external auditor operates

Chapter 3 Legal responsibilities of the auditor

Chapter 4 Basic concepts of governance and internal control

Chapter 5 Introduction to risks and internal controls in a computerised

Chapter 6 Revenue and receipts cycle

Chapter 7 Purchases and payments cycle

Chapter 8 Inventory and production cycle

Chapter 9 Human resources cycle

Chapter 10 Investment and financing cycle

PART C: The external audit process

Chapter 11 Overview of the audit process

Chapter 12 Pre-engagement and planning activities

Chapter 13 Audit procedures: Essential concepts

Chapter 14 Audit procedures: Specific considerations

Chapter 15 Completion of the audit

Chapter 16 The independent review

Chapter 17 Additional questions

For lecturers, the Learning Zone website provides:

A set of Online Questions

For students, the Learning Zone website provides:

Pranisha Rama BCom, BCom Honours, CTA (Johannesburg), CA(SA)

CHAPTER 3 Legal responsibilities of the auditor

A. I found the following definition in my auditing text book:

Could you please explain the definition to me? (6)

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

Understand the question

Read the question

might cause independence issues.2 (1)

CAATs but continues with the engagement irrespectively. (1)

Available marks [16]; maximum marks [12]

Question 1 LEVEL 1/2

A. In the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct, a ‘conceptual framework’ approach is used.

B. The SAICA Code of Professional Conduct consists of four parts: 1, 2, 3 and 4.

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

During the period of 10–14 August 20X1, the following occurs:

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SUGGESTED SOLUTION TO QUESTION 5

Available marks [7]; maximum marks [6]

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in business

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in practice

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in business

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in business

SUGGESTED SOLUTION TO QUESTION 14

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in business

SAICA Code of Professional Conduct: CA in business